OSN 1800 II Packet V100R006C10 Hardware Description 02

OptiX OSN 1800 II Packet Multi-Service Edge
Optical Transport Platform

V100R006C10
Hardware Description
Issue 02
Date 2016-04-20
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2016. All rights reserved.
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written
consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions
and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective
holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the
customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the
purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information,
and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or
representations of any kind, either express or implied.
The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the
preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and
recommendations in this document do not constitute a warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base
Bantian, Longgang
Shenzhen 518129
People's Republic of China
Website: http://www.huawei.com
Email: support@huawei.com
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
OptiX OSN 1800 II Packet Multi-Service Edge Optical
Transport Platform
Hardware Description About This Document
About This Document
Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document.
Product Name Product Version
OptiX OSN 1800 V100R006C10
iManager U2000 V200R015C60 and later
Intended Audience
The document is intended for:
l Network planning engineer

l Hardware installation engineer
l Installation and commissioning engineer
l Field maintenance engineer
l Data configuration engineer
l Network monitoring engineer
l System maintenance engineer
Symbol Conventions
The following symbols may be found in this document. They are defined as follows:
Symbol Description
DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium

level of risk which, if not avoided, could result in death or
DANGER serious injury.
WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk

which, if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate
WARNING injury.
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

Transport Platform
Symbol Description
CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation

that, if not avoided, could result in equipment damage,
CAUTION
data loss, performance deterioration, or unanticipated
results.
TIP Provides a tip that may help you solve a problem or save
time.
NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or

supplement important points in the main text.
Command Conventions
Convention Description
Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.
Italic Command arguments are in italic.
[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are

optional.
{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. One is selected.
[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square

brackets and separated by vertical bars. One or none is
selected.
{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

vertical bars. A minimum of one or a maximum of all
can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ] * Alternative items are grouped in brackets and separated

by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be
selected.
GUI Conventions
Convention Description
Boldface Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in
boldface. For example, click OK.
> Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For
example, choose File > Create > Folder.
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Transport Platform
Change History
Updates between document versions are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document version
contains all updates made to previous versions.
Updates in Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Based on Product Version

V100R006C10
This is the second document issue for the V100R006C10 product version. Compared with
issue 01, this issue incorporates the following updates:
l 9.6 EGS4: Update the description of the slot.

V100R006C10
This is the first document issue for the V100R006C10 product version.

V100R006C00
This is the third document issue for the V100R006C00 product version.

V100R006C00
This is the second document issue for the V100R006C00 product version.

V100R006C00
This is the first document issue for the V100R006C00 product version.

V100R005C20
issue 01, this issue incorporates the following updates:
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Transport Platform
l Corrected the default value of Service Type from 10GE LAN to OTU2 in section "LDX
Parameters on the NMS".

V100R005C20
This is the first document issue for the V100R005C20 product version. Compared with the
document issue for V100R005C10, this issue incorporates the following updates:
l Added section "Indoor Cabinet" and included information about indoor cabinets to this
newly added section.
l Optimized section "Board Category." Specifically, all boards supported by OptiX OSN
1800 I&II Compact, OptiX OSN 1800 II Packet, and OptiX OSN 1800 V Packet
Enhanced are added to section "Board Category."
l Added information about EFS8 boards to section "TDM Boards."
l Added information about DSFIU boards to section "Optical Multiplexer and
Demultiplexer Board."
l Added information about ST2 boards to section "Optical Supervisory Channel Board."

V100R005C10
This is the first document issue for the V100R005C10 product version. Compared with
V100R005C00SPC200, this issue incorporates the following updates:
l Added missing boards in section "Appearance and Dimensions of Boards."

l Added EX1 boards in section "Board Category."
l Added EX1 boards in section "Packet Boards."
l Added support for VPLS for EF8F, EM6F, EG4C, and UXCL boards in their respective
section "Functions and Features."
l Added status explanation for indicators on missing boards in section "Board Indicators."
l Added specifications and functions of EX1 boards in section "Quick Reference Table of
the Boards."

V100R005C00
issue 01, this issue incorporates updates in V100R005C00SPC200:
Deleted the description about ELOM and LDX boards supporting 1400ps/nm-fixed-APD-
XFP optical modules in the "Optical Transponder Boards" section.
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Transport Platform

V100R005C00
This issue is used for first office application (FOA) of V100R005C00.
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

Transport Platform
Hardware Description Contents
Contents
About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

1 Cabinet.............................................................................................................................................1
1.1 Indoor Cabinet................................................................................................................................................................ 2
1.1.1 Introduction to Cabinets.............................................................................................................................................. 2
1.1.2 Guidelines for Placing Cabinets.................................................................................................................................. 3
1.1.3 Cabinet Cables............................................................................................................................................................. 5
1.2 Outdoor Cabinet............................................................................................................................................................. 7
2 Chassis........................................................................................................................................... 10
2.1 Structure........................................................................................................................................................................12
2.2 Slot Description............................................................................................................................................................ 13
2.3 Product capacity........................................................................................................................................................... 14
2.4 Label............................................................................................................................................................................. 15
2.5 FAN...............................................................................................................................................................................17
2.6 Power Consumption..................................................................................................................................................... 20
3 Power Supply............................................................................................................................... 21
3.1 External Power Supply (from the Power Distribution Cabinet to the Cabinet)........................................................... 22
3.1.1 DC Power Distribution Box (PDU)...........................................................................................................................22
3.1.2 PDU Power Cables.................................................................................................................................................... 24
3.1.3 PDU Ground Cable....................................................................................................................................................27
3.2 Internal Power Supply (from the Cabinet to the Chassis)............................................................................................ 28
3.2.1 DC Power Requirement.............................................................................................................................................29
3.2.2 AC Power Requirement.............................................................................................................................................31
3.2.3 Power Cables............................................................................................................................................................. 33
3.2.4 Chassis Ground Cable............................................................................................................................................... 35
3.3 Uninterruptible Power Module..................................................................................................................................... 36
3.3.1 Structure.....................................................................................................................................................................36
3.3.2 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 38
4 Fiber Management Tray............................................................................................................. 40

4.1 Structure of Fiber Management Tray............................................................................................................................41
4.2 Technical Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 42
5 DCM Frame and DCM Module................................................................................................ 44
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

Transport Platform
6 Overview of Board...................................................................................................................... 47
6.1 Appearance and Dimensions of Boards........................................................................................................................48
6.2 Symbols on Boards....................................................................................................................................................... 50
6.3 Board Category.............................................................................................................................................................51
6.4 Bar Code for Boards..................................................................................................................................................... 77
7 Optical Transponder Board....................................................................................................... 79

7.1 Overview...................................................................................................................................................................... 80
7.2 ELOM........................................................................................................................................................................... 81
7.2.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................................... 81
7.2.2 Functions and Features.............................................................................................................................................. 82
7.2.3 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS.............................................................................................................................87
7.2.4 ELOM Scenario 1: 1*AP8 General Mode.................................................................................................................88
7.2.5 ELOM Scenario 2: 1*AP1 ODU2 Mode...................................................................................................................92
7.2.6 ELOM Scenario 3: 1*AP1 ODUflex Mode.............................................................................................................. 94
7.2.7 ELOM Scenario 4: ODUk ADM...............................................................................................................................95
7.2.8 Working Principle and Signal Flow.........................................................................................................................104
7.2.9 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................107
7.2.10 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................108
7.2.11 ELOM Parameters on the NMS.............................................................................................................................108
7.2.12 ELOM Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 121
7.3 LDX............................................................................................................................................................................ 142
7.3.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................................. 142
7.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 142
7.3.3 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................ 143
7.3.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................149
7.3.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................150
7.3.7 Physical and Logical Ports...................................................................................................................................... 151
7.3.8 LDX Parameters on the NMS..................................................................................................................................152
7.3.9 LDX Specifications................................................................................................................................................. 158
7.4 LQM2......................................................................................................................................................................... 164
7.4.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 164
7.4.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................176
7.4.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................179
7.4.7 Physical and Logical Ports...................................................................................................................................... 179
7.4.8 LQM2 Parameters on the NMS............................................................................................................................... 187
7.4.9 LQM2 Specifications...............................................................................................................................................194
8 Packet Board............................................................................................................................... 205

8.1 EF8F........................................................................................................................................................................... 206
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

Transport Platform

8.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 206
8.1.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................214
8.1.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................215
8.1.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................215
8.1.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS............................................................................................................215
8.1.9 EF8F Specifications.................................................................................................................................................229
8.2 EM6F.......................................................................................................................................................................... 231
8.2.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 232
8.2.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................240
8.2.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................243
8.2.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................243
8.2.8 EM6F Parameters.................................................................................................................................................... 243
8.2.9 EM6F Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 257
8.3 EG4C.......................................................................................................................................................................... 264
8.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 264
8.3.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................272
8.3.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................275
8.3.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................275
8.3.8 EG4C Parameters.................................................................................................................................................... 275
8.3.9 EG4C Specifications................................................................................................................................................289
8.4 EX1............................................................................................................................................................................. 296
8.4.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 296
8.4.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................303
8.4.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................304
8.4.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................304
8.4.9 Technical Specifications.......................................................................................................................................... 318
8.5 CQ1.............................................................................................................................................................................322
8.5.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 322
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

Transport Platform

8.5.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................328
8.5.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................329
8.5.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................329
8.6 MD1............................................................................................................................................................................335
8.6.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 335
8.6.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................341
8.6.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................343
8.6.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................343
8.6.9 MD1 Specifications................................................................................................................................................. 347
9 TDM Board................................................................................................................................. 349

9.1 SL1Q...........................................................................................................................................................................350
9.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 350
9.1.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................354
9.1.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................355
9.1.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................355
9.1.8 SL1Q Parameters..................................................................................................................................................... 356
9.1.9 SL1Q Specifications................................................................................................................................................ 358
9.2 SL4D...........................................................................................................................................................................361
9.2.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 361
9.2.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................366
9.2.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................367
9.2.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................367
9.2.8 SL4D Parameters..................................................................................................................................................... 367
9.2.9 SL4D Specifications................................................................................................................................................ 370
9.3 SP3D........................................................................................................................................................................... 373
9.3.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 373
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

Transport Platform

9.3.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................377
9.3.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................380
9.3.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................380
9.3.8 SP3D Parameters on the NMS.................................................................................................................................380
9.3.9 SP3D Specifications................................................................................................................................................ 384
9.4 PL3T........................................................................................................................................................................... 385
9.4.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 385
9.4.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................389
9.4.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................390
9.4.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................390
9.4.8 PL3T Parameters on the NMS.................................................................................................................................390
9.4.9 PL3T Specifications................................................................................................................................................ 392
9.5 EFS8........................................................................................................................................................................... 393
9.5.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 394
9.5.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................401
9.5.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................403
9.5.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................403
9.5.8 EFS8 Parameters on the NMS................................................................................................................................. 403
9.6 EGS4...........................................................................................................................................................................417
9.6.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................. 417
9.6.5 Front Panel...............................................................................................................................................................425
9.6.6 Valid Slots................................................................................................................................................................428
9.6.7 Feature Code............................................................................................................................................................429
9.6.8 EGS4 Parameters on the NMS................................................................................................................................ 429
10 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board....................................................................... 447

10.1 DMD1....................................................................................................................................................................... 449
10.1.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................................... 449
10.1.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 449
10.1.3 Functions and Features.......................................................................................................................................... 450
10.1.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.......................................................................................................................450
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

Transport Platform
10.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................451

10.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................452
10.1.7 Optical Interfaces...................................................................................................................................................452
10.1.8 DMD1 Parameters................................................................................................................................................. 453
10.1.9 DMD1 Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 453
10.2 DMD1S.....................................................................................................................................................................456
10.2.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 457
10.2.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................459
10.2.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................460
10.2.8 DMD1S Parameters............................................................................................................................................... 461
10.2.9 DMD1S Specifications.......................................................................................................................................... 461
10.3 DMD2....................................................................................................................................................................... 463
10.3.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 464
10.3.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................466
10.3.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................467
10.3.8 DMD2 Parameters................................................................................................................................................. 468
10.3.9 DMD2 Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 468
10.4 DMD2S.....................................................................................................................................................................472
10.4.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 472
10.4.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................474
10.4.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................476
10.4.8 DMD2S Parameters............................................................................................................................................... 477
10.4.9 DMD2S Specifications.......................................................................................................................................... 477
10.5 MD8..........................................................................................................................................................................479
10.5.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 480
10.5.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................481
10.5.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................482
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

Transport Platform

10.5.8 MD8 Parameters.................................................................................................................................................... 483
10.5.9 MD8 Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 484
10.6 MD8S........................................................................................................................................................................485
10.6.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 486
10.6.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................487
10.6.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................488
10.6.8 MD8S Parameters..................................................................................................................................................489
10.6.9 MD8S Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 490
10.7 MR1.......................................................................................................................................................................... 491
10.7.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 492
10.7.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................495
10.7.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................497
10.7.8 MR1 Parameters.................................................................................................................................................... 498
10.7.9 MR1 Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 499
10.8 MR1S........................................................................................................................................................................501
10.8.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 501
10.8.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................503
10.8.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................505
10.8.8 MR1S Parameters.................................................................................................................................................. 505
10.8.9 MR1S Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 506
10.9 MR2.......................................................................................................................................................................... 509
10.9.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 510
10.9.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................512
10.9.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................513
10.9.8 MR2 Parameters.................................................................................................................................................... 514
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

Transport Platform
10.9.9 MR2 Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 514

10.10 MR2S......................................................................................................................................................................517
10.10.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................................. 517
10.10.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................................... 518
10.10.3 Functions and Features........................................................................................................................................ 518
10.10.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.....................................................................................................................519
10.10.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................520
10.10.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................................521
10.10.7 Optical Interfaces.................................................................................................................................................521
10.10.8 MR2S Parameters................................................................................................................................................ 522
10.10.9 MR2S Specifications........................................................................................................................................... 522
10.11 MR4........................................................................................................................................................................ 526
10.11.1 Version Description..............................................................................................................................................526
10.11.2 Application...........................................................................................................................................................526
10.11.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................528
10.11.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................................ 530
10.11.8 MR4 Parameters.................................................................................................................................................. 530
10.11.9 MR4 Specifications..............................................................................................................................................531
10.12 MR4S......................................................................................................................................................................534
10.12.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................................... 534
10.12.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................536
10.12.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................................537
10.12.8 MR4S Parameters................................................................................................................................................ 538
10.12.9 MR4S Specifications........................................................................................................................................... 539
10.13 MR8........................................................................................................................................................................ 541
10.13.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................................... 542
10.13.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................544
10.13.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................................545
10.13.8 MR8 Parameters.................................................................................................................................................. 546
10.13.9 MR8 Specifications............................................................................................................................................. 546
10.14 SBM1......................................................................................................................................................................548
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv

Transport Platform

10.14.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................................... 549
10.14.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................551
10.14.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................................552
10.14.8 SBM1 Parameters................................................................................................................................................ 553
10.14.9 SBM1 Specifications........................................................................................................................................... 554
10.15 SBM2......................................................................................................................................................................556
10.15.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................................... 557
10.15.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................558
10.15.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................................560
10.15.8 SBM2 Parameters................................................................................................................................................ 561
10.16 SBM4......................................................................................................................................................................563
10.16.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................................... 564
10.16.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................566
10.16.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................................567
10.16.8 SBM4 Parameters................................................................................................................................................ 568
10.17 SBM8......................................................................................................................................................................570
10.17.2 Application.......................................................................................................................................................... 570
10.17.5 Front Panel...........................................................................................................................................................572
10.17.6 Valid Slots............................................................................................................................................................574
10.17.8 SBM8 Parameters................................................................................................................................................ 575
11 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board................................................................. 578

11.1 DSFIU.......................................................................................................................................................................579
11.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................................579
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

Transport Platform
11.1.2 Application.............................................................................................................................................................579
11.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................582
11.1.6 Valid Slots.............................................................................................................................................................. 583
11.1.7 Interfaces................................................................................................................................................................583
11.1.8 DSFIU Specifications............................................................................................................................................ 584
12 Optical Amplifying Board..................................................................................................... 586

12.1 OBU..........................................................................................................................................................................587
12.1.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 587
12.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................590
12.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................591
12.1.8 OBU Parameters on the NMS............................................................................................................................... 592
12.1.9 OBU Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 593
13 System Control, Switching, and Timing Board.................................................................595

13.1 UXCL....................................................................................................................................................................... 596
13.1.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 596
13.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................608
13.1.6 DIP Switches and CF Card.................................................................................................................................... 610
13.1.7 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................613
13.1.8 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................................614
13.1.9 UXCL Specifications.............................................................................................................................................614
13.2 UXC..........................................................................................................................................................................622
13.2.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 623
13.2.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................628
13.2.6 DIP Switches and CF Card.................................................................................................................................... 630
13.2.7 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................633
13.2.8 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................................634
13.2.9 UXC Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 634
14 Optical Supervisory Channel Board.................................................................................... 635

14.1 ST2............................................................................................................................................................................636
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvi

Transport Platform

14.1.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 636
14.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................639
14.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................640
14.1.7 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................................640
14.1.9 ST2 Parameters......................................................................................................................................................640
14.1.10 ST2 Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 641
15 Auxiliary Board........................................................................................................................ 645

15.1 AUX..........................................................................................................................................................................646
15.1.4 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................648
15.1.5 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................653
15.1.6 Feature Code..........................................................................................................................................................653
15.1.7 AUX Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 653
16 Optical Protection Board........................................................................................................ 656

16.1 OLP...........................................................................................................................................................................657
16.1.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 657
16.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................660
16.1.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................662
16.1.8 OLP Parameters on the NMS................................................................................................................................ 662
16.1.9 OLP Specifications................................................................................................................................................ 663
16.2 SCS........................................................................................................................................................................... 664
16.2.2 Application............................................................................................................................................................ 664
16.2.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................666
16.2.6 Valid Slots..............................................................................................................................................................667
16.2.8 SCS Specifications................................................................................................................................................ 668
17 Cables.........................................................................................................................................670
17.1 Optical Fibers........................................................................................................................................................... 671
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xvii

Transport Platform
17.1.1 Classification......................................................................................................................................................... 671

17.1.2 Connectors............................................................................................................................................................. 671
17.2 Signal Cable..............................................................................................................................................................673
17.2.1 16xE1/T1 Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 673
17.2.2 21xE1/T1 Cable..................................................................................................................................................... 677
17.2.3 E3/T3 Cable........................................................................................................................................................... 682
17.2.4 STM-1 Cable......................................................................................................................................................... 683
17.3 Management Cables................................................................................................................................................. 684
17.3.1 Straight-through Cable.......................................................................................................................................... 684
17.3.2 Crossover Cable.....................................................................................................................................................685
18 Optical Attenuator...................................................................................................................688
18.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator ......................................................................................................................................... 689
18.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator.................................................................................................................. 689
18.3 EVOA Module..........................................................................................................................................................690
19 Pluggable Optical Modules................................................................................................... 692

19.1 Types of Pluggable Module...................................................................................................................................... 693
19.2 Service Types Supported by Modules...................................................................................................................... 693
20 Pluggable electrical Modules................................................................................................ 697

21 Filler Panels.............................................................................................................................. 699
21.1 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................. 700
21.2 Front Panel................................................................................................................................................................700
21.3 Valid Slots.................................................................................................................................................................701
21.4 Technical Specifications........................................................................................................................................... 701
22 Indicators...................................................................................................................................702
22.1 Cabinet Indicators.....................................................................................................................................................703
22.2 Board Indicators....................................................................................................................................................... 703
22.3 Fan Indicator.............................................................................................................................................................708
22.4 APIU Indicator......................................................................................................................................................... 708
22.5 PIU Indicator............................................................................................................................................................ 709
23 Quick Reference Table of the Boards.................................................................................. 710

23.1 Quick Reference Table for Optical Interfaces.......................................................................................................... 711
23.1.1 Specification of OTUs........................................................................................................................................... 711
23.1.2 Specification of Optical Amplifier Boards............................................................................................................ 719
23.1.3 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of Packet Boards.............................................................. 720
23.1.4 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of TDM Boards................................................................722
23.1.5 Specification of Other Unit....................................................................................................................................724
23.2 Basic Functions of Boards........................................................................................................................................ 728
23.3 Loopback Function of the Boards............................................................................................................................ 729
23.4 Protection Mode of boards....................................................................................................................................... 731
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xviii

Transport Platform
A Glossary......................................................................................................................................733
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xix

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 1 Cabinet
1 Cabinet
About This Chapter
This section describes the cabinet and the related cables.
1.1 Indoor Cabinet

1.2 Outdoor Cabinet
The equipment operating outdoors needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet.
Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential 1

Transport Platform
1.1 Indoor Cabinet
1.1.1 Introduction to Cabinets

OptiX OSN equipment supports European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI)
and 19-inch standard cabinets. This section describes types of cabinets provided by Huawei.
Introduction
Table 1-1 describes the types, appearances, and specifications of the cabinets supported by
OptiX OSN equipment.
Table 1-1 Types, appearances, and specifications of the cabinets supported by OptiX OSN
equipment
Item N63E/N63B Cabinet 19-Inch Cabinet
Appearance
NOTE
N63E cabinets use front columns while
N63B cabinets use middle columns.
Weight N63E cabinet: 45 kg (99.2 lb.) 76 kg (167.6 lb.)

N63B cabinet: 60 kg (132.3 lb.)
Dimensions 2200 mm x 600 mm x 300 mm 2200 mm x 600 mm x 600 mm

(H x W x D) (86.6 in. x 23.6 in. x 11.8 in.) (86.6 in. x 23.6 in. x 23.6 in.)
Available 45 U 45 U
space
Space l Ordinary chassis: 2 U

required by l Chassis equipped with a fiber management tray (FMT): 3 U
the hardware
l DC power distribution unit (PDU): 3 U
l FMT: 1 U
l Dispersion compensation module (DCM) frame: 1 U

Transport Platform
Item N63E/N63B Cabinet 19-Inch Cabinet
Configuratio l Configure one FMT for each l One FMT is configured for each
n principles OptiX OSN 1800 chassis. OptiX OSN 1800 chassis.
l Configure a maximum of eight l Configure a maximum of eight
OptiX OSN 1800 chassis in one OptiX OSN 1800 chassis in one
cabinet (ensure that the cabinet (ensure that the
temperature in the equipment temperature in the equipment
room is within the range from room is within the range from
-5C to +40C). -5C to +40C).
l For an N63E cabinet, keep a l No space needs to be reserved
minimum distance of 37 mm between devices in a cabinet
between two adjacent OptiX because fibers can be routed
OSN 1800 chassis, to facilitate through the space between the
fiber routing. column and a side panel of the
l No space needs to be reserved cabinet.
between devices in an N63B l No space needs to be reserved
cabinet because fibers can be between chassis and the FMTs
routed through the space configured for the chassis.
between the column and a side
panel of the cabinet.
l No space needs to be reserved
between chassis and the FMTs
configured for the chassis.
NOTE
1 U = 44.5 mm
The power consumed by an N63E cabinet, an N63B cabinet, or a 19inch cabinet must not exceed 1500
W.
1.1.2 Guidelines for Placing Cabinets

To ensure proper heat dissipation and maintenance of cabinets, adhere to the guidelines
provided in this section when placing cabinets.
Cabinets are usually installed in a row inside a room, their positions are shown in Figure 1-1
and Figure 1-2.
To meet the requirements of heat dissipation and maintenance, the space around a cabinet
should be reserved according to the following principles:
l The space reserved before a cabinet should not be less than 1000 mm (39.4 in.).
l The space reserved beside both sides of a cabinet should not be less than 800 mm (31.5
in.).
l The space reserved behind a cabinet should not be less than 50 mm. (In back-to-back
mode, it is not required.)

Transport Platform
Figure 1-1 Top view of cabinets in face-to-face mode

Unit: mm
50
Cabinet 300
800 600
Front 1000
600
800
300
50

Transport Platform
Figure 1-2 Top view of cabinets in back-to-back mode

Unit: mm
Front 1000
Cabinet
300
300
800 600
Front 1000
300
600 300
800
Front 1000
1.1.3 Cabinet Cables
Cabinet Ground Power Cables

One end of the cabinet ground power cables is connected to ground bar in the equipment
room. The other end is connected to the ground bolts at the top of the cabinet.
Structure
Figure 1-3 shows the structure of the cabinet ground cable.
Figure 1-3 Structure of the cabinet ground cable

4 3 2 1
Connected to
Connected to the ground bar
a cabinet in the
X1 X2 equipment room

Transport Platform
1. OT one-hole naked crimping 2. Cable 3. Heat-shrink tubing 4. JG two-hole naked crimping

connector connector
Technical Parameters
Table 1-2 Technical parameters of the cabinet ground cable
Parameter Description
Connector X1 Naked Crimping Terminal, JG2, 16mm2,

M6, 95A, Tin Plated
Connector X2 Naked Crimping Terminal, OT, 16mm2, M8,

Tin Plating, Naked Ring Terminal
Cable model Wire, 450/750V, 60227 IEC 02(RV)16mm2,

yellow green, 85A, With a package
exempted from fumigating
Cabinet Door Ground Cables

A cabinet door ground cable uses one OT one-hole naked crimping connector at each end. It
connects the front door, rear door, or a side panel of the cabinet to the ground.
Structure
Figure 1-4 shows the structure of the cabinet door ground cable.
Figure 1-4 Structure of the cabinet door ground cable
X1 X2

Transport Platform
1. OT one-hole naked crimping connector
Table 1-3 Technical parameters of the cabinet door ground cable

Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-6 mm2 (0.01

in.2)-M6-Tin plating-Insulated ring
terminal-12-10AWG
Cable model Single Cable, PGND Feeder Cable, 0.35m,

OT6-6, 10UL3386G, OT6-6, LSZH
1.2 Outdoor Cabinet

The equipment operating outdoors needs to be installed in an outdoor cabinet.
Appearance and Structure

Figure 1-5 shows the appearance of an APM30H outdoor cabinet. Figure 1-6 shows the
structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet.

Transport Platform
Figure 1-5 Appearance of an APM30H outdoor cabinet
Figure 1-6 Structure of an APM30H outdoor cabinet

3 4 5
1. Cable distribution box 2. PMU module 3. HPMI board 4. Fan board (for internal
circulation)
5. CMUA board 6. PSU module 7. EPS subrack -
Technical and Ambient Specifications

Table 1-4 lists the technical and ambient specifications of APM30H outdoor cabinets.
Table 1-4 Technical and ambient specifications of APM30H outdoor cabinets

Item Specification Remarks
Dimensions (H x W x D) 700 mm x 600 mm x 480 -

mm

Transport Platform
Item Specification Remarks
Weight 72 kg -
Heat consumption 700 W -
Operating temperature -40C to +50C. The solar If the ambient temperature is

radiant intensity is below -20C, a heater is
112010% W/m2. required.
NOTE
The ambient temperature in
the operating environment
where a heater is required
refers to the average of the
lowest temperature every day
in the annually coldest month
in the local place.
Relative humidity 5% RH to 100% RH -
Altitude -60 m to 4000 m After the altitude reaches

3000 m, the highest
operating temperature
decreases by 1C as the
altitude increases by 100 m.
Wind speed 67 m/s -
Storage temperature -40C to +70C -
Dust resistance and water In compliance with IP55 -

resistance rating protection
Acoustic power In compliance with ETS 300 -

753 4.1E
CAUTION
OptiX OSN equipment must be installed in Huawei-specified outdoor cabinets. They can be
installed in other outdoor cabinets only with Huawei's permits; otherwise, the equipment may
be damaged. OptiX OSN equipment cannot be installed in direct-ventilation cabinets.

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 2 Chassis
2 Chassis
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN works on a chassis basis. The OptiX OSN converts wavelengths,
multiplexes/demultiplexes wavelengths, adds/drops wavelengths, and amplifies optical power
by using different functional boards. In addition, the OptiX OSN can be housed in different
cabinets as required and can be configured with different DC power distribution boxes, fiber
management trays, external AC power systems, DCM modules, and DCM frames.
The OptiX OSN is designed according to IEC60297 and ETS 300 119. The system
architecture complies with GR3028 and GR63. It uses the hot standby mode for power
supplies, which meets the requirements of DC (-48 V/-60 V) and AC (100 V to 240 V) power
supplies and can be installed in the ETSI cabinet (300 mm/600 mm), 19-inch cabinet, outdoor
cabinet. In addition, the OptiX OSN can be installed on a desk or against a wall.
The OptiX OSN uses the non-air filter design. In this way, the on-site equipment maintenance
is avoided.
As network telecommunication facilities, the OptiX OSN does not require external lightning
arresters when external AC power supplies are applied.
2.1 Structure
This section describes the appearance and dimensions of a chassis.
2.2 Slot Description
All boards in the chassis are installed horizontally in the front of the chassis.
2.3 Product capacity
The OptiX OSN 1800 chassis has a large service access capacity. It grooms electrical layer
signals as a service convergence node, and enhances the network flexibility.
2.4 Label
During equipment installation and maintenance, you should notice the warning and take the
precautions specified by safety symbols to avoid injury to the human body and damage to the
equipment.
2.5 FAN
The FAN board used in the OptiX OSN chassis is FAN, which is equipped with six fans.
2.6 Power Consumption

Transport Platform
This section provides the power consumption specifications of an OptiX OSN chassis.

Transport Platform
2.1 Structure
This section describes the appearance and dimensions of a chassis.
An OptiX OSN chassis can be an ordinary chassis or a chassis integrated with a fiber
management tray (FMT). Both an ordinary chassis and a chassis integrated with an FMT can
be a DC or AC power-supply chassis. A DC power-supply chassis uses the PIU board and an
AC power-supply chassis uses the APIU board. On the AC power-supply chassis, the APIU
board occupies two service slots and the slots for housing the PIU boards are installed with
two filler panels.
NOTE
The PIU and APIU boards cannot be installed on the same chassis. Install the PIU board only on a DC
power-supply chassis and install the APIU board only on an AC power-supply chassis.
Figure 2-1, Figure 2-2 and Figure 2-3 show the appearance of the OptiX OSN chassis.
Figure 2-1 Ordinary OptiX OSN chassis (DC power-supply chassis)
Figure 2-2 Ordinary OptiX OSN chassis (AC power-supply chassis)

Transport Platform
Figure 2-3 OptiX OSN chassis integrated with an FMT (AC and DC power-supply chassis)
NOTE
An AC power-supply chassis is connected to external AC power supplies and a DC power-supply

chassis is connected to external DC power supplies. When no DC power supply is available in a
telecommunications room, a DC power-supply chassis can be connected to external AC power supplies
through the uninterruptible power module (UPM). For details, see 3.3 Uninterruptible Power Module.
Table 2-1, Table 2-2 list the mechanical specifications of the OptiX OSN chassis.
Table 2-1 Mechanical specifications of ordinary OptiX OSN chassis (AC and DC power-
supply chassis)
Item Specification
Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) 88 mm x 442 mm x 220 mm (3.5 in. x 17.4 in.
x 8.7 in.)
Weight (empty chassis) 3.6 kg (7.9 lb.)
Table 2-2 Mechanical specifications of OptiX OSN chassis integrated with an FMT (AC and
DC power-supply chassis)
Item Specification
Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth) 131.7 mm x 442 mm x 283 mm (5.2 in. x 17.4
in. x 11.1 in.)
2.2 Slot Description

All boards in the chassis are installed horizontally in the front of the chassis.
The OptiX OSN chassis provides eleven slots for boards.

Transport Platform
l Slots 1 through 6 can be used to house the optical transponder (OTU) boards, optical
add/drop multiplexer (OADM) boards, optical amplifier boards, protection boards,
packet boards, TDM boards, and auxiliary boards.
l Slots 7 and 8 is fixed to house the UXCL/UXC boards.
l Slots 91 and 92 are fixed to house the PIU board.
l An APIU board occupies two slots. Since the pins are at the upper part of the board, the
board is inserted into the upper slot. On the NMS, the slot ID of the APIU board is
therefore that of the upper slot.
If the board is inserted into slot 4, occupying slots 2 and 4, the slot ID of the board
displayed on the NMS is slot 4.
If the board is inserted into slot 6, occupying slots 4 and 6, the slot ID of the board
displayed on the NMS is slot 6.
l Slot 93 is fixed to house the FAN board.
Figure 2-4 Slot layout of the OptiX OSN chassis

SLOT 92 SLOT91
XXXX
SLOT 7 SLOT 8
XXXX
SLOT 93
SLOT 5 SLOT 6
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
XXXX
SLOT 3 SLOT 4
XXXX
XXXX
SLOT 1 SLOT 2
2.3 Product capacity

The OptiX OSN 1800 chassis has a large service access capacity. It grooms electrical layer
signals as a service convergence node, and enhances the network flexibility.
The OptiX OSN 1800 supports the following cross-connection types:
l OTN:
Optical layer: Implements the add/drop multiplexing of any two wavelengths or four and
eight adjacent wavelengths on the OTM and the OADM boards.
Electrical layer: Supports intra-board cross-connections of ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex/
ODU2 services.
l Packet switching: A packet switching capacity of 60 Gbit/s. Access capacities of all slots
are shown in Figure 2-5.
Figure 2-5 Access capacities of slots on the OptiX OSN 1800 (Packet Mode)
SLO SLOT 7
SLOT SLOT 7 10Gbit/s SLOT SLOT
8 10Gbit/s
8 (CST/CSH)
T (CST/CSH)
1
91
0 SLOT
SLO
(PIU SLOT 5 SLOT 6
(PIU) T SLOT 5 4Gbit/s SLOT 6
) (EXT) (EXT)4Gbit/s
1
93
1
SLO SLOT 3 SLOT 4
SLOT (FAN)
T SLOT 3 (EXT) 4Gbit/s SLOT 4 (EXT)4Gbit/s
929
(PIU SLOT 1 SLOT 2
(PIU) SLOT 1 ) )
) (EXT 10Gbit/s SLOT 2 (EXT10Gbit/s

Transport Platform
l SDH: Higher order cross-connection: 20 Gbit; Lower order cross-connection: 5 Gbit/s.

Access capacities of all slots are shown in Figure 2-6.
Figure 2-6 Access capacities of slots on the OptiX OSN 1800 (SDH Mode)
SLO SLOT 7
SLOT SLOT 7 2.5Gbit/s SLOT SLOT
8 2.5Gbit/s
8 (CST/CSH)
T (CST/CSH)
1
91
0 SLOT
SLO
(PIU SLOT 5 SLOT 6
(PIU) T SLOT 5 1.25Gbit/s SLOT 6 1.25Gbit/s
) (EXT) (EXT)
1
93
1
SLO SLOT 3 SLOT 4
SLOT (FAN)
T SLOT 3 (EXT)2.5Gbit/s SLOT 4 2.5Gbit/s
(EXT)
929
(PIU SLOT 1 SLOT 2
(PIU) SLOT 1 ) )
) (EXT 2.5Gbit/s SLOT 2 (EXT2.5Gbit/s
2.4 Label
During equipment installation and maintenance, you should notice the warning and take the
precautions specified by safety symbols to avoid injury to the human body and damage to the
equipment.
Table 2-3 lists the warning and safety symbols on the OptiX OSN chassis, and specifies the
meaning of them.
Table 2-3 Description of labels on the OptiX OSN chassis

Symbol Meaning
DC power-supply chassis: Product nameplate label

Indicates name and
certification of OptiX OSN
chassis.
Specifies the power supply and
rated current of the OptiX OSN
AC power-supply chassis: chassis.

Transport Platform
Symbol Meaning
Laser class symbol

Indicates the class of the laser.
CAUTION
HAZARD LEVEL 1M INVISIBLE
Avoid direct exposure to the
LASER RADIATION
DO NOT VIEW DIRECTLY WITH
laser beams launched from the
NON-ATTENUATING OPTICAL
INSTRUMENTS
optical port. Otherwise,
damage might be caused to
your skin or eyes.
Grounding symbol
Indicates where the equipment
is grounded.
Anti-static protection symbol

Indicates that you should wear
an anti-static wrist strip or
gloves when you touch a
board. Otherwise, damage
might be caused to the board.
Fan safety warning symbol

Indicates that you should not
touch the fan leaves when the
fan is rotating.
Suggestion label
It advises the user to consult
related documents for
operations specific to power
boards.
Label Position
The anti-static protection symbol and subrack grounding symbol are affixed to the equipment
chassis.
Figure 2-7 show the position of labels on the chassis.

Transport Platform
Figure 2-7 Position of labels on the OptiX OSN chassis
2.5 FAN
The FAN board used in the OptiX OSN chassis is FAN, which is equipped with six fans.
Version Description
Table 2-4 describes the version mapping of the FAN board.
Table 2-4 Version description of the FAN

Item Description
Board hardware TNF1

version
Functions and Features

For detailed functions and features, see Table 2-5.

Transport Platform
Table 2-5 Functions and features of the FAN

Functions and Description
Features
Basic function The board enables heat dissipation in the chassis to ensure that the
equipment works normally and effectively under the designed
temperature.
Speed adjustment The fan speed can be classified into three levels: low speed, medium
speed, and high speed. The default level is "low speed". The fan
speed can be adjusted manually.
NOTICE
If any one of the three or six fans in the FAN board fails, the OptiX OSN system can keep on
operating for 96 consecutive hours in an environment with temperatures between -5C to
40C (23F to 104F).
Replace the FAN board immediately if two or more fans fail in the board.
Application
Figure 2-8 shows the schematic diagram of the air intake and air exhaust of OptiX OSN
chassis. The air intake vent is on the left of the chassis and the air exhaust vent is on the right
of the chassis. In this case, a good heat dissipation and ventilation system is formed to
facilitate the normal operation of the equipment.
Figure 2-8 Schematic diagram of the air intake and air exhaust in the OptiX OSN chassis

Transport Platform
Front Panel
Figure 2-9 shows the front panel of the FAN.
Figure 2-9 Front panel of the FAN

HUAWEI
OptiX
OSN 1800 II
FAN
There is one indicator on the front panel of the FAN board, the descriptions of the indicator
are shown in Table 2-6.
Table 2-6 Descriptions of the indicator on the FAN board

Indicator Status Description
On (green) The board works normally.
On (red) The FAN_FAIL alarm occurs to the board.
Off The board is not powered on.
There is a port for ESD wrist strap on the front panel of the FAN board.
Valid Slots
The FAN board occupies the SLOT 93 in the OptiX OSN chassis.
The board occupies one slot on the U2000. The slot number displayed on the U2000 or Web
LCT represents the slot where the slot is installed.
FAN Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the FAN board are as follows:

Transport Platform
l Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth): 85.7 mm x 27.5 mm x 207.5 mm (3.4 in. x 1.1 in.
x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.70 kg (1.54 lb.)
The power consumption of the FAN board is as follows:
l Maximum power consumption at 25C (77F): 7.2 W
2.6 Power Consumption

This section provides the power consumption specifications of an OptiX OSN chassis.
Table 2-7 lists the power consumption of an OptiX OSN chassis.
Table 2-7 Power consumption of an OptiX OSN chassis (including both DC-powered and
AC-powered chassis)
Item Specification
Maximum power consumption l For a DC-powered chassis: 300 W

l For an AC-powered chassis: 200 W
Typical power consumption l For a DC-powered chassis: 158.6 W

l For an AC-powered chassis: 158.6 W
Empty shelf power consumption (with l For a DC-powered chassis: 11.2 W = 2 x

FAN and PIU) PIU (2 W) + FAN (7.2 W)
l For an AC-powered chassis: 47.2 W = 2 x
APIU (20 W) + FAN (7.2 W)

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 3 Power Supply
3 Power Supply
About This Chapter
3.1 External Power Supply (from the Power Distribution Cabinet to the Cabinet)
3.2 Internal Power Supply (from the Cabinet to the Chassis)
3.3 Uninterruptible Power Module
The product provides the uninterruptible power modules (UPM), which can convert the
alternating current (AC) to the direct current (DC) required by the transmission equipment.
Hence, the product can be applied to the equipment room without DC power supply. If you
need this equipment, contact Huawei.

Transport Platform
3.1 External Power Supply (from the Power Distribution

Cabinet to the Cabinet)
3.1.1 DC Power Distribution Box (PDU)

The DC PDU is installed in the upper part of the cabinet and provides power for the four
OptiX OSN subracks in the cabinet. The DC PDU provides two channels of DC power for
each subrack to implement the power 1+1 protection.
Overview
Figure 3-1 shows the front panel of a DC power distribution box.
Figure 3-1 Front panel of DC power distribution box
3 1 2 3
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
OUTPUT OUTPUT
ON ON
RTN1(+) RTN2(+) NEG1(-) NEG2(-)
OFF OFF
INPUT
SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4 SW1 SW2 SW3 SW4
4x20A 4x20A
4 4
1. Protection grounding screws 2. Input cable terminals

3. Output cable terminals 4. Power switches
For the function of each unit in a DC power distribution box, see Table 3-1.
Table 3-1 Functions of the units in a DC power distribution box
Marking Function Unit Function
1 Protection grounding To access the protection ground cables.

screws
2 Input cable terminals To access two -48V DC or -60V DC power cables and
two power ground cables.

Transport Platform
Marking Function Unit Function
3 Output cable There are four output cable terminals at both the left
terminals side and the right side, to access power cables of
subracks.
4 Power switches There are four power switches at both the left side and
the right side, corresponding to the output cable
terminals above them to control the power supply for
each subrack.
Table 3-2 shows the specification of the DC power distribution box.
Table 3-2 Technical Specifications of the DC Power Distribution Box

Item Specifications
Size 132 mm (H) x 400 mm (W) x 80 mm (D)
Maximum capability of 4 x 20 A + 4 x 20 A
power supply
Weight 4.4 kg (9.7 lb.)
Maximum power 2000 W

consumption (full
configuration)
Normal working voltage -48V DC/-60V DC
Working voltage range -38.4V DC to -60V DC (-48 V)/-48.0V DC to -72.0V DC (-60

V)
Connection of Power Cables

The connection of power cables between chassis and DC power distribution box is given in
Figure 3-2.

Transport Platform
Figure 3-2 Connection of Power Cables Between Chassis and DC Power Distribution Box
Black
Blue
Black
Yellow and green Blue

PGND
NEG2(-)
NEG1(-)
-48 V -48 V
Power supply Power supply
0V 0V
OptiX OSN Chassis
RTN1(+)
RTN2(+)
Office ground
3.1.2 PDU Power Cables

A PDU power cable connects to a power distribution frame (PDF) at one end and to a PDU at
the other end.
Figure 3-3 shows the structure of the PDU power cables.
Figure 3-3 PDU power cables
1 1
X1 X2
Connected 1 3 2 Connected
to the PDU to the PDF
X3 X4

Transport Platform
-48V BGND
1. Cord end terminal 2. OT one-hole naked 3. Cable

crimping connector

Transport Platform
Table 3-3 Technical parameters of power cables

Cable Usage Description Connector
-48 V power Accepts -48 V -48 V DC power cable X1: Cord end terminal. It
cable DC to the (blue) is connected to a PIU
equipment. For 63 A power supply: board.
l If the required cable X2: Cord end terminal. It
length is less than 18 is connected to the PDF.
m, the cross-sectional
area of the cable must
be 16 mm2.
l If the required cable
length ranges from 18
m to 29 m, the cross-
sectional area of the
cable must be 25
mm2.
cable must be 35
mm2.
For 80 A power supply:
length is less than 15
be 16 mm2.
cable must be 25
mm2.
cable must be 35
mm2.

Transport Platform
Cable Usage Description Connector
BGND cable Connects the Battery ground cable X3: Cord end terminal. It
battery ground (black) is connected to a PIU
(BGND) to the For 63 A power supply: board.
equipment. X4: OT one-hole naked
length is less than 18 crimping connector. It is
m, the cross-sectional connected to the PDF.
be 16 mm2.
cable must be 25
mm2.
cable must be 35
mm2.
For 80 A power supply:
length is less than 15
be 16 mm2.
cable must be 25
mm2.
cable must be 35
mm2.
3.1.3 PDU Ground Cable

One end of the PDU ground cable is connected to a ground screw on the PDU, and the other
end is connected to the ground screw on the right side of the cabinet.

Transport Platform
Structure
Figure 3-4 shows the structure of the PDU ground cable.
Figure 3-4 Structure of the PDU ground cable
1 2 3
X1 X2
1. OT one-hole naked crimping 2. Heat-shrink tube 3. Cable

connector
Table 3-4 Technical parameters of a PDU ground cable
Connector X1/X2 Naked crimping terminal-OT-10-6
Cable model Electric power cable-0.3m-16mm2-Yellow/

Green-(OT16-6)-(H07Z-K-162 Yellow/
Green)-(OT16-6)-LSZH
3.2 Internal Power Supply (from the Cabinet to the

Chassis)

Transport Platform
3.2.1 DC Power Requirement

This section describes the requirements on power supply when the equipment runs on DC
power.
Requirements on Voltage
Table 3-5 provides the requirements on voltage of OptiX OSN chassis.
Table 3-5 Requirements on Voltage of ordinary OptiX OSN chassis (DC power-supply
chassis)
Item Specification
Power supply -38.4 to -60 (-48 V power supply)

-48.0 to -72.0 (-60 V power supply)
Table 3-6 describes the version mapping of the PIU board.
Table 3-6 Version description of the PIU

Item Description
Board hardware version TND1
l Functions and Features

Table 3-7 Functions and features of the PIU

Functions and
Features Description
lightning Receives status signals of the lightning protection circuit and

protection reports alarms of lightning protection failure when the lightning
circuit status protection circuit is faulty.
monitoring
l Front Panel
Figure 3-5 shows the front panel of the PIU.

Transport Platform
Figure 3-5 Front panel of the PIU
-60V
RTN(+)
-48V
NEG(-)
PWR
There is one indicator on the PIU front panel, the descriptions of the indicator are shown
in Table 3-8.
Table 3-8 Descriptions of the indicator on the PIU board
Indicator Indicator Status Description
The power On (green) Indicates that the power is accessed

supply normally.
status
indicator Off Indicates that the power is not accessed.
(PWR)
There are two power supply ports on the front panel of the PIU, Table 3-9 lists the
function of each port.
Table 3-9 Descriptions of the PIU ports
Port Description
NEG(-) Access the negative pole of the power.
RTN(+) Access the positive pole of the power.
l Valid Slots
The PIU board occupies the SLOT 91 and SLOT 92 in the OptiX OSN chassis.
The board occupies one slot on the U2000. The slot number displayed on the U2000
represents the slot where the slot is installed.

Transport Platform
l Specifications
Mechanical Specifications of PIU:
Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth): 41.8 mm x 20.0 mm x 208.9 mm (1.6 in. x
0.8 in. x 8.2 in.)
Weight: 0.15 kg (0.33 lb.)
Power Consumption of PIU:
Maximum Power Consumption at 25C (77F) (W): 2.0 W
Maximum Power Consumption at 55C (131F) (W): 2.0 W
3.2.2 AC Power Requirement

This section describes the requirements on power supply when the equipment runs on AC
power.
APIU
APIU is AC Power Port Unit, provides power for OptiX OSN AC power-supply chassis.
Table 3-10 describes the version mapping of the APIU board.
Table 3-10 Version description of the APIU

Item Description
Board hardware version TNF1, the mapping version of the equipment is

V100R002C00 or later.
l Functions and Features

Table 3-11 Functions and features of the APIU

Functions and
Basic function The board accesses the 100 V to 240 V AC power, and converts
the AC power into the -53.5 V DC power.
Power supply The board supports two power supply modules AC1 and AC2,
module which are inserted in two separate frames. Both the power
supply modules and frames can be removed and installed
independently.
Protection The two power supply modules support hitless switching, thus
providing 1+1 power protection. A single module provides
protection against input undervoltage, input overvoltage, output
overvoltage, output overcurrent, output short-circuit, and over
temperature.

Transport Platform
l Front Panel
Figure 3-6 shows the front panel of the APIU.
Figure 3-6 Front panel of the APIU

APIU APIU
ON ON
AC2
INPUT INPUT
OUTPUT OUTPUT
OFF OFF
AC1 100-240V;50/60Hz;3.5A 100-240V;50/60Hz;3.5A
There are two indicators on the front panel. For details on the indicators, refer to Table
3-12.
Table 3-12 Descriptions of the indicator on the APIU board

Indicator Meaning Indicator Status Description
INPUT Indicator of the On (green) The input power voltage is

input power status normal.
On (red) The input power voltage is

abnormal, under-voltage or
over-voltage occurs.
OUTPUT Indicator of the On (green) The output power voltage is

output power normal.
status
On (red) The output power voltage is
The two AC power ports on the front panel of the APIU board access the 100 V to 240 V
AC power to the system. Otherwise, there are two switches on the front panel, which are
used to control the on and off of the two AC power ports respectively.
l Valid Slots
Table 3-13 describes the mapping between the slot where the APIU board is inserted and
the slots that the APIU board occupies.
NOTE
The APIU board occupies two slots. The pins on the board are located on the upper part of the board;
therefore, the board is inserted into the upper slot between the two slots.
Table 3-13 Mapping between the slot where the APIU board is inserted and the slots
between the APIU board occupies
Chassis Valid Slot Occupied Slots
OptiX OSN SLOT4 SLOT2 and SLOT4

Transport Platform
Chassis Valid Slot Occupied Slots
SLOT6 SLOT4 and SLOT6
The board occupies two slots on the U2000.

The slot ID of the board displayed on the NMS is the slot of upper-position between the
two slots that the board occupies. For example, if the board is inserted in SLOT4, it
occupies SLOT2 and SLOT4, and the slot displayed on the NMS is SLOT4.
l Specifications
Table 3-14 lists the specifications of the APIU.
Table 3-14 Specifications of the APIU
Item Description
Dimensions (Height x 40.1 mm x 193.8 mm x 208.7 mm (1.6 in. x 7.6 in. x 8.2 in.)
width x Depth)
Weight (with two 1.93 kg (4.25 lb.)

power supply
modules)
Power Consumption l Maximum power consumption at 25C (77F): 20.0 W

Input voltage AC power supply of 100 V to 240 V
Output voltage DC power supply of -53.5 V
Power When the ambient temperature is in the range of -25C to

65C, the board can provide stable 200 W power.
NOTE
An alarm is reported to the NMS when the power exceeds 197 w.
Power supply 88%

efficiency
Operating temperature The long-term operating temperature of the board is -25C

to 65C, and the short-term operating temperature of the
board is 65C to 75C. The board can start when the
ambient temperature is above -40C.
NOTE
Short-term means operating for continuous cannot exceed 72 hours
and the total time of short-term operating in a year cannot exceed 15
days.
3.2.3 Power Cables

The power cable should be made on site. The power cable consists of the DC connector,
single cord end terminal, and cable.

Transport Platform
DC Power Cables
Figure 3-7 shows the appearance of a DC power cable and Table 3-15 lists technical
specifications of DC power cables.
Figure 3-7 Appearance of the OptiX OSN chassis power cable
Power Cable 2U DC Connector
Table 3-15 Technical specifications of the power cable and ground cable
Cable Parameter Terminal Parameter
Electronic/electric cable-450 V/750 V- Power terminal: Bare pressure welding

H07Z-K-4 mm2 (0.01in2.) blue/black-low- terminal-single cord end terminal-6 mm2
smoke halogen-free fireproof cable (0.01in2.) -30 A-tin plating-inserted 12 mm
black
AC Power Cables
Figure 3-8 shows the appearance of an AC power cable.
NOTE
AC power cables use different connectors in different countries. Figure 3-8 illustrates the AC power
cable connector used in China.
Figure 3-8 Appearance of an AC power cable
Specifications of an AC power cable connector used on the OptiX OSN equipment: C13, left
angle, straight, female

Transport Platform
NOTE
In the case of the OptiX OSN chassis, the restrictions between the cross-sectional area and length of the
cable are listed as follows:
l When the cross-sectional area is 2.5 mm2 (0.004in2.), the maximum extension distance of the cable
is 52.3 m(171.6ft.).
l When the cross-sectional area is 6 mm2 (0.01in2.), the maximum extension distance of the cable is
71.1 m(233.3ft.).
3.2.4 Chassis Ground Cable

One end of a chassis ground cable is connected to the ground screw on the right-side cabinet
column, and the other end is connected to the ground screw on the chassis.
Structure
Figure 3-9 shows the structure of a chassis ground cable.
Figure 3-9 Structure of a chassis ground cable
1. OT one-hole naked crimping connector

Transport Platform
Table 3-16 Technical parameters of the chassis ground cable

Connector Naked crimping terminal-OT-6-4
Cable model Electric power cable-2m-4 mm2-Yellow/

Green-(OT6-4)-(227IEC02-42Yellow/
Green)-(OT6-4)-MA5201
3.3 Uninterruptible Power Module

The product provides the uninterruptible power modules (UPM), which can convert the
alternating current (AC) to the direct current (DC) required by the transmission equipment.
Hence, the product can be applied to the equipment room without DC power supply. If you
need this equipment, contact Huawei.
3.3.1 Structure
The power supply system is composed of rectifier module, monitoring module and AC/DC
power distribution subrack. The rectifier module and monitoring module adopt hot swappable
design, and the damaged rectifier and monitoring module can be replaced when the system is
on operation.
Figure 3-10 shows the appearance of the UPM used in OptiX OSN chassis. The UPM is
numbered EPS30-4815AF.
Figure 3-10 Appearance of the UPM used in OptiX OSN chassis
The front panel of the UPM used in OptiX OSN chassis is shown in Figure 3-11, and the
function descriptions of each part are shown in Table 3-17.

Transport Platform
Figure 3-11 Front panel of the UPM used in OptiX OSN chassis
1 3 6 7 8
4 5
2
1. AC input socket 2. Rectifier module 3. Indicators on rectifier module 4. Monitoring module
5. Signal port 6. Communication port 7. Indicators on monitoring module 8. Load port
Table 3-17 Function description of each part on the panel of UPM

No. Name Description
1 AC input socket It is the AC mains supply input socket, which can

access the AC.
2 Rectifier module The UPM has two AC/DC rectifier modules, which
can convert AC mains supply to DC communication
power supply.
3 Indicators on Indicates the running state of the Rectifier module.

rectifier module
4 Monitoring module It can monitor and control the parameters and status of
the rectifier modules, AC/DC power distribution box
and the battery box in real time. It also can report the
result to the transmission network management in real
time.
5 Signal port The monitoring module connects to multiple sensors

through this port, implementing monitoring expansion.
6 Communication port It is the RS-232/RS-485 communication port, through

which the UPM can communicate with the OptiX OSN
equipment to report alarms and perform remote
control.
The port on the left side is active and the port on the
right side is standby. The two ports are not valid at the
same time.
7 Indicators on Indicates the running state of the monitoring module.

monitoring module
8 Load port It can power on the OptiX OSN through the power
cable.
The descriptions of the indicators on the modules are shown in Table 3-18 and Table 3-19.

Transport Platform
Table 3-18 Meanings of Indicators on rectifier module
Indicat Meanin Color Normal Fault

or g state state Fault cause
RUN Run Green On Off Rectifier module failure or

indicator non-output over-current
protection.
ALM Alarm Yellow Off On The indicator is on when the

indicator rectifier module occurs
recoverable protection, while
the indicator blinks when the
communication is
interrupted.
FAULT Fault Red Off On There is non-recoverable

indicator fault within the module.
Table 3-19 Meanings of Indicators on monitoring module
Indicat Meanin Color Normal Fault

or g state state Fault cause
RUN Run Green Flashing Off Monitoring module failure.

indicator regularly
Flashing Communication failure.
rapidly
ALM Alarm Red Off On Alarm in the power supply

indicator system.
3.3.2 Technical Specifications

Specifications include dimensions, weight, current, voltage and so on.
Table 3-20 lists the technical specifications of UPM that used in the OptiX OSN chassis.
Table 3-20 Technical specifications of the OptiX OSN chassis UPM
Item Specification
Dimensions 43.6 mm (Height) x 442.0 mm (Width) x 270

mm (Depth) (excluding handle)
43.6 mm (Height) x 482.6 mm (Width) x 270
mm (Depth) (including handle)
Weight < 10 kg (22.0 lb.)
AC input Rated input voltage 220 V (90 V to 300 V) AC

Transport Platform
Item Specification
Maximum input 10 A
current
Frequency 50 Hz (45 Hz to 65 Hz)
Battery input Rated input voltage 48 V
Capacity 5 Ah to 500 Ah (default: 40 Ah)
DC output Rated output voltage -53.5 V (-43.2 V to -57.6 V) DC
Total output current l 15 A (the AC input voltage is 90 V to 175 V)

l 30 A (the AC input voltage is 176 V to 300
V)
Efficiency 89% (rated input, 50% to 100% load)
Power factor 0.98 (rated input and output)
Operation ambient -40C to 65C
Cooling method Built-in fan inside the rectifier module: forced

air cooling.

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 4 Fiber Management Tray
4 Fiber Management Tray
About This Chapter
The product provides the fiber management tray, which coils up the redundant fiber jumpers.
The fiber management tray is the optional equipment. If you need this equipment, contact
Huawei.
4.1 Structure of Fiber Management Tray
The fiber management tray can be used to coil up the redundant fiber jumpers.
4.2 Technical Specifications
Specifications include dimensions and weight.

Transport Platform
4.1 Structure of Fiber Management Tray

The fiber management tray can be used to coil up the redundant fiber jumpers.
Figure 4-1 and Figure 4-2 show the appearance of a fiber management tray.
Figure 4-1 Fiber management tray 1 (Optional)
Figure 4-2 Fiber management tray 2 (Optional)
Figure 4-3 and Figure 4-4 show the appearance of a drawing out fiber management tray.

Transport Platform
Figure 4-3 Drawing out the tray 1 (Optional)
Position for installing an MVOA

Position for holding the stylus used
to adjust the attenuation of an MVOA
Cable bridge
Fiber spool
NOTE
Cable bridges help in bundling non-fiber cables.
Figure 4-4 Drawing out the tray 2 (Optional)
Position for holding the stylus used to

adjust the attenuation of an MVOA
Position for installing an MVOA
Fiber spool
NOTE
l Fibers are pulled in and pulled out though the fiber management tray at the right side. When you
spool fibers, raise the cap of the fiber through hole.
l If too many fibers need to be pulled out from the left side, reroute the fibers to the right from the
bottom of the tray.

Specifications include dimensions and weight.
Table 4-1 list the technical specifications of the fiber management tray. You can choose a
fiber management tray with proper specifications according to the fibers on site and the
capacity of the fiber management tray.

Transport Platform
Table 4-1 Technical specifications of the fiber management tray

Item Specification
Dimensions l Fiber management tray 1: 44 mm (Height) x 435 mm

(Width) x 278 mm (Depth)
l Fiber management tray 2: 44 mm (Height) x 442 mm
(Width) x 280 mm (Depth)
Capacity 40 fibers with the length of 50 m can be rotated in the

fiber management tray.

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 5 DCM Frame and DCM Module
5 DCM Frame and DCM Module
The DCM frame can be used to hold DCM modules which compensate the positive dispersion
of transmitting fiber, so as to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse. If your network
needs this equipment, contact Huawei.
DCM Module
After an optical signal is transmitted over certain distance, the optical signal pulse is widened
because of the positive dispersion accumulated in the system. This widened shape seriously
affects the system transmission performance. The DCM is a passive device that uses a
dispersion compensation fiber. Because a DCM has inherent negative dispersion that can
offset the positive dispersion of transmission fibers, the signal pulses are compressed.
The OptiX OSN 1800 II Packet can provide several types of DCMs of several compensation
distance specifications: 5 km (3.1 mi.), 10 km (6.2 mi.), 20 km (12.4 mi.), 40 km (24.8 mi.),
60 km (37.3 mi.), 80 km (49.7 mi.), 100 km (62.1 mi.), 120 km (74.6 mi.).
Table 5-1 and Table 5-2 provide the performance specifications of the DCM module.
Table 5-1 Performance requirement for C-band dispersion compensation optical fibers (G.652
fibers)
DCM Distanc Max. DSCR PMD PDL Max. Operati
Module e (km) Insertio (ps) (dB) Allowe ng
n d Wavele
Loss(dB Power ngth
) (dBm) (nm)
DCM(S) 5 2.3 90% to 0.3 0.1 20 1525 to

110% 1568
DCM(T) 10 2.8 0.3 0.1 20
DCM(A) 20 3.3 0.4 0.1 20
DCM(B) 40 4.7 0.5 0.1 20
DCM(C) 60 6.4 0.6 0.1 20
DCM(D) 80 8 0.7 0.1 20
DCM(E) 100 9 0.8 0.1 20

Transport Platform

n d Wavele
Loss(dB Power ngth
) (dBm) (nm)
DCM(F) 120 9.8 0.8 0.1 20
Table 5-2 Performance requirement for C-band dispersion compensation optical fibes (G.655
LEAF fibers)
n Loss d Wavele
(dB) Power ngth
(dBm) (nm)
DCM(A) 20 4 90% to 0.4 0.3 24 1528 to

110% 1568
DCM(B) 40 5 0.5 0.3 24
DCM(C) 60 5.9 0.7 0.3 24
DCM(D) 80 6.9 0.8 0.3 24
DCM(E) 100 7.8 0.9 0.3 24
DCM(F) 120 8.8 1.0 0.3 20
Table 5-3 provides the mechanical specifications of the DCM module.
Table 5-3 Dimensions of a DCM

Module Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth)
DCM module 44 mm x 238 mm x 266 mm (1.7 in. x 9.4

in. x 10.5 in.)
DCM Frame
The DCM frame is fixed onto the columns of the cabinet by mounting brackets and screws, as
shown in Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2.

Transport Platform
Figure 5-1 Dual-DCM frame in the cabinet
2
1
1. DCM frame 2. DCMs
Figure 5-2 Single-DCM frame in the cabinet
1 2
1. DCM frame 2. DCM
Table 5-4 DCM frame specifications

Type of a DCM Dimensions Weight Number of DCMs
frame (Height x Width x
Depth)
Single-DCM frame 48 mm x 436 mm x 1.38 Kg (3.04 lb) 1

NOTE 280 mm (1.9 in. x
It applies only to 19- 17.2 in. x 11.0 in.)
inch cabinets.
Dual-DCM frame 48 mm x 484 mm x 1.53 Kg (3.37 lb) 2

NOTE 270.5 mm (1.9 in. x
It applies only to 19.1 in. x 10.6 in.)
ETSI cabinets.

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 6 Overview of Board
6 Overview of Board
About This Chapter
Describes the classification and appearance of boards, and the pluggable module of the board.
6.1 Appearance and Dimensions of Boards

Describes the appearance and dimensions of the boards.
6.2 Symbols on Boards
This section describes the warning symbol and label affixed to all boards.
6.3 Board Category
This topic lists boards when these NEs house different system control boards.
6.4 Bar Code for Boards
The bar code of a board is provided on the front panel of the board and contains the basic
information about the board, including the BOM code and delivery time.

Transport Platform
6.1 Appearance and Dimensions of Boards

Describes the appearance and dimensions of the boards.
CAUTION
Always wear an ESD wrist strap when holding the board, and make sure the ESD wrist strap
is well grounded, to prevent static discharge from damaging the board.
Table 6-1 provides the appearance and dimensions of different board types for the OptiX
OSN series.
Table 6-1 Board appearance and dimensions

Board Type Board Appearance and Dimension
System Control, Switching, and Timing

Boards (for example, the UXCL)
Dimensions (H x W x D): 22.4 mm x 193.8

mm x 269.7 mm (0.9 in. x 7.6 in. x 10.6
in.)
l Optical transponder board (for example, For example, LDX:

the LDX)
l Optical add/drop multiplexer board (for
example, the MR2)
l Optical protection board (for example, the
LDX
STAT
SRV
OLP)
NOTE
The preceding boards have the same dimensions
but differ slightly in appearance. The boards you
receive may appear different from that shown in mm x 208.7 mm (0.8 in. x 7.6 in. x 8.2 in.)
the figure.

Transport Platform
l Packet board (for example, the EM6F) For example, EM6F:

l SDH board (for example, the SL1Q)
l PDH board (for example, the SP3D)
l Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer
Board (for example, the DSFIU)
l Optical amplifying board (for example,
the OBU)
l Optical Supervisory Channel Board (for
example, the ST2)
l Auxiliary boards (for example, the AUX)
mm x 208.7 mm (0.8 in. x 7.6 in. x 8.2 in.)
NOTE
The preceding boards have the same dimensions
but differ slightly in appearance. The boards you
receive may appear different from that shown in
the figure.
PIU

mm x 208.9 mm (1.6 in. x 0.8 in. x 8.2 in.)
APIU

mm x 208.7 mm (1.6 in. x 7.6 in. x 8.2 in.)

Transport Platform
FAN

mm x 207.5 mm (3.4 in. x 1.1 in. x 8.2 in.)
6.2 Symbols on Boards

This section describes the warning symbol and label affixed to all boards.
Table 6-2 Labels on boards

Label Type Description
Laser safety class label This indicates that the laser

safety class of the board is
CAUTION HAZARD LEVEL 1M and
LASER RADIATION that there may be laser
INSTRUMENTS
radiation. It warns users not
to look directly at fiber
connectors without using
protective measures. Always
use an optical instrument
that can attenuate optical
power when working with
boards.

Transport Platform
Label Type Description
The laser safety class label

CLASS1 CLASS 1 indicates that the
LASER maximum optical power of
PRODUCT the optical port is less than
10 dBm (10 mW).
6.3 Board Category

This topic lists boards when these NEs house different system control boards.
NOTE
"Y" indicates that the corresponding board is supported. "N" indicates that the corresponding board is
not supported.
Table 6-3 Optical transponder boards

Name Descrip OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OptiX OSN 1800 V Packet
tion I&II Compact OSN Enhanced
1800 II
Packet
TNF1S TNF3S TNF1U TNF5U TNF5X TNZ5U

CC CC XC/ XCM/ CH XCMS
TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1CE 6-port Y N N N N N
6 encrypte
d
multiple
xing
optical
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1CP 6-port Y N N N N N
6 CPRI
multiple
xing
optical
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF2CP 6-port N Y N N N N
6 CPRI
multiple
xing
optical
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1CP Enhance Y N N N N N
8 d8x
Multi-
rate
Ports
Wavelen
gth
Conversi
on Board
ELOM Enhance Y N N N N N
(COMP) d8x
/ELOM multi-
(STND) rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
F2ELO Enhance Y Y Y Y Y Y
M d8x
(STND) multi-
rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF2EL Enhance N N N Y Y Y
OM d8x
(C9LOG multi-
) rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1EL Enhance Y N N N N N
QM d4x
multi-
rate
ports
multiple
xing
optical
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1L Double Y N N N N N
DE port
EPON/G
E access
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
DGF GE
services
&
double
FE
services
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
with
FEC
TNF1L Double 2 Y N N N N N
DGF2 x GE
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
DGF2 x GE
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1L 2 x 10 Y Y Y Y Y Y
DX Gbit/s
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF2L 2 x 10 N Y N Y Y Y
DX Gbit/s
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1LE 16 x GE Y N N N N N
G16 Ethernet
switch
board
TNF1LE 16 x GE Y N N N N N
M18 +2x
10GE
LAN + 2
x OTU2
Ethernet
switch
board
TNF1L 8 port Y N N N N N
OE EPON &
GE
access
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1L 4 x GE Y N N N N N
QG wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1L 4x Y N N N N N
QM multi-
rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF2L 4x Y N N N N N
QM multi-
rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
QM2 x multi-
rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
QM2 x multi-
rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF2L Double 4 Y Y Y Y Y Y
QM2 x multi-
(STND) rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF2L Double 4 N N N Y Y Y
QM2 x multi-
(C9LQ rate
M2) ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF2L Double 4 N Y N Y Y Y
QM2 x multi-
(VA8) rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1L OLT Y N N N N N
QPL side 4
port
GPON/
STM-16/
OTU1
access
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1L ONU Y N N N N N
QPU side 4
port
GPON/
STM-16/
OTU1
access
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1LS OLT Y N N N N N
PL side
single
port
GPON
access
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1LS Single Y N N N N N
PR port
GPON
extensio
n REG
board
TNF1LS ONU Y N N N N N
PU side
single
port
GPON
access
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1LS 10 Gbit/s Y N N N N N
X wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF2LS 10 Gbit/s Y N N N N N
X wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
WX2 arbitrary
bit rate
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1TS 21- Y N N N N N
P channel
E1/T1
and 2-
channel
STM-1
service
converge
nce and
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1LT 10 x N Y N Y Y Y
X multi-
rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1LT 10 x N Y N Y Y Y
XM multi-
rate
ports
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
TNF1LS 1 port N Y N Y Y Y
C/ 100GE/
TNF1LS OTU4
CM/ access
TNF1LS wavelen
CG gth
conversi
on board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1FC 4x Y N N N N N
16Q FC1600
low
latency
service
wavelen
gth
conversi
on board
Table 6-4 OTN tributary boards

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF5T 8 any- N N N Y Y Y
OA rate
ports
service
processi
ng board
TNF5T 4 x 10G N N N Y Y Y
QX tributary
service
processi
ng board
TNF5T 2 x 10G N N N Y Y Y
DX tributary
service
processi
ng board

Transport Platform
Table 6-5 OTN line boards

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF5N 2 x 10G N N N Y Y Y
D2 line
service
processi
ng board
TNF5NS 1x N N N Y Y Y
4 100G
line
service
processi
ng board
Table 6-6 Universal line boards

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF5H Universa N N N Y N N
UNQ2 l4x
10G
universal
line
service
processi
ng board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF5HS Universa N N N Y Y N
NQ2 l4x
10G
universal
line
service
processi
ng board
TNZ5U Universa N N N N N Y
NQ2 l4x
10G
universal
line
service
processi
ng board
Table 6-7 Packet boards

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF5E 8x10GE N N N Y N N
M20 +12xGE
or
20xGE/F
E
Ethernet
switchin
g
processi
ng board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1EF 8xFE N N Y N N N
8F processi
ng board
TNZ5E 10xGE N N N N N Y
G10 Ethernet
Processi
ng Board
TNF1E FE/GE N N Y N N N
M6F processi
ng board
TNF1E 4xGE N N Y N N N
G4C processi
ng board
TNF1E 1x10GE N N Y N N N
X1 Ethernet
processi
ng board
TNZ5E 4x10GE N N N N N Y
X4 Ethernet
processi
ng board
TNF1C 4-port N N Y N N Y
Q1 channeli
zed
STM-1
processi
ng board
TNF1M 32xCES N N Y N N Y
D1 E1
service
processi
ng board

Transport Platform
Table 6-8 TDM boards

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1SP 42xE1/T N N Y Y N Y
3D 1
electrical
interface
board
TNF1PL 3xE3/T3 N N Y Y N Y
3T electrical
interface
board
TNF1SL 4xSTM- N N Y Y N Y
1Q 1 optical
interface
board
TNF1SL 2xSTM- N N Y Y N Y
4D 4 optical
interface
board
TNF5SL 4-port N N N Y N Y
NO STM-16/
8-port
STM-4/8
-port
STM-1
line
board
TNF5SL 2x N N N Y N Y
64D STM-64
optical
interface
board
TNF1E 4xGE N N Y Y N Y
GS4 switchin
g and
processi
ng board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1EF 8xFE N N Y N N N
S8 switchin
g and
processi
ng board
Table 6-9 Optical add and drop multiplexing boards

Name Description OptiX OSN 1800 OptiX OptiX OSN 1800 V Packet
I&II Compact OSN Enhanced
1800 II
Packet
TNF1S TNF3S TNF1U TNF5U TNF5X TNZ5

CC CC XC/ XCM/ CH UXCM
TNF1U TNF5U S
XCL XCME
TNF1D Bidirectional Y N Y N N N
MD1 single
channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board
MD1S single
channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board with
OSC
TNF1D Bidirectional Y Y Y Y Y Y
MD2 double
channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U S
XCL XCME
MD2S double
channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board with
OSC
TNF1E Enhanced Y Y N Y Y Y
MR2 double
channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexer
board
MR4 four channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexer
board
MR8 eight channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexer
board
TNF1M 8 channel Y Y Y Y Y Y
D8 multiplexing
and
demultiplexin
g board
TNF1M Bandpass N Y N Y Y Y
B1 filter 1-
channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U S
XCL XCME
TNF1M 8 channel Y Y Y Y Y Y
D8S multiplexing
and
demultiplexin
g board with
OSC
TNF1M 8-channel Y N N N N N
D8M multiplexing/
demultiplexin
g board with
MON ports
TNF1M 16-channel Y N N N N N
D16M multiplexing/
demultiplexin
g board with
MON ports
TNF1M Single Y N Y N N N
R1 channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board
TNF1M Single Y N Y N N N
R1S channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board with
OSC
TNF1M Double Y Y Y Y Y Y
R2 channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U S
XCL XCME
TNF1M Double Y N Y N N N
R2S channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board with
OSC
TNF1M Four channel Y Y Y Y Y Y

R4 optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board
TNF1M Four channel Y Y Y Y Y Y

R4S optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board with
OSC
TNF1M Eight channel Y Y Y Y Y Y

R8 optical add/
drop
multiplexing
board
TNF1SB Single fiber Y Y Y Y Y Y

M1 bidirectional
single
channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
configuration
board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U S
XCL XCME

M2 bidirectional
double
channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
configuration
board

M4 bidirectional
four channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
configuration
board

M8 bidirectional
eight channel
optical add/
drop
multiplexing
configuration
board

Transport Platform
Table 6-10 Reconfigurable optical add and drop multiplexing unit

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF6D Dual 9- N N N Y Y Y
WSS9 Port
Wavelen
gth
Selective
Switchin
g Board
TNF1W 4-Port N Y N Y Y Y
SMD4 Wavelen
gth
selective
multiple
xing and
Demulti
plexing
board
Table 6-11 Optical multiplexer and demultiplexer boards

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1DF Both Y Y N Y Y Y
IU01/ east &
TNF1DF west
IU03 direction
al fiber
interface
board
(dual
FIU
subcard)

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1DF Fiber Y Y N Y Y Y
IU02/ interface
TNF1DF board
IU04 (single
FIU
subcard)
TNF1DS Both Y Y Y Y Y Y
FIU01 east &
west
direction
al fiber
interface
board for
sync
timing
(dual
SFIU
subcard)
TNF1DS Fiber Y Y Y Y Y Y
FIU02 interface
board for
sync
timing
(single
SFIU
subcard)
TNF1FI Fiber Y Y N Y Y Y
U port unit
TNF2FI Fiber Y Y N Y Y Y
U port unit
TNF1X4 40- Y Y N Y Y Y
0 channel
multiple
xing or
demultip
lexing
board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1E Enhance N Y N Y Y Y
X40 d 40-
channel
multiple
xing or
demultip
lexing
board
Table 6-12 Optical amplifying boards

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1O Optical Y Y Y Y Y N
BU booster
board
TNF2O Optical Y Y N Y Y Y
BU booster
board
TNF1OP Optical Y N N N N N
U preampli
fier unit

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1B C-Band N Y N Y Y Y
AS1 optical
booster
and
amplifyi
ng unit
with
optical
supervis
ory
channel
board
Table 6-13 System control, switching, and timing boards

Name Description OptiX OSN OptiX OSN OptiX OSN
1800 I&II 1800 II Packet 1800 V Packet
Compact Enhanced
TNF1CTL OADM control Y N N

board
TNF1SCC System control Y N N

&
communication
board with OSC
TNF3SCC System control Y N N

&
communication
board with OSC
TNF1UXCL System control, N Y N

cross-connect,
timing, and line
board
TNF1UXC System control, N Y N

cross-connect,
and timing
board

Transport Platform
Name Description OptiX OSN OptiX OSN OptiX OSN

1800 I&II 1800 II Packet 1800 V Packet
Compact Enhanced
TNF5UXCM System control, N N Y

cross-connect
and clock board
TNF5UXCME System control, N N Y

cross-connect
and clock board
that supports 20
Gbit/s lower
order cross-
connections
TNF5XCH OTN system N N Y

control, cross-
connect and
clock board
TNZ5UXCMS system control, N N Y

cross-connect
and clock board
that supports 40
Gbit/s lower
order cross-
connections.
Table 6-14 Optical supervisory channel boards
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1ST Bidirecti Y Y Y Y Y Y
2 onal
optical
supervis
ory
channel
and
timing
transmis
sion unit

Transport Platform
Table 6-15 Auxiliary boards

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1A Auxiliar N N Y Y Y Y
UX y
interface
board
Table 6-16 Spectrum Analyzer Board

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1OP 8- N Y N Y Y Y
M8 channel
optical
power
monitor
board

Transport Platform
Table 6-17 Optical protection boards

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1O Optical Y Y Y Y Y Y
LP line
protectio
n board
TNF1SC Sync Y Y Y Y Y Y
S optical
channel
separator
board
Table 6-18 Fan and power boards

1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF1FA Fan Y Y N N N N
N board
TND1F Fan N N Y N N N
AN board
TNF5FA Fan N N N Y Y Y
N board
TNC1PI DC Y Y N N N N
U power
board
TND1PI DC Y Y Y N N N
U power
board

Transport Platform
1800 II
Packet

TNF1U TNF5U
XCL XCME
TNF5PI DC N N N Y Y Y
U power
board
TNF1AP AC Y Y Y N N N
IU power
board
TNF5AP AC N N N Y Y Y
IU power
board
6.4 Bar Code for Boards

The bar code of a board is provided on the front panel of the board and contains the basic
information about the board, including the BOM code and delivery time.
The bar code of a board provides the feature information about the board and varies according
to boards. Figure 6-1 shows a bar code and Table 6-19 provides the description of the bar
code.
Figure 6-1 Bar code of a board
028467104B000085 Y1 LPS-FRM800-PIU
1. Type code
5. Manufacture month
8. Board name
3. Vendor
6. Serial number
2. BOM code
4. Manufacture year
property
7. Environmental protection

Transport Platform
NOTE
The bar code in the figure is only an example and it may differ in practice.
Table 6-19 Description of the bar code of a board

No. Item Description
1 Type Code Indicates whether a board is a manufactured or finished

board. "02" indicates a manufactured board and "03"
indicates a finished board.
2 BOM Code Indicates the last four digits of the BOM code of a board.
3 Vendor Indicates the vendor of a board. "10" indicates Huawei.
4 Manufacture Indicates the last digit of the year when a board is

Year manufactured. For example, "4" indicates 2004. From 2010
onwards, a letter is used to indicate the manufacture year.
For example, the letter A indicates 2010, the letter B
indicates 2011, and so on.
5 Manufacture Indicates the month when a board is manufactured. The

Month value is expressed in hexadecimal format. For example, the
letter B indicates November.
6 Serial Number Indicates the production serial number of a board. The value
ranges from 000001 to 999999.
7 Environmental An environmental friendliness flag code identifies the

Protection environmental protection information. Possible values are
Property as follows:
l Y: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5
requirements and its lead status is not identified.
l Y1 and Y3: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5
requirements and contains lead.
l Y2: indicates that the product satisfies RoHS5
requirements and is lead-free.
l N: indicates that the product is not environmentally
friendly.
8 Board Name Indicates the name and associated information about a

board.

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 7 Optical Transponder Board
7 Optical Transponder Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical transponder boards.
7.1 Overview
An OTU (Optical Transponder Unit) board converts client-side services into standard optical
signals after performing mapping, convergence, and other procedures. The board also
performs the reverse process.
7.2 ELOM
ELOM: Enhanced 8 x Multi-rate Ports Wavelength Conversion Board
7.3 LDX
LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s Wavelength Conversion Board
7.4 LQM2
LQM2: Double 4 x Multi-rate Ports Wavelength Conversion Board

Transport Platform
7.1 Overview
An OTU (Optical Transponder Unit) board converts client-side services into standard optical
signals after performing mapping, convergence, and other procedures. The board also
performs the reverse process.
Positions of OTU Boards in a WDM System

Figure 7-1 shows the positions of OTU boards in a WDM system.
Figure 7-1 Positions of OTU boards in a WDM system
Client-side WDM-side
services services
OTU
OM
OA
Client-side equipment
WDM-side ODF
OTU
FIU
OTU
OA
OD
OTU

Transport Platform
Types of OTU Boards
Table 7-1 Main functions of OTU boards
Boar Type Client-Side Service Pluggable Optical WDM

d Module Specificatio
ns
Type Max. Client WDM DW CW

Num Side Side DM DM
ber
ELO Conver STM-64, OC-192, 10GE LAN, 10GE 1 Y Y Y Y

M gence WAN, OTU2, FC800, FC1200,
FICON8G, FICON 10G, CPRI
option6, CPRI option7
FC400, FICON4G 2
OTU1, STM-16, OC-48, FC200, 4

FICON EXPRESS, 3G-SDI, HD-SDI,
CPRI option3
STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FE, 8

GE, ESCON, FC100, FICON, DVB-
ASI, SDI, CPRI option2
LDX Conver STM-64, OC-192, FC800, FC1200, 1 Y Y Y Y

gence 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, OTU2,
FICON 8G, FICON 10G
LQM Conver STM-16, OC-48, FC200, FICON 1 Y Y Y Y

2 gence EXPRESS, HD-SDI, CPRI option2,
CPRI option3
GE, FC100, FICON, 2
STM-1, STM-4, OC-3, OC-12, FE, 4

ESCON, DVB-ASI, SDI
7.2 ELOM
ELOM: Enhanced 8 x Multi-rate Ports Wavelength Conversion Board
7.2.1 Version Description

The available hardware version of the ELOM board is TNF2. On the NMS, the logical board
name of the ELOM board is F2ELOM(STND).
Version
Table 7-2 describes the version mapping of the ELOM board.

Transport Platform
Table 7-2 Version description of the ELOM board

Item Description
Board hardware version TNF2: The mapping version of the equipment is

7.2.2 Functions and Features

The main functions and features supported by the ELOM board are wavelength conversion,
service convergence, and ALS.
Table 7-3 Functions and features of the ELOM board

Functio
n and
Feature Description
Basic The ELOM board supports the following working modes:

Function l 1*AP8 general mode
ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0): 8 x Any (125 Mbit/s
1.25 Gbit/s) <-> 2xOTU2
ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1): 8 x Any (125 Mbit/s
2.46 Gbit/s) <-> 2xOTU2
ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1): 8 x Any (1.5
Gbit/s 2.67 Gbit/s) <-> 2xOTU2
ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex): 8 x Any (2.5 Gbit/s
4.25 Gbit/s) <-> 2xOTU2
NOTE
If intra-board 1+1 protection or ODUk SNCP is configured, the client-side signals are
converged into one channel of OTU2 optical signals, WDM-side ports support the
dual fed and selective receiving function.
l 1*AP1 ODU2 mode
1 x Any (4.9 Gbit/s 10.5 Gbit/s) <-> 1xOTU2/OTU2e
The optical ports on the WDM side provide the dual fed and selective
receiving function.
l 1*AP1 ODUflex mode
1 x CPRI option6/FC800/FICON 8G<-> 1xOTU2
The optical ports on the WDM side provide the dual fed and selective
receiving function.

Transport Platform
Functio
n and
Feature Description
Service l OTU1: OTN services with the rate being 2.67 Gbit/s.
type l 10GE LAN: Ethernet services with the rate being 10.31 Gbit/s. The 10GE
LAN services can be mapped in two modes: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1
G) and MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).
l 10GE WAN: Ethernet services with the rate being 9.95 Gbit/s.
l STM-1: SDH services, the rate is 155.52 Mbit/s.
l STM-4: SDH services, the rate is 622.08 Mbit/s.
l STM-16: SDH services, the rate is 2.488 Gbit/s.
l STM-64: SDH services, the rate is 9.95 Gbit/s.
l OC-3: SONET services, the rate is 155.52 Mbit/s.
l OC-12: SONET services, the rate is 622.08 Mbit/s.
l OC-48: SONET services, the rate is 2.488 Gbit/s.
l OC-192: SONET services, the rate is 9.95 Gbit/s.
l FE: Fast Ethernet services with the rate being 125 Mbit/s. Supports FE
optical signals and FE electrical signals.
l GE: Gigabit Ethernet services with the rate being 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE
optical signals and GE electrical signals.
l ESCON: Enterprise system connection services with the rate being 200
Mbit/s.
l FC100: Fiber channel services with the rate being 1.06 Gbit/s.
l FICON: Fiber channel services with the rate being 1.06 Gbit/s.
l FICON 4G: Fiber channel services with the rate being 4.25 Gbit/s.
l FICON EXPRESS: Fiber channel services with the rate being 2.12 Gbit/s.
l DVB-ASI (Digital Video Broadcasting -Asynchronous Serial Interface):
Digital TV services with the rate being 270 Mbit/s.
l SDI (Digital Video Broadcasting - Serial Digital Interface): Digital TV
services with the rate being 270 Mbit/s.
l HD-SDI: High-definition digital TV services with the rate being 1.485
Gbit/s or 1.4835 Gbit/s.
l 3G-SDI: High-definition digital TV services with the rate being 2.97
Gbit/s.
l CPRI option2: the rate is 1.2288 Gbit/s.

Transport Platform
Functio
n and
Feature Description

NOTE
"SDI" is also called "SD-SDI" according to SMPTE 259M standard.
FEC l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.709.
Mode l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE
Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interoperate with each other.
Ethernet Supports encapsulation of GE services in GFP-T (ITU-T G.7041) and TTT-

service GMP (ITU-T G.709) (displayed as GE(TTT-GMP) on the NMS) modes.
mapping Supports encapsulation of 10GE LAN services in GFP-F or BMP mode (GFP-
mode F is the abbreviated form of Generic Framing Procedure - Frame Mapped and
BMP of Bit-synchronous Mapping Procedure).
Alarms Monitors B1, SM_BIP8, PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.

and Monitors performance parameters and alarm signals, including the monitoring
performa of laser bias current, laser working temperature and optical power on the
nce WDM side.
events
monitorin Monitors the RMON performance of GE, FE and 10GE LAN services.
g
OTN l Supports the mapping of client-side 10GE LAN services into OTU2/
function OTU2e signals, FC1200/FICON 10G services into OTU2e signals, and the
mapping of other services into OTU2 signals.
l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l ELOM supports PM functions for ODU2/ODUflex/ODU1/ODU0, and SM
functions for OTU2/OTU1.
Tunable Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module,
waveleng the board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range
th of 40 wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
function
Synchron Supports the transparent transmission of synchronous Ethernet services, the

ous quality of the clock signals of the board meets the requirements of G.8261.
Ethernet
services
Protectio l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection

n l Supports client 1+1 protection
schemes
l Supports ODUk (k = 0, 1, 2, flex) SNCP protection

Transport Platform
Functio
n and
Feature Description
Loopback l Supports WDM side inloop

l Supports WDM side outloop
l Supports client side inloop
l Supports client side outloop
ALS When there is no optical power received on the WDM side or client side, the
function OTU board shuts down the laser of the client side to avoid personal injuries.
NOTE
Only the client side supports the configuration of the ALS function.
ESC Supported
function
Cross- l Intra-board cross-connect:

connect When the board works in 1*AP8 general mode, it achieves intra-board
function ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex cross-connections. When the ports on the
board work in ODU1 convergence mode, the board also achieves the
intra-board cross-connect function of optical services at any rate in the
range from 125 Mbit/s to 2.46 Gbit/s.
When the board works in 1*AP1 ODU2 mode, it achieves intra-board
ODU2 cross-connections.
When the board works in 1*AP1 ODUflex mode, it achieves intra-
board ODUflex cross-connections.
l Inter-board cross-connect: not supported.
LPT The board supports the LPT function only when the client-side service type is
function FE, GE or 10GE LAN.
PRBS Supports the PRBS function on the client side.

test NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type
is OTU1/STM-1/STM-4/STM-16/STM-64/OC-3/OC-12/OC-48/OC-192/GE/10GE LAN.
If the access service type is 10GE LAN and the bit transparent mapping mode (11.1 G) is
used, a PRBS test is not supported.
WDM Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications and ITU-T G.

specificat 694.2-compliant CWDM specifications.
ions

Transport Platform
Functio
n and
Feature Description
Protocol Protocols or IEEE 802.3u

or standards (non- IEEE 802.3z
standard performance
complian monitoring) with ITU-T G.707
ce which ITU-T G.782
transparently ITU-T G.783
transmitted
services comply GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
Transport Systems: Common Generic
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES
(FC-PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND
SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-
SW-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND
SIGNALING INTERFACE (FC-PH)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE
COMMAND CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL
(FC-SB-2)
SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-
Definition Television Systems
SMPTE 297-2006 Serial Digital Fiber Transmission
System for SMPTE 259M, SMPTE 344M, SMPTE 292
and SMPTE 424M Signals
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for
the implementation and usage of the DVB
Asynchronous Serial Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc
Composite Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets
CONnection architecture (SBCON)
CPRI Specification V4.1
InfiniBandTM Architecture Release 1.2.1
IEEE 802.3ae

Transport Platform
Functio
n and
Feature Description
Protocols or ITU-T G.805

standards ITU-T G.806
(performance
monitoring) for ITU-T G.709
processing services ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2
7.2.3 Physical Ports Displayed on NMS

This section describes the display of ports on the board.
Display of Optical Ports

Table 7-4 lists the sequence number displayed on an NMS of the optical port on the ELOM
board front panel.
Table 7-4 Display of the ELOM optical ports

Optical Ports on the Front
Panel Optical Port Displayed on the U2000
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
RX1/TX1 3
RX2/TX2 4
RX3/TX3 5
RX4/TX4 6
RX5/TX5 7

Transport Platform

RX6/TX6 8
RX7/TX7 9
RX8/TX8 10
NOTE
An optical port number displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of actual optical ports, one for
transmitting signals, and the other for receiving signals.
7.2.4 ELOM Scenario 1: 1*AP8 General Mode
Application
The ELOM board converges a maximum of eight channels of Any service signals at a rate in
the range of 125 Mbit/s to 4.25 Gbit/s into the ODU0, ODU1 or ODUflex channels, and then
converges the signals into one channel or two channels of OTU2 optical signals. Then, the
ELOM board converts the OTU2 optical signals into standard DWDM wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The
ELOM board also performs the reverse process. See Figure 7-2.
Figure 7-2 Application of the ELOM board working in 1*AP8 general mode
RX1/TX1 OUT1 IN1 RX1/TX1

RX2/TX2 ODU1 ODU1 RX2/TX2
OUT2 OADM OADM IN2
RX3/TX3 RX3/TX3
125Mbit/s RX4/TX4 ODU2 OTU2 OTU2 ODU2
RX4/TX4 125Mbit/s
G.694.1/G.694.2
4.25Gbit/s RX5/TX5 ODU0 IN1 OUT1 ODU0
RX5/TX5 4.25Gbit/s
RX6/TX6 ODU1 ODU1 RX6/TX6
ODU0 IN2 OADM OADM OUT2 ODU0
RX8/TX8 RX8/TX8
ODUflex ELOM ELOM ODUflex
RX7/TX7 RX7/TX7
Client side WDM side WDM side Client side
The ELOM board maps eight channels of services received on the client side into
ODU0, ODU1 or ODUflex. In this figure, services at ports RX1/TX1RX5/TX5 are
mapped into ODU1, services at ports RX6/TX6 and RX8/TX8 are mapped into ODU0,
and then into ODU1, and services at the RX7/TX7 port are converged into ODUflex.

Transport Platform
NOTE
In this scenario, the board can work in five port modes to support various services on the client side:
l ODU0 non-convergence mode (Any->ODU0): STM1, STM4, FE, GE(GFP-T), GE(TTT_GMP),
ESCON, FC100, FICON, DVB-ASI, CPRI option2, HD-SDI.
l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1): STM1, STM4, GE(GFP-T), FE, ESCON, FC100,
FC200, FICON, FICON EXPRESS, DVB-ASI, HD-SDI. The total timeslots allocated for services
converged into an ODU1 container cannot exceed 16.
l ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1): OTU1, STM16, FC200, FICON EXPRESS,
HD-SDI, CPRI option3. OTU1 services can only be received at the TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3, TX5/RX5,
and TX7/RX7 ports.
l ODUflex non-convergence mode (Any->ODUflex): FC400, FICON 4G, 3G-SDI
l None (not for ports): No service can be received.
l Ports RX1/TX1RX8/TX8 support EVOA SFP modules.
l When intra-board 1+1 protection or ODUk SNCP protection is not configured, the client-side
signals can be converged into two channels of OTU2 optical signals, WDM-side ports do not
support the dual fed and selective receiving function, and the total bandwidth of services received at
ports 201 (ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1) to 208 (ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8) cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.
l When intra-board 1+1 protection or ODUk SNCP protection is configured, the client-side signals are
converged into one channel of OTU2 optical signals, WDM-side ports support the dual fed and
selective receiving function, and the total bandwidth of services received at ports 201 (ConvGroup1/
ConvGroup1) to 208 (ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8) cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
l In 1*AP8 general mode, intra-board 1+1 protection is not recommended because of service
configuration restrictions but ODUk SNCP protection is recommended if both ODU1 convergence
mode and ODU0/ODUflex non-convergence mode are configured.
Table 7-5 lists the mapping between the port working modes and available mapping paths
when the ELOM board works in 1*AP8 general mode.
Table 7-5 Mapping between the port working modes and available mapping paths
Port Working Mode Available Mapping Path
ODU0 non-convergence mode ODU0->ODU1->ODU2

(Any->ODU0) ODU0->ODU2
ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any- ODU1->ODU2

>ODU1)
ODU1 non-convergence mode ODU1->ODU2

(OTU1/Any->ODU1)
ODUflex non-convergence mode ODUflex->ODU2

(Any->ODUflex)
Background Information
Timeslots can be set for services when the TNF2ELOM board works in 1*AP8 general mode
and the ports on the board work in ODU1 convergence mode. The number of timeslots that
are occupied by services varies according to service types. Each ODU1 service requires 16
timeslots; therefore, the total number of timeslots occupied by all client-side services that are
converged into an ODU1 service must be 16 or smaller.

Transport Platform
Mapping Client Services into ODUk Signals describes the number of timeslots required by
common services.
NOTE
In 1*AP8 general mode, multiple client-side services can be encapsulated into one ODU1 service, but
one client-side service cannot be encapsulated into multiple ODU1 services. For example, one FC200
service occupies 12 timeslots. If four FC200 services are received on the client side, the four FC200
services can be encapsulated into only four ODU1 services but cannot be encapsulated into three ODU1
services.
Logical Ports
This section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the port models for this
board.
Figure 7-3 Port model for the ELOM board (ODU1 convergence mode)
1
ODU1 ODU2 OTU2 1(IN1/OUT1)

201
3(TX1/RX1) 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-1
ODU1
4(TX2/RX2)
201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-8
202
ODU1
6(TX4/RX4)
202(ConvGroup2/ConvGroup2)-8
2
7(TX5/RX5)
8(TX6/RX6)
208
ODU1
: Active service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

: Virtual channel, which does not need to be configured on the NMS
: Client-side services
: WDM-side services
NOTE
In ODU1 convergence mode, the total timeslots allocated for services converged into an ODU1
container cannot exceed 16.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-4 Port model for the ELOM board (ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex non-convergence mode)
1
ODU0 ODU1
ODU0 ODU1
ODU0
ODU2 OTU2
1(IN1/OUT1)
ODU0/ODU1/
3(TX1/RX1)
ODUflex ODU0
4(TX2/RX2) ODUfle
x
ODUfle
5(TX3/RX3) x
6(TX4/RX4) ODU0/ODU1/
ODUflex
2
7(TX5/RX5)
ODU0 ODU1
8(TX6/RX6)
ODU0 ODU1
9(TX7/RX7)
ODU0
ODU0/ODU1/ ODU2 OTU2
10(TX8/RX8)
ODUflex 2(IN2/OUT2)
ODU0
ODUfle
x
ODUfle
x

: WDM-side services
NOTE
l In ODU0 non-convergence mode, GE(GFP-F) services cannot be received.

l In ODU1 non-convergence mode, OTU1 services can only be received at the TX1/RX1, TX3/RX3,
TX5/RX5, and TX7/RX7 ports.
l In ODUflex non-convergence mode, when 3G-SDI, FC400 or FICON 4G services are received, the
3 x 1.25 Gbit/s, 4 x 1.25 Gbit/s or 4 x 1.25 Gbit/s bandwidth is occupied.
l In ODUflex non-convergence mode, when intra-board 1+1 protection is configured for the board,
only TX1/RX1 and TX3/RX3 are available.
l Client-side optical ports can be set to ODU0 non-convergence mode, ODU1
convergence mode, ODU1 non-convergence mode, ODUflex non-convergence mode, or
None. The default mode is None.
l When an optical port is set to the ODU1 convergence mode, the signals at this optical
port can be cross-connected to any 8 channels of the 64 channels at ports 201-208.
l OTU1 services can be received only through ports 3(TX1/RX1), 5(TX3/RX3), 7(TX5/
RX5), and 9(TX7/RX7) on the client side.
The upstream OTU1 and ODU1 alarms and performance events are reported
through channel 1 of corresponding client-side optical ports.
The downstream ODU1 alarms and performance events are reported at optical ports
1 and 2.
l When the client services are not OTU1:

Transport Platform
Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported
through channel 1 of corresponding client-side optical ports.
ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex alarms and performance events are reported at optical ports
1 and 2.
NOTE
ODU0/ODU1/ODUflex alarms and performance events can be reported at the corresponding

optical ports only after the non-intrusive monitoring function is enabled.
l Alarms and performance events related to OTU2/ODU2 electrical-layer overheads are
reported through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1) and 2 (IN2/
OUT2).
l Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms and
performance events are reported through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/
OUT1) and 2 (IN2/OUT2).
NOTE
l When intra-board 1+1 protection or ODUk SNCP protection is not configured, the client-side
signals can be converged into two channels of OTU2 optical signals, WDM-side ports do not
support the dual fed and selective receiving function, and the total bandwidth of services received at
ports 201 (ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1) to 208 (ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8) cannot exceed 20 Gbit/s.
l When intra-board 1+1 protection or ODUk SNCP protection is configured, the client-side signals are
converged into one channel of OTU2 optical signals, WDM-side ports support the dual fed and
selective receiving function, and the total bandwidth of services received at ports 201 (ConvGroup1/
ConvGroup1) to 208 (ConvGroup8/ConvGroup8) cannot exceed 10 Gbit/s.
7.2.5 ELOM Scenario 2: 1*AP1 ODU2 Mode
Application
The ELOM board maps one channel of Any service signals at a rate in the range of 4.9 Gbit/s
to 10.5 Gbit/s into the ODU2 channels, and then converges the signals into one channel of
OTU2 optical signals. Then, the ELOM board converts the OTU2 optical signals into
standard DWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that
comply with ITU-T G.694.2. The ELOM board also performs the reverse process. The WDM-
side port of the ELOM board supports the dual feeding and selective receiving function. See
Figure 7-5.
Figure 7-5 Application of the ELOM board working in 1*AP1 ODU2 mode
OUT1 IN1
OADM OADM
6.1Gbit/s ODU2 OTU2 G.694.1/G.694.2 OTU2 ODU2 6.1Gbit/s

RX1/TX1 RX1/TX1
10.5Gbit/s IN1 OUT1 10.5Gbit/s
OADM OADM
ELOM ELOM

Transport Platform
NOTE
l In this scenario, the ELOM board supports the following types of services on the client side: 10GE
LAN, 10GE WAN, STM64, OC-192, FC800, FICON 8G, FC1200, FICON 10G, CPRI option6,
and CPRI option7.
l The services can only be received at the TX1/RX1 ports.
l Ports RX7/TX7 and RX8/TX8 support EVOA SFP modules.
Physical and Logical Ports

This section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the port models and the
configuration steps for this board.
Figure 7-6 Port model for the ELOM board working in 1*AP1 ODU2 mode
ODU2 OTU2 1(IN1/OUT1)
ODU2 2
3(RX1/TX1)

: Standby service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS
: WDM-side services
l Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported through
channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1).
l Alarms and performance events related to OTU2 electrical-layer overheads are reported
through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1) and 2 (IN2/OUT2).
l Alarms and performance events related to ODU2 electrical-layer overheads are reported
through channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1).
l Intra-board 1+1 protection or ODU2 SNCP protection can be configured on the WDM
side.
NOTE
If the non-intrusive monitoring function is enabled, ODU2 overhead alarms and performance events can
also be reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical port 1.

Transport Platform
7.2.6 ELOM Scenario 3: 1*AP1 ODUflex Mode
Application
The ELOM board maps one channel of CPRI option6, FC800 or FICON 8G service signals
into the ODUflex channels, and then converges the signals into one channel of OTU2 optical
signals. Then, the ELOM board converts the OTU2 optical signals into standard DWDM
wavelengths that comply with ITU-T G.694.1 or CWDM wavelengths that comply with ITU-
T G.694.2. The ELOM board also performs the reverse process. The WDM-side port of the
ELOM board supports the dual feeding and selective receiving function. See Figure 7-7.
Figure 7-7 Application of the ELOM board working in 1*AP1 ODUflex mode
OUT1 IN1
OADM OADM
CPRI option6 ODUflex ODU2 OTU2 G.694.1/G.694.2 OTU2 ODU2 ODUflex

CPRI option6
FC800 RX1/TX1 RX1/TX1 FC800
FICON 8G IN1 OUT1 FICON 8G
OADM OADM
ELOM ELOM
NOTE
l In this scenario, the ELOM board supports the following types of services on the client side: FC800,
FICON 8G, and CPRI option6.
l The services can only be received at the TX1/RX1 ports.
Physical and Logical Ports

This section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the port models and the
configuration steps for this board.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-8 Port model for the ELOM board working in 1*AP1 ODUflex mode
ODUflex ODU2 OTU2 1(IN1/OUT1)
3(RX1/TX1) ODUflex
2
ODUflex ODU2 OTU2 2(IN2/OUT2)

: WDM-side services
l Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported through
channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1).
l Alarms and performance events related to OTU2/ODU2 electrical-layer overheads are
reported through channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/OUT1) and 2 (IN2/
OUT2).
l Alarms and performance events related to ODUflex electrical-layer overheads are
reported through channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3 (RX1/TX1).
l Intra-board 1+1 protection or ODUflex SNCP protection can be configured on the WDM
side.
NOTE
If the non-intrusive monitoring function is enabled, ODUflex overhead alarms and performance events
can also be reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical port 1.
7.2.7 ELOM Scenario 4: ODUk ADM

The ELOM board can enable ODUk services to pass through between the east WDM side and
west WDM side.
NOTE
The ELOM board supports ODUk ADM only when the common 1xAP8 mode is used.
Application Scenarios of ODUk ADM

The ODUk ADM function of ELOM board can be used in two different application scenarios.

Transport Platform
Function Overview of ODUk ADM

In normal cases, services are transmitted between the client side and WDM side on the ELOM
board, as represented by blue lines with arrows in Figure 7-9. The ODUk ADM function
enables ODUk services to pass through between the east WDM side and west WDM side, as
represented by purple lines with arrows in Figure 7-9.
The ELOM board supports a 10 Gbit/s pass-through capability and a 20 Gbit/s service
grooming capability. The board supports pass-through of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex
services. The following figure shows the pass-through of ODU1 services.
Figure 7-9 Schematic diagram of the ODUk ADM function
ODU1
3(TX1/RX1) West
ODU1
4(TX2/RX2) ODU2 OTU2 1(IN1/OUT1)
ODU1
5(TX3/RX3)
ODU1
6(TX4/RX4)
7(TX5/RX5) ODU1
8(TX6/RX6)
East
ODU1
9(TX7/RX7) ODU1
10(TX8/RX8) ELOM ODU1
Services transmitted between the client side and WDM side (Solid lines represent
the working channel and dashed lines the protection channel.)
Pass-through services between the east WDM side and west WDM side
Client- side services
WDM- side services
Application Scenario 1
As shown in Figure 7-10, OADM sites A, B, C, and D form a ring network. An ELOM board
is configured at each site. The following services are configured:
l One STM-16 service is transmitted between sites A and B, between sites B and C,
between sites C and D, and between sites D and A each.
l Three GE services are transmitted from site A to sites B, C, and D each (the signal
transmission paths are respectively represented by red, yellow, and purple lines in the
following figure). The GE service to site C passes through the ELOM board at site B (the
signal transmission path is represented by yellow lines). The GE service to site D passes
through the ELOM boards at sites B and C (the service transmission path is represented
by purple lines).

Transport Platform
The ODUk ADM function enables ODUk services to be added, be dropped, and pass through
on the ring.
Figure 7-10 Networking for application scenario 1

STM-16 3 x GE STM-16
ELOM
IN1/ IN2/
OUT1 OUT2
Station A
STM-16
IN2/ IN1/ STM-16
GE OUT2 OUT1
OTU2 Ring
GE
IN1/ IN2/
OUT1 OUT2
STM-16 STM-16
ELOM ELOM
IN2/ IN1/
Station B OUT2 OUT1 Station D
ELOM
Station C
STM-16 GE STM-16
Application Scenario 2
OADM sites A, B, C, and D form a ring network. An ELOM board is configured at each site.
The following services are configured:
l One STM-16 service is transmitted between sites A and B, and one ODU1 SNCP
protection group is configured for the service.
l Two GE services are transmitted between sites A and C, and two ODU0 SNCP
protection groups are configured for the services.
l One FC400 service is transmitted between sites A and D, and one ODUflex SNCP
protection group is configured for the service.
In normal cases, services between sites A, B, C, and D are carried on the working channel. In
Figure 7-11, the solid lines indicate the working channel and the dashed lines indicate the
protection channel.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-11 Networking for application scenario 2 (normal)

STM16 FC400
2XGE
ELOM
IN1/ IN2/
OUT1 OUT2
STM16
IN2/ Station A IN1/
OUT2 OUT1
OTU2 Ring
IN1/ IN2/
OUT1 OUT2 FC400
ELOM ELOM
IN2/ IN1/
ELOM
Station C
2XGE
When a line fault occurs between sites A and B, services at each site are switched to the
protection channel, as shown in the solid lines in Figure 7-12.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-12 Networking for application scenario 2 (switching)
STM16 FC400
2XGE
ELOM
IN1/ IN2/
OUT1 OUT2
STM16
IN2/ Station A IN1/
OUT2 OUT1
OTU2 Ring
IN1/ IN2/
OUT1 OUT2 FC400
ELOM ELOM
IN2/ IN1/
ELOM
Station C
2XGE
Function Implementation of ODUk ADM

A maximum of eight ODU0 services, four ODU1 services, two ODUflex services, or a
combination of these services can pass through between the east WDM side and west WDM
side of the ELOM board.
This section describes how the ODUk ADM function is implemented for ODU0 services,
ODU1 services, ODUflex services, or a combination of these services on an ELOM board.
ODUk ADM (ODU0 Services)

As shown in Figure 7-13, the first ODU0 service in the west can pass through to any ODU0
channel (the first ODU0 channel in this example) in the east using the 201 port. The reverse
process (from east to west) is also supported. Similarly, the eighth ODU0 service in the west
can pass through to any vacant ODU0 channel (the eighth ODU0 channel in this example) in
the east using the 208 port. The reverse process (from east to west) is also supported.
Ports that have used to pass through ODU0 services cannot be used again. If fewer than eight
ODU0 services need to pass through the board, vacant logical ports (201-208) can be used to
transmit services between the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
The east WDM-side and west WDM-side mapping paths for a pass-through service must be the same.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-13 ODU0 service pass-through

1
ODU0:1
201(LP1/LP1) ODU1
ODU0:2 West
ODU0:3
ODU1
ODU0:4 1(IN1/OUT1)
3(TX1/RX1) 202(LP2/LP2) ODU2 OTU2
ODU0:5
ODU1
ODU0:6
4(TX2/RX2)
ODU0:7
203(LP3/LP3) ODU1
ODU0:8
5(TX3/RX3)
204(LP4/LP4)
6(TX4/RX4)
7(TX5/RX5)
205(LP5/LP5)
8(TX6/RX6) 2
ODU0:1
206(LP6/LP6) ODU1
ODU0:2
9(TX7/RX7)
ODU0:3
East
ODU1
ODU0:4
10(TX8/RX8) 207(LP7/LP7) ODU2 OTU2 2(IN2/OUT2)
ODU0:5
ODU1
ODU0:6
ODU0:7
208(LP8/LP8) ODU1
ODU0:8
0DU0 services pass through between the east WDM side and west WDM side
Logical ports (201-208) are occupied
Client-side services
WDM-side services
The eight ODU0 channels on the west WDM side correspond to logical ports (201-208).
Table 7-6 lists the mapping between ODU0 services and the required logical ports.
Table 7-6 Mapping between ODU0 services and the required logical ports
ODU0 Channel on the Logical Port (201-208) ODU0 Channel on the
West WDM Side East WDM Side
ODU0:1 201 ODU0:1/ODU0:2/ODU0:3/

ODU0:4/ODU0:5/ODU0:6/
ODU0:7/ODU0:8
ODU0:2 202 ODU0:1/ODU0:2/ODU0:3/

ODU0:7/ODU0:8
ODU0:3 203 ODU0:1/ODU0:2/ODU0:3/

ODU0:7/ODU0:8
ODU0:4 204 ODU0:1/ODU0:2/ODU0:3/

ODU0:7/ODU0:8
ODU0:5 205 ODU0:1/ODU0:2/ODU0:3/

ODU0:7/ODU0:8

Transport Platform

ODU0:6 206 ODU0:1/ODU0:2/ODU0:3/

ODU0:7/ODU0:8
ODU0:7 207 ODU0:1/ODU0:2/ODU0:3/

ODU0:7/ODU0:8
ODU0:8 208 ODU0:1/ODU0:2/ODU0:3/

ODU0:7/ODU0:8
ODUk ADM (ODU1 Services)

As shown in Figure 7-14, the first ODU1 service in the west can pass through to any ODU1
channel (the first ODU1 channel in this example) in the east using the 202 and 204 ports. The
reverse process (from east to west) is also supported. Similarly, the fourth ODU1 service in
the west can pass through to any vacant ODU1 channel (the fourth ODU1 channel in this
example) in the east using the 205 and 207 ports. The reverse process (from east to west) is
also supported.
Ports that have used to pass through ODU1 services cannot be used again. If fewer than four
ODU1 services need to pass through the board, vacant logical ports (201-208) can be used to
transmit services between the client side and WDM side.
NOTE

Transport Platform
Figure 7-14 ODU1 service pass-through

1
202(LP2/LP2)
ODU1:1
ODU1:2
West
3(TX1/RX1) 204(LP4/LP4)
4(TX2/RX2) ODU1:3
206(LP6/LP6)
5(TX3/RX3) ODU1:4
208(LP8/LP8)
6(TX4/RX4)
7(TX5/RX5) 2
201(LP1/LP1)
8(TX6/RX6) ODU1:1
203(LP3/LP3) East
9(TX7/RX7) ODU1:2
10(TX8/RX8) ODU1:3
205(LP5/LP5)
ODU1:4
207(LP7/LP7)
0DU1 services pass through between the east WDM side and west WDM side
WDM-side services
The ODU1 services that pass through from the west WDM side use fixed logical ports
(201-208). Table 7-7 lists the mapping between ODU1 services and the required logical ports.
Table 7-7 Mapping between ODU1 services and the required logical ports
ODU1:1 202 and 204 ODU1:1/ODU1:2/ODU1:3/

ODU1:4

ODU1:4

ODU1:4

ODU1:4
ODUk ADM (ODUflex Services)

As shown in Figure 7-15, the first ODUflex service in the west can pass through to any
ODUflex channel (the first ODUflex channel in this example) in the east using the 201 and
202 ports. The reverse process (from east to west) is also supported. Similarly, the second
ODUflex service in the west can pass through to any vacant ODUflex channel (the second

Transport Platform
ODUflex channel in this example) in the east using the 205 and 206 ports. The reverse
process (from east to west) is also supported.
If fewer than two ODUflex services need to pass through the board, vacant logical ports
(201-208) can be used to transmit services between the client side and WDM side.
NOTE
Figure 7-15 ODUflex service pass-through

1
201(LP1/LP1)
ODUflex:1 West
3(TX1/RX1) 202(LP2/LP2)
4(TX2/RX2)
203(LP3/LP3) ODUflex:2
5(TX3/RX3)
204(LP4/LP4)
6(TX4/RX4)
7(TX5/RX5) 2
205(LP5/LP5)
8(TX6/RX6)
ODUflex:1 East
206(LP6/LP6)
9(TX7/RX7)
10(TX8/RX8) 207(LP7/LP7)
ODUflex:2
208(LP8/LP8)
0DUflex services pass through between the east WDM side and west WDM side
WDM-side services
The ODUflex services that pass through from the west WDM side use fixed logical ports
(201-208). Table 7-8 lists the mapping between ODUflex services and the required logical
ports.
Table 7-8 Mapping between ODUflex services and the required logical ports
ODUflex Channel on the Logical Port (201-208) ODUflex Channel on the
ODUflex:1 201 and 202 ODUflex:1/ODUflex:2
ODUflex:2 205 and 206 ODUflex:1/ODUflex:2

Transport Platform
ODUk ADM (ODU0&ODU1&ODUflex Services)

As shown in Figure 7-16, one ODU0 service, one ODU1 service, and one ODUflex service in
the west pass through to the east WDM side in hybrid mode using the 201, 202, and 205
207 ports respectively.
In hybrid pass-through, the total ODUk capacity is smaller than 10 Gbit/s and logical ports
(201-208) cannot be repeatedly used. See Table 7-6, Table 7-7, and Table 7-8 for the
mappings between the required logical ports (201-208) and ODU0 services, ODU1 services,
and ODUflex services respectively.
NOTE
Figure 7-16 Hybrid pass-through of ODU0, ODU1, and ODUflex services

1
201(ConvGroup1/C
onvGroup1)
ODUflex
West
202(ConvGroup2/C 1(IN1/OUT1)
3(TX1/RX1) ODU2 OTU2
onvGroup2)
ODU0
4(TX2/RX2)
203(ConvGroup3/C
onvGroup3) ODU1
5(TX3/RX3)
204(ConvGroup4/C
6(TX4/RX4) onvGroup4)
7(TX5/RX5) 206(ConvGroup6/C
onvGroup6) 2
8(TX6/RX6)
205(ConvGroup5/C
onvGroup5) ODUflex
9(TX7/RX7) East
207(ConvGroup7/C ODU2 OTU2 2(IN2/OUT2)
10(TX8/RX8)
onvGroup7) ODU0
208(ConvGroup8/C ODU1
onvGroup8)
0DUk (k = 0, 1, flex) services pass through between the east WDM side and west WDM side
WDM-side services
7.2.8 Working Principle and Signal Flow

The ELOM board consists of the client-side optical module, the WDM-side optical module,
the service en/de-capsulation and processing module, the clock module, the variable optical
attenuator, the communication module, and the power supply module. The variable optical
attenuator is the optional module. If you need this equipment, contact Huawei.
Figure 7-17 is the functional block diagram of the ELOM board that realize the convergence
of eight channels of signals at any rate.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-17 Functional block diagram of the ELOM board
Clock module
Client side
WDM side
RX1
OUT1
O/E E/O
RX8
OUT2
En/de- Service
capsulation processing
TX1
IN1
E/O O/E
TX8 IN2
Client-side Service en/de-capsulation WDM-side optical

optical module
and processing module module
EVOA
Communication module
Required voltage
EVOA
Power supply
module
Variable
Fuse optical
attenuator
Backplane
DC power supply UXC
from a chassis
In the signal flow of the ELOM board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the ELOM to the WDM
side of the ELOM, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l Transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives optical signals from client side equipment
through the RX1 - RX8 optical ports, and performs O/E conversion.
After conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the service en/
decapsulation and processing module. The module performs processes such as
multiplexing, clock generating and frame processing. Then, the module outputs one
channel of OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals.
The OTU2 or OTU2e electrical signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After
performing E/O conversion, the module sends out the G.694.1-compliant optical signals
at DWDM standard wavelengths or the G.694.2-compliant optical signals at CWDM
standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2e optical signals. The optical signals are output
through the OUT1 and OUT2 optical ports.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the G.694.1-compliant or G.694.2-compliant at
WDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2e optical signals from the WDM side through
the IN1 and IN2 optical ports. Then, the module performs O/E conversion.

Transport Platform
After O/E conversion, the signals are sent to the service en/de-capsulation and
processing module. The module performs processes such as decapsulation, clock
recovery and demultiplexing. Then, the module outputs eight channels of electrical
signals at any rate.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion and the client-side electrical
module performs level conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then
outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals and electrical signals through the
TX1 - TX8 optical ports.
Module Function
l Client-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the client-side receiver and the client-side transmitter.
Client-side receiver: Receives optical signals in any format from the client side
devices and performs the O/E conversion of the optical signals in internal electrical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from internal electrical signals to
optical signals in any format, and transmits the optical signals to client side devices.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical ports.
Reports the working state of the client-side laser.
l WDM-side optical module
The module consists of two parts: the WDM-side receiver and the WDM-side
transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical
signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
Reports the performance of the WDM-side optical port.
Reports the working state of the WDM-side laser.
l Service en/de-capsulation and processing module
The module consists of the service en/de-capsulation module and the service processing
module. It realizes the en/de-capsulation of signals in any format and service
convergence.
Service en/de-capsulation module: Processes the overheads of signals in any format,
and reports the performance monitoring state of service signals.
Service processing module: Achieves the multiplexing from signals in any format to
signals in OTU2 format and the demultiplexing from signals in OTU2 format to
signals in any format, and performs processes such as encapsulation/decapsulation
of FEC, encoding/decoding and scrambling/descrambling.
l Clock module
Provides a clock for the board and realizes clock transparent transmission.
l Variable optical attenuator (can be selected)
Adjust the transmission optical power or receive optical power.
l Communication module
Collects the information of alarms, performance events, and working states of each
functional module of the unit.
Communicates with the system control, switching, and timing board, to control and
operate on each module of the unit.

Transport Platform
l Power supply module

Converts the DC power into the power required by each module of the unit.
7.2.9 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the ELOM front panel.
Appearance of the Front Panel

Figure 7-18 shows the front panel of the ELOM.
Figure 7-18 Front panel of the ELOM

TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8 STAT
ELOM
SRV
IN1
IN2
OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2
Indicators
There are some indicators on the front panel.
l Working status indicator (STAT) -red, green, orange

l Service status indicator (SRV) - red, green, orange
l WDM-side receive optical power status indicator (INn)- red, green
For details on the indicators, refer to 22.2 Board Indicators.
Interfaces
Table 7-9 lists the type and function of each interface.
Table 7-9 Types and functions of the ELOM interfaces
Interface Interface Type Function
IN1/OUT1 to IN2/ LC Connected to the OADM board to

OUT2 receive/transmit the WDM signals
coming from the active channel.
TX1/RX1 to TX8/RX8 LC Transmits/receives service signals

to client-side equipment.
NOTE
When the ELOM board works in 1*AP8 general mode, the EVOA SFP modules can be used in
RX1/TX1 - RX8/TX8 ports.

Transport Platform
NOTE
The RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 interfaces on the client side support the optical interface SFP module,
electrical interface SFP module, and single-fiber bidirectional GE SFP module. The preceding SFP
modules can be used on the client side at the same time. The interfaces on the client side can access Any
optical signals, GE/FE electrical signals, or GE optical signals through the replacement of the SFP
modules.
Laser Level
The laser hazard level of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1 (The maximum output
optical power of each optical interface is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW)).
7.2.10 Valid Slots

The ELOM occupies one slot.
Valid Slots in the Subracks

In the OptiX OSN chassis, the valid slots of the board are SLOT 1 to SLOT 6. To ensure
board performance, it is recommended that the ELOM board be inserted into SLOT 1, SLOT
3, or SLOT 5.
NOTE
If the power supply board is an APIU board, at most two ELOM boards can be configured in a single
subrack at a high temperature (55C).
Display of Slots
7.2.11 ELOM Parameters on the NMS
Precautions
NOTICE
If you delete a logical ELOM board and configure it again on the NMS, the original
configuration of the board is deleted and the default configuration is restored.

Transport Platform
Working Mode
Field Value Description
Board l 1*AP8 general mode, 1*AP1 l 1*AP8 general mode: The

Working ODU2 mode, 1*AP1 ODUflex ELOM board supports
Mode mode ODU0, ODU1 and ODUflex
l Default: 1*AP8 general mode service encapsulation.
l 1*AP1 ODU2 mode: The
ELOM board supports ODU2
service encapsulation.
l 1*AP1 ODUflex mode: The
ELOM board supports
ODUflex service
encapsulation.
NOTE
Before changing the Board
Working Mode, ensure that no
cross-connection is configured on
the board. If a cross-connection is
configured on the board, delete the
cross-connection before you change
the working mode of the board.
NOTICE
The signal flow and functions of the
ELOM board vary according to the
working modes. Switching between
different working modes will
interrupt services that are running in
the current working mode.

Transport Platform
Port Working l ODU0 non-convergence mode This parameter is valid when

Mode (Any->ODU0), ODU1 Board Working Mode is set to
convergence mode (n*Any- 1*AP8 general mode.
>ODU1), ODU1 non-convergence l ODU0 non-convergence
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1), mode (Any->ODU0): client
ODUflex non-convergence mode services are mapped into
(Any->ODUflex), None (Not for different ODU0 services.
Ports)
l ODU1 convergence mode
l The default mode is None (not for (n*Any->ODU1): client
ports). services are mapped into one
ODU1 service.
l ODU1 non-convergence
mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1):
client services are mapped
into different ODU1 services.
l ODUflex non-convergence
mode (Any->ODUflex):
client services are mapped
into different ODUflex
services.
l None (Not for Ports):
reserved mode.
NOTE
Before changing the Port Working
Mode, ensure that no cross-
connection or protection is
configured on the board. If a cross-
connection or protection is
configured on the board, delete the
cross-connection or protection
before you change the working
mode of the port.
Basic Attributes
Optical - -
Interface/
Channel
Optical - An optical interface name

Interface contains a maximum of 64
Name characters. Any characters are
supported.

Transport Platform
Optical 0 to 20 Parameter provides an option to

Interface Default: 20 set the optical power attenuation
Attenuation of a board channel so that the
Ratio (dB) optical power of the output
signals at the transmit end is
within the preset range.
Max. 20 Parameter provides an option to

Attenuation Default: 20 query the maximum attenuation
Ratio (dB) rate allowed by the current
optical port of a board.
Min. 0 Parameter provides an option to

Attenuation Default: 0 query the minimum attenuation
Ratio (dB) rate allowed by the current
optical port of a board.
Channel Use Used, Unused Recommendations:

Status Default: Used l Set this parameter to Unused
when a channel that is not
used.
l Set this parameter to Used
when a channel that is used.
For example, if the ELOM board
works in 1*AP8 general mode,
set the status of the TX1/RX1
optical port to Used and the
status of the TX5/RX5 optical
port to Unused when only the
TX1/RX1 optical port receives
services.

Transport Platform
Service Type l None, FE, GE(TTT-GMP), The Service Type parameter sets
GE(GFP-T), 10GE_LAN, FC-100, the type of the service accessed
FC-200, FC-400, FICON 4G, at the optical interface on the
FC-800, FICON 8G, CPRI2, client side.
CPRI3, 10GE WAN, STM-64, In case of GE services, select a
OC-192, DVB-ASI, HD-SDI, 3G- proper service type according to
SDI, CPRI6, CPRI7, FC1200, the source of the GE services.
FICON 10G, STM-1, OC-3,
STM-4, OC-12, STM-16, OC-48, l When a board is used to
FICON, FICON EXPRESS, transmit synchronous
ESCON, OTU-1 Ethernet services, this
parameter must be set to
l Default: the default service type for GE(TTT-GMP).
all the optical ports is None.
l When a board is used to
transmit ordinary Ethernet
services, this parameter must
be set to GE(GFP-T).
NOTE
l After you configure a cross-
connection for the board, setting
the Service Type field fails if
the service type selected during
cross-connection configuration
is different from the value you
set for Service Type. In this
case, you need to delete the
cross-connection and set the
Service Type field again.
l The service type supported by
the ELOM board varies
according to the value of
Working Mode.
NOTE
l Before services are connected to
the board, configure the service
types on the client side through
the U2000 according to the
actually accessed services.
Otherwise, services cannot be
connected normally.

Transport Platform
Optical Non-Loopback, Inloop, Outloop Value description:

Interface Default: Non-Loopback l Non-Loopback: Indicates that
Loopback the equipment is normal.
Optical port loopback is not
required when the equipment
runs normally.
l Inloop: Loops the signals to
be output from the output
optical port back to the input
optical port of the same
equipment at the local end.
Inloop is used to test whether
the signal processing on the
board is normal.
l Outloop: Directly loops the
accessed signals of the local
equipment back to the
corresponding output optical
port before signal processing
on the premise that the signal
structure is not changed.
Outloop is used to test
connections between fiber
lines and connectors.
Recommendations:
Set this parameter to Non-
Loopback when a network works
normally. It can be set to Inloop
or Outloop to help locate a faulty
point in a test or a process of
removing a fault on a network.
However, it must be set to Non-
Loopback right after the test is
complete or the fault is removed.
When Automatic Disabling of
NE Function is set to the default
value Enabled, the loopback
setting is automatically canceled
after Auto Disabling Time
(default: 5 minutes) elapses.

Transport Platform
Port Mapping Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), Value description:

MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G) l Bit Transparent Mapping
Default: Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)
(11.1 G) Supports transparent bit (11.1
G) transport for 10GE LAN
signals. In this port mapping
mode, transmission of signals
is achieved by increasing the
OTU frame frequency. This
ensures the encoding gain and
correction capability of FEC.
In this mode, the bit rate is
11.1 Gbit/s, which is higher
than the standard bit rate of
OTU2 signals.
l MAC Transparent Mapping
(10.7 G)
In this port mapping mode,
10GE LAN signals are
encapsulated in the GFP-F
format and then are mapped
into standard OTU frames.
This mode supports
transparent transmission of
only client 10GE MAC
frames. In this mode, the
signals are encapsulated in
standard OTU2 frames and
the bit rate of the signals is
10.71 Gbit/s. In addition, the
FEC code pattern is
applicable to 10GE LAN
services in this mode.
Originally, the FEC code
pattern is intended for 10G
SDH services.
Recommendations:
This parameter is valid when
Service Type is set to 10GE
LAN.
l Select Bit Transparent
Mapping (11.1 G) when
there are OTU2e signals on
the WDM side.
l Select MAC Transparent
Mapping (10.7 G) when
there are OTU2 signals on the
WDM side.

Transport Platform

NOTE
l Port mapping of the two boards
that are interconnected with
each other must be consistent.
l When a board is used to
transparently transmit
synchronous Ethernet services,
this parameter must be set to Bit
Transparent Mapping (11.1
G).
Laser Status ON, OFF The default value is

Default: recommended. In practical
application, set this parameter
l WDM side: ON according to the scenario where
l Client side: OFF the board is used.
NOTICE
When NEs communicate with each
other through the electric
supervisory channel (ESC) of
ELOM, the NEs will be unreachable
if all the lasers at ports IN1/OUT1
and IN2/OUT2 on the WDM side of
the ELOM board are disabled.

Transport Platform
Automatic Enabled, Disabled Value description:

Laser Default: Enabled l Enabled:
Shutdown After the received signal is
lost, the laser is automatically
shut down and stops emitting
optical signals. This can
prolong the life span of the
laser and avoid injuries to
relevant personnel.
When there is no optical
signal input to the receive
optical port on the WDM side
of an OTU, the transmit
optical port on the client-side
shuts down the laser
automatically.
l Disabled: After the received
signal is lost, the laser is not
shut down automatically. The
parameter is usually set to
Disabled during
commissioning.
Recommendations:
l The default value is
recommended.
l On the WDM side, this
automatic laser shutdown
function is not supported and
therefore cannot be set or
query.

Transport Platform
ALS FW_Defect, BW_Client_R_LOS, Specifies auxiliary conditions for

Auxiliary BW_WDM_Defect, FW_OPUk_CSF triggering ALS.
Condition Value description:
l If a fault occurs on the client-
side receiver of the upstream
board or the WDM-side
receiver of the local board,
the laser on the client-side
transmitter of the local board
must be shut down. For this
situation, set this parameter to
FW_Defect.
l If a fault occurs on the client-
side receiver of the local
board, the laser on the client-
side transmitter of the local
board must be shut down. For
this situation, set this
parameter to
BW_Client_R_LOS.
l If a fault occurs on the
WDM-side receiver of the
local board, the laser on the
client-side transmitter of the
upstream board must be shut
down. For this situation, set
this parameter to
BW_WDM_Defect.
l If an OPUk_CSF alarm is
detected on the WDM-side
port of the local board, the
laser on the client-side
transmitter of the local board
must be shut down. For this
situation, set this parameter to
FW_OPUk_CSF.
Hold-Off 0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms. Specifies the hold-off time for
Time of Default: 0s automatically disabling lasers.
Automatic With ALS enabled, the hold-off
Laser time is a time period from the
Shutdown point when the system detects
service interruption to the point
when ALS automatically shuts
down the related lasers.

Transport Platform
Hold-off 0s to 2s, with a step of 100 ms. Specifies the hold-off time for
Time of Default: 0s automatically enabling lasers.
Automatic With ALS enabled, the hold-off
Laser Turn- time is a time period from the
On point when the system detects
service recovery to the point
when ALS automatically enables
the related lasers.
LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled The board supports the LPT

Default: Disabled function only when Service Type
is set to FE, GE(TTT-GMP),
GE(GFP-T), FC100, FC200,
FC400, FC800, FC1200 or
10GE LAN.
l The LPT function can work
only with optical line
protection, intra-board 1+1
protection or ODUk SNCP
protection and cannot work
with any other protection.
l Set this parameter to Enabled
when you want to enable the
LPT function; otherwise,
keep the default value for this
parameter.
GCC Independent Communication, Dual fed l Independent Communication:

Receive/ and selective receiving In this mode, both WDM-side
Transmit Default: Dual fed and selective optical ports are allocated
Mode receiving general communication
channels (GCC) and they
receive and transmit GCC
signals separately.
l Dual fed and selective
receiving: In this mode, only
the active WDM-side optical
port is allocated GCC
channels.
NOTICE
The settings of GCC Receive/
Transmit Mode for two
interconnected boards must be the
same; otherwise, the DCN
communication is unavailable. For
the boards that do not support GCC
Receive/Transmit Mode, the
parameter value is always set to
Dual fed and selective receiving.

Transport Platform
Advanced Attributes
Optical - -
Interface/
Channel
FEC Working Enabled, Disabled l Enabled is recommended.

State Default: Enabled l FEC Working State of the two
interconnected OTU boards
must be consistent.
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC This parameter is available only

Default: FEC when you set FEC Working State
to Enabled.
l The default value is
recommended. To improve
the error correction capability,
set this parameter to AFEC.
l FEC Mode of the two boards
that are interconnected on the
WDM side must be
consistent. Otherwise,
services are interrupted.
Band Type/ The parameter format is as follows: This parameter is for query only.
Wavelength band type/wavelength No./optical port
No./ wavelength/frequency, for example, C/
Wavelength(n 11/1471.00/208.170.
m)/ Default: /
Frequency(T
Hz)
Band Type C, CWDM This parameter is for query only.

Default: /
Planned The parameter format is as follows: This parameter is used to set the
Wavelength wavelength No./optical port wavelength and frequency only
No./ wavelength/frequency, for example, when the board uses TXFP
Wavelength(n 60/1552.52/193.100. modules on the WDM side.
m)/ Default: /
Frequency(T
Hz)
Planned Band C, CWDM This parameter is available only

Type Default: C when the board uses TXFP
modules and must be set to C.

Transport Platform
Max. Packet 1518-9600 This parameter is valid only

Length Default: 9600 when Service Type is set to
10GE LAN, and when Port
Mapping is set to MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).
It is recommended that you use
the default value.
SD Trigger SM_BIP8_SD, PM_BIP8_SD, B1_SD Value description:

Condition Default: None l SM_BIP8_SD: Optical
channel transport unit (OTU)
layer SM section signal
degrade alarm. This alarm
occurs when the number of
BIP8 bit errors of the SM
section in the OTU layer
crosses the signal degrade
threshold.
l PM_BIP8_SD: Optical
channel data unit (ODU)
layer PM section signal
degrade alarm. This alarm
occurs when the number of
BIP8 bit errors of the PM
section in the optical channel
data unit layer crosses the
degraded threshold.
l B1_SD: The alarm indicates
that signal degrade due to
excessive bit errors.
Recommendations:
This parameter is valid only
when the SD Trigger Flag is set
to Enable.
All the alarms can be set as the
SD switching conditions.

Transport Platform
ODU Assign random, Assign consecutive l In Assign consecutive mode,

Timeslot Default: Assign random the service mapping path can
Configuratio be as follows: ODU0 >
n Mode ODU1 > ODU2 or
ODU1>ODU2.
l In Assign random mode, the
service mapping path can be
as follows: ODU0>ODU2,
ODU1>ODU2, or
ODUflex>ODU2.
NOTICE
When the Cross-Connection
Configuration Mode is set to
Automatic, the ODU Timeslot
Configuration Mode must be set to
Assign random.
ODUflex 0 to 100 Specifies the tolerance of

Tolerance Default: / deviation between the actual
(ppm) client-side service rate and the
specified rate when the client-
side service type is ODUflex.
7.2.12 ELOM Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, mechanical specifications, and power
consumption.

Transport Platform
Board Name Optical Module on Electrical Module Optical Module on

Client Side on Client Side WDM Side
ELOM 2400ps/nm-fixed-APD- GE electrical 800ps/nm-tunable-

eSFP module PIN-TXFP
1600ps/nm-fixed-APD- FE electrical 800ps/nm-fixed-PIN-
eSFP module XFP
800ps/nm-fixed-PIN- 1600ps/nm-fixed-
eSFP APD-XFP
1400ps/nm-fixed-APD- 1600ps/nm-tunable-
eSFP APD-TXFP
1000BASE-SX-0.5km 10Gbit/s Single
1000BASE-LX-10km rate-0.3km
1000BASE-LX-40km 10Gbit/s Multi-
rate-10km
1000BASE-ZX-80km
10Gbit/s Multi-
1000BASE-BX-10km rate-40km
(SM1310)
10Gbit/s Multi-
1000BASE-BX-10km rate-80km
(SM1490)
1000BASE-BX-40km
(SM1310)
1000BASE-BX-40km
(SM1490)
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
100BASE-FX
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
10G BASE-SR
10G BASE-LR
FC400 Multi-mode
FC400 Single-mode
Multi-rate-10km-SFP+
CPRI option6-2km
CPRI option6-10km
3G-SDI
EVOA

Transport Platform

For service types supported by each type of module, see 19.2 Service Types Supported by
Modules.
NOTE
The ports on the WDM side support gray optical module.
Specifications for Optical Modules

NOTE
There is a margin between the input power low alarm threshold and the receiver sensitivity and a margin
between the input power high alarm threshold and the overload point. This ensures that the system can
report an input power low alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or an input
power high alarm before the actual input power reaches the overload point.
Table 7-10 Specifications of 800ps/nm-tunable-PIN-TXFP optical module
Item Unit Value
800ps/nm-tunable-PIN-TXFP
Optical Module Type - NRZ-40 channels tunable
Transmitter parameter specifications at point S
Maximum mean dBm 2

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -1

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 10
ratio
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00
Central frequency GHz 5

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.3

spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 35

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800
Eye pattern - -
Receiver parameter specifications at point R
Receiver type - PIN

Transport Platform
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength nm 1270 to 1600

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -16
Minimum receiver dBm 0

overload
Maximum reflectance dB -27
Table 7-11 Specifications of 800ps/nm-fixed-PIN-XFP and 1600ps/nm-fixed-APD-XFP

optical modules
Item Unit Value
800ps/nm-fixed- 1600ps/nm-fixed-
PIN-XFP APD-XFP
Optical Module Type - NRZ-40 channels NRZ-40 channels fixed

fixed
Maximum mean dBm 2 3

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -1 -1

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 10 8.2

ratio
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00 192.10 to 196.00a
Central frequency GHz 10 10

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.3 0.3

spectral width
Minimum side mode dB 35 30

suppression ratio
Dispersion tolerance ps/nm 800 1600
Eye pattern - Compliant with Telcordia GR-253/IEEE

802.3ae/G.959
Receiver type - PIN APD

Transport Platform
Item Unit Value
PIN-XFP APD-XFP
Operating wavelength nm 1200 to 1650 1270 to 1600

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -16 -24

-17
Minimum receiver dBm 0 -9

overload
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -27
a: The module support 193.2 THz, 193.3 THz, 193.4 THz, 193.5 THz, 193.6 THz, 195.6
THz, 195.7 THz, 195.8 THz, 195.9 THz and 196.0 THz in DWDM system, and support
1531 nm and 1551 nm in CWDM system.
Table 7-12 Specifications of 2400ps/nm-fixed-APD-eSFP optical module

Value
Item Unit 2400ps/nm-fixed-APD-eSFP
Line code format - NRZ
Target distance km 120
Maximum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum mean launched power dBm -1
Minimum extinction ratio dB 8.2
Central frequency deviation GHz 10
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 0.3
Minimum side mode suppression dB 30

ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.957-compliant
Receiver type - APD
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650

Transport Platform
Value
Minimum receiver overload dBm -8
Table 7-13 Specifications of 1600ps/nm-fixed-APD-eSFP and 800ps/nm-fixed-PIN-eSFP

optical modules
Value
1600ps/nm-fixed- 800ps/nm-fixed-PIN-
Item Unit APD-eSFP eSFP
Maximum wavelength count - 8 8
Line code format - NRZ NRZ
Target distance km 80 40
Maximum mean launched dBm 5 5

power
Minimum mean launched dBm 0 0

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 10 8.2
Central wavelength nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 1 1

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD PIN
Operating wavelength range nm 1200 to 1650 1200 to 1650
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9 -3

Transport Platform
Value

Value
Maximum wavelength count - 8
Minimum mean launched power dBm 3
Minimum extinction ratio dB 5
Central wavelength nm 1471 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm 1

ratio
Eye pattern mask - G.959.1-compliant
Receiver type - APD
Receiver sensitivity (with FEC) dBm -25.5

Transport Platform
Table 7-15 Specifications of 1600ps/nm-tunable-APD-TXFP optical module

Item Unit Value
1600ps/nm-tunable-APD-TXFP
Maximum mean dBm 3

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -1

launched power
ratio

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 1
spectral width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern - -
Receiver type - APD

range
Minimum receiver dBm -7

overload

Transport Platform
Table 7-16 Specifications of 10 Gbit/s single-rate and 10 Gbit/s Multi-rate optical modules
Item Unit Value
Supported optical - 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s

interface type Single- Multi-rate Multi-rate Multi-rate
rate -0.3 -10 km -40 km -80 km
km
Optical line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Light source type - Multi- SLM SLM SLM

mode
Target distance km 0.3 10 40 80
Transmitter characteristics at point S
Operating wavelength nm 840 to 860 1290 to 1530 to 1565 1530 to

range 1330 1565
Maximum mean dBm -1.3 -1 2 4

launched optical power
Minimum mean dBm -7.3 -6 -1 0

launched optical power
Minimum extinction dB 3 6 8.2 10

ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm NA NA NA NA
spectrum width
Minimum side-mode dB NA NA NA NA
suppression ratio
Eye pattern - Compliant with IEEE 802.3
Receiver characteristics at point R
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN APD
Operating wavelength nm 840 to 860 1290 to 1260 to 1605 1270 to

range 1330 1600
Receiver sensitivity dBm - -11a -14 -24

(multirate)
Receiver sensitivity dBm -7.5 - - -

(10GE LAN)
Minimum overload dBm - -1a -1 -7

point (multirate)
Minimum overload dBm -1 - - -

point (10GE LAN)
Maximum reflectance dB -12 -27 -27 -27

Transport Platform
Table 7-17 Specifications of 10G BASE-SR/10G BASE-LR optical modules

Item Unit Value
Supported optical - 10G BASE-SR 10G BASE-LR

interface type
Light source type - Multi-mode SLM
Target distance km 0.3 10

range
Maximum mean dBm -1 0.5

launched power
Minimum mean launched dBm -7.3 -8.2

power
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with Telcordia GR-253/IEEE

802.3ae/G.959
Receiver type - PIN PIN

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11.1 -14.4
Minimum receiver dBm -1 0.5

overload
Table 7-18 Specifications of 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-ZX optical modules

Value
1000BASE 1000BASE- 1000BASE- 1000BASE-

Item Unit -SX-0.5km LX-10km LX-40km ZX-80km
Line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ

format
Target km 0.5 10 40 80
distance

Transport Platform
Value

Operating nm 770 to 860 1270 to 1355 1270 to 1355 1500 to 1580

wavelength
range
Maximum dBm -2.5 -3 0 5

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z-compliant

mask
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN PIN

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -3 -3 -3
receiver
overload
Table 7-19 Specifications of 1000BASE-BX-10km optical module

Value
1000BASE-BX-10km 1000BASE-BX-10km
Item Unit (SM1310) (SM1490)

Transport Platform
Value
Operating wavelength nm Transmit: 1260 to 1360 Transmit: 1480 to 1500

range Receive: 1480 to 1500 Receive: 1260 to 1360
Maximum mean dBm -3 -3

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 6 6
ratio
Eye pattern mask - IEEE802.3ah-compliant
Receiver type - Transmit: FP Transmit: PIN

Receive: PIN Receive: FP

Minimum receiver dBm -3 -3

overload

Value


launched power

launched power

Transport Platform
Value
ratio
Receiver type - Transmit: DFB Transmit: PIN

Receive: PIN Receive: DFB


overload
Table 7-21 Specifications of I-16/S-16.1/L-16.2 optical modules

Value
Item Unit I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

format
Optical source - MLM SLM SLM SLM

type
Target distance km 2 15 40 80
Operating nm 1266 to 1260 to 1280 to 1500 to 1580

wavelength 1360 1360 1335
range
Maximum dBm -3 0 3 3
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -10 -5 -2 -2

mean launched
power
Minimum dB 8.5 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio

Transport Platform
Value
Item Unit I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Maximum -20 nm NA 1 1 1
dB spectral
width
Minimum side dB NA 30 30 30
mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - G.957-compliant

mask
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD APD

range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -3 0 -9 -9
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Table 7-22 Specifications of S-4.1/L-4.1/L-4.2 optical modules
Value
Item Unit S-4.1 L-4.1 L-4.2
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source type - MLM SLM SLM
Target distance km 15 40 80
Operating wavelength nm 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580

range
Maximum mean dBm -8 2 2

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -15 -3 -3

launched power

Transport Platform
Value
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 10.5 10.5

ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm NA 1 1
spectral width
Spectral Width-RMS nm NA NA NA
Minimum side mode dB NA 30 30

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -28 -28 -28
Minimum receiver dBm -8 -8 -8

overload
Maximum reflectance dB -27 -14 -27
Table 7-23 Specifications of 100BASE-FX/S-1.1/L-1.1/L-1.2 optical modules

Value
100BASE- S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Item Unit FX
Line code format - LED NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source - Multi-mode SLM SLM SLM

type
Operating nm 1270 to 1261 to 1263 to 1480 to

wavelength range 1380 1360 1360 1580
Maximum mean dBm -14 -8 0 0

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -19 -15 -5 -5

launched power

Transport Platform
Value
100BASE- S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Item Unit FX
Minimum dB 10 8.2 10.5 10.5

extinction ratio
Maximum -20 dB nm NA NA NA 1
spectral width
Spectral Width- nm 63 NA NA NA
RMS
Minimum side dB NA NA NA 30
mode suppression
ratio
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN

Receiver dBm -30 -28 -34 -34

sensitivity
Minimum receiver dBm -14 -8 -10 -10

overload
Maximum dB NA NA NA NA
reflectance
Table 7-24 Specifications of FC400 Multi-mode and FC400 Single-mode optical modules
Value
FC400 Multi- FC400 Single-

Item Unit mode mode
Line code format - 8B/10B 8B/10B
Target distance km 0.3 10
Maximum mean launched dBm -1.1 -1

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -9 -8.4

power

Transport Platform
Value
FC400 Multi- FC400 Single-

Item Unit mode mode
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm NA NA

width
Minimum side mode dB NA NA

suppression ratio
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0 0
Table 7-25 Specifications of Multi-Rate-10km-SFP+ (with CDR) optical module

Value
Item Unit Multi-Rate-10km-SFP+
Rate Gbit/s 9.95 to 11.1
Optical source type - SLM
Maximum mean launched power dBm -1
Maximum -20 dB spectral width nm NA
Minimum side mode suppression dB NA

ratio
Eye pattern mask - Compliant with IEEE802.3/G.

959.1/G.691

Transport Platform
Value
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11 (9.95Gbit/s, 10.7Gbit/s)

-14.4 (10.3Gbit/s, 10.5Gbit/s)
-13.4 (11.1Gbit/s)
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0.5

Value

ratio

959.1/G.691
Receiver type - PIN

Transport Platform
Table 7-27 Specifications of optical module for CPRI option6 services at client side
Value
CPRI CPRI
Item Unit option6-2km option6-10km
Light source type - SLM SLM

range
Maximum mean launched dBm 0.5 0.5

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -8.2 -8.4

power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 3.5 3.5

range
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11 -13.8
Minimum receiver dBm 0.5 0.5

overload
Table 7-28 Specifications of 3G-SDI optical module

Item Unit Value
3G-SDI
Light source type - SLM

range

Transport Platform
Item Unit Value
3G-SDI
Maximum mean launched dBm 0

power
Minimum mean launched dBm -7

power
Eye pattern mask Compliant with G.694.2
Receiver type - PIN

range

overload
Table 7-29 Specifications of EVOA optical module

Item Unit Value
Inherent insertion loss dB 1.5
Dynamic attenuation range dB 20
Adjustment accuracy dB 0.7 (attenuation 10 dB)

1.5 (attenuation > 10 dB)
Specifications for Client-Side Electrical Modules
Table 7-30 Specifications of FE electrical modules

Item Unit Value
Electrical interface rate Mbit/s 100
Transmission distance m 100
Transmission - 98%
bandwidth

Transport Platform
Item Unit Value
Maximum byte 9600

transmission packet
RJ-45 electrical - Compliant with the following norms:

interface specification l IEEE 802.3u and enterprise regulations
l 100Base-T interface test regulations
Table 7-31 Specifications of GE electrical modules

Item Unit Value
Electrical interface Mbit/s 1000

rate
Transmission m 100
distance
Transmission - 98%
bandwidth

interface l IEEE 802.3ab and enterprise regulations
specification
Mechanical Specifications
The mechanical specifications of the board are as follows:
l Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth): 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 208.7 mm (0.8 in. x 7.6
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.77 kg (1.69 lb.)
Power Consumption
Board Typical Power Maximum Power
Consumption (W) Consumptiona (W)
ELOM 27.1 35.1
a: The maximum power consumption is the power consumed by the board when it works
normally under the highest ambient temperature.
NOTE
The ELOM board can work at room temperature below 50C (122F) at a long term or below 55C
(131F) at a short term. A short term refers to a maximum of 72 consecutive hours or fewer than 15 days
in a year in total.

Transport Platform
7.3 LDX
LDX: 2 x 10 Gbit/s Wavelength Conversion Board

The available hardware version for the LDX is TNF1.
Version
Table 7-32 describes the version mapping of the LDX board.
Table 7-32 Version description of the LDX

Item Description

The TNF2LDX board can be created as the F1LDX(STND) board on the NMS and can
directly substitute for the TNF1LDX board without any software upgrade. After the
substitution, the TNF2LDX board can function only as the substituted TNF1LDX board. The
TNF2LDX board cannot be created as the F2LDX(STND) board on the NMS.
7.3.2 Application
The LDX board implements the transmission of two channels of 10 Gbit/s optical signals.
Application Scenario: Implements the Transparent Transmission of Two

Channels of 10 Gbit/s Optical Signals
The LDX is mainly used to map two channels of 10 Gbit/s service signals into OTU2 or
OTU2e signals and convert the converged OTU2 signals into signals borne on a standard
DWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-T G.694.1 or signals borne on a standard CWDM
wavelength compliant with ITU-T G. 694.2. At the same time, the board completes the
reverse process.
For the application of the board to implement the transparent transmission of two channels of
optical signals, see Figure 7-19
Figure 7-19 Application of the LDX board (access two channels of optical signals)
OUT1 OUT1
10GE LAN TX1 OADM OADM
TX1
10GE LAN
10GE WAN RX1 IN1 IN1 RX1
10GE WAN
STM-64/OC-192 STM-64/OC-192
FC800 LDX G.694.1/G.694.2 LDX FC800
FICON 8G FICON 8G
FC1200 TX2 OUT3 OUT3 TX2 FC1200
FICON 10G RX2
IN3
OADM OADM IN3 RX2 FICON 10G

Transport Platform
NOTE
The board supports dual-fed selective receiving on the WDM side. The two services received and transmitted
by the RX1/TX1 and RX2/TX2 ports are independent from each other. The RX1/TX1 port corresponds to the
OUT1/IN1 and OUT2/IN2 ports, and the RX2/TX2 port corresponds to the OUT3/IN3 and OUT4/IN4 ports.
The OUT1/IN1 and OUT3/IN3 ports function as the working channels and the OUT2/IN2 and OUT4/IN4
ports function as the protection channels.

The main functions and features supported by the LDX are wavelength conversion, OTN
ports, and ESC.
For detailed information about the functions and features, see Table 7-33.
Table 7-33 LDX Functions and Features

Functi Description
ons
and
Featur
es
Basic 2 x 10Gbit/s service signals<-> 2 x OTU2/OTU2e

functio
n
Service l Transparent transmission services:

s type 10GE LAN: Ethernet services, the rate is 10.31 Gbit/s.
NOTE
The 10GE LAN services can be mapped in two modes: Bit Transparent Mapping
(11.1 G) and MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G).
10GE WAN: Ethernet services, the rate is 9.95 Gbit/s.
STM-64: SDH services, the rate is 9.95 Gbit/s.
OC-192: SONET services, the rate is 9.95 Gbit/s.
FC800: Fiber channel services with the rate being 8.5 Gbit/s.
FICON 8G: Fiber channel services with the rate being 8.5 Gbit/s.
FC1200: Fiber channel services with the rate being 10.51 Gbit/s.
FICON 10G: Fiber channel services with the rate being 10.51 Gbit/s.
OTU2: OTN services, the rate is 10.71 Gbit/s.
OTU2e: OTN services, the rate is 11.1 Gbit/s.
OTN l Provides the OTU2 and OTU2e interfaces on the WDM side.
functio l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to the
n ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU2.
l Supports SM functions for OTU2.

Transport Platform
Functi Description
ons
and
Featur
es
Tunabl Supports the tunable wavelength optical module. Equipped with this module, the
e board can tune the optical signal output on the WDM side within the range of 40
wavele wavelengths in C-band with the channel spacing of 100 GHz.
ngth
functio
n
Alarms Monitors B1, SM_BIP8 and PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.
and Monitors performance parameters and alarm signals, including the monitoring of
perform laser bias current, laser working temperature and optical power on the WDM
ance side.
events
monitor Monitors the RMON performance of 10GE LAN services.
ing
Non- Supports non-intrusive monitoring function at the PM layer.

intrusiv
e
monitor
ing
functio
n
FEC l Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.709.
Mode l Supports AFEC-2 that complies with ITU-T G.975.1.
NOTE
Boards that use different FEC modes cannot interconnect with each other.
Service Supports encapsulation of 10GE LAN services in GFP-F or BMP mode (GFP-F
mappin is the abbreviated form of Generic Framing Procedure - Frame Mapped and
g mode BMP of Bit-synchronous Mapping Procedure).
Synchr When receiving 10GE LAN services on the client side, and the services are
onous mapped in Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G), the board supports the transparent
Etherne transmission of synchronous Ethernet services, the quality of the clock signals of
t the board meets the requirements of G.8261.
services
Protecti l Supports client 1+1 protection

on l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection
scheme
s l Supports ODUk SNCP (k=2) protection
Loopba l Supports WDM side inloop

ck l Supports WDM side outloop

Transport Platform
Functi Description
ons
and
Featur
es
functio OTU board shuts down the laser of the client side to avoid personal injuries.
n NOTE
ESC Supported
functio
n
Cross- Supports the intra-board ODU2 cross-connect function.

connect
functio
n
functio 10GE LAN services.
n

test NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type is
STM-64/OTU2/OTU2e/OC-192.
WDM Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications and ITU-T G.694.2-

specific compliant CWDM specifications.
ations
Protoco Protocols or standards ITU-T G.707

l or (non-performance ITU-T G.782
standar monitoring) with
d which transparently ITU-T G.783
complia transmitted services GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network
nce comply (SONET) Transport Systems: Common Generic
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL
INTERFACES (FC-PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-
LS)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND
SIGNALING-2 (FC-FS-2)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-
BB-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-
SW-3)
IEEE 802.3ae

Transport Platform
Functi Description
ons
and
Featur
es
Protocols or standards ITU-T G.805

(performance ITU-T G.806
monitoring) for
processing services ITU-T G.709
ITU-T G.872
ITU-T G.7710
ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LDX board consists of the client-side optical module, WDM-side optical module, service
processing module, the clock module, communication module, and power supply module.
Signal Flow of Transparent Transmission of Two Channels of 10 Gbit/s Optical

Signals
Figure 7-20 is the functional block diagram of the LDX that implement the transparent
transmission of two channels of 10 Gbit/s optical signals.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-20 Functional block diagram of the LDX (transparent transmission of two channels
of 10 Gbit/s optical signals)
Clock module
Client side WDM side
OUT1
SDH En/de-
RX1 capsulation and OUT2
O/E mapping module E/O
RX2 OUT3
10GE LAN OTN
OUT4
En/de-capsulation processin
and mapping module g module IN1
TX1
E/O O/E IN2
TX2 FC En/de-
IN3
capsulation and
Client-side mapping module WDM-side IN4
optical optical
module Service processing module module
Power supply
module
Required
Fuse
voltage
Backplane
DC power supply
from a chassis UXC
In the signal flow of the LDX board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LDX to the WDM side
of the LDX, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
l In the transmit direction
The client-side optical module receives two channels of the optical signals from client
equipment through the RX1/RX2 optical port, and performs the O/E conversion.
After the O/E conversion, the electrical signals are sent to the service processing module.
Different types of signals are sent to different encapsulation and mapping modules for
encapsulation and mapping. In the end, operations such as the OTN framing are
performed. Then, the module outputs four channels of OTU2/OTU2e electrical signals.
The OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing
the E/O conversion, the module sends out the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant or ITU-T G.
694.2-compliant at WDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2e optical signals through
the OUT1/OUT2/OUT3/OUT4 optical port.
l In the receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives four channels of the ITU-T G.694.1-compliant
or ITU-T G.694.2-compliant at WDM standard wavelengths OTU2/OTU2e optical
signals from the WDM side through the IN optical port. Then, the module performs the
O/E conversion.

Transport Platform
After the O/E conversion, the OTU2/OTU2e signals are sent to the service processing
module. The module performs operations such as OTU2/OTU2e in frame, and
decapsulation processing. Then, the module outputs two channels of STM-64/10GE
LAN/10GE WAN/FC800/FICON 8G/FC1200/FICON 10G/OTU2/OTU2e electrical
signal.
The client-side optical module performs the E/O conversion of the electrical signal, and
then outputs client-side optical signals through the TX1/TX2 optical port.
NOTE
The RX1/TX1 port on the client side corresponds to the OUT1/IN1 and OUT2/IN2 ports on the WDM side;
The RX2/TX2 port on the client side corresponds to the OUT3/IN3 and OUT4/IN4 ports on the WDM side.
The OUT1/IN1 and OUT2/IN2 ports and the OUT3/IN3 and OUT4/IN4 ports can be used to implement dual-
fed selective receiving of an OTU2/OTU2e signal.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE
WAN/FC800/FICON 8G/FC1200/FICON 10G/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical
signals to STM-64/10GE LAN/10GE WAN/FC800/FICON 8G/FC1200/FICON
10G/OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical port.
transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs the O/E conversion of OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs the E/O conversion from the internal electrical
signals to OTU2/OTU2e optical signals.
l Service processing module
The module consists of the SDH en/de-capsulation and mapping module, 10GE LAN
en/de-capsulation and mapping module, FC en/de-capsulation and mapping module, and
OTN processing module.
SDH en/de-capsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates two channels of SDH/10GE WAN signals and maps the signals into
the OTU2 payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has the
SDH/10GE WAN performance monitoring function.
10GE LAN en/de-capsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates two channels of 10GE LAN signals and maps the signals into the
OTU2/OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the reverse process and has
the 10GE LAN performance monitoring function.
FC en/de-capsulation and mapping module
Encapsulates two channels of FC800/FICON 8G signals and maps the signals into
the OTU2 payload area. Encapsulates two channels of FC1200/FICON 10G signals

Transport Platform
and maps the signals into the OTU2e payload area. The module also performs the
reverse process and has the FC800/FICON 8G/FC1200/FICON 10G performance
monitoring function.
OTN processing module
Implements the framing of OTU2/OTU2e signals, processes the overheads of the
OTU2/OTU2e signals, and performs the encoding and decoding.
l Clock module
Provides a clock for the board and implements clock transparent transmission.
7.3.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and ports on the LDX front panel.

Figure 7-21 shows the front panel of the LDX.
Figure 7-21 Front panel of the LDX

STAT TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 IN1
LDX
SRV IN3
IN2
IN4
OUT1 IN1 OUT3 IN3 OUT2 IN2 OUT4 IN4
Indicators

Ports
l When the LDX board implements to access two channels of optical signals, Table 7-34
lists the type and function of each port.

Transport Platform
Table 7-34 Types and functions of the LDX ports (access two channels of optical
signals)
Port Port Type Function Remarks
TX1/RX1 LC Transmits/Receives The TX1/RX1

service signals of the port corresponds
client side. to the IN1/OUT1
and IN2/OUT2
IN1/OUT1 LC Receives/Transmits ports, which can
the signal over the be used to
working channel of implement dual-
the optical add/drop fed selective
multiplexer board on receiving of a
WDM equipment. WDM-side signal.
IN2/OUT2 LC Receives/Transmits
the signal over the
protection channel of
the optical add/drop
multiplexer board on
WDM equipment.
TX2/RX2 LC Transmits/Receives The TX2/RX2

service signals of the port corresponds
client side. to the IN3/OUT3
and IN4/OUT4
IN3/OUT3 LC Receives/Transmits ports, which can
the signal over the be used to
working channel of implement dual-
the optical add/drop fed selective
multiplexer board on receiving of a
WDM equipment. WDM-side signal.
IN4/OUT4 LC Receives/Transmits
the signal over the
protection channel of
the optical add/drop
multiplexer board on
WDM equipment.
Laser Level
7.3.6 Valid Slots

The LDX occupies one slot.

Transport Platform

In the OptiX OSN chassis, the valid slots of the board are SLOT 1 to SLOT 6. To ensure
board performance, it is recommended that the LDX board be inserted into SLOT 1, SLOT 3
or SLOT 5.
Display of Slots
7.3.7 Physical and Logical Ports

This section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the configuration rules
for this board on the NMS.
Display of Ports
Table 7-35 lists the sequence number displayed on the U2000 of the port on the LDX board
front panel.
Table 7-35 Display of the LDX ports

Ports on the Front Panel Port Displayed on the U2000
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
IN3/OUT3 3
IN4/OUT4 4
RX1/TX1 5
RX2/TX2 6
NOTE
Port model of LDX board

Figure 7-22 shows the port model of the LDX board.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-22 Port model of the LDX board
1
ODU2/ OTU2/
ODU2e OTU2e 1(IN1/OUT1)
5(RX1/TX1) ODU2/
ODU2e 2
ODU2/ OTU2/
3
ODU2/ OTU2/
6(RX2/TX2) ODU2/
4
ODU2e
ODU2/ OTU2/
: Service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

: Protection service cross-connection, which needs to be configured on the NMS

: WDM-side services
l Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported on
channel 1 of client-side optical ports 5(RX1/TX1) and 6(RX2/TX2).
performance events are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1, 2, 3, and 4
(IN1/OUT1, IN2/OUT2, IN3/OUT3, and IN4/OUT4).
l The WDM side supports intra-board 1+1 protection and ODUk SNCP (k = 2) protection.
However, the two types of protection cannot be configured simultaneously. Before the
intra-board 1+1 protection is configured, Cross-Connection Configuration Mode must
be set to Automatic. Then the system automatically configures the following cross-
connections: bidirectional cross-connections from port 5(RX1/TX1) to optical port 1 and
unidirectional cross-connections from port 5(RX1/TX1) to optical port 2; bidirectional
cross-connections from port 6(RX2/TX2) to optical port 3 and unidirectional cross-
connections from port 6(RX2/TX2) to optical port 4. When ODUk SNCP (k = 2)
protection is configured, Cross-Connection Configuration Mode must be set to
Manual.
7.3.8 LDX Parameters on the NMS
Basic Attributes
Optical - -
Interface/
Channel

Transport Platform
Optical - An optical interface name contains a maximum of

Interface 64 characters. Any characters are supported.
Name
Channel Use Used, Unused Recommendations:

Status Default: Used l Set this parameter to Unused when a channel
that is not used.
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel that
is used.
NOTE
When it is set to Unused, no alarm on the optical port is
reported.
Service Type 10GE LAN, 10GE Select a proper value according to the received
WAN, FC-1200, services.
FICON 10G, NOTE
FC-800, FICON 8G, l Before services are connected to the board,
STM-64, OC-192, configure the service types on the client side through
OTU2, OTU2e the U2000 according to the actually received
Default: OTU2 services. Otherwise, services cannot be connected
normally.
Optical Non-Loopback, Value description:

Interface Inloop, Outloop l Non-Loopback: Indicates that the equipment is
Loopback Default: Non- normal. Optical port loopback is not required
Loopback when the equipment runs normally.
l Inloop: Loops the signals to be output from the
output optical port back to the input optical
port of the same equipment at the local end.
Inloop is used to test whether the signal
processing on the board is normal.
l Outloop: Directly loops the accessed signals of
the local equipment back to the corresponding
output optical port before signal processing on
the premise that the signal structure is not
changed. Outloop is used to test connections
between fiber lines and connectors.
Recommendations:
Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a
network works normally. It can be set to Inloop or
Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test or a
process of removing a fault on a network.
However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right
after the test is complete or the fault is removed.
When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is set
to the default value Enabled, the loopback setting
is automatically canceled after Auto Disabling
Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

Transport Platform
Port Mapping Bit Transparent This parameter is valid when Service Type is set
Mapping (11.1 G), to 10GE LAN.
MAC Transparent l When a board is used to transparently transmit
Mapping (10.7 G) synchronous Ethernet services, this parameter
Default: Bit must be set to Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1
Transparent Mapping G).
(11.1 G) l Select Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G)
when there are OTU2e signals on the WDM
side.
l Select MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G)
when there are OTU2 signals on the WDM
side.
NOTE
Bit Transparent Mapping (11.1 G): Supports transparent
bit (11.1 G) transport for 10GE LAN signals. In this port
mapping mode, transmission of signals is achieved by
increasing the OTU frame frequency. This ensures the
encoding gain and correction capability of FEC. In this
mode, the bit rate is 11.1 Gbit/s, which is higher than the
standard bit rate of OTU2 signals.
MAC Transparent Mapping (10.7 G): In this port
mapping mode, 10GE LAN signals are encapsulated in
the GFP-F format and then are mapped into standard
OTU frames. This mode supports transparent
transmission of only client 10GE MAC frames. In this
mode, the signals are encapsulated in standard OTU2
frames and the bit rate of the signals is 10.71 Gbit/s. In
addition, the FEC/AFEC code pattern is applicable to
10GE LAN services in this mode. Originally, the FEC
code pattern is intended for 10G SDH services.
NOTE
l Port mapping of the two boards that are
interconnected with each other must be consistent.
Laser Status ON, OFF The default value is recommended. In practical

Default: application, set this parameter according to the
scenario where the board is used.
l WDM side: ON
NOTE
l Client side: OFF In the case of the OTUs configured with client-side 1+1
protection, whether to enable or disable the laser on the
board client side is controlled by the NE software
automatically. No manual setting is required.
NOTICE
If the communication between NEs is achieved through
only the ESC provided by the LDX board, the following
situations occur when neither a standby channel is
available nor protection is configured:
l When the LDX board is used for transparently
transmitting the 10 Gbit/s optical signals, the NE
becomes unreachable after the lasers at the IN and
OUT optical ports on the LDX board are disabled.

Transport Platform
Automatic Enabled, Disabled Value description:

Laser Default: Enabled for l Enabled:
Shutdown client-side optical After the received signal is lost, the laser is
ports. automatically shut down and stops emitting
optical signals. This can prolong the life span
of the laser and avoid injuries to relevant
personnel.
When there is no optical signal input to the
receive optical port on the WDM side of an
OTU, the transmit optical port on the client-
side shuts down the laser automatically.
l Disabled: After the received signal is lost, the
laser is not shut down automatically. The
parameter is usually set to Disabled during
commissioning.
Recommendations:
l The default value is recommended.
l On the WDM side, this automatic laser
shutdown function is not supported and
therefore cannot be set or query.
ALS FW_Defect, Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering ALS.

Auxiliary BW_Client_R_LOS, l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of
Condition BW_WDM_Defect the upstream board or the WDM-side receiver
Default: FW_Defect of the local board, the laser on the client-side
transmitter of the local board must be shut
down. For this situation, set this parameter to
FW_Defect.
l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver of
the local board, the laser on the client-side
transmitter of the local board must be shut
BW_Client_R_LOS.
l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver of
the local board, the laser on the client-side
transmitter of the upstream board must be shut
BW_WDM_Defect.
Hold-Off 0s to 2s, with a step Specifies the hold-off time for automatically
Time of of 100 ms. disabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off
Automatic Default: 0s time is a time period from the point when the
Laser system detects service interruption to the point
Shutdown when ALS automatically shuts down the related
lasers.

Transport Platform
Hold-off 0s to 2s, with a step Specifies the hold-off time for automatically
Time of of 100 ms. enabling lasers. With ALS enabled, the hold-off
Automatic Default: 0s time is a time period from the point when the
Laser Turn- system detects service recovery to the point when
On ALS automatically enables the related lasers.
LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled This parameter is valid when Service Type is set
Default: Disabled to 10GE LAN.
l The LPT function can work only with optical
line protection, intra-board 1+1 protection or
ODUk SNCP protection and cannot work with
any other protection.
l Set this parameter to Enabled when you want
to enable the LPT function; otherwise, keep the
default value for this parameter.
GCC Dual fed and l Independent Communication: In this mode,

Receive/ selective receiving, both WDM-side optical ports are allocated
Transmit Independent general communication channels (GCC) and
Mode Communication they receive and transmit GCC signals
Default: Dual fed and separately.
selective receiving l Dual fed and selective receiving: In this mode,
only the active WDM-side optical port is
allocated GCC channels.
NOTICE
The settings of GCC Receive/Transmit Mode for two
interconnected boards must be the same; otherwise, the
DCN communication is unavailable. For the boards that
do not support GCC Receive/Transmit Mode, the
parameter value is always set to Dual fed and selective
receiving.
NOTE
If intra-board 1+1 protection or SNCP is configured for
two interconnected boards and electrical regeneration
sites are deployed between the boards, GCC Receive/
Transmit Mode must be set to Independent
Communication for the interconnected boards.
Advanced Attributes
Optical - An optical interface name contains a maximum of

Interface 64 characters. Any characters are supported.
Name
Optical - -
Interface/
Channel

Transport Platform

State Default: Enabled l FEC Working State of the two interconnected
OTU boards must be consistent.
FEC Mode FEC, AFEC This parameter is available only when you set
Default: FEC FEC Working State to Enabled.
l The default value is recommended. To improve
the error correction capability, set this
parameter to AFEC.
l FEC Mode of the two boards that are
interconnected on the WDM side must be
consistent. Otherwise, services are interrupted.
NOTE
The actual value is AFEC-2, but AFEC is displayed on
the NMS.
Users only can set the FEC mode for WDM-side ports.
Band Type/ The parameter format This parameter is for query only.
Wavelength is as follows: band
No./ type/wavelength No./
Wavelength(n optical port
m)/ wavelength/
Frequency(T frequency, for
Hz) example, C/
11/1471.00/208.170.
Default: /

Default: /
Planned The parameter format This parameter is used to set the wavelength and
Wavelength is as follows: frequency only when the board uses TXFP
No./ wavelength No./ modules on the WDM side.
Wavelength(n optical port
m)/ wavelength/
Frequency(T frequency, for
Hz) example,
60/1552.52/193.100.
Default: /
Planned Band C, CWDM This parameter is available only when the board
Type Default: C uses TXFP modules and must be set to C.
Max. Packet 1518-9600 This parameter is valid when Service Type is set
Length Default: 9600 to 10GE LAN and Port Mapping is set to MAC
Transparent Mapping (10.7 G). The default
value is recommended.

Transport Platform
SD Trigger SM_BIP8_SD, Value description:

Condition PM_BIP8_SD, l SM_BIP8_SD: Optical channel transport unit
B1_SD (OTU) layer SM section signal degrade alarm.
Default: None This alarm occurs when the number of BIP8
bit errors of the SM section in the OTU layer
crosses the signal degrade threshold.
l PM_BIP8_SD: Optical channel data unit
(ODU) layer PM section signal degrade alarm.
This alarm occurs when the number of BIP8
bit errors of the PM section in the optical
channel data unit layer crosses the degraded
threshold.
l B1_SD: The alarm indicates that signal
degrade due to excessive bit errors.
Recommendations:
This parameter is valid only when the SD Trigger
Flag is set to Enable.
All the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.
7.3.9 LDX Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, mechanical specifications and power
consumption.
Board Name Optical Module on Electrical Optical Module

Client Side Module on on WDM Side
Client Side
LDX Multi-rate-10km-SFP+ N/A 800ps/nm-tunable-

Multi-rate-40km-SFP+ PIN-TXFP
10G BASE-SR 800ps/nm-fixed-
PIN-XFP
10G BASE-LR
1600ps/nm-fixed-
APD-XFP
10Gbit/s Multi-
rate-10km
10Gbit/s Multi-
rate-40km
10Gbit/s Multi-
rate-80km
Modules.

Transport Platform
NOTE
The ports on the WDM side support grey optical module.

NOTE
A margin of the lower threshold of input optical power compared with the receiver sensitivity of the
board and a margin of the upper threshold of output optical power compared with the overload point of
the board are reserved on the U2000 for precaution.
Table 7-36 Specifications of 800ps/nm-tunable-PIN-TXFP optical module

Item Unit Value
Maximum mean dBm 2

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -1

launched power
ratio

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.3

spectral width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern - -
Receiver type - PIN

range

overload

Transport Platform
Table 7-37 Specifications of 800ps/nm-fixed-PIN-XFP and 1600ps/nm-fixed-APD-XFP

optical modules
Item Unit Value
PIN-XFP APD-XFP
Optical Module Type - NRZ-40 channels NRZ-40 channels fixed

fixed

launched power

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 10 8.2

ratio
Central frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00 192.10 to 196.00a
Central frequency GHz 10 10

deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 0.3 0.3

spectral width

suppression ratio
Eye pattern - Compliant with Telcordia GR-253/IEEE

802.3ae/G.959
Receiver type - PIN APD

range

-17
Minimum receiver dBm 0 -9

overload
a: The module support 193.2 THz, 193.3 THz, 193.4 THz, 193.5 THz, 193.6 THz, 195.6
THz, 195.7 THz, 195.8 THz, 195.9 THz and 196.0 THz in DWDM system, and support
1531 nm and 1551 nm in CWDM system.

Transport Platform
Table 7-38 Specifications of 10 Gbit/s Multi-rate optical modules

Item Unit Value
Supported optical interface - 10 Gbit/s 10 Gbit/s Multi- 10 Gbit/s

type Multi-rate rate -40 km Multi-rate
-10 km -80 km
Optical line code - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Light source type - SLM SLM SLM
Transmitter characteristics at point S
Operating wavelength nm 1290 to 1530 to 1565 1530 to 1565

range 1330
Maximum mean launched dBm -1 2 4

optical power
Minimum mean launched dBm -6 -1 0

optical power
Minimum extinction ratio dB 6 8.2 10
Maximum -20 dB spectrum nm NA NA NA

width
Minimum side-mode dB NA NA NA
suppression ratio
Eye pattern - Compliant with IEEE 802.3
Receiver characteristics at point R
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD
Operating wavelength nm 1290 to 1260 to 1605 1270 to 1600

range 1330
Minimum overload point dBm -1 -1 -7
NOTE
The preceding optical modules can be used on the WDM side grey optical modules.

Transport Platform

Value
Maximum mean launched power dBm -1

ratio

959.1/G.691
Receiver type - PIN
Receiver sensitivity dBm -11 (9.95Gbit/s, 10.7Gbit/s)

-14.4 (10.3Gbit/s, 10.5Gbit/s)
-13.4 (11.1Gbit/s)
Minimum receiver overload dBm 0.5

Value

Transport Platform
Value

ratio

959.1/G.691
Receiver type - PIN
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight:
F1LDX: 1 kg (2.2 lb.)
Power Consumption
TNF1LDX 31 32
TNF2LDX 29.5 32.5

Transport Platform
NOTE
The LDX board can work at room temperature below 45C (113F) at a long term or below 55C
(131F) at a short term. A short term refers to a maximum of 72 consecutive hours or fewer than 15 days
in a year in total.
7.4 LQM2
LQM2: Double 4 x Multi-rate Ports Wavelength Conversion Board

The available hardware version for the LQM2 is TNF2.
Version
Table 7-41 describes the version mapping of the LQM2 board.
Table 7-41 Version description of the LQM2 board

Item Description
Board hardware TNF2: The mapping version of the equipment is V100R003C03

version or later.
Logical board name On the NMS, the logical board name of the LQM2 board is
F2LQM2(STND).
7.4.2 Application
The LQM2 board can be mainly used in convergence of Any services.
Application Scenario 1: Implements the Convergence of Any Services

The LQM2 board mainly used to converge a maximum of eight channels of Any (at a rate of
125 Mbit/s to 2.5 Gbit/s) signals to one channel or two channels of OTU1 signals and convert
the converged OTU1 signals into signals borne on a standard DWDM wavelength compliant
with ITU-T G.694.1 or signals borne on a standard CWDM wavelength compliant with ITU-
T G. 694.2. At the same time, the board completes the reverse process.
Figure 7-23 Application 1: convergence of Any services implemented by the LQM2 board
G.694.1/G.694.2
RX1 OUT1 IN1 TX1

OADM OADM
RX4 TX4
TX1 IN1 OUT1 RX1
TX4 OADM OADM
RX4
Any service LQM2 Any service
LQM2
signals RX5 OUT2 IN2 TX5 signals
OADM OADM TX8
RX8
TX5 IN2 OUT2 RX5
TX8 OADM OADM
RX8

Transport Platform
G.694.1/G.694.2 IN1
RX1 OUT1
OADM IN2 TX1
RX2 OUT2 OADM
TX2
TX1 IN1 OUT1
RX1
TX2 IN2 OADM OADM OUT2 RX2
Any service LQM2 OUT3 Any service
IN3 LQM2
signals RX5 signals
OADM TX5
RX6 OUT4 OADM IN4
TX6
TX5 IN3 OUT3 RX5
G.694.1/G.694.2 IN1
RX1 OUT1
OADM IN2 TX1
RX3 OUT2 OADM
TX3
TX1 IN1 OUT1
RX1
Any service LQM2 OUT3 Any service
IN3 LQM2
signals RX4 TX4 signals
OUT4 OADM OADM IN4 TX6
RX6
TX4 IN3 OUT3 RX4
The LQM2 board can work in four different modes: 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode, 2 x AP4 ODU1
mode, 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode, 2 x AP3 ODU1 mode.
l When the LQM2 board adopts 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode, see Figure 7-23.
Converges eight channels of Any signals to a channel of OTU1 optical signals.
Supports ODU1-level mapping.
WDM-side optical ports provide the dual fed and selective receiving function.
NOTE
l The overall bandwidth of the services received at 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-1 to

201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-8 should not exceed 2.5 Gbit/s.
l WDM-side optical ports provide the dual fed and selective receiving function.
l The client-side ports RX2/TX2-RX8/TX8 support EVOA SFP modules.
Functions as two single fed and single receiving LQM boards, each of the RX1/
TX1RX4/TX4 and RX5/TX5RX8/TX8 port groups supports mutual conversion
between 4 channels of Any services and one channel of OTU1 optical signal.

Transport Platform
The client-side ports (TX1/RX1-TX4/RX4) work with the WDM-side port IN1/
OUT1; the client-side ports (TX5/RX5-TX8/RX8) work with the WDM-side port
(IN2/OUT2). Both the two port groups support single fed and single receiving.
NOTE

l The client-side ports TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, TX4/RX4, TX6/RX6, TX7/RX7, and
TX8/RX8 support EVOA SFP modules.
Each of the RX1/TX1RX2/TX2 and RX5/TX5RX6/TX6 port groups supports
mutual conversion between 2 channels of Any services and two channels of OTU1
optical signals.
In this scenario, client-side services can only be transmitted through ports TX1/
RX1, TX2/RX2, TX5/RX5, TX6/RX6.
The client-side ports (TX1/RX1-TX2/RX2) work with the WDM-side ports (IN1/
OUT1 and IN2/OUT2); the client-side ports (TX5/RX5-TX6/RX6) work with the
WDM-side ports (IN3/OUT3 and IN4/OUT4). Both the two port groups support
dual fed and selective receiving.
NOTE
l Both the two channels of WDM-side signals support dual fed and selective receiving.
l The client-side ports RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 support EVOA SFP modules.
Each of the RX1/TX1RX3/TX3 and RX4/TX4RX6/TX6 port groups supports
mutual conversion between 3 channels of Any services and two channels of OTU1
optical signals.
In this scenario, client-side services can only be transmitted through ports TX1/
RX1-TX6/RX6.
The client-side ports (TX1/RX1-TX3/RX3) work with the WDM-side ports (IN1/
OUT1 and IN2/OUT2), the client-side ports (TX4/RX4-TX6/RX6) work with the
WDM-side ports (IN3/OUT3 and IN4/OUT4). Both the two port groups support
dual fed and selective receiving.
NOTE
l The overall bandwidth of the services received at 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)

should not exceed 2.5 Gbit/s.
l The overall bandwidth of the services received at 202(ConvGroup2/ConvGroup2)
should not exceed 2.5 Gbit/s.
l Both the two channels of WDM-side signals support dual fed and selective receiving.
l The client-side ports TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, TX4/RX4, TX6/RX6, TX7/RX7, and
TX8/RX8 support EVOA SFP modules.
Background Information
The LQM2 board has two service processing chips, each of which provides 16 timeslots for
receiving services. Different types of services require different number of timeslots. The total

Transport Platform
number of timeslots for the services received at the LQM2 board must be smaller than the
maximum number of timeslots that the service processing chip can provide.
l When the LQM2 works in 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode, the total number of timeslots for the
services configured at all client-side ports must be not greater than 16.
services configured at the TX1/RX1-TX4/RX4 ports must be not greater than 16 and the
total number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX5/RX5-TX8/RX8 ports
must be not greater than 16.
services configured at the TX1/RX1-TX3/RX3 ports must be not greater than 16 and the
total number of timeslots for the services configured at the TX4/RX4-TX6/RX6 ports
must be not greater than 16.
Table 7-42 lists the number of timeslots required by common services.
Table 7-42 Number of timeslots required by common services

Service Type Number of Service Type Number of
Timeslots Timeslots
Required Required
GE(GFP-T) 7 FICON 6
STM-1 1 FICON EXPRESS 12
STM-4 4 ESCON 2
STM-16 16 DVB-ASI 2
FC200 12 SDI 3
FC100 6 HDSDI 12
FE 1 - -

The LQM2 board supports the following functions and features: wavelength conversion,
service convergence, and ALS.

Transport Platform
Table 7-43 Functions and features of the LQM2 board

Functio
n and
Feature Description
Basic The LQM2 board supports the following working modes:

Function l In 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode:
8 x Any (125 Mbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s) <-> 1 x OTU1
The WDM-side ports on the board support the dual feeding and
selective receiving function.
l In 2 x AP4 ODU1 mode:
Dual 4 x Any (125 Mbit/s 2.5 Gbit/s) <-> 2 x OTU1
The WDM-side ports on the TNF2LQM2 board support the dual
feeding and selective receiving function.
The WDM-side ports on the TNF2LQM2 board support the dual
feeding and selective receiving function.

Transport Platform
Functio
n and
Feature Description
Service l Convergence services:

type STM-1: SDH services, the rate is 155.52 Mbit/s.
STM-4: SDH services, the rate is 622.08 Mbit/s.
STM-16: SDH services, the rate is 2.488 Gbit/s.
OC-3: SONET services, the rate is 155.52 Mbit/s.
OC-12: SONET services, the rate is 622.08 Mbit/s.
OC-48: SONET services, the rate is 2.488 Gbit/s.
FE: Fast Ethernet services, the rate is 125 Mbit/s. Supports FE optical
signals and FE electrical signals.
GE: Gigabit Ethernet services, the rate is 1.25 Gbit/s. Supports GE
optical signals and GE electrical signals.
ESCON: Enterprise system connection services, the rate is 200 Mbit/s.
FC100: Fiber channel services, the rate is 1.06 Gbit/s.
FC200: Fiber channel services, the rate is 2.12 Gbit/s.
FICON: Fiber channel services, the rate is 1.06 Gbit/s.
FICON EXPRESS: Fiber channel services, the rate is 2.12 Gbit/s.
DVB-ASI (Digital Video Broadcasting -Asynchronous Serial Interface):
Digital TV services with the rate being 270 Mbit/s.
SDI (Digital Video Broadcasting - Serial Digital Interface): Digital TV
services with the rate being 270 Mbit/s.
HD-SDI: High-definition digital TV services, the rate is 1.485 Gbit/s.
CPRI option2: The rate is 1.2288 Gbit/s.
CPRI option3: The rate is 2.4576 Gbit/s.
NOTE
The "SDI" is also called the "SD-SDI" according to SMPTE 259M standard.
FEC Supports forward error correction (FEC) that complies with ITU-T G.709.
function
Ethernet LQM2:
service l Supports encapsulation of GE services in GFP-T and TTT-GMP (displayed
mapping as GE(TTT-GMP) on the NMS) modes.
mode
l Supports encapsulation of FE services in GFP-F SLICE+BMP modes.
Non- Supported
Intrusive
Monitori
ng
Function

Transport Platform
Functio
n and
Feature Description
Alarms Monitors B1, SM_BIP8, PM_BIP8 bytes to help locate faults.

and Monitors performance parameters and alarm signals, including the monitoring
performa of laser bias current, laser working temperature and optical power on the
nce WDM side.
events
monitorin LQM2 monitors the RMON performance of GE/FE services.
g
OTN l Provides the OTU1 interface on WDM-side.

function l Supports the OTN frame format and overhead processing by referring to
the ITU-T G.709.
l Supports PM functions for ODU1 and ODU0.
l Supports SM functions for OTU1.
Variable The TNF2LQM2 board can adjust the optical power of the WDM-side signals
optical using the SFP EVOA module housed at the VO/VI port. The allowable
attenuato attenuation range is from 0 dB to 20 dB.
r
Synchron Not supported

ous
Ethernet
services
Protectio l Supports intra-board 1+1 protection

n l Supports client 1+1 protection
schemes
l Supports ODUk (k = 0, 1) SNCP protection.
Loopbac l Supports WDM side inloop

k l Supports WDM side outloop
function OTU board shuts down the laser of the client side to avoid personal injuries.
NOTE
ESC Supported
function

Transport Platform
Functio
n and
Feature Description
Cross- l Intra-board cross-connect:

connect When the board works in 1*AP8 ODU1 mode or 2*AP4 ODU1 mode,
function it achieves the cross-connect function of optical services with rate lower
than 1.25 Gbit/s.
l Inter-board cross-connect:
Not supported
NOTICE
l The LQM2 board can receive GE and FE electrical services on the client side. These
electrical services cannot be cross-connected. They can be configured only as pass-
through services.
function GE, FE, FC100, FC200 services.

test NOTE
The PRBS function on the client side is supported only when the client-side service type
is GE/STM-1/OC-3/STM-4/OC-12/STM-16/OC-48.
WDM Supports ITU-T G.694.1-compliant DWDM specifications and ITU-T G.

specificat 694.2-compliant CWDM specifications.
ions

Transport Platform
Functio
n and
Feature Description
Protocol Protocols or IEEE 802.3u

or standards IEEE 802.3z
standard (non-
complian performance ITU-T G.707
ce monitoring) ITU-T G.782
with which ITU-T G.783
transparently
transmitted GR-253-CORE Synchronous Optical Network (SONET)
services Transport Systems: Common Generic
comply NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL PHYSICAL INTERFACES (FC-
PI)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL LINK SERVICES (FC-LS)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL FRAMING AND SIGNALING-2
(FC-FS-2)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL BACKBONE-3 (FC-BB-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SWITCH FABRIC-3 (FC-SW-3)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL - PHYSICAL AND SIGNALING
INTERFACE (FC-PH)
NCITS FIBRE CHANNEL SINGLE-BYTE COMMAND
CODE SETS-2 MAPPING PROTOCOL (FC-SB-2)
SMPTE 292M Bit-Serial Digital Interface for High-Definition
Television Systems
ETSI TR 101 891 Professional Interfaces: Guidelines for the
implementation and usage of the DVB Asynchronous Serial
Interface (ASI)
SMPTE 259M 10-Bit 4:2:2 Component and 4fsc Composite
Digital Signals - Serial Digital Interface
NCITS SBCON Single-Byte Command Code Sets CONnection
architecture (SBCON)
CPRI Specification V4.1

Transport Platform
Functio
n and
Feature Description
Protocols or ITU-T G.805

standards ITU-T G.806
(performanc
e ITU-T G.709
monitoring) ITU-T G.872
for ITU-T G.7710
processing
services ITU-T G.798
ITU-T G.874
ITU-T M.3100
ITU-T G.873.1
ITU-T G.874.1
ITU-T G.875
ITU-T G.808.1
ITU-T G.841
ITU-T G.8201
ITU-T G.694.1
ITU-T G.694.2

The LQM2 board consists of the client-side optical module or the client-side electrical
module, the WDM-side optical module, the cross-connect and service processing module, the
clock module, the variable optical attenuator, the communication module, and the power
supply module. The variable optical attenuator is the optional module. If you need this
equipment, contact Huawei.
Signal Flow of LQM2 (Convergence of Any Services)

Figure 7-26 is the functional block diagram of the LQM2 board that implements the
convergence of eight channels of signals at any rate. The diagram shows that the optical SFP
module is used in the RX1/TX1-RX6/TX6 ports and the electrical SFP module is used in the
RX7/TX7-RX8/TX8 ports.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-26 Functional block diagram of the LQM2 board (convergence of Any services)
Clock module
Client side
WDM side
RX1
O/E
RX6 OUT1
TX1 E/O
E/O Service OUT2
TX6 Service
Client-side Cross- en/de-
process
optical module connect capsula
ing
tion
RX7
IN1
RX8 Levle O/E
IN2
TX7 conversion
TX8 Cross-connect and
Client-side WDM-side optical
service processing module module
electrical module
EVOA
Required voltage
EVOA
Power supply
module Variable
Fuse optical
attenuator
Backplane
DC power supply UXC
from a chassis
In the signal flow of the LQM2 board, the transmit and the receive directions are defined. The
transmit direction is defined as the direction from the client side of the LQM2 to the WDM
side of the LQM2, and the receive direction is defined as the reverse direction.
The client-side optical module receives optical signals from client equipment
through the RX1-RX8 ports, and performs O/E conversion.
The client-side electrical module receives electrical signals from client equipment
through the RX1-RX8 ports, and performs level conversion.
After conversion, the eight channels of electrical signals are sent to the service en/de-
capsulation and processing module. The module performs processes such as
multiplexing, clock generating and frame processing. Then, the module outputs one or
two channels of OTU1 signals.
The OTU1 signals are sent to the WDM-side optical module. After performing E/O
conversion, the module sends out the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM or CWDM
standard wavelengths. The optical signals are output through the OUT1 and OUT2
optical ports.
l Receive direction
The WDM-side optical module receives the OTU1 optical signals at DWDM or CWDM
standard wavelengths from the WDM side through the IN1 and IN2 optical ports. Then,
the module performs O/E conversion.

Transport Platform
After O/E conversion, the signals are sent to the service en/de-capsulation and
processing module. The module performs processes such as decapsulation, clock
recovery and demultiplexing. Then, the module outputs eight channels of electrical
signals at any rate.
The client-side optical module performs E/O conversion and the client-side electrical
module performs level conversion of the eight channels of electrical signals, and then
outputs eight channels of client-side optical signals and electrical signals through the
TX1 - TX8 ports.
NOTE
When the LQM2 board works in 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode, ports TX1/RX1TX2/RX2 and TX5/RX5
TX6/RX6 can be used to receive client-side services. When the TNF2LQM board works in 2 x AP3
ODU1 mode, ports TX1/RX1TX6/RX6 can be used to receive client-side services.
Module Function
Client-side receiver: Receives optical signals in any format from the client side
devices and performs the O/E conversion of the optical signals in internal electrical
signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from internal electrical signals to
optical signals in any format, and transmits the optical signals to client side devices.
Reports the performance of the client-side optical port.
l Client-side electrical module
Client-side receiver: Receives GE or FE electrical signals from client side devices,
and performs the level conversion of the GE or FE electrical signals to internal
electrical signals.
Client-side transmitter: Performs the level conversion of internal electrical signals
to GE or FE electrical signals, and transmits the GE or FE electrical signals to client
side devices.
transmitter.
WDM-side receiver: Performs O/E conversion of optical signals at 2.67 Gbit/s.
WDM-side transmitter: Performs E/O conversion from the internal electrical signals
to optical signals at 2.67 Gbit/s.
l Cross-connect and service processing module
The module consists of the service en/de-capsulation module and the service processing
module. It implements the en/de-capsulation of signals in any format and service
convergence.
Service en/de-capsulation module: Processes the overheads of signals in any format,
and reports the performance monitoring state of service signals.

Transport Platform
Service processing module: Achieves the multiplexing from signals in any format to
signals in OTU1 format and the demultiplexing from signals in OTU1 format to
signals in any format, and performs processes such as encapsulation/decapsulation
of FEC, encoding/decoding and scrambling/descrambling.
Cross-connect module: Cross-connects the client-side accessed signals with each
other and passes them through.
l Clock module
Provides a clock for the board and implements clock transparent transmission.
Adjust the transmission optical power or receive optical power.
7.4.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and ports on the LQM2 front panel.

Figure 7-27shows the front panel of the LQM2. It shows the situation that the ports are
inserted with optical SFP modules.
Figure 7-27 Front panel of the LQM2

RX7/IN3 RX8/IN4
TX7/OUT3 TX8/OUT4
STAT TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7/OUT3 RX7/IN3 TX8/OUT4 RX8/IN4 OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 IN1
LQM2
SRV IN2
IN3
IN4
Indicators


Transport Platform
Ports
RX1/TX1 to TX6/RX6 are client-side ports, while IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2 are WDM-side
ports. TX7/OUT3/RX7/IN3 and TX8/OUT4/RX8/IN4 can work as client-side ports or WDM-
side ports based on the working mode of the board.
l When the LQM2 board adopts 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode:
Table 7-44 Types and functions of the LQM2 ports (1 x AP8 ODU1 mode)
TX1/RX1 to LC (optical Transmits/receives the l TX7/

TX8/RX8 ports) first group service OUT3/RX7/IN3
RJ-45 signals from client-side and TX8/
(electrical equipment. OUT4/RX8/IN4
ports) work as the
client-side ports
IN1/OUT1 LC Connected to the TX7/RX7 and
OADM board to TX8/RX8.
receive/transmit the l WDM-side
WDM signals coming optical ports
from the active provide the dual
channel. fed and selective
receiving
IN2/OUT2 LC Connected to the
function.
OADM board to
receive/transmit the
WDM signals coming
from the standby
channel.
TX1/RX1 to LC (optical Transmits/receives the l TX7/OUT3/RX7/IN3

TX8/RX8 ports) first group service signals and TX8/
RJ-45 from client-side OUT4/RX8/IN4 work
(electrical equipment. as the client-side ports
ports) TX7/RX7 and TX8/
RX8.
IN1/OUT1 LC Connected to the OADM l The client-side ports
board to receive/transmit TX1/RX1-TX4/RX4
the first group WDM work with the WDM-
signals. side port IN1/OUT1.
l The client-side ports
TX5/RX5-TX8/RX8
work with the WDM-
side port IN2/OUT2.

Transport Platform
IN2/OUT2 LC Connected to the OADM l Both the two port

board to receive/transmit groups support single
the second group WDM fed and single
signals. receiving.
Port Remarks
Port Type Function
TX1/RX1, TX2/ LC Transmits/receives the l TX7/OUT3/RX7/IN3

RX2, TX5/RX5, first group service signals and TX8/
TX6/RX6 from client-side OUT4/RX8/IN4 work
equipment. as the WDM-side
IN3/OUT3 and IN4/
IN1/OUT1, LC Connected to the OADM OUT4 ports.
IN2/OUT2 board to receive/transmit
the first group WDM
TX1/RX1-TX2/RX2
signals coming from the
work with the WDM-
active channel and
side ports IN1/OUT1
standby channel.
and IN2/OUT2.
IN3/OUT3, LC Connected to the OADM l The client-side ports
IN4/OUT4 board to receive/transmit TX5/RX5-TX6/RX6
the second group WDM work with the WDM-
signals coming from the side ports IN3/OUT3
active channel and and IN4/OUT4.
standby channel. l Both the two port
groups support dual
fed and selective
receiving.
TX1/RX1 to LC Transmits/receives the l TX7/OUT3/RX7/IN3

TX6/RX6 first group service signals and TX8/
from client-side OUT4/RX8/IN4 work
equipment. as the WDM-side IN3/
OUT3 and IN4/OUT4
ports.
TX1/RX1-TX3/RX3
work with the WDM-

Transport Platform
IN1/OUT1, LC Connected to the OADM side ports IN1/OUT1

IN2/OUT2 board to receive/transmit and IN2/OUT2.
the first group WDM l The client-side ports
signals coming from the TX4/RX4-TX6/RX6
active channel and work with the WDM-
standby channel. side ports IN3/OUT3
and IN4/OUT4.
IN3/OUT3, LC Connected to the OADM
IN4/OUT4 board to receive/transmit l Both the two port
the second group WDM groups support dual
signals coming from the fed and selective
active channel and receiving.
standby channel.
NOTE
l The RX1/TX1-RX8/TX8 ports on the client side support the optical SFP module, single-fiber
bidirectional GE SFP module, and electrical SFP module. The preceding SFP modules can be used
on the client side at the same time. The ports on the client side can receive Any optical signals, GE
optical signals, or GE/FE electrical signals through the replacement of the SFP modules.
Laser Level
7.4.6 Valid Slots

The LQM2 occupies one slot.

In the OptiX OSN 1800 II Packet chassis, the valid slots of the board are SLOT 1 to SLOT 6.
Display of Slots
7.4.7 Physical and Logical Ports

This section describes the display of ports on the board and provides the configuration rules
for this board on the NMS.
Display of Ports
Table 7-48 lists the sequence number displayed on the U2000 of the port on the LQM2 board
front panel.

Transport Platform
Table 7-48 Display of the LQM2 ports

Ports on the Front Panel Port Displayed on the U2000
IN1/OUT1 1
IN2/OUT2 2
TX1/RX1 3
TX2/RX2 4
TX3/RX3 5
TX4/RX4 6
TX5/RX5 7
TX6/RX6 8
TX7/OUT3/RX7/IN3 9
TX8/OUT4/RX8/IN4 10
NOTE
l An optical port number displayed on the U2000 indicates a pair of actual optical ports, one for
l For EVOA module support on client-side ports, please see 18.3 EVOA Module.
l TX7/OUT3/RX7/IN3 and TX8/OUT4/RX8/IN4 can work as client-side ports or WDM-side ports
based on the working mode of the board.
Port model of LQM2 board

The LQM2 board can work in four different modes: 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode, 2 x AP4 ODU1
mode, 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode, 2 x AP3 ODU1 mode.
l 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode
Figure 7-28 and Figure 7-29 show the port model of the LQM2 board in 1 x AP8 ODU1
mode.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-28 Port model of the LQM2 board (ODU1 convergence mode)
201 1
5(RX3/TX3) 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-3
ODU1 2
8(RX6/TX6) 201(ConvGroup1/ConvGroup1)-6 ODU1 OTU1 2(IN2/OUT2)

: WDM-side services
Figure 7-29 Port model of the LQM2 board (ODU1 non-convergence mode)
3(RX1/TX1) ODU1 2

: WDM-side services
Alarms and performance events related to client signal overheads are reported on
channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3-10 (RX1/TX1 to RX8/TX8).
Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to OTU1 overheads are
reported on channel 1 of optical ports 1 and 2.
In the ODU1 convergence mode, alarms, performance events, and configurations
related to OTU1 overheads are reported on channel 1 of optical port 201. In the

Transport Platform
ODU1 non-convergence mode, ODU1 alarms, performance events, and

configurations related to OTU1 overheads are reported on channel 1 of optical port
3.
Alarms related to the WDM-side optical module and optical-layer alarms and
performance events are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/
The WDM side supports intra-board 1+1 protection and ODUk SNCP (k = 1)
protection. However, the two types of protection cannot be configured
simultaneously. Before intra-board 1+1 protection is configured, Cross-Connection
Configuration Mode must be set to Automatic. Then the system automatically
configures bidirectional cross-connections from port 201 to optical port 1 and
unidirectional cross-connections from port 201 to optical port 2. Before ODUk
SNCP (k = 1) protection is configured, Cross-Connection Configuration Mode
must be set to Manual.
l 2 x AP4 ODU1 mode
Figure 7-30 and Figure 7-31 show the port model of the LQM2 board in 2 x AP4 ODU1
mode.
201 1
202 2

: WDM-side services

Transport Platform
3(RX1/TX1) ODU1 ODU1 OTU1 1(IN1/OUT1)
7(RX5/TX5) ODU1 ODU1 OTU1 2(IN2/OUT2)

: WDM-side services
Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to OTU1 overheads are
reported on channel 1 of optical ports 1 and 2.
related to OTU1 overheads are reported on channel 1 of optical ports 201 and 202.
In the ODU1 non-convergence mode, ODU1 alarms, performance events, and
configurations related to OTU1 overheads are reported on channel 1 of optical ports
3 and 7.
performance events are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 and 2
(IN1/OUT1 and IN2/OUT2).
The 201 and 202 ports support ODU1 convergence mode and ODU1 non-
convergence mode. They work in ODU1 convergence mode by default.
l 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode
Figure 7-32 shows the port model of the LQM2 board in 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode.

Transport Platform
Figure 7-32 Port model of the LQM2 board (2 x AP2 ODU0 mode)
ODU0
3(RX1/TX1) ODU1 OTU1 1(IN1/OUT1)
ODU0
ODU0 2
ODU0
4(RX2/TX2) ODU1 OTU1
2(IN2/OUT2)
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0
ODU0 10
ODU0
ODU0

: WDM-side services
channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3(RX1/TX1), 4(RX2/TX2), 7(RX5/TX5),
8(RX6/TX6).
Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to ODU0 signal overheads
are reported on channel 1 of client-side optical ports 3(RX1/TX1), 4(RX2/TX2),
7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/TX6).
Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to ODU1/OTU1 signal
overheads are reported on channel 1 of optical ports 1, 2, 9, and 10.
Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to WDM-side optical
modules and the optical layer are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports
1, 2, 9, and 10.
Cross-connections from ports 3(RX1/TX1), 4(RX2/TX2), 7(RX5/TX5), 8(RX6/
TX6) to channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1, 2, 9, and 10 need to be configured.

Transport Platform
configures cross-connections from optical ports on the client side to those on the
WDM side. Before ODUk SNCP (k = 0) protection is configured, Cross-
Connection Configuration Mode must be set to Manual.
l 2 x AP3 ODU1 mode
Figure 7-33 shows the port model of the LQM2 board in 2 x AP3 ODU1 mode.
201
4(RX2/TX2) (ConvGro
ODU1
up1/Conv 2
Group1)
5(RX3/TX3)
202
7(RX5/TX5) (ConvGro ODU1
up2/Conv 10
Group2)
8(RX6/TX6)

: WDM-side services

Transport Platform
3(RX1/TX1) ODU1
2
7(RX5/TX5) ODU1
10

: WDM-side services
Alarms, performance events, and configurations related to OTU1 signal overheads
are reported on channel 1 of optical ports 1, and 2.
related to OTU1 overheads are reported on channel 1 of optical ports 201 and 202.
In the ODU1 non-convergence mode, ODU1 alarms, performance events, and
configurations related to OTU1 overheads are reported on channel 1 of optical ports
3 and 7.
performance events are reported on channel 1 of WDM-side optical ports 1 (IN1/
OUT1), 2 (IN2/OUT2), 9 (IN9/OUT9), 10 (IN10/OUT10).
The 201 and 202 ports support ODU1 convergence mode and ODU1 non-
convergence mode. They work in ODU1 convergence mode by default.

Transport Platform
configures the following cross-connections: bidirectional cross-connections from

port 201 to optical port 1 and unidirectional cross-connections from port 201 to
optical port 2; bidirectional cross-connections from port 202 to optical port 9 and
unidirectional cross-connections from port 202 to optical port 10. Before ODUk
SNCP (k = 1) protection is configured, Cross-Connection Configuration Mode
must be set to Manual.
7.4.8 LQM2 Parameters on the NMS
Precautions
NOTICE
If you delete a logical LQM2 board and configure it again on the NMS, the original
configuration of the board is deleted and the default configuration is restored.

Transport Platform
Working Mode
Board l 1*AP8 l 1 x AP8 ODU1 mode: the LQM2 board is used for
Working ODU1 converging eight services at Any rate and ODUk (k=1)
Mode mode, SNCP protection is supported. In this mode, signals are
2*AP4 sent by optical ports on the WDM side in a dual fed
ODU1 and selective receiving manner.
mode, l 2 x AP4 ODU1 mode: the LQM2 board is used for
2*AP2 converging double four services at Any rate and ODUk
ODU0 (k=1) SNCP protection is supported. In this mode, two
mode, channels of signals are sent on the WDM side in a
2*AP3 single-fed and single receiving manner.
ODU1
mode l 2 x AP2 ODU0 mode: the LQM2 board is used for
converging double two services at Any rate and ODUk
l Default: (k=0) SNCP protection is supported. In this mode,
2*AP4 signals are sent by optical ports on the WDM side in a
ODU1 dual fed and selective receiving manner.
mode
l 2 x AP3 ODU1 mode: the LQM2 board is used for
converging double three services at Any rate and
ODUk (k=1) SNCP protection is supported. In this
mode, signals are sent by optical ports on the WDM
side in a dual fed and selective receiving manner.
NOTE
Before changing the working mode of the LQM2 board, ensure
that no cross-connection or service is configured on the board. If
a cross-connection or service is configured on the board, delete
the cross-connection or service and set Service Type to None
before you change the working mode of the board.
NOTICE
Switching between different working modes on a board interrupts
the existing services.
Port ODU1 l ODU1 convergence mode (n*Any->ODU1): client

Working convergence services are mapped into ODU1 services.
Mode mode l ODU1 non-convergence mode (OTU1/Any->ODU1):
(n*Any- client services are mapped into ODU1 services.
>ODU1),
NOTE
ODU1 non- This parameter is valid when Board Working Mode is set to
convergence 1*AP8 ODU1 mode, 2*AP4 ODU1 mode or 2*AP3 ODU1
mode (OTU1/ mode.
Any->ODU1)
Default:
ODU1
convergence
mode
(n*Any-
>ODU1)

Transport Platform
Basic Attributes
Optical - -
Interface/
Channel
Optical - An optical interface name contains a maximum

Interface of 64 characters. Any characters are supported.
Name
Cross- l Automatic, Manual When intra-board 1+1 protection is configured

Connection l Default: Manual for the board, set this parameter to Automatic.
Configuratio When ODUk SNCP protection is configured
n Mode for the board, set this parameter to Manual.
Service Type l DVB-ASI, SDI, The Service Type parameter sets the type of
HDSDI, ESCON, the service accessed at the optical interface on
FC-100, FC-200, FE, the client side.
FICON, FICON NOTE
express, GE(TTT- l After you configure a cross-connection for the
GMP), GE(GFP-T), board, setting the Service Type field fails if the
CPRI2, CPRI3, service type selected during cross-connection
STM-1, OC-3, configuration is different from the value you set
STM-4, OC-12, for Service Type. In this case, you need to
STM-16, OC-48, delete the cross-connection and set the Service
Type field again.
None
l The service type supported by the LQM2 board
l Default: None varies according to the value of Working Mode.
l GE(TTT-GMP) is supported only when the
board works in 2*AP2 ODU0 mode.
In case of GE services, select a proper service type
according to the source of the GE services.
l When a board is used to transmit ordinary
Ethernet services, this parameter must be set to
GE(GFP-T).
Channel Use Used, Unused l Set this parameter to Unused when a

Status Default: Used channel that is not used.
l Set this parameter to Used when a channel
that is used.
Examples are as follows:
l When the LQM2 board is used for
converging services at Any rate, set
Channel Use Status to Used for all WDM-
side optical ports and set this parameter for
all client-side optical ports according to the
actual network design.

Transport Platform
Automatic Enabled, Disabled l The default value is recommended.

Laser Default: Disabled (in the l On the WDM side, this automatic laser
Shutdown case of TX1/RX1, and shutdown function is not supported and
TX5/RX5 ports), therefore cannot be set or query.
Enabled (in the case of
the other client-side
optical ports), or
Disabled (in the case of
WDM-side optical ports)
l Enabled, Disabled
l Default:
1*AP8 ODU1
mode: Enabled in
the case of all the
client-side optical
ports.
2*AP4 ODU1
mode: Enabled in
the case of all the
client-side optical
ports.
2*AP2 ODU0
mode: Enabled in
the case of TX1/
RX1, TX2/RX2,
TX5/RX5 and
TX6/RX6 ports,
Disabled in the
case of the other
client-side optical
ports.
2*AP3 ODU1
mode: Enabled in
the case of
TX1/RX1 to
TX6/RX6 ports,
Disabled in the
case of the other
client-side optical
ports.

Transport Platform
ALS FW_Defect, Specifies auxiliary conditions for triggering

Auxiliary BW_Client_R_LOS, ALS.
Condition BW_WDM_Defect l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver
of the upstream board or the WDM-side
receiver of the local board, the laser on the
client-side transmitter of the local board
must be shut down. For this situation, set
this parameter to FW_Defect.
l If a fault occurs on the client-side receiver
of the local board, the laser on the client-
side transmitter of the local board must be
shut down. For this situation, set this
parameter to BW_Client_R_LOS.
l If a fault occurs on the WDM-side receiver
of the local board, the laser on the client-
side transmitter of the upstream board must
be shut down. For this situation, set this
parameter to BW_WDM_Defect.
Hold-Off 0s to 2s, with a step of The default value is recommended.

Time of 100 ms.
Automatic Default: 0s
Laser
Shutdown

Transport Platform
Laser Status ON, OFF The default value is recommended. In practical

Default: application, set this parameter according to the
l WDM side: ON scenario where the board is used. Examples are
as follows:
l Client side: OFF
l When the LQM2 board is used for
converging services at Any rate, set Laser
Status to On for all WDM-side optical
ports. Automatic Laser Shutdown of
client-side optical ports is set to Enabled.
Therefore, lasers on client-side optical ports
is enabled or disabled automatically
according to the signal receiving conditions
at the WDM-side optical ports on the local
board and the signal receiving conditions at
the client-side optical ports on the opposite
board. That is, you do not need to set this
parameter manually.
NOTICE
If the communication between NEs is achieved
through only the ESC provided by the LQM2 board,
the following situations occur when neither a
standby channel is available nor protection is
configured:
l The NE becomes unreachable after the WDM-
side lasers on the LQM2 board are disabled
when the LQM2 board is used for converging
services at Any rate.
Optical 0 to 20 Parameter provides an option to set the optical

Interface Default: 20 power attenuation of a board channel so that
Attenuation the optical power of the output signals at the
Ratio (dB) transmit end is within the preset range.
Max. 20 Parameter provides an option to query the

Attenuation Default: 20 maximum attenuation rate allowed by the
Ratio (dB) current optical port of a board.
Min. 0 Parameter provides an option to query the

Attenuation Default: 0 minimum attenuation rate allowed by the
Ratio (dB) current optical port of a board.
Optical Non-Loopback, Inloop, Set this parameter to Non-Loopback when a

Interface Outloop network works normally. It can be set to Inloop
Loopback Default: Non-Loopback or Outloop to help locate a faulty point in a test
or a process of removing a fault on a network.
However, it must be set to Non-Loopback right
after the test is complete or the fault is
removed.
When Automatic Disabling of NE Function is
set to the default value Enabled, the loopback
setting is automatically cancelled after Auto
Disabling Time (default: 5 minutes) elapses.

Transport Platform
LPT Enabled Enabled, Disabled This parameter is valid when Service Type is
Default: Disabled set to FE, GE(TTT-GMP), GE(GFP-T),
FC100, FC200, FICON or FICON
EXPRESS.
l The LPT function can work only with
optical line protection, intra-board 1+1
protection or ODUk SNCP protection and
cannot work with any other protection.
l Set this parameter to Enabled when you
want to enable the LPT function; otherwise,
keep the default value for this parameter.
GCC Dual fed and selective l Independent Communication: In this mode,

Receive/ receiving, Independent both WDM-side optical ports are allocated
Transmit Communication general communication channels (GCC)
Mode Default: Dual fed and and they receive and transmit GCC signals
selective receiving separately.
l Dual fed and selective receiving: In this
mode, only the active WDM-side optical
port is allocated GCC channels.
NOTICE
The settings of GCC Receive/Transmit Mode for
two interconnected boards must be the same;
otherwise, the DCN communication is unavailable.
For the boards that do not support GCC Receive/
Transmit Mode, the parameter value is always set
to Dual fed and selective receiving.
Advanced Attributes

State Default: Enabled l FEC Working State of the two
interconnected OTU boards must be
consistent.
SD Trigger SM_BIP8_SD, This parameter is valid only when the SD

Condition PM_BIP8_SD, B1_SD Trigger Flag is set to Enable.
Default: None All the alarms can be set as the SD switching
conditions.

Transport Platform
PRBS Test Enabled, Disabled l Retain the default value when a network
Status Default: / works normally.
l Set this parameter to Enabled for the
auxiliary board if you need to perform a
PRBS test during deployment
commissioning. Set this parameter to
Disabled after the test is complete.
Band Type/ The parameter format is This parameter is for query only.
Wavelength as follows: band type/
No./ wavelength No./optical
Wavelength(n port wavelength/
m)/ frequency, for example,
Frequency(T C/11/1471.00/208.170.
Hz) Default: /

Default: /
7.4.9 LQM2 Specifications

Specifications include electrical specifications, optical specifications, mechanical
specifications, and power consumption.

Transport Platform

LQM2 1000BASE-SX-0.5km GE electrical 2400ps/nm-fixed-

1000BASE-LX-10km module APD-eSFP
1000BASE-LX-40km FE electrical 1600ps/nm-fixed-
module APD-eSFP
1000BASE-ZX-80km
800ps/nm-fixed-PIN-
1000BASE-BX-10km eSFP
(SM1310)
1000BASE-BX-10km
(SM1490)
1000BASE-BX-40km
(SM1310)
1000BASE-BX-40km
(SM1490)
I-16
S-16.1
L-16.2
S-4.1
L-4.1
L-4.2
100BASE-FX
S-1.1
L-1.1
L-1.2
EVOA
Modules.
NOTE
The ports on the WDM side support grey optical module.

NOTE
There is a margin between the input power low alarm threshold and the receiver sensitivity and a margin
between the input power high alarm threshold and the overload point. This ensures that the system can
report an input power low alarm before the actual input power reaches the receiver sensitivity or an input
power high alarm before the actual input power reaches the overload point.

Transport Platform

Value

ratio
Receiver type - APD
Table 7-50 Specifications of 1600ps/nm-fixed-APD-eSFP and 800ps/nm-fixed-PIN-eSFP

optical modules
Value
Maximum wavelength count - 8 8

Transport Platform
Value
Maximum mean launched dBm 5 5

power
Minimum mean launched dBm 0 0

power
Central wavelength nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611
Central wavelength deviation nm 6.5 6.5
Maximum -20 dB spectral nm 1 1

width

suppression ratio
Receiver type - APD PIN
Minimum receiver overload dBm -9 -3
Table 7-51 Specifications of 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-ZX optical modules
Value


format
Target km 0.5 10 40 80
distance

wavelength
range

Transport Platform
Value

Maximum dBm -2.5 -3 0 5

mean
launched
power
Minimum dBm -9.5 -9 -5 -2

mean
launched
power
Minimum dB 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio
Eye pattern - IEEE802.3z-compliant

mask
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN PIN

wavelength
range
Receiver dBm -17 -20 -23 -23

sensitivity
Minimum dBm 0 -3 -3 -3
receiver
overload
Value

Maximum mean dBm -3 -3

launched power

Transport Platform
Value

launched power
ratio
Receiver type - Transmit: FP Transmit: PIN

Receive: PIN Receive: FP


overload

Value


launched power

launched power
ratio

Transport Platform
Value
Receiver type - Transmit: DFB Transmit: PIN

Receive: PIN Receive: DFB


overload
Table 7-54 Specifications of I-16/S-16.1/L-16.2 optical modules

Value
Item Unit I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2

format
Optical source - MLM SLM SLM SLM

type

range
Maximum dBm -3 0 3 3
mean launched
power
Minimum dBm -10 -5 -2 -2

mean launched
power
Minimum dB 8.5 8.2 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
Maximum -20 nm NA 1 1 1
dB spectral
width

Transport Platform
Value
Item Unit I-16 S-16.1 L-16.1 L-16.2
Minimum side dB NA 30 30 30
mode
suppression
ratio
Eye pattern - G.957-compliant

mask
Receiver type - PIN PIN APD APD

range
Receiver dBm -18 -18 -27 -28

sensitivity
Minimum dBm -3 0 -9 -9
receiver
overload
Maximum dB -27 -27 -27 -27

reflectance
Table 7-55 Specifications of S-4.1/L-4.1/L-4.2 optical modules

Value
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source type - MLM SLM SLM

range
Maximum mean dBm -8 2 2

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -15 -3 -3

launched power
Minimum extinction dB 8.2 10.5 10.5

ratio

Transport Platform
Value
Maximum -20 dB nm NA 1 1
spectral width
Spectral Width-RMS nm NA NA NA
Minimum side mode dB NA 30 30

suppression ratio
Receiver type - PIN PIN PIN

range
Minimum receiver dBm -8 -8 -8

overload
Table 7-56 Specifications of 100BASE-FX/S-1.1/L-1.1/L-1.2 optical modules

Value
100BASE- S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Item Unit FX
Line code format - LED NRZ NRZ NRZ
Optical source - Multi-mode SLM SLM SLM

type

Maximum mean dBm -14 -8 0 0

launched power
Minimum mean dBm -19 -15 -5 -5

launched power
Minimum dB 10 8.2 10.5 10.5

extinction ratio

Transport Platform
Value
100BASE- S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2

Item Unit FX
Maximum -20 dB nm NA NA NA 1
spectral width
Spectral Width- nm 63 NA NA NA
RMS
Minimum side dB NA NA NA 30
mode suppression
ratio
Receiver type - PIN APD APD PIN

Receiver dBm -30 -28 -34 -34

sensitivity
Minimum receiver dBm -14 -8 -10 -10

overload
Maximum dB NA NA NA NA
reflectance

Item Unit Value
Inherent insertion loss dB 1.5
Dynamic attenuation range dB 20

Specifications for Client-Side Electrical Modules
Table 7-58 Specifications of FE electrical modules

Item Unit Value
Electrical interface rate Mbit/s 100

Transport Platform
Item Unit Value
Transmission distance m 100
Transmission - 98%
bandwidth
Maximum byte 9600

transmission packet

interface specification l IEEE 802.3u and enterprise regulations
Table 7-59 Specifications of GE electrical modules

Item Unit Value
Electrical interface Mbit/s 1000

rate
Transmission m 100
distance
Transmission - 98%
bandwidth

interface l IEEE 802.3ab and enterprise regulations
specification
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.7 kg (1.59 lb.)
Power Consumption
LQM2 16.5 21.0

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 8 Packet Board
8 Packet Board
About This Chapter
Packet processing boards supported by the OptiX OSN include EF8F, EM6F, EG4C, MD1,
and PEX1 boards.
NOTE
PEX1 is integrated on the UXCL board.
8.1 EF8F
The EF8F is an 8xFE processing board.
8.2 EM6F
The EM6F is an FE/GE processing board.
8.3 EG4C
The EG4C is a 4xGE processing board.
8.4 EX1
The EX1 is a 1x10GE Ethernet processing board.
8.5 CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.
8.6 MD1
The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board.

Transport Platform
8.1 EF8F
The EF8F is an 8xFE processing board.

The functional version of the EF8F is TNF1.
Version
Table 8-1 describes the version mapping of the EF8F board.
Table 8-1 Version description of the EF8F

Item Description

8.1.2 Application
The EF8F is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data
packets, manage bandwidths, and implement switching of data packets.
Figure 8-1 shows the typical networking and application of the EF8F. The EF8F works with
the cross-connect board that provides the packet switching function to meet the requirement
of packet features.

Transport Platform
Figure 8-1 Networking and application of the EF8F
Packet Packet
GE service UXC service GE
board board
FE
GE ring 10GE
FE
FE Packet Packet Packet

EF8F UXC service GE GE service UXC service 10GE
FE board board board
OptiX OSN equipment
NG-WDM equipment

The EF8F receives/transmits, processes, and converges 8xFE signals.
Table 8-2 lists the functions and features that the EF8F supports. The EF8F needs to work
with the packet switching unit of the system control, switching, and timing board to
implement Ethernet service functions.
Table 8-2 Functions and features that the EF8F supports

Function and Feature Board
Basic functions Receives/Transmits fast Ethernet (FE) service signals and

works with the packet switching unit to process the
received FE service signals.
Backplane bus bandwidth 1.25 Gbit/s

Transport Platform
Port specifications l FE optical port: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/

100BASE-LX/100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX
l The following types of small form-factor pluggable
(SFP) modules are supported:
FE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
FE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical
module
Port Working mode l The FE optical port supports 100M full-duplex.

attributes
TAG attributes l The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or
hybrid.
l Sets and queries the TAG attribute of a port.
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that

at ports complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Port type query Supported
Query and Supported

setting of
optical power
thresholds
Packet Ethernet line l Native ETH services:

services (E-Line) E-Line services based on point-to-point transparent
services transmission
E-Line services based on virtual local area networks
(VLANs)
E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q (QinQ)
l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3)
services: E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS
services)
Ethernet local l Native ETH services:

area network E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
(E-LAN)
services E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad bridges
Ethernet data IEEE 802.3/Ethernet II

frame format
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600

bytes.
Maximum Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes
transmission being the default value.
unit (MFL)

Transport Platform
Protection Tunnel Supports 1:1 tunnel APS.

schemes automatic
protection
switching
(APS)
Pseudo wire Supports 1:1 PW APS/FPS.

(PW) APS/FPS
Multiple Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal

Spanning Tree Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP
Protocol provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree
(MSTP) Protocol (RSTP).
Ethernet ring Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.

protection
switching
(ERPS)
Link l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static

aggregation aggregation
group (LAG) l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load sharing
Link-state pass Point-point and point-multipoint LPT

through (LPT)
MRPS Supported

Transport Platform
Quality of service (QoS) l DiffServ

Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB
service classes for service flows based on their QoS
information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities,
DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.
l Complex traffic classification
Supports complex traffic classification based on C-
VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by
packets, and V-UNI ingress policies.
l QoS policies
Supports port policies, port WRED policy and V-UNI
ingress policies.
l Access control list (ACL) policy
Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches rules
specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress policy.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and
V-UNI ingresses.
l Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW ingress,
prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
l Queue scheduling policies
Supports SP, WRR, and SP+WRR.
Maintenan Multiprotocol l Tunnel OAM and PW OAM are supported.

ce features Label l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification (CV),
Switching fast failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication
(MPLS)/ (BDI), forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and
Multiprotocol traceroute tests in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
label switching
transport l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs),
profile (MPLS- remote defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal
TP) operation, (AIS) insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT)
administration tests, PW loss measurement (LM), and two-way delay
and measurement (DM) in compliance with ITU-T G.
maintenance 8113.1.
(OAM)
Ethernet OAM l Ethernet service OAM:

(ETH OAM) Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion
in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM with
reference to ITU-T Y.7131.
l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-discovery, link
performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and
selfloop checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.

Transport Platform
l Inloops at the physical (PHY)/media access control (MAC) layer of

Ethernet ports
l Warm resets (having no impact on services) and cold resets
l Board power consumption query
l Board voltage detection
l Board temperature detection
l SFP module information query
l Ethernet performance monitoring (remote network monitoring [RMON])
l Hot-swappable board
l Hot swapping for pluggable optical modules
l Support for port mirroring and port traffic mirroring
Synchroni Synchronous Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at eight

zation Ethernet ports.
IEEE 1588v2 Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at eight
ports.
IEEE 1588 Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at eight ports.

adaptive clock
recovery
(ACR)
Data communication Each FE port provides one inband DCN channel.

network (DCN)
Internet Group Management Supports IGMP Snooping V1/V2/V3.

Protocol (IGMP) snooping

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EF8F.

Transport Platform
Function Block Diagram
Figure 8-2 EF8F board function block diagram

Backplane
Ethernet Ethernet
signal Dual-fed and signal
FE signal Control signal Service
processing unit selective- Packet switching unit
access unit receiving unit
FE signal
Control bus of the board
System control bus

Logic control System control and
unit communication unit
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V power supplied Fuse System power supply
Power
to the board supply unit
System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
Clock signal provided to the Clock unit System clock signal

other units on the board
Signal Processing in the Receive Direction
Table 8-3 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EF8F

Step Function Unit Processing Flow
1 FE signal access l Receives FE signals.

unit l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE signals.
l Performs frame delimitation, preamble stripping,
and CRC checks for frame signals.

Transport Platform
2 Service processing Works with the system control, switching, and timing
unit board to provide the following functions:
l Processes VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames.
l Processes labels in Multiprotocol Label Switching
(MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge
(PWE3) packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic
classification and committed access rate (CAR)
restriction for Ethernet data frames.
l Processes OAM packets and protocol packets.
3 Dual-fed and Transmits Ethernet data frames to the active and

selective-receiving standby packet switching units.
unit
Signal Processing in the Transmit Direction
Table 8-4 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EF8F
1 Dual-fed and l Selects Ethernet data frames from the packet

selective-receiving switching unit.
unit l Transmits Ethernet data frames to the Ethernet
processing unit.
l Processes labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets.
l Performs QoS processing such as traffic shaping and
queue scheduling for Ethernet data frames.
3 FE signal access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and

CRC code computing.
l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
Ethernet data frames, and sends out the generated
FE signals through Ethernet ports.
Control Signal Processing

The service processing unit controls the FE signal access unit using management control
signals.

Transport Platform
The logic control unit controls the service processing unit and the dual-fed and selective-
receiving unit using the control bus on the board.
The logic control unit communicates with the active and standby system control and
communication units using the system control bus. Specifically, the logic control unit
transmits the configuration data and query commands from the system control and
communication unit to various units of the board; it also transmits the command responses,
alarms, and performance events reported by units on the board to the system control and
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit performs the following functions:
Receives two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies from the backplane, converts the supplied
power into +3.3 V power by using the DC-DC unit, and then supplies the +3.3 V power to the
other units on the board.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit receives the system clock from the control bus on the backplane, and
supplies clock signals to other units on the EF8F.
l The clock unit receives IEEE 1588v2 messages and IEEE 1588 ACR messages from the
FE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time
synchronization.
l The clock unit supports synchronous Ethernet clock.
8.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 8-3 shows the front panel of the EF8F.
Figure 8-3 Front panel of the EF8F

OUT1 IN1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 IN3 OUT4 IN4 OUT5 IN5 OUT6 IN6 OUT7 IN7 OUT8 IN8
EF8F
STAT
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4
L/A5
L/A6
L/A7
L/A8
SRV
Indicators
The front panel of the EF8F has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, L/A1, L/A2, L/A3,
L/A4, L/A5, L/A6, L/A7, and L/A8. For status explanation for the indicators, see 22.2 Board
Indicators.

Transport Platform
Ports
Table 8-5 Ports on an EF8F board

Port Descripti Connector Type Pin Assignment Required
on Cable
IN1- Input ports LC SFP optical module l OUT 17.1.2

IN8 for the first OUT IN represents the Connector
to eighth transmit port. s
FE optical l IN represents
signals the receive
OUT1- Output port.
OUT8 ports for
the first to
eighth FE
optical
signals
8.1.6 Valid Slots

The EF8F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 3 and 5 >
slots 1 and 2 > slots 4 and 6. The logical slots of the EF8F on the NMS are the same as its
physical slots.
8.1.7 Feature Code

None.
8.1.8 Parameters Can Be Set or Queried by NMS

This section lists the board parameters that can be set or queried using the NMS.
Parameters for Ethernet Interfaces
Table 8-6 Parameters for the basic attributes of an Ethernet port

Field Value Range Description
Port Example: 1- Displays the port name.

EM6F-1(PORT-1)
Name Example: Port 1 Enters the port name

specified by the user.

Transport Platform
Enable Port Enabled, Disabled The Enable Port parameter

Default value: Enabled sets whether the Ethernet port
is usable.
Impact on the System:
When services are available
on the Ethernet port, setting
this port to disabled interrupts
the services.
Value description:
l Enabled: The port is
usable.
l Disabled: The port is
unusable.
Recommendations:
When a port is used for
transmitting services, enable
this port first.
Port Mode Layer 2, Layer 3, Layer Mix Selects the working mode of
Default value: Layer 2 the Ethernet port.
NOTE l If this field is set to Layer
For the equipment, this field 2, the port can be used to
cannot be set to Layer Mix. receive Ethernet services
from the user equipment
or to transmit Ethernet
services that exclusively
occupy the port.
l If this field is set to Layer
3, the port can carry
tunnels.

Transport Platform
Encapsulation Type Null, 802.1Q, QinQ The Encapsulation Type

Default value: 802.1Q parameter sets the link layer
encapsulation type of the
port, and specifies the link
layer encapsulation type that
can be identified by this port.
Value description:
l Null: No link layer is
available, or the link layer
encapsulation is not
processed.
l 802.1Q: In the Layer 2
mode, the encapsulation
type of the Ethernet port is
802.1Q by default.
l QinQ: When the Ethernet
port is used for QinQ
Link, the port attribute
should be set to Layer 2,
and the encapsulation type
should be set to QinQ. In
addition, QinQ Type
Domain of the two
interconnected Ethernet
ports should be set to the
same value.
Recommendations:
Currently, the encapsulation
type of the Ethernet port can
be set. In addition, the
encapsulation type can be
switched only when the port
does not carry services.
In the Layer 2 mode, the
Ethernet port can be Null,
802.1Q, and QinQ. In the
Layer 3 mode, the
Ethernet port, which is fixed
to 802.1Q, cannot be set.

Transport Platform
Working Mode 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full- Set the Working Mode
Duplex, Auto-Negotiation, parameter to set the working
100M Half-Duplex, 100M mode of the Ethernet port on
Full-Duplex, 1000M Full- the board. The Working
Duplex, 10G Full-Duplex Mode parameter indicates the
LAN, 10G Full-Duplex WAN maximum transmission rate
Default value: Auto- and communication mode of
Negotiation a port.
If the working modes of
interconnected Ethernet ports
are inconsistent, the services
are not available or have a
severe packet loss problem.
Value description:
l 10M Half-Duplex: The
maximum transmission
rate of the port is 10
Mbit/s and the
communication mode is
half-duplex.
l 10M Full-Duplex: The
Mbit/s and the
full-duplex.
l Auto-Negotiation: The
port uses the protocol to
automatically specify the
best working mode that
matches the opposite port
for communication.
Mbit/s and the
half-duplex.
Mbit/s and the
full-duplex.

Transport Platform
Mbit/s and the

full-duplex.
l 10G Full-Duplex LAN:
The maximum
transmission rate of the
port is 10 Gbit/s and the
full-duplex. This value is
applicable to the Ethernet
port.
l 10G Full-Duplex WAN:
The maximum
applicable to the SDH
port.
Recommendations:
The Auto-Negotiation
working mode is
recommended. If the
communication fails and the
working mode of the port is
set to Auto-Negotiation, you
need specify the working
mode of the port according to
the working mode of the
interconnected port.
If the working mode of the
port is set to any other mode
instead of Auto-Negotiation,
interconnected port should be
the same. Otherwise, the
communication is not
available.
In the case of equipment
interconnection, set the
communication modes of the
interconnected ports to full-
duplex.

Transport Platform
Max Frame 960-9600 This parameter specifies the

Length(bytes) Default value: 1620 maximum length of a frame
traversing a port. When the
length of a frame exceeds the
specified maximum frame
length, the frame will be
discarded or the service will
be interrupted.
Auto-Negotiation Ability 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full- Displays the auto-negotiation

Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, capability of the Ethernet
100M Full-Duplex, 1000M port.
Half-Duplex, 1000M Full- l Auto-Negotiation Ability
Duplex is valid only when
Default value: 100M Full- Working Mode is set to
Duplex Auto-Negotiation.
Logical Port Attribute - Displays the optical attribute

of the logical Ethernet port.
Physical Port Attribute - Displays the optical attribute

of the physical Ethernet port
Running Status - Indicates the running status of

the port.
Table 8-7 Parameters for flow control at Ethernet ports


EM6F-1(PORT-1)

Transport Platform
Non-Autonegotiation Disabled, Enable Symmetric If the port does not work in

Flow Control Mode Flow Control, Send Only, auto-negotiation mode, this
Receive Only field is set to Non-
Default value: Disabled Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode.
NOTE
For the OptiX OSN equipment, l Enable Symmetric Flow
this field cannot be set to Send Control: The port can
Only and Receive Only. transmit and receive the
PAUSE frame.
l Send Only The port only
transmits the PAUSE
frame. Receive Only: The
port only receives the
PAUSE frame.
The setting of this field must
match that of Non-
Autonegotiation Flow
Control Mode for the
equipment at the opposite
end.
Auto-Negotiation Flow Disabled, Enable If the port works in auto-

Control Mode Dissymmetric Flow Control, negotiation mode, this field is
Enable Symmetric Flow set to Auto-Negotiation Flow
Control, Enable Symmetric/ Control Mode.
Dissymmetric Flow Control l Enable Dissymmetric
Default value: Disabled Flow Control: The port
NOTE only transmits the PAUSE
For the OptiX OSN equipment, frame.
this field cannot be set to
l Enable Symmetric Flow
Enable Dissymmetric Flow
Control and Enable Control: The port can
Symmetric/Dissymmetric Flow transmit and receive only
Control. the PAUSE frame.
l Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control: The auto-
negotiation mode
determines the symmetric/
dissymmetric flow control
mode.
match that of Auto-
Negotiation Flow Control
Mode for the equipment at
the opposite end.

Transport Platform
Table 8-8 Parameters for Layer 2 attributes of Ethernet ports

Port Example:3-EM6F-1(PORT-1) Displays the port name.
QinQ Type Domain 0x0600-0xFFFF Specifies the QinQ type

Default value: 88A8 domain.
This field is available only
when Encapsulation Type in
General Attributes is set to
QinQ.
Tag Tag Aware, Access, Hybrid Identifies the type of packets.

Default value: Tag Aware l Tag Aware: If the port is
set to Tag aware, the port
transparently transmits the
packets with a VLAN ID
(namely, tagged packets)
and discards the packets
without a VLAN ID
(namely, untagged
packets). At this time,
Default VLAN ID and
VLAN Priority are
unavailable.
l Access: If the port is set to
Access, the port attaches
the default VLAN ID to
the packets without a
VLAN ID (namely,
untagged packets) and
discards the packets with a
VLAN ID (namely, tagged
packets).
l Hybrid: If the port is set
to Hybrid, the port
attaches the default VLAN
ID to the packets without a
VLAN ID (namely,
(namely, tagged packets).
This field is unavailable if
Encapsulation Type in
QinQ.

Transport Platform
Default VLAN ID 1-4094 Specifies the default VLAN

Default value: 1 ID of the packets that can be
transmitted by the port.
l If TAG is set to Access,
the port discards the
packets that contain the
VLAN ID, but attaches the
default VLAN ID to the
packets that do not contain
a VLAN ID and then
transmits these packets.
l If TAG is set to Hybrid,
the port transmits the
packets that contain a
TAG, and attaches the
a TAG and then transmits
these packets.
VLAN Priority 0-7 Specifies the quality of

Default value: 0 service. For example, on a
busy network, the higher-
priority packets are processed
first whereas the lower-
priority packets may be
discarded. The value 0
indicates the lowest priority,
and the value 7 indicates the
highest priority.
The default value is
recommended unless
otherwise specified.
Table 8-9 Parameters for the Layer 3 attributes of an Ethernet port

Parameter Value Range Description
Port For example, 3- Displays the port name.

EM6F-1(PORT-1)

Transport Platform
Enable Tunnel Enabled, Disabled The Enable Tunnel(Ethernet

Default value: Disabled Interface) parameter sets the
MPLS enabling state of the
port. When Enable Tunnel is
set to Enabled, it indicates
that the port can identify and
process the MPLS label.
If the MPLS is disabled, the
services on the port are
interrupted.
Value description:
l Enabled: The MPLS is
enabled.
l Disabled: The MPLS is
disabled.
Recommendations:
When the services are
configured, the MPLS should
not be disabled.
Max Reserved For example, 102400 Sets the maximum bandwidth

Bandwidth(kbit/s) used by the tunnel.
The maximum reserved
bandwidth should not exceed
the physical bandwidth of the
bearer port.
Available - Displays the available

Bandwidth(kbit/s) bandwidth of the port. The
Available Bandwidth value
is obtained from equipment
and refreshed automatically
when the Max Reserved
Bandwidth value of the port
is modified or the tunnel
traversing the port is adjusted.

Transport Platform
Specify IP Address Manually, Unspecified The Specify IP Address

Default value: Unspecified parameter, set by port,
indicates the method of
specifying the IP address
parameter of a specified port.
The IP address parameter of
the port is the prerequisite for
MPLS service creation. If the
current IP address parameter
is invalid, the services cannot
be created.
Value description:
l Manually: Indicates the IP
parameter of the specified
port. If the IP address
parameter is valid, specify
an IP address to the
current port. If the IP
address is invalid, release
the IP address of the
current port.
l Unspecified: Indicates that
the IP address of the port
is not specified.
Association with other
parameters:
The IP address parameter can
be configured only when the
port is in the Layer 3 mode.
IP Address For example, 192.168.0.1 Specifies the IP address of a

port.
This parameter is available
when Specify IP Address is
set to Manually.
IP addresses of Ethernet ports
on an NE cannot be in the
same network segment. IP
addresses of the ports at both
ends of a link, however, must
be in the same network
segment.

Transport Platform
IP Mask For example, 255.255.255.0 Specifies the subnet mask of a

port.
set to Manually.
An IP mask address
determines the range of
available IP addresses.
Table 8-10 Parameters for the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port


EM6F-1(PORT-1)
Port Physical Parameters For example: Port Enable: Displays physical parameters
Enabled, Working Mode: of the port.
Auto-Negotiation, Non-
Autonegotiation Flow Control
Mode: Disabled, MAC
Loopback: Non-Loopback,
PHY Loopback: Non-
Loopback
MAC Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, This parameter specifies the

Outloop loopback state at the MAC
Default value: Non-Loopback layer. When this parameter is
set to Inloop, the Ethernet
NOTE
The OptiX OSN equipment
signals transmitted to the
supports only Non-Loopback opposite end are looped back.
and Inloop. In normal cases, it is
recommended that you use
the default value.

Transport Platform
PHY Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, The PHY Loopback

Outloop parameter indicates the
Default value: Non-Loopback loopback status of the
physical layer of an Ethernet
NOTE
port. This parameter is an
supports only Non-Loopback advanced attribute of the
and Inloop. Ethernet port.
As a fault diagnosis function,
setting PHY loopback affects
the services configured on the
port. In the case of loopback,
interrupted.
Value description:
l Non-Loopback: Indicates
the normal status. When
the equipment is operating
normally, loopback is not
required.
l Inloop: At the local
equipment, the outgoing
services of an Ethernet
port are looped back at the
physical layer and input to
this Ethernet port.
l Outloop: At the local
equipment, the incoming
physical layer and output
to this Ethernet port.
Recommendations:
The PHY loopback is mainly
used to locate a fault. When
setting this parameter,
determine the loopback type
according to the service flow
direction.
MAC Address For example, Displays the MAC address of

00-5A-3D-03-4C-1B an Ethernet port.
Transmitting Rate(kbit/s) Example: 1024 Displays the rate for

transmitting data packets.
Receiving Rate(kbit/s) Example: 1024 Displays the rate for receiving

data packets.

Transport Platform
Loopback Check Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether loop

detection is enabled.
When loop detection is
enabled, the equipment
automatically detects whether
a loop exists on the link. If a
loop exists, the equipment
reports a loop alarm.
Loopback Port Block Enabled, Disabled Specifies whether the

automatic port shutdown
function is enabled.
When Loopback Check is set
to Enabled and Loopback
Port Block is set to Enabled,
the equipment automatically
detects whether a loop exists
on the link. If a loop exists,
shuts down the port to
eliminate the loop.
Egress PIR 1000-100000 Specifies the egress PIR

Bandwidth(kbit/s) NOTE bandwidth.
The OptiX OSN equipment does
not support this function.
Enabling Broadcast Disabled, Enabled Specifies whether the

Packet Suppression Default value: Disabled broadcast packet suppression
function at the port is enabled
to limit the traffic rate of the
incoming broadcast packets.
If the broadcast packet
suppression function is
enabled, and if the traffic rate
of the incoming broadcast
packets exceeds the specified
value, the last received
broadcast packets are
discarded.
NOTE
Enabling Broadcast Packet
Suppression is valid for UNI
ports only.

Transport Platform
Broadcast Packet Example: 3 Allocates the specified

Suppression Threshold bandwidth to the broadcast
packets according to the
proportion of the broadcast
packets in the total packets at
the port. If the actual
bandwidth of the broadcast
threshold, the port discards
the last received broadcast
packets.
Network Cable Mode Network Cable Mode Auto- Specifies the mode of
Sensing, MDIX, MDI network cables.
8.1.9 EF8F Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the port performance, dimensions,
weight, and power consumption.
Table 8-11 lists the technical specifications of the EF8F.
Table 8-11 Technical Specifications of the EF8F

Item Performance
Service ports For the specifications of the FE optical port, see Table 8-12, Table
8-13, and Table 8-14.
Table 8-12 Specifications of the FE optical ports

Item Value
Optical port 100BASE-FX 100BASE-LX 100BASE-VX 100BASE-ZX

type
Optical fiber Multi-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode Single-mode

type LC LC
Transmissio 2 15 40 80
n distance
(km)
Operating 1270 to 1380 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

wavelength
(nm)

Transport Platform
Item Value
Mean -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

launched
power
(dBm)
Receiver -30 -28 -34 -34

minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -14 -8 -10 -10

overload
(dBm)
Minimum 10 8.2 10 10
extinction
ratio (dB)
Table 8-13 Specifications of the FE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports

Parameter Value
Type of optical interface 100Base-BX
Transmission distance 15 40
(km)
Type of fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC
Operating transmit 1550 1310 1550 1310

wavelength (nm)
Operating receive 1310 1550 1310 1550

wavelength (nm)
Launched optical power -15 to -8 -5 to 0

range (dBm)
Receiver sensitivity -32 -32

(dBm)
Minimum overload -8 -10

(dBm)
Minimum extinction 8.5 10

ratio (dB)

Transport Platform
Table 8-14 Ethernet performance specifications of the FE optical ports

Item Performance
Frame Throughput Latency (us) Packet Loss Back-to-Back

Length (pks/sec) Ratio (%) (Frames)
(Bytes)
64.00 148810.00 44.90 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 65.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 106.50 0.00 226450.00
512.00 23496.00 182.20 0.00 117480.00
1024.00 11973.00 241.10 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 269.20 0.00 48075.00
1518.00 8126.00 292.20 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 341.90 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 1133.30 0.00 6459.00
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.55 kg (1.21 lb.)
Power Consumption
EF8F 15 18
8.2 EM6F
The EM6F is an FE/GE processing board.

The functional version of the EM6F is TNF1.

Transport Platform
Version
Table 8-15 describes the version mapping of the EM6F board.
Table 8-15 Version description of the EM6F
Item Description

8.2.2 Application
The EM6F is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data
Figure 8-4 shows the typical networking and application of the EM6F. The EM6F works with
of packet features.
Figure 8-4 Networking and application of the EM6F
Packet Packet
board board
FE
GE ring 10GE
GE

EM6F UXC service GE GE service UXC service 10GE
GE board board board
OptiX OSN equipment
NG-WDM equipment

Transport Platform

The EM6F receives/transmits and processes four FE signals and two GE signals.
Table 8-16 lists the functions and features that the EM6F supports. The EM6F needs to work
Table 8-16 Functions and features that the EM6F supports

Function and Description
Feature
Basic functions Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals and works with the
packet switching unit to process the received FE/GE service
signals.
Backplane bus 2.5 Gbit/s

bandwidth
Port FE Provides four 10/100BASE-T(X) ports.

specifica electrical
tions port
FE optical l GE ports can function as FE optical ports if pluggable FE

port optical modules are used. The following types of FE optical
ports are supported: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASE-
LX/100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX.
l The following types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules are supported:
FE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
FE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
GE port l Provides two GE ports by using SFP modules of any of the

following types: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-
VX/1000BASE-ZX/1000Base-T.
l The following types of SFP modules are supported:
GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
GE pluggable electrical module
l A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port. A
colored CWDM optical port supports a transmission distance
of 40 km or 80 km.

Transport Platform

Feature
Port Working l The FE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-
attributes mode duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l The FE optical port supports 10M full-duplex and 100M full-
duplex.
l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex, 10M half-
duplex, 100M full-duplex, 100M half-duplex, 1000M full-
duplex, and auto-negotiation.
l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-
negotiation.
TAG The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.
attributes
Traffic Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies

control at with IEEE 802.3x.
ports
Port type Supported

query
Query and Supported

setting of
optical
power
thresholds
Packet E-Line l Native ETH services:

services services E-Line services based on point-to-point transparent
transmission
(VLANs)
l ETH pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) services:
E-Line services carried by PWs (VPWS services)
E-LAN l Native ETH services:

services E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
Ethernet IEEE 802.3/Ethernet II

data frame
format
Jumbo Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.

frame

Transport Platform

Feature
Maximum Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes being the
transmissio default value.
n unit
(MFL)
Protectio Tunnel Supports 1:1 tunnel APS.

n automatic
schemes protection
switching
(APS)
Pseudo Supports 1:1 PW APS/FPS.

wire (PW)
APS/FPS
Multiple Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal Spanning
Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides the same
Tree functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Protocol
(MSTP)
Ethernet Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.

ring
protection
switching
(ERPS)
Link l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static aggregation

aggregatio l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load sharing
n group
(LAG)
Link-state Point-point and point-multipoint LPT.

pass
through
(LPT)
MRPS Supported

Transport Platform

Feature
Quality of service l DiffServ

(QoS) Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB
information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP
values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.
Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN
IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities, C-
VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN
priorities, or DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI
ingress policies.
l QoS policies
Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-
UNI ingresses.
l Shaping
Mainten Multiproto l Tunnel OAM and PW OAM are supported.

ance col Label l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification (CV), fast
features Switching failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication (BDI),
(MPLS)/ forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests in
Multiproto compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
col label
switching l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs), remote
transport defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal (AIS)
profile insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss
(MPLS- measurement (LM), and two-way delay measurement (DM)
TP) in compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1.
operation,
administrat
ion and
maintenanc
e (OAM)

Transport Platform

Feature
Ethernet l Ethernet service OAM:

OAM Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion in
(ETH compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
OAM)
performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and selfloop
checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.

Ethernet ports
l Ethernet performance monitoring (remote network monitoring [RMON])
Synchro Synchrono Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at six ports.

nization us Ethernet NOTE
SFP electrical modules do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks.
Data communication Each FE/GE port provides one inband DCN channel.
network (DCN)
Internet Group Supports IGMP Snooping V1/V2/V3.

Management Protocol
(IGMP) snooping

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EM6F.

Transport Platform
Figure 8-5 EM6F board function block diagram

Backplane
GE signal
GE signal
Control signal Ethernet Ethernet
access unit
Service signal Dual-fed and signal
processing unit selective- Packet switching unit
receiving unit
FE signal Control signal
access unit
FE signal
System control bus

-48 V/-60 V
Power
System power supply
-48 V/-60 V

Table 8-17 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EM6F

1 GE signal access l Receives GE/FE signals.

unit/FE signal l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
access unit conversion for GE/FE signals.
and cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs) for frame
signals.

Transport Platform
(PWE3) packets.

unit
Table 8-18 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EM6F

processing unit.
3 GE signal access l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and

unit/FE signal access CRC code computing.
unit l Performs parallel/serial conversion and coding for
GE/FE signals through Ethernet ports.

The service processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit using management control
signals.

Transport Platform
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
This unit receives the system clock from the control bus in the backplane and provides clock
signals to the other units on the board.
8.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, FE service ports, and GE service ports on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 8-6 Front panel of the EM6F

EM6F
EM6F
CLASS1
LASER
LINK1
LINK2
STAT
PROG
SRV
PRODUCT
GE1 GE2 FE1 FE2 FE3 FE4
Indicators
The front panel of the EM6F has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, PROG, LINK1, and
LINK2. For status explanation for the indicators, see 22.2 Board Indicators.

Transport Platform
Ports
Table 8-19 Ports on an EM6F board

Port Descriptio Connector Type Pin Required
n Assignmen Cable
t
FE1, FE2, FE service RJ45 The FE ports 17.3

FE3, FE4 port and GE Manageme
87 65 4 32 1 electrical nt Cables
GE1/GE2 FE/GE GE electrical ports support
service port port: SFP For status the MDI,
(using SFP electrical explanation MDI-X, and
modules) module for the auto-MDI/
indicators of MDI-X
an RJ45 modes.
port, see Table 8-21
Table 8-20. and Table
8-22 provide
the pin
assignments
for an RJ45
port in
different
modes.
FE/GE optical port: LC SFP l TX 17.1.2

optical module represent Connectors
s the
TX RX transmit
port.
l RX
represent
s the
receive
port.
Table 8-20 Status explanation for indicators on an Ethernet port

Indicator State Meaning
LINK (green) On The Ethernet link is working

properly.
Off The Ethernet link is interrupted.
LINK (yellow) On or blinking The port is receiving or transmitting

data.
Off The port is not receiving or

transmitting data.

Transport Platform
Table 8-21 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI mode

Pin 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX 1000BASE-T
Signal Function Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+) BIDA+ Bidirectional data wire A

(+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-) BIDA- Bidirectional data wire A

(-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+) BIDB+ Bidirectional data wire B

(+)
4 Reserved - BIDC+ Bidirectional data wire C

(+)
5 Reserved - BIDC- Bidirectional data wire C

(-)
6 RX- Receiving data (-) BIDB- Bidirectional data wire B

(-)
7 Reserved - BIDD+ Bidirectional data wire D

(+)
8 Reserved - BIDD- Bidirectional data wire D

(-)
Table 8-22 Pin assignments for an RJ45 port in MDI-X mode


(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

Transport Platform

(-)
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EM6F.
The laser safety class label CLASS 1 indicates that the maximum launched optical power of
the optical port is lower than 10 dBm (10 mW).
8.2.6 Valid Slots

The EM6F can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4 and 6
> slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the EM6F on the NMS are the same as its
physical slots.
8.2.7 Feature Code

None.
8.2.8 EM6F Parameters



EM6F-1(PORT-1)


Transport Platform

is usable.
the services.
Value description:
usable.
unusable.
Recommendations:
this port first.
occupy the port.
tunnels.

Transport Platform

Value description:
processed.
802.1Q by default.
addition, QinQ Type
Domain of the two
same value.
Recommendations:
Layer 3 mode, the

Transport Platform
Negotiation a port.
Value description:
Mbit/s and the
half-duplex.
Mbit/s and the
full-duplex.
for communication.
Mbit/s and the
half-duplex.
Mbit/s and the
full-duplex.

Transport Platform
Mbit/s and the

full-duplex.
The maximum
port.
The maximum
port.
Recommendations:
working mode is
recommended. If the
available.
duplex.

Transport Platform

be interrupted.




the port.


EM6F-1(PORT-1)

Transport Platform

Control Mode.
NOTE
PAUSE frame.
transmits the PAUSE
PAUSE frame.
match that of Non-
end.

l Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control: The auto-
negotiation mode
mode.
match that of Auto-
the opposite end.

Transport Platform


QinQ.

without a VLAN ID
(namely, untagged
Default VLAN ID and
VLAN Priority are
unavailable.
VLAN ID (namely,
packets).
to Hybrid, the port
VLAN ID (namely,
QinQ.

Transport Platform

a VLAN ID and then
these packets.

highest priority.
recommended unless


EM6F-1(PORT-1)

Transport Platform

interrupted.
Value description:
enabled.
disabled.
Recommendations:
not be disabled.

bearer port.


Transport Platform

be created.
Value description:
current port.
is not specified.
parameters:

port.
set to Manually.
segment.

Transport Platform

port.
set to Manually.
An IP mask address


EM6F-1(PORT-1)
Mode: Disabled, MAC
PHY Loopback: Non-
Loopback

NOTE
the default value.

Transport Platform

NOTE
interrupted.
Value description:
required.
this Ethernet port.
Recommendations:
direction.



data packets.

Transport Platform


eliminate the loop.


discarded.
NOTE
ports only.

Transport Platform

packets.
8.2.9 EM6F Specifications

Table 8-28 lists the technical specifications of the EM6F.
Table 8-28 Technical specifications of the EM6F

Item Performance
Service FE1, FE electrical port See Table 8-29 and Table 8-30.
ports FE2,
FE3,
FE4
GE1, FE optical port See Table 8-31, Table 8-32, and

GE2 Table 8-33.
GE electrical port See Table 8-29 and Table 8-34.
GE optical port By using different SFP modules,

the equipment provides GE
optical ports with different
application codes and
transmission distances.
For port specifications, see Table
8-35, Table 8-36, Table 8-37,
andTable 8-38.

Transport Platform
Table 8-29 Specifications of the Ethernet electrical ports

Service Port Port Rate Code Pattern Port Type
GE/FE 10BASE-T Manchester coding RJ45

electrical port signals
GE/FE 100BASE-TX MLT-3 coding

electrical port signals
GE electrical 1000BASE-T 4D-PAM5 coding

port signals
Table 8-30 Ethernet performance specifications of the FE electrical ports

Item Performance

(Bytes)
64.00 148810.00 12.80 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 17.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 28.00 0.00 226450.00
512.00 23496.00 48.40 0.00 117480.00
1024.00 11973.00 89.40 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 109.80 0.00 48075.00
1518.00 8126.00 129.00 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 167.50 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 773.10 0.00 6459.00

Item Value

type

type LC LC
n distance
(km)

Transport Platform
Item Value

wavelength
(nm)
Mean -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

launched
power
(dBm)
Receiver -30 -28 -34 -34

minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -14 -8 -10 -10

overload
(dBm)
Minimum 10 8.2 10 10
extinction
ratio (dB)

Parameter Value
(km)

wavelength (nm)

wavelength (nm)

range (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

ratio (dB)

Transport Platform

Item Performance

(Bytes)
64.00 148810.00 44.90 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 65.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 106.50 0.00 226450.00
512.00 23496.00 182.20 0.00 117480.00
1024.00 11973.00 241.10 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 269.20 0.00 48075.00
1518.00 8126.00 292.20 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 341.90 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 1133.30 0.00 6459.00
Table 8-34 Ethernet performance specifications of the GE electrical ports

Item Performance

(Bytes)
64.00 1488095.00 7.00 0.00 7440475.00
128.00 844595.00 7.40 0.00 4222975.00
256.00 452899.00 8.40 0.00 2264495.00
512.00 234962.00 10.60 0.00 1174810.00
1024.00 119732.00 14.70 0.00 598660.00
1280.00 96154.00 17.00 0.00 480770.00
1518.00 81274.00 18.90 0.00 406370.00
2000.00 61881.00 22.60 0.00 309405.00
9600.00 12994.00 83.40 0.00 64970.00

Transport Platform
Table 8-35 Specifications of the GE optical ports

Item Value
Optical port 1000BASE-SX 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-ZX

type
Optical fiber Multi-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC

type
Transmission 0.5 10 40 80
distance (km)

wavelength
(nm)
Mean -9.5 to -2.5 -9 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +5

launched
power (dBm)
Receiver -17 -20 -23 -23

minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio (dB)
Table 8-36 Specifications of the GE single-fiber bidirectional optical ports

Paramete Value
r
Type of 1000BASE-LX 1000BASE-LX

optical
interface
Transmiss 10 40
ion
distance
(km)
Type of Single-mode LC Single-mode LC

fiber
Operating 1490 1310 1490 1310

transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)

Transport Platform
Paramete Value
r
Operating 1310 1490 1310 1490

receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
Launched -9 to -3 -2 to 3
optical
power
range
(dBm)
Receiver -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9
extinction
ratio (dB)
Table 8-37 Ethernet performance specifications of the GE optical ports

Item Performance

(Bytes)
64.00 1488095.00 9.00 0.00 7440475.00
128.00 844595.00 11.80 0.00 4222975.00
256.00 452899.00 17.30 0.00 2264495.00
512.00 234962.00 25.00 0.00 1174810.00
1024.00 119732.00 29.20 0.00 598660.00
1280.00 96154.00 31.30 0.00 480770.00
1518.00 81274.00 33.40 0.00 406370.00
2000.00 61881.00 37.40 0.00 309405.00
9600.00 12994.00 98.00 0.00 64970.00

Transport Platform
Table 8-38 Parameters specified for colored GE optical ports (CWDM)

Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit 1,250,000 kbit/s

rate
Type of fiber Single-mode LC
Transmission 40 80
distance (km)
Launched 0 to 5 0 to 5
optical power
range (dBm)
Operating 1471 to 1611, in steps of 1471 to 1611, in steps of 20

wavelength 20
range (nm)
Receiver -19 -28

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -9
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
(dB)
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.4 kg
Power Consumption
EM6F 10.7 11.2

Transport Platform
8.3 EG4C
The EG4C is a 4xGE processing board.

The functional version of the EG4C is TNF1.
Version
Table 8-39 describes the version mapping of the EG4C board.
Table 8-39 Version description of the EG4C

Item Description

8.3.2 Application
The EG4C is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data
Figure 8-7 shows the typical networking and application of the EG4C. The EG4C works with
of packet features.

Transport Platform
Figure 8-7 Networking and application of the EG4C
Packet Packet
board board
FE
GE ring 10GE
GE

EG4C UXC service GE GE service UXC service 10GE
GE board board board
OptiX OSN equipment
NG-WDM equipment

The EG4C receives/transmits and processes 4xFE/GE signals.
Table 8-40 lists the functions and features that the EG4C supports. The EG4C needs to work
Table 8-40 Functions and features that the EG4C supports

Function and Feature Description
Basic functions Receives/Transmits FE/GE service signals, and

process these signals by working with the packet
switching unit.
Backplane bus bandwidth 5 Gbit/s

Transport Platform
Port specifications Provides optical/electrical ports for 4xFE/GE signals.

On the front panel of an EG4C board, the first four
ports are optical ports using small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) optical modules, and the last four
ports are fixed electrical ports. The ports with the
same ID cannot be used simultaneously.
l The following types of FE small form-factor
pluggable (SFP) optical modules are supported:
100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/
100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX
l The following types of GE SFP optical modules
are supported: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/
1000BASE-VX/1000BASE-ZX
l The following types of SFP modules are
supported:
FE/GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable
optical module
FE/GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable
optical module
l A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM
optical port. A colored CWDM optical port
supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80
km.
l A GE optical port can be a colored DWDM
optical port. A colored DWDM optical port
supports a transmission distance of 120 km.
Port attributes Working mode l The GE electrical port supports 10M full-duplex,
100M full-duplex, 1000M full-duplex, and auto-
negotiation.
l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex
and auto-negotiation.
l The FE optical port supports 100M full-duplex.
TAG attributes The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or
hybrid.

function complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Query and Supported

setting of
optical power
thresholds

Transport Platform
Packet services Ethernet line l Native ETH services:

(E-Line) E-Line services based on point-to-point
services transparent transmission
E-Line services based on virtual local area
networks (VLANs)
E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q
(QinQ)
services)
Ethernet local l Native ETH services:

area network E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
(E-LAN)
services E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1q bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad
bridges

frame format
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of

9600 bytes.
Maximum Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620

transmission bytes being the default value.
unit (MFL)

schemes automatic
protection
switching
(APS)

(PW) APS/FPS

Protocol provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning
(MSTP) Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Ethernet ring Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.

protection 1344.
switching
(ERPS)

group (LAG) l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load
sharing

Transport Platform
Link-state pass Point-point and point-multipoint LPT.

through (LPT)
MRPS Supported

Supports simple traffic classification by
specifying PHB service classes for service flows
based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or
MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.
Supports complex traffic classification based on
C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI
ingress policies.
l QoS policies
Supports port policies and V-UNI ingress policies.
Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches
rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress
policy.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at
ports and V-UNI ingresses.
l Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW
ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
Maintenance Multiprotocol l Tunnel OAM and PW OAM are supported.

features Label l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification
Switching (CV), fast failure detection (FFD), backward
(MPLS)/ defect indication (BDI), forward defect indication
Multiprotocol (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests in compliance
label switching with ITU-T Y.1711.
transport profile
(MPLS-TP) l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks
operation, (CCs), remote defect indication (RDI), alarm
administration indication signal (AIS) insertion, loopback (LB)
and tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss measurement
maintenance (LM), and two-way delay measurement (DM) in
(OAM) compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1.

Transport Platform
Ethernet OAM l Ethernet service OAM:

(ETH OAM) Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS
insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM
with reference to ITU-T Y.7131.
l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-
discovery, link performance monitoring, remote
loopbacks, and selfloop checks in compliance
with IEEE 802.3ah.

Ethernet ports
l Ethernet performance monitoring (remote network monitoring
[RMON])
Synchronizatio Synchronous Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at four

n Ethernet ports.
IEEE 1588v2 Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at

four ports.
IEEE 1588 Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at four ports.

adaptive clock
recovery (ACR)
Data communication network Provides one inband DCN channel at each GE port.
(DCN)


This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EG4C.

Transport Platform
Figure 8-8 EG4C board function block diagram

Backplane
Ethernet Ethernet
signal Dual-fed and signal
FE/GE signal Control signal Service
selective- Packet switching unit
access unit processing unit
receiving unit
FE/GE signal
System control bus

-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V power supplied Power Fuse System power supply
System power supply
-48 V/-60 V

Table 8-41 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EG4C

1 FE/GE signal access l Receives FE/GE signals.

conversion for FE/GE signals.
signals.

Transport Platform
(PWE3) packets.

unit
Table 8-42 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EG4C

processing unit.
3 FE/GE signal access l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and

unit CRC code computing.
FE/GE signals through Ethernet ports.

The service processing unit controls the FE/GE signal access unit using management control
signals.

Transport Platform
communication unit to other units on the EG4C; it also transmits the response messages,
alarms, and performance events from other units on the EG4C to the system control and
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
supplies clock signals to other units on the EG4C.
FE/GE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time
synchronization.
8.3.5 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 8-9 Front panel of the EG4C

OUT 1/IN 1 OUT 2/IN 2 OUT 3/IN 3 OUT 4/IN 4
E G4C
STAT
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4
SRV
1 2 3 4
Indicators
The front panel of the EG4C has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, L/A1, L/A2, L/A3, and
L/A4. For status explanation for the indicators, see 22.2 Board Indicators.

Transport Platform
Ports
Table 8-43 Ports on an EG4C board

Port Descrip Connector Type Pin Assignment Required
tion Cable
GE1- GE RJ45 The GE electrical 17.3

GE4 service ports support the Management
port 87 65 4 32 1 medium dependent Cables
(fixed interface (MDI),
electrica For status medium dependent
l port) explanation for interface crossover
the indicators (MDI-X), and auto-
of an RJ45 MDI/MDI-X modes.
port, see Table Table 8-45 and Table
8-44. 8-46 provide the pin
assignments for an
RJ45 port in different
modes.
FE/GE LC SFP optical module l OUT represents 17.1.2

service OUT IN the transmit port. Connectors
port l IN represents the
(using receive port.
SFP
modules
)

L/A (green) On The Ethernet link is working

properly.
L/A (yellow) On or blinking The port is receiving or transmitting

data.

transmitting data.

Transport Platform


(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)


(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

Transport Platform

(-)
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EG4C.
8.3.6 Valid Slots

The EG4C can be inserted in slots 3-6, and slots 4 and 6 are preferred. The logical slots of the
EG4C on the NMS are the same as its physical slots.
8.3.7 Feature Code

None.
8.3.8 EG4C Parameters



EM6F-1(PORT-1)


Transport Platform

is usable.
the services.
Value description:
usable.
unusable.
Recommendations:
this port first.
occupy the port.
tunnels.

Transport Platform

Value description:
processed.
802.1Q by default.
addition, QinQ Type
Domain of the two
same value.
Recommendations:
Layer 3 mode, the

Transport Platform
Negotiation a port.
Value description:
Mbit/s and the
half-duplex.
Mbit/s and the
full-duplex.
for communication.
Mbit/s and the
half-duplex.
Mbit/s and the
full-duplex.

Transport Platform
Mbit/s and the

full-duplex.
The maximum
port.
The maximum
port.
Recommendations:
working mode is
recommended. If the
available.
duplex.

Transport Platform

be interrupted.




the port.


EM6F-1(PORT-1)

Transport Platform

Control Mode.
NOTE
PAUSE frame.
transmits the PAUSE
PAUSE frame.
match that of Non-
end.

l Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control: The auto-
negotiation mode
mode.
match that of Auto-
the opposite end.

Transport Platform


QinQ.

without a VLAN ID
(namely, untagged
Default VLAN ID and
VLAN Priority are
unavailable.
VLAN ID (namely,
packets).
to Hybrid, the port
VLAN ID (namely,
QinQ.

Transport Platform

a VLAN ID and then
these packets.

highest priority.
recommended unless


EM6F-1(PORT-1)

Transport Platform

interrupted.
Value description:
enabled.
disabled.
Recommendations:
not be disabled.

bearer port.


Transport Platform

be created.
Value description:
current port.
is not specified.
parameters:

port.
set to Manually.
segment.

Transport Platform

port.
set to Manually.
An IP mask address


EM6F-1(PORT-1)
Mode: Disabled, MAC
PHY Loopback: Non-
Loopback

NOTE
the default value.

Transport Platform

NOTE
interrupted.
Value description:
required.
this Ethernet port.
Recommendations:
direction.



data packets.

Transport Platform


eliminate the loop.


discarded.
NOTE
ports only.

Transport Platform

packets.
8.3.9 EG4C Specifications

Table 8-52 lists the technical specifications of the EG4C.
Table 8-52 Technical Specifications of the EG4C

Item Performance
Service GE1- GE electrical port See Table 8-53 and Table 8-54.
ports GE4
FE/GE optical port By using various SFP modules,
the equipment provides FE/GE
optical ports with various
application codes and
transmission distances.
For FE optical port
specifications, see Table 8-55,
Table 8-56, and Table 8-57.
For GE optical port
specifications, see Table 8-58,
Table 8-59, Table 8-60, Table
8-61, andTable 8-62.
Table 8-53 Specifications of the EG4C Ethernet electrical ports

GE electrical 1000BASE-T 4D-PAM5 coding RJ45

port signals

Transport Platform
Table 8-54 Ethernet performance specifications of the GE electrical ports

Item Performance

(Bytes)
64.00 1488095.00 7.00 0.00 7440475.00
128.00 844595.00 7.40 0.00 4222975.00
256.00 452899.00 8.40 0.00 2264495.00
512.00 234962.00 10.60 0.00 1174810.00
1024.00 119732.00 14.70 0.00 598660.00
1280.00 96154.00 17.00 0.00 480770.00
1518.00 81274.00 18.90 0.00 406370.00
2000.00 61881.00 22.60 0.00 309405.00
9600.00 12994.00 83.40 0.00 64970.00

Item Value

type

type LC LC
n distance
(km)

wavelength
(nm)
Mean -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

launched
power
(dBm)
Receiver -30 -28 -34 -34

minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)

Transport Platform
Item Value
Minimum -14 -8 -10 -10

overload
(dBm)
Minimum 10 8.2 10 10
extinction
ratio (dB)

Parameter Value
(km)

wavelength (nm)

wavelength (nm)

range (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

ratio (dB)

Item Performance

(Bytes)
64.00 148810.00 44.90 0.00 744050.00
128.00 84459.00 65.90 0.00 422295.00
256.00 45290.00 106.50 0.00 226450.00

Transport Platform
Item Performance

(Bytes)
512.00 23496.00 182.20 0.00 117480.00
1024.00 11973.00 241.10 0.00 59865.00
1280.00 9615.00 269.20 0.00 48075.00
1518.00 8126.00 292.20 0.00 40635.00
2000.00 6188.00 341.90 0.00 30940.00
9600.00 1299.00 1133.30 0.00 6459.00

Item Value

type

type
distance (km)

wavelength
(nm)
Mean -9.5 to -2.5 -9 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +5

launched
power (dBm)
Receiver -17 -20 -23 -23

minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio (dB)

Transport Platform

Paramete Value
r

optical
interface
Transmiss 10 40
ion
distance
(km)

fiber
Operating 1490 1310 1490 1310

transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
Operating 1310 1490 1310 1490

receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
optical
power
range
(dBm)
Receiver -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9
extinction
ratio (dB)
Table 8-60 Ethernet performance specifications of the GE optical ports

Item Performance

(Bytes)
64.00 1488095.00 9.00 0.00 7440475.00

Transport Platform
Item Performance

(Bytes)
128.00 844595.00 11.80 0.00 4222975.00
256.00 452899.00 17.30 0.00 2264495.00
512.00 234962.00 25.00 0.00 1174810.00
1024.00 119732.00 29.20 0.00 598660.00
1280.00 96154.00 31.30 0.00 480770.00
1518.00 81274.00 33.40 0.00 406370.00
2000.00 61881.00 37.40 0.00 309405.00
9600.00 12994.00 98.00 0.00 64970.00

Parameter Value
CWDM

rate
Transmission 40 80
distance (km)
optical power
range (dBm)

wavelength 20
range (nm)
Receiver -19 -28

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -9
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
(dB)

Transport Platform
Table 8-62 Parameters specified for colored GE optical ports (DWDM)

Parameter Value
DWDM
Nominal bit 2666057.143 kbit/s

rate
Transmission 120
distance (km)
Launched 0 to 4
optical power
range (dBm)
Operating 192.10 to 196.00

wavelength
range (nm)
Receiver -28
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -8
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 8.2
extinction ratio
(dB)
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.45 kg
Power Consumption
EG4C l 4xGE optical ports: 10 l 4xGE optical ports: 10.6

W W
l 4xGE electrical ports: l 4xGE electrical ports:
7.8 W 8.4 W

Transport Platform
8.4 EX1
The EX1 is a 1x10GE Ethernet processing board.

The functional version of the EX1 is TNF1.
Version
Table 8-63 describes the version mapping of the EX1 board.
Table 8-63 Version description of the EX1

Item Description

8.4.2 Application
The EX1 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets,
manage bandwidths, and implement switching of data packets.
Figure 8-10 shows the typical networking and application of the EX1. The EX1 works with
of packet features.
Figure 8-10 Networking and application of the EX1
System
control,
10GE EX1 switching, EX1 10GE
and timing
board
FE
10GE ring 10GE

GE
System System
control, control,
FE
EG4C switching, EX1 10GE 10GE EX1 switching, EX1 10GE
and timing and timing
GE
board board
Metro convergence MS-OTN equipment
Metro backbone MS-OTN equipment

Transport Platform

The EX1 receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals.
Table 8-64 lists the functions and features that the EX1 supports.
Table 8-64 Functions and features that the EX1 supports

Basic functions Receives/Transmits 10GE service signals, and

processes these signals by working with the packet
switching unit of the system control, switching, and
timing board.
Backplane bus bandwidth 10 Gbit/s
Port specifications l 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN),

10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN), 10GBASE-ER (LAN),
10GBASE-EW (WAN), 10GBASE-ZR (LAN), or
10GBASE-ZW (WAN)
l A 10GE optical port can be a colored CWDM
optical port or a colored DWDM optical port. A
colored CWDM optical port supports a
transmission distance of 70 km. A colored
DWDM optical port supports a transmission
distance of 40 km or 80 km.
l The following types of XFP modules are
supported:
10GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical
module
10GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable
optical module
Port attributes Working mode Supports 10G full-duplex and supports the setting of
the LAN mode or WAN mode.
TAG attributes The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or
hybrid.

at ports complies with IEEE 802.3x.
Query and Supported

setting of
optical power
thresholds

Transport Platform
Packet services E-Line services l Native ETH services:

E-Line services based on point-to-point
transparent transmission
E-Line services based on virtual local area
networks (VLANs)
E-Line services based on 802.1Q in 802.1Q
(QinQ)
services)
E-LAN services l Native ETH services:

E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges
E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1ad
bridges

frame format
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of

9600 bytes.
MFL Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620

bytes being the default value.

schemes automatic
protection
switching
(APS)

(PW) APS/FPS

Protocol provides the same functions as the Rapid Spanning
(MSTP) Tree Protocol (RSTP).
Ethernet ring Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.

protection 1344.
switching
(ERPS)

group (LAG) l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load
sharing

Transport Platform
Link-state pass Point-point and point-multipoint LPT

through (LPT)
MRPS Supported

Supports simple traffic classification by
specifying PHB service classes for service flows
based on their QoS information (C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN priorities, DSCP values, or
MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.
Supports complex traffic classification based on
C-VLAN IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities,
S-VLAN priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN
priorities, S-VLAN IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or
DSCP values carried by packets, and V-UNI
ingress policies.
l QoS policies
Supports port policies, port WRED policy and V-
UNI ingress policies.
Passes or discards packets in a flow that matches
rules specified by a port policy or V-UNI ingress
policy.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at
ports and V-UNI ingresses.
l Shaping
Provides traffic shaping for a specific port, PW
ingress, prioritized queue, or traffic flow.
Maintenance Multiprotocol l Tunnel OAM and PW OAM are supported.

features Label l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification
Switching (CV), fast failure detection (FFD), backward
(MPLS)/ defect indication (BDI), forward defect indication
Multiprotocol (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests in compliance
label switching with ITU-T Y.1711.
transport profile
(MPLS-TP) l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks
operation, (CCs), remote defect indication (RDI), alarm
administration indication signal (AIS) insertion, loopback (LB)
and tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW loss measurement
maintenance (LM), and two-way delay measurement (DM) in
(OAM) compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1.

Transport Platform
ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM:

Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS
insertion in compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
Implements IEEE 802.1ag-based LM and DM
with reference to ITU-T Y.7131.
l Ethernet port OAM: supports OAM auto-
discovery, link performance monitoring, remote
loopbacks, and selfloop checks in compliance
with IEEE 802.3ah.
l Inloops at the physical PHY/MAC layer of Ethernet ports

l XFP module information query
l Ethernet performance monitoring (remote network monitoring
[RMON])
Synchronizatio Synchronous Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at one

n Ethernet port.
IEEE 1588v2 Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at one
port.
NOTE
Ports working in WAN mode do not support IEEE 1588v2.
IEEE 1588 Transmits IEEE 1588 ACR signals at one port.

adaptive clock NOTE
recovery (ACR) Ports working in WAN mode do not support IEEE 1588
ACR.
Data communication network Provides one inband DCN channel.

(DCN)


This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the EX1.

Transport Platform
Figure 8-11 EX1 board function block diagram

Backplane
Ethernet
signal
Ethernet Packet switching unit
signal Dual-fed and (active)
10GE signal Control signal Service
selective-
access unit processing unit
receiving unit
10GE signal Packet switching unit
Ethernet (backup)
signal
System control bus

-48 V/-60 V
System power supply
-48 V/-60 V

Table 8-65 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EX1

1 10GE signal access l Receives 10GE signals.

conversion for 10GE signals.
signals.

Transport Platform
(PWE3) packets.

unit
Table 8-66 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EX1


processing unit.
3 10GE signal access l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition, and

unit CRC code computing.
10GE signals through Ethernet ports.


Transport Platform
communication unit to other units on the EX1; it also transmits the response messages,
alarms, and performance events from other units on the EX1 to the system control and
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
supplies clock signals to other units on the EX1.
l The clock unit processes IEEE 1588v2 and IEEE 1588 ACR protocol packets.
8.4.5 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 8-12 Front panel of the EX1
OUT IN
EX1
STAT
SRV
L/A
Indicators
The front panel of the EX1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, and L/A. For status
explanation for the indicators, see 22.2 Board Indicators.
Ports
Table 8-67 Ports on an EX1 board

tion Cable
IN Receives XFP optical module l OUT represents 17.1.2

10GE OUT IN the transmit port. Connectors
signals. l IN represents the
receive port.

Transport Platform

tion Cable
OUT Transmit
s 10GE
signals.
8.4.6 Valid Slots

The EX1 can be inserted in slot 1 (preferred) or slot 2. Its logical slot on the network
management system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.
8.4.7 Feature Code

None.



EM6F-1(PORT-1)


Transport Platform

is usable.
the services.
Value description:
usable.
unusable.
Recommendations:
this port first.
occupy the port.
tunnels.

Transport Platform

Value description:
processed.
802.1Q by default.
addition, QinQ Type
Domain of the two
same value.
Recommendations:
Layer 3 mode, the

Transport Platform
Negotiation a port.
Value description:
Mbit/s and the
half-duplex.
Mbit/s and the
full-duplex.
for communication.
Mbit/s and the
half-duplex.
Mbit/s and the
full-duplex.

Transport Platform
Mbit/s and the

full-duplex.
The maximum
port.
The maximum
port.
Recommendations:
working mode is
recommended. If the
available.
duplex.

Transport Platform

be interrupted.




the port.


EM6F-1(PORT-1)

Transport Platform

Control Mode.
NOTE
PAUSE frame.
transmits the PAUSE
PAUSE frame.
match that of Non-
end.

l Enable Symmetric/
Dissymmetric Flow
Control: The auto-
negotiation mode
mode.
match that of Auto-
the opposite end.

Transport Platform


QinQ.

without a VLAN ID
(namely, untagged
Default VLAN ID and
VLAN Priority are
unavailable.
VLAN ID (namely,
packets).
to Hybrid, the port
VLAN ID (namely,
QinQ.

Transport Platform

a VLAN ID and then
these packets.

highest priority.
recommended unless


EM6F-1(PORT-1)

Transport Platform

interrupted.
Value description:
enabled.
disabled.
Recommendations:
not be disabled.

bearer port.


Transport Platform

be created.
Value description:
current port.
is not specified.
parameters:

port.
set to Manually.
segment.

Transport Platform

port.
set to Manually.
An IP mask address


EM6F-1(PORT-1)
Mode: Disabled, MAC
PHY Loopback: Non-
Loopback

NOTE
the default value.

Transport Platform

NOTE
interrupted.
Value description:
required.
this Ethernet port.
Recommendations:
direction.



data packets.

Transport Platform


eliminate the loop.


discarded.
NOTE
ports only.

Transport Platform

packets.

Table 8-73 lists the technical specifications of the EX1.
Table 8-73 Technical specifications of the EX1

Item Performance
Service ports For 10GE optical port specifications, see Table 8-74, Table 8-75,
Table 8-76, Table 8-77, and Table 8-78.
Table 8-74 Specifications of the two-fiber bidirectional 10GE optical ports

Item Value
Optical port 10GBASE-SR 10GBASE-LR 10GBASE-ER 10GBASE-ZR

type (LAN)/ (LAN)/ (LAN)/ (LAN)/
10GBASE-SW 10GBASE-LW 10GBASE-EW 10GBASE-ZW
(WAN) (WAN) (WAN) (WAN)

type
distance (km)

wavelength
(nm)

Transport Platform
Item Value
Mean -1.3 to -7.3 -8.2 to 0.5 -4.7 to +4 0 to 4

launched
power (dBm)
Receiver -7.5 -12.6 -14.1 -21

minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -1 0.5 -1 -7
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 3 3.5 3 3
extinction
ratio (dB)
Table 8-75 Specifications of the single-fiber bidirectional 10GE optical ports

Item Value
Optical port 10GBASE-LR (LAN)/10GBASE- 10GBASE-ER (LAN)/10GBASE-

type LW (WAN) EW (WAN)
Optical fiber Single-mode LC Single-mode LC

type
Transmission 10 40
distance (km)
Operating 1330 1270 1330 1270

transmit
wavelength
(nm)
Operating 1270 1330 1270 1330

receive
wavelength
(nm)
Mean -5 to 0 1 to 5
launched
power (dBm)
Receiver -14 -15

minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0.5 0.5

overload
(dBm)

Transport Platform
Item Value
Minimum 3.5 3.5

extinction
ratio (dB)
Table 8-76 Ethernet performance specifications of the 10GE optical ports

Item Performance
Frame Throughput Latency (us) Packet Loss Delay jitter

Length (pks/sec) Ratio (%) (us)
(Bytes)
64.00 14880952.00 13.00 0.00 0.57
128.00 8445945.00 13.70 0.00 0.51
256.00 4528985.00 14.90 0.00 0.58
512.00 2349624.00 16.00 0.00 0.57
1024.00 1197318.00 16.40 0.00 0.57
1280.00 961538.00 16.60 0.00 0.59
1518.00 812743.00 16.80 0.00 0.60
2000.00 618811.00 17.20 0.00 0.60
9600.00 129937.00 23.30 0.00 0.50
Table 8-77 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit rate l LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s

l WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s
Transmission distance (km) 70
Launched optical power 0 to 4

range (dBm)
Operating wavelength 1471 to 1611, in steps of 20

range (nm)

Transport Platform
Parameter Value
CWDM
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) l 1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23

l 1571 nm: -22
l 1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21
Minimum overload (dBm) -9
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2

(dB)
Table 8-78 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM

Transmission 40 80
distance (km)
Launched optical -1 to +2 -1 to +3
power range
(dBm)
Central frequency 192.1 to 196.0 192.1 to 196.0

(THz)
Central frequency 10 10
deviation (GHz)
Receiver -17 -24

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum -1 -9
overload (dBm)
Minimum 9.5 8.2

extinction ratio
(dB)
in. x 8.2 in.)

Transport Platform
l Weight: 0.5 kg
Power Consumption
EX1 13.4 14.5
8.5 CQ1
CQ1 boards are 4-port channelized STM-1 processing boards.

The functional version of CQ1 boards is TNF1.
Version
Table 8-79 describes the version mapping of the CQ1 board.
Table 8-79 Version description of the CQ1

Item Description

8.5.2 Application
The CQ1 is mainly used to transmit/receive channelized STM-1 services on the packet ring,
and manage bandwidths.
Figure 8-13 shows the typical networking and application of the CQ1. The CQ1 works with
of packet features.

Transport Platform
Figure 8-13 Networking and application of the CQ1
GE ring
CES E1 Packet Packet

CQ1 channelized
MD1 UXC service GE GE service UXC
STM-1
ATM/IMA E1 board board
OptiX OSN equipment
NG-WDM equipment

CQ1 boards receive and transmit four channels of channelized STM-1 optical/electrical
signals.
Table 8-80 lists the functions and features supported by CQ1 boards.
Table 8-80 Functions and features that CQ1 boards support

Basic functions Receives/Transmits four channels of channelized STM-1

optical/electrical signals.
Supported packet service l Circuit emulation service (CES) E1

types l ML-PPP E1
Port Optical ports l Provides four STM-1 optical ports, which can be S-1.1,
specificati L-1.1, or L-1.2 optical ports.
ons l The following types of SFP modules are supported:
STM-1 two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical
module
STM-1 single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical
module
Electrical l Use SFP electrical modules.

ports l Comply with ITU-T G.703.

Transport Platform
CES Maximum 252

number of
services
Encapsulation l CESoPSN (CESoPSN stands for circuit emulation

mode services over packet switch networks)
l SAToP (SAToP stands for Structure-Agnostic Time
Division Multiplexing over Packet)
Idle timeslot Supported only in CESoPSN mode

compression
Jitter 375 to 16,000

buffering time
(us)
Packet 125 to 5,000

loading time
(us)
CES Supported, but the NE can only function as a master node

ACR(ACR
stands for
adaptive
clock
recovery)
Transparent D1 to D12, E1, and E2 bytes

transmission
of SDH
overheads in
packet
networks
ML-PPP Type of links VC-12s in channelized STM-1s (service type: PWE3 over
carrying ML- tunnel)
PPP links
Maximum 252
number of
supported
PPP links
Maximum 32
number of
supported
ML-PPP
groups

Transport Platform
Maximum 16
number of
links in one
ML-PPP
group
Linear multiplex section 1+1/1:1 LMSP

protection (LMSP) on the NOTE
packet plane A CQ1 board and a TDM service board, such as SL1Q, cannot be
configured into the same LMSP protection group.
Synchroni Clock source l Each line port provides one channel of SDH line clock
zation signals.
l Each board supports two channels of E1 clock signals
over its STM-1 ports.
SDH line Supported

clock
DCN Outband Each SDH line port can provide one data communications
DCN channel (DCC) that is composed of three DCC bytes or nine
DCC bytes.
Inband DCN Transmits DCN information over ML-PPP links.
Maintenan Loopback l Supports inloops at STM-1 ports.

ce features l Supports outloops at STM-1 ports.
l Supports inloops over E1 channels.
l Supports outloops over E1 channels.
Warm and Supported

cold resetting
Switching a Supported
laser on or off
Pseudo Not supported

random
binary
sequence
(PRBS)
testing
Manufacturer Supported
information
querying
Power Supported
consumption
querying

Transport Platform
SFP module Supported

information
detecting and
querying

This section describes how the function units of a CQ1 board process channelized STM-1
optical signals.
Figure 8-14 CQ1 board function block diagram

Backplane
STM-1 E1 GE GE
Channelized signal SDH signal Packet signal Logic bus
Signal processing
STM-1 signal processing processing Packet switching unit
access unit unit
unit unit
Control bus
System control and
communication unit
Logic
Line clock signal control unit
Line clock signal

Clock unit
Clock signal provided to System clock signal
+3.3 V power Fuse -48 V/-60 V

Power module -48 V/-60 V
supplied to the board
Table 8-81 Signal processing in the receive direction of a CQ1 board

1 Signal interface unit l Receives channelized STM-1 signals.

l Regenerates STM-1 signals.
l Checks for R_LOS alarms.
l Converts STM-1 optical signals into STM-1
electrical signals.

Transport Platform
2 SDH processing unit l Restores clock signals.

l Synchronizes frames and checks for R_LOS and
R_LOF alarms.
l Descrambles signals.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates alarms and
performance events, if any.
l Checks the M1 byte and bits 6-8 of the K2 byte, and
generates alarms and performance events, if any.
l Checks for changes in Synchronization Status
Messages (SSMs) in the S1 byte and reports the
SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
l Extracts orderwire bytes, auxiliary channel bytes
(including F1 and serial bytes), DCC bytes, and K
bytes, and transmits the bytes to the logic processing
unit.
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates performance
events, if any.
l Checks higher order path overheads and generates
alarms and performance events, if any.
l Decapsulates E1 signals from the STM-1 signals.
3 Packet processing l Frames E1 signals.

unit l Performs CES emulation.
l Performs Multilink Point-to-Point Protocol (MP-
PPP) processing.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts them into
Ethernet services.
4 Logic processing l Grooms services from service buses to the GE bus

unit on the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.
Table 8-82 Signal processing in the transmit direction of a CQ1 board

1 Logic processing l Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit unit.
l Grooms services from the GE bus on the backplane
to service buses.

Transport Platform
2 Packet processing l Decapsulates service signals.

unit l Restructures CES packets.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the SDH processing unit.
3 SDH processing unit l Multiplexes E1 signals into STM-1 signals.

l Sets higher order path overheads.
l Sets AU pointers.
l Sets multiplex section overhead bytes.
l Sets regenerator section overhead bytes.
l Scrambles signals.
4 Signal interface unit Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

The CQ1 board is directly controlled by a CPU on the system control and communication
unit. The CPU issues configuration and query commands to other units of the board over the
control bus. These units send command responses, alarms, and performance events to the
CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU.
Power Supply Unit

The power supply unit receives two -48 V/-60 V power supplies from the backplane. It then
converts the -48 V power supplies into +3.3 V power and supplies the +3.3 V power to other
units on the board.
Clock Unit
The clock unit performs the following operations:
l Extracts line clock signals or E1 clock signals and transmits them to the system control
and communication unit.
l Receives system clock signals from the control bus on the backplane and supplies clock
signals to other units on the board.
8.5.5 Front Panel

A CQ1 board has indicators and STM-1 ports on its front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 8-15 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing optical ports

CQ1
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
LOS3
LOS4
SRV

Transport Platform
Figure 8-16 Front panel of a CQ1 board providing electrical ports

CQ1
STAT
LOS1
LOS2
LOS3
LOS4
SRV
Indicators
The front panel of the CQ1 has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3,
and LOS4. For status explanation for the indicators, see 22.2 Board Indicators.
Ports
Table 8-83 Ports on a CQ1 board

Port Description Connector Type Required Cable
OUT1 to OUT4 Transmit ports of the l LC (with an SFP l 17.1.2

first to fourth optical module) Connectors for
STM-1 ports OUT IN SFP optical
modules
IN1 to IN4 Receive ports of the
l SAA straight l 17.2.4 STM-1
first to fourth
female (with an Cable for SFP
STM-1 ports
SFP electrical electrical
module) modules
OUT IN
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the CQ1.
8.5.6 Valid Slots

A CQ1 board can be inserted in any of slots 1 to 6. The priorities of the slots are as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. Its logical slot on the network management
system (NMS) is the same as its physical slot.
8.5.7 Feature Code

None.

Transport Platform

Configuring a channelized STM-1 port includes setting of the parameters such as the
encapsulation type of the port, the maximum data packet size, and the enabling status of the
laser.
Table 8-84 Parameters for the attributes of an SDH port


CQ1-1(PORT-1)
Name For example, port1 Specifies the name of the

port specified by the user.
Port Mode Layer 1 Displays the working mode

of the CES port Layer 1
indicates the channelized
STM port is currently
available.
currently supports only
Layer 1 in Port Mode. In
this case, the OptiX OSN
equipment can transmit
channelized STM-1
services.
Encapsulation Type Null Indicates the link layer

port. It specifies the link
can be identified and
processed by the port.
When Encapsulation Type
is set to Null, no link layer
encapsulation is available or
the link layer encapsulation
is not performed.
currently supports only
Layer 1 in Port Mode. For
this reason, Encapsulation
Type can only be set to Null
and cannot be changed.

Transport Platform
Channelize No Displays whether the port is

a channelized port.
Channelize refers to the use
of the low-speed tributary
signals in the STM-N
service. One fiber is used to
transmit multiple channels
of data that are separated
from each other. Each
channel of data exclusively
occupies the bandwidth, in
addition to the starting
point, terminating point, and
monitoring policy.
Max Data Packet Size (byte) - Specifies the maximum size

of the packets that can be
received by the port.
This parameter is currently
inapplicable to the OptiX
OSN equipment.
Laser Interface Enabling On, Off Specifies the enabling status

Status Default: On of the laser on the port.
Laser Transmission - Displays the transmission

Distance(m) distance of the laser on the
port.
OSN equipment.
Scrambling Capability - Suppresses multiple 0s and

1s in the data when the
Scrambling Capability is
enabled.
OSN equipment.
CRC Check Length - Specifies the length of the

CRC field in the mapping
protocol.
OSN equipment.

Transport Platform
Clock Mode - The Clock Mode parameter

specifies the re-timing mode
of a port.
NOTE
inapplicable to an SDH port.
Loopback Mode Non-loopback, Inloop, Specifies the loopback

Outloop status of the port.
Default: Non-loopback The loopback mode is used
for locating a fault. Outloop
is used for testing whether
the port module and external
fiber or cable of a board are
proper. Inloop is used for
testing whether the cross-
connect unit and service
path of the equipment are
proper.
CES Encapsulation Clock Null, Line Clock Mode, Specifies the encapsulation
Mode System Clock Mode mode of the clock signal on
Default: Null a UNI port on the master
side of the CES service.
l Null: The clock signal is
not encapsulated in the
service packets.
l Line Clock Mode: The
clock frequency signal
extracted on a line port is
used as the time stamp,
which is encapsulated in
the RTP packet header
and transmitted to the
downstream.
l System Clock Mode:
The system frequency
signal is used as the time
stamp, which is
encapsulated in the RTP
packet header and
transmitted to the
downstream.
CES Encapsulation Clock - Specifies the enabling status

Poke of the CES encapsulation
clock poke.
OSN equipment.

Transport Platform

This section describes board specifications, including the STM-1 optical/electrical port
performance, mechanical behaviors, and power consumption.
Table 8-85 lists the technical specifications of the CQ1.
Table 8-85 Technical specifications of the CQ1
Item Performance
Service ports Electrical See Table 8-86.

port
Optical port See Table 8-87 and Table 8-88.
Table 8-86 Specifications of STM-1 electrical ports
Item Value
Bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Code pattern CMI
Connector SAA straight female
Signal bit rate at the output port Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Permitted frequency deviation at the

input port
Allowed attenuation at the input port
Input jitter tolerance
Table 8-87 Specifications of the STM-1 optical ports
Item Value
Nominal bit rate 155520 kbit/s
Optical port type S-1.1 L-1.1 L-1.2
Transmission distance 15 40 80
(km)
Operating wavelength 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

range (nm)
Optical fiber type Single-mode LC Single-mode LC Single-mode LC

Transport Platform
Item Value
Launched optical power -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

range (dBm)
Receiver sensitivity -28 -34 -34

(dBm)
Minimum overload -8 -10 -10

(dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 10 10

(dB)
NOTE
Format of optical port type is defined as follows: transmission distance-signal rate.fiber type
Explanation for optical port type "S-1.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first digit "1"
represents STM-1 signals; the second digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm).
Explanation for optical port type "L-1.1" is as follows: "L" represents long distance; the first digit "1"
Table 8-88 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the STM-1
optical ports
Parameter Value
Line code pattern NRZ
Type of optical interface S-1.1 L-1.1
(km)

wavelength (nm)

wavelength (nm)

range (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

Transport Platform
Parameter Value

ratio (dB)
The mechanical specifications of a CQ1 board are as follows:
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.47 kg
Power Consumption
CQ1 7.8 8.9
8.6 MD1
The MD1 is a 32xSmart E1 service processing board.

The functional version of the MD1 is TNF1.
Version
Table 8-89 describes the version mapping of the MD1 board.
Table 8-89 Version description of the MD1

Item Description

8.6.2 Application
The MD1 is mainly used in the packet data transmission field to transmit/receive data packets,
manage bandwidths, and implement switching of data packets.

Transport Platform
Figure 8-17 shows the typical networking and application of the MD1. The MD1 works with
of packet features.
Figure 8-17 Networking and application of the MD1
Packet Packet
board board
CES E1
GE ring 10GE
ATM/IMA E1
CES E1 Packet Packet Packet

MD1 UXC service GE GE service UXC service 10GE
ATM/IMA E1 board board board
OptiX OSNequipment
NG-WDM equipment

The MD1 receives and transmits 32xE1 signals.
Table 8-90 lists the functions and features that the MD1 supports.
Table 8-90 Functions and features that the MD1 supports

Basic functions Receives and transmits E1 signals, and supports flexible

configuration of E1 service categories.
E1 service categories Supports the following E1 service categories:

l CES E1
l ATM/IMA E1
Port specifications Provides thirty-two 75-ohm/120-ohm E1 ports.
Fractional E1 Supports transparent service transmission at the 64 kbit/s level.

Transport Platform
ATM/IMA Maximum l Local: 32

number of l Remote: 64
ATM
services
Maximum l Local: 128

number of l Remote: 256
ATM
connections
ATM traffic Supported

managemen
t
ATM Supports the following ATM encapsulation modes:

encapsulati l N-to-one VPC
on mode
l N-to-one VCC
l One-to-one VPC
l One-to-one VCC
Maximum 31
number of
concatenate
d ATM
cells
ATM OAM Supports F4 OAM (VP level) and F5 OAM (VC level),
including the following functions:
l Alarm indication signal (AIS)/Remote defect indication
(RDI)
l Continuity check test
l Loopback test
Maximum 32
number of
IMA
groups
Maximum 16
number of
members in
an IMA
group
CES Maximum 32
number of
services

Transport Platform
Encapsulati Supports the following encapsulation modes:

on mode l CESoPSN
l SAToP
Service Point-to-point services

category
Compressio Supported (applicable to CESoPSN only)

n of vacant
slots
Jitter 375-16000
buffering
time (us)
Packet 125-5000
loading
time (us)
CES ACR Supported

NOTE
Supports CES ACR for a maximum of four channels. The clock
information that is recovered from the services transported at ports 1
16 can be sent out only from ports 116; the clock information that is
recovered from the services transported at ports 1732 can be sent out
only from ports 1732.
Retiming Supported
Maintenan Loopback Supports inloops and outloops at E1 tributary ports.

ce features
Cold reset Supported (with warm resets having no impact on services)
and warm
reset
PRBS tests Supported

at E1 ports
Board Supported
manufacturi
ng
information
query
Board Supported
power
consumptio
n
information
query

Transport Platform

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the MD1.
Functional Block Diagram
Figure 8-18 Functional block diagram of the MD1

Backplane
processing unit
processing unit
E1
interface unit
Service
Signal
Service
Logic
GE bus Packet switching unit
bus
E1
Control bus System control and

communication unit
Logic
control unit
-48 V/-60 V
System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
Clock
Clock signal provided to the other units of the board unit System clock signal
Table 8-91 Signal processing in the receive direction of the MD1

1 Signal interface unit l Receives external E1 signals.

l Matches the resistance.
l Equalizes signals.
l Converts the level.
l Restores clock signals.
l Buffers the received data.
l Performs HDB3 decoding.

Transport Platform
2 Service processing l Frames E1 signals.

unit l Performs CES emulation or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Encapsulates PWE3 services and converts the PWE3
services into Ethernet services.
4 Logic processing l Shifts transmission of service signals from the

unit internal service bus to the GE bus in the backplane.
l Sends service signals to the packet switching unit.
Table 8-92 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the MD1

1 Logic processing l Receives service signals from the packet switching

unit unit.
l Shifts transmission of service signals from the GE
bus in the backplane to the internal service bus.
2 Service processing l Decapsulates service signals.

unit l Re-forms CES packets or processes ATM/IMA
services.
l Converts signals into E1 signals and sends the E1
signals to the signal interface unit.
3 Signal interface unit l Performs HDB3 coding.

l Performs clock re-timing.
l Shapes pulses.
l Drives the line.
l Sends E1 signals to a port.

The board is directly controlled by the CPU unit on the system control and communication
unit.
l The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board
over the control bus.
l These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance events to the CPU
unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit of the system
control and communication unit.

Transport Platform
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
8.6.5 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram
Figure 8-19 Front panel of the MD1

MD1
16 32
STAT
SRV
1 17
Indicators
The front panel of the MD1 has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status
Ports
Table 8-93 Ports on an MD1 board

Port Descript Connector Type Pin Assignment Required Cable
ion
1 to The first Anea 96 See Table 8-94. 17.2.1 16xE1/T1

16 to POS.1 Cable
sixteenth
E1 ports
17 to The
32 seventeen POS.96
th to
thirty-
second
E1 ports

Transport Platform
Table 8-94 Pin assignments for an Anea 96 port

Pin Signal Pin Signal
1 The first received E1 25 The first transmitted E1 differential

differential signal (+) signal (+)

differential signal (-) signal (-)
3 The second received E1 27 The second transmitted E1

differential signal (+) differential signal (+)

differential signal (-) differential signal (-)
5 The third received E1 29 The third transmitted E1 differential


7 The fourth received E1 31 The fourth transmitted E1


9 The fifth received E1 33 The fifth transmitted E1 differential


11 The sixth received E1 35 The sixth transmitted E1 differential


13 The seventh received E1 37 The seventh transmitted E1


15 The eighth received E1 39 The eighth transmitted E1


17 The ninth received E1 41 The ninth transmitted E1 differential



Transport Platform
19 The tenth received E1 43 The tenth transmitted E1 differential


21 The eleventh received E1 45 The eleventh transmitted E1


23 The twelfth received E1 47 The twelfth transmitted E1


49 The thirteenth received E1 73 The thirteenth transmitted E1


51 The fourteenth received E1 75 The fourteenth transmitted E1


53 The fifteenth received E1 77 The fifteenth transmitted E1


55 The sixteenth received E1 79 The sixteenth transmitted E1


8.6.6 Valid Slots

The MD1 can be inserted in slots 1-6. The slot allocation priority is as follows: slots 4 and 6 >
slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the MD1 on the NMS are the same as its
physical slots.
8.6.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the MD1 indicates the E1 port impedance.

Transport Platform
Table 8-95 Feature codes of the MD1

Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 75
B 120

Table 8-96 Parameters for the general attributes of a PDH port

Port Slot ID-Board name-Port Displays the port name.

(Port No.)
Name For example, Port 1 Enters the port name

Port Mode Layer 1, Layer 2 Specifies the working mode

of the PDH port.
When this parameter is set
to Layer 1, the port can
transmit TDM signals.
When this parameter is set
to Layer 2, the port can
transmit ATM signals.
Encapsulation Type Null Specifies Encapsulation

Type.
When Port Mode is set to
Layer 1, Encapsulation
Type is defaulted to Null
When Port Mode is set to
Layer 2, Encapsulation
Type is defaulted to ATM
Table 8-97 Parameters for the advanced attributes of a PDH port

Port Slot ID-Board name-Port Displays the port name.

(Port No.)

Transport Platform
Frame Format Unframe, Double Frame, Specifies the frame format.

CRC-4 Multiframe When the E1 port transmits
CES services in CESoPSN
mode, this parameter can be
set to Double Frame or
CRC-4 Multiframe. It is
recommended that you set
this parameter to CRC-4
Multiframe. When the CES
services are in SAToP mode,
this parameter needs to be
set to Unframe.
Line Encoding Format HDB3 Displays the line encoding

format.
The HDB3 codes are
transmitted on the E1 port.
Clock Mode Master Mode, Slave Mode, The Clock Mode parameter
Line Clock Mode specifies the re-timing mode
Default: Master Mode of a port.
l Master Mode: Indicates
that the internal clock is
adopted.
l Slave Mode: Indicates
that the clock from ACR
is adopted.
l Line Clock Mode:
Indicates that the clock
from line boards is
adopted.
Loopback Mode Non-loopback, Inloop, Specifies the loopback

Outloop status of the port.
Impedance 120 ohm Displays the impedance of

the port.
Frame Mode - Specifies the value of the

frame mode.
The frame modes of the
local port and opposite port
need to be consistent.

Transport Platform
CES Encapsulation Clock Null, Line Clock Mode, Queries the encapsulation
Mode System Clock Mode mode of the clock signal on
Default: Null a UNI port on the master
side of the CES service.
l Null: The clock signal is
not encapsulated in the
service packets.
l Line Clock Mode: The
clock frequency signal
extracted on a line port is
used as the time stamp,
which is encapsulated in
the RTP packet header
and transmitted to the
downstream.
l System Clock Mode:
The system frequency
signal is used as the time
stamp, which is
encapsulated in the RTP
packet header and
transmitted to the
downstream.
Table 8-98 Parameters for an associated service

Service Type For example, CES service Displays the type of the
service associated with the
port.
Service ID For example, 20 Displays the ID of the

port.
When you select the value
of the service ID, the active
window changes to the
service management dialog
box of the corresponding
service type.
Service Name For example, CES Displays the name of the

port.

Transport Platform
Used Resource For example, 64K Displays the resource used

Timeslot1-31 by the service associated
with the port.
8.6.9 MD1 Specifications

Table 8-99 lists the technical specifications of the MD1.
Table 8-99 Technical specifications of the MD1

Item Performance
E1 ports (1-16 See Table 8-100.

and 17-32)
Table 8-100 Specifications of the CES/ATM/IMA service electrical ports

Item Value
Standard compliance ITU-T G.703/G.823
Nominal bit rate (kbit/s) 2048
Code pattern HDB3
Impedance (ohm) 75 120
Pair in each direction One coaxial pair One symmetrical pair
Port type Anea 96
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.5 kg

Transport Platform
Power Consumption
MD1 11.9 13

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 9 TDM Board
9 TDM Board
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN supports the following TDM boards: SDH boards, PDH boards, and EoS
boards.
NOTE
SL16S, SL4S, and SL1S are integrated on the UXCL board.
9.1 SL1Q
The SL1Q is a 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.
9.2 SL4D
The SL4D is a 2xSTM-4 optical interface board.
9.3 SP3D
The SP3D is a 42xE1/T1 electrical interface board.
9.4 PL3T
The PL3T is a 3xE3/T3 electrical interface board.
9.5 EFS8
The EFS8 is an 8xFE switching and processing board.
9.6 EGS4
The EGS4 is a 4xGE switching and processing board.

Transport Platform
9.1 SL1Q
The SL1Q is a 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical interface board.

The functional version of SL1Q boards is TNF1.
Version
Table 9-1 describes the version mapping of the SL1Q board.
Table 9-1 Version description of the SL1Q board

Item Description

version or later.
9.1.2 Application
The SL1Q is a line board. The SL1Q can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-1 optical/electrical signals. The SL1Q converts the received optical
signals into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In
addition, the SL1Q converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical
signals and transmits the optical signals.
Figure 9-1 shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards
can form a ring network or a chain network in the system.
Figure 9-1 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Cross-connect and timing board

Transport Platform

The SL1Q receives/transmits 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals, performs O/E conversion for
STM-1 optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on
the line.
Table 9-2 lists the functions and features that the SL1Q supports.
Table 9-2 Functions and features that the SL1Q supports

Function and Board
Feature
Basic functions Receives/Transmits 4xSTM-1 optical/electrical signals.
Optical port l Provides S-1.1, L-1.1, and L-1.2 optical ports.

specifications l The characteristics of all optical ports comply with ITU-T G.957.
Optical module l Optical module information can be detected and queried. STM-1
specifications optical ports support SFP electrical modules.
l Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical modules can be used.
l Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used and the running
status can be monitored. This facilitates your maintenance.
l Optical ports allow setting the on/off state of a laser and support
the automatic laser shutdown (ALS) function.
DCN Supports outband DCN.
Service Processes VC-12, VC-3, and VC-4 services.

processing
Overhead l Processes the section overheads of STM-1 signals.

processing l Processes higher order path overheads.
l Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and pass-through.
l Provides transparent DCCs and orderwire byte channels.
l Sets and queries J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Pointer processing Processes AU pointers.
Alarms and Provides various alarms and performance events, facilitating

performance equipment management and maintenance.
events
Protection l Supports two-fiber unidirectional ring MSP.

schemes l Supports linear MSP.
l Supports SNCP.

Transport Platform
Function and Board

Feature
Maintenance l Inloops and outloops at optical ports

features l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick fault locating
l Setting of overhead bytes to be sent/received
l Enabling/Disabling SSMs on line optical ports
l Pass-through tests of line K bytes
l Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and degrade
thresholds
l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact
on services)
l Board manufacturing information query
l In-service FPGA loading
l Hot board swapping
l ALS

The SL1Q consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control
unit, and a clock unit.
Figure 9-2 SL1Q board function block diagram

Backplane
O/E conversion
Service bus
STM-1 Cross-connect unit
processing
Overhead
unit
unit
Overhead bus System control and

STM-1 communication unit
Logic System control and

control communication unit
Control bus unit
Power supplied to the
other units on the board +3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the

Clock unit System clock signal

Transport Platform
Table 9-3 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL1Q
1 O/E conversion unit l Detects R_LOS alarms.

l Converts STM-1 optical signals into STM-1
electrical signals.
2 Overhead processing l Restores clock signals.

unit l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF
alarms.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific
alarms and performance events.
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and
transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
specific alarms and performance events.
l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4
signals to the cross-connect unit.
Table 9-4 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL1Q
1 Overhead processing l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals

unit from the cross-connect unit.
l Sets AU pointers.

Transport Platform
2 O/E conversion unit l Converts electrical signals into optical signals.

unit. The CPU unit issues configuration and query commands to the other units of the board
over the control bus. These units then report command responses, alarms, and performance
events to the CPU unit over the control bus.
The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the system control and
communication unit.
Clock Unit
9.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 9-3 Front panel of the SL1Q

TX3/RX3 TX4/RX4
SL1Q
CLASS1
LASER
LOS1
LOS2
LOS3
LOS4
STAT
SRV
PRODUCT
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
Indicators
The front panel of the SL1Q has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, LOS2, LOS3,
and LOS4. For status explanation for the indicators, see 22.2 Board Indicators.
Ports
Table 9-5 Ports on an SL1Q board

Port Description Connector Type Pin Required
Assignme Cable
nt
TX1/ Receive/Transmit port STM-1 optical port: l TX 17.1.2

RX1 of the first STM-1 LC SFP optical represen Connectors
optical/electrical port module ts the

Transport Platform
Port Description Connector Type Pin Required

Assignme Cable
nt
TX2/ Receive/Transmit port transmit

TX RX
RX2 of the second STM-1 port.
optical/electrical port l RX
STM-1 electrical port: represen
TX3/ Receive/Transmit port SFP electrical module ts the
RX3 of the third STM-1
receive
optical/electrical port TX RX
port.
TX4/ Receive/Transmit port
RX4 of the fourth STM-1
optical/electrical port
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel.
9.1.6 Valid Slots

The SL1Q can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis.
9.1.7 Feature Code

The feature code of a board refers to the number next to the board name in the bar code and
indicates the type of optical port. SL1Q boards have feature codes.
Table 9-6 Feature codes of the SL1Q

Feature Code Type of Optical Port
01 S-1.1, eSFP optical module
02 L-1.1, eSFP optical module
04 S-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1

and 3, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength
is 1310 nm; for optical ports 2 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1310
nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.)
05 L-1.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical ports 1

and 3, the transmit wavelength is 1550 nm and the receive wavelength
is 1310 nm; for optical ports 2 and 4, the transmit wavelength is 1310
nm and the receive wavelength is 1550 nm.)

Transport Platform
9.1.8 SL1Q Parameters

This section describes the parameters for SDH boards.
Table 9-7 Parameters for SDH interfaces

Port For example: NE(9-1001)-1- This parameter indicates the

SL4D-1(SDH-1) corresponding SDH interface.
Optical Interface Name For example: SDH-1 This parameter indicates or

specifies the name of the
optical interface.
Laser Switch Open, Close This parameter indicates or

Default value: Open specifies the on/off state of
the laser.
This parameter is set for SDH
optical interfaces only. In
normal cases, this parameter
is set to Open.
Optical(Electrical) Non-Loopback, Inloop, This parameter indicates or

Interface Loopback Outloop specifies the loopback status
Default value: Non-Loopback on the SDH interface.
l Non-Loopback indicates
that the loopback is
canceled or not
performed.
l Inloop indicates that the
SDH signals transmitted
to the opposite end are
looped back.
l Outloop indicates that the
received SDH signals are
looped back.
This function is used for fault
locating for the SDH
interfaces. The
Optical(Electrical) Interface
Loopback function is used
for diagnosis and may affect
the services that are
transmitted over the
interfaces. Hence, exercise
precaution before starting this
function.
In normal cases, this
parameter is set to Non-
Loopback.

Transport Platform
VC4 Path For example: NE(9-1001)-1- This parameter indicates the

SL4D-1(SDH-1)-VC4:1 corresponding VC-4 path.
VC4 Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, This parameter indicates or

Outloop specifies the loopback status
Default value: Non-Loopback in the VC-4 path.
canceled or not
performed.
VC-4 signals transmitted
looped back.
received VC-4 signals are
looped back.
locating for the VC-4 paths.
The VC4 Loopback function
is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are
function.
Loopback.
Table 9-8 Parameters for automatic laser shutdown

Optical Interface For example: NE(9-1001)-1- This parameter indicates the

SL4D-1(SDH-1) corresponding optical
interface.

Transport Platform
Automatic Shutdown Disabled, Enabled This parameter indicates or

Default value: Disabled specifies whether the
Automatic
Shutdownfunction is enabled
or disabled for the laser.
The ALS function allows the
laser to shut down
automatically when an optical
port does not carry services,
an optical fiber is broken, or
no optical signal is received.
You can set On Period(ms),
Off Period(ms), and
Continuously On-test
Period(ms) only when this
parameter is set to Enabled.
On Period(ms) For example, 2000 This parameter indicates or

specifies the period when a
shutdown laser automatically
starts up and tests whether the
optical fiber is normal.
Off Period(ms) For example, 60000 This parameter indicates or

specifies the period when the
laser does not work (with the
ALS function being enabled).
Continuously On-test For example, 90000 This parameter indicates or

Period(ms) specifies the period when a
shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether
the optical fiber is normal.
9.1.9 SL1Q Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the optical port performance,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 9-9 lists the technical specifications of the SL1Q.
Table 9-9 Technical specifications of the SL1Q

Item Performance
Service TX1/RX Receive/Transmit port of the For the performance of STM-1

ports 1 first STM-1 optical/electrical optical ports, see Table 9-11 and
port Table 9-12.

Transport Platform
Item Performance
TX2/RX Receive/Transmit port of the For the performance of STM-1

2 second STM-1 optical/electrical electrical ports, see Table 9-10.
port
TX3/RX Receive/Transmit port of the

3 third STM-1 optical/electrical
port

4 fourth STM-1 optical/electrical
port
Dimensions (H x W 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 208.7 mm

x D)
Weight 0.30 kg
Power consumption 4.5 W

Item Value
Code pattern CMI

input port

Item Value
Transmission distance 15 40 80
(km)
Operating wavelength 1261 to 1360 1263 to 1360 1480 to 1580

range (nm)

Transport Platform
Item Value
Launched optical power -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

range (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2 10 10

(dB)
NOTE
optical ports
Parameter Value
(km)

wavelength (nm)

wavelength (nm)

range (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

Transport Platform
Parameter Value

ratio (dB)
9.2 SL4D
The SL4D is a 2xSTM-4 optical interface board.

The functional version of the SL4D is TNF1.
Version
Table 9-13 describes the version mapping of the SL4D board.
Table 9-13 Version description of the SL4D board

Item Description

version or later.
9.2.2 Application
The SL4D is a line board. The SL4D can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment series to
transmit and receive STM-4 optical signals. The SL4D converts the received optical signals
into electrical signals and sends the electrical signals to the cross-connect side. In addition, the
SL4D converts the electrical signals sent from the cross-connect side into optical signals and
transmits the optical signals.
Figure 9-4 shows the application of the SDH processing boards. The SDH processing boards
can form a ring network or a chain network in the system.

Transport Platform
Figure 9-4 Networking and application of the SDH processing boards
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board

The SL4D receives/transmits 2xSTM-4 optical signals, performs O/E conversion for STM-4
optical signals, extracts and inserts overhead bytes, and reports alarms generated on the line.
Table 9-14 lists the functions and features that the SL4D supports.
Table 9-14 Functions and features that the SL4D supports
Basic functions l Receives/Transmits 2xSTM-4 optical signals.
Optical port specifications l Provides S-4.1, L-4.1, and L-4.2 optical ports.
l The characteristics of all optical ports comply
with ITU-T G.957.
Optical module specifications l Optical module information can be detected and

queried.
l Single-fiber, bidirectional, pluggable optical
modules can be used.
l Pluggable optical modules support hot swapping.
l Appropriate SFP optical modules can be used,
their information can be queried, and their
running status can be monitored. This facilitates
your maintenance.
l Allows setting the on/off state of a laser and
supports the automatic laser shutdown (ALS)
function.
DCN l Supports outband DCN.

Transport Platform
Service processing l Processes VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services and

VC-4-4c concatenated services.
Overhead processing l Processes the section overheads of STM-4

signals.
l Processes higher order path overheads.
l Sets K-byte reporting, transmission, and pass-
through.
l Provides transparent DCCs and orderwire byte
channels.
l Sets and queries J0, J1, and C2 bytes.
Pointer processing l Processes AU pointers.
Alarms and performance events l Provides various alarms and performance events,
facilitating equipment management and
maintenance.
Protection schemes l Supports two-fiber unidirectional/bidirectional

ring MSP.
l Supports linear MSP.
l Supports SNCP.
Maintenance features l Inloops and outloops at optical ports

l Inloops and outloops on VC-4 paths for quick
fault locating
l Setting of overhead bytes to be sent/received
l Enabling/Disabling SSMs on line optical ports
l Pass-through tests of line K bytes
l Setting of bit error threshold-crossing values and
degrade thresholds
l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets
having no impact on services)
l In-service FPGA loading
l ALS

The SL4D consists of an O/E conversion unit, an overhead processing unit, a logic control
unit, and a clock unit.

Transport Platform
Figure 9-5 Functional block diagram of the SL4D

Backplane
O/E conversion
Service bus
STM-4 Cross-connect unit
processing
Overhead
unit
unit
Overhead bus System control and
STM-4 communication unit

control communication unit
Control bus unit
Power supplied to the other
units on the board +3.3 V
Clock signal provided to the System clock signal

Clock unit
Table 9-15 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SL4D

1 O/E conversion unit l Detects R_LOS alarms.

l Converts STM-4 optical signals into electrical
signals.

Transport Platform
2 Overhead processing l Restores clock signals.

unit l Aligns frames and detects R_LOS and R_LOF
alarms.
l Checks B1 and B2 bytes and generates specific
alarms and performance events.
generates specific alarms and performance events.
l Detects changes in the SSM in the S1 byte and
reports the SSM status to the system control and
communication unit.
including F1 and SERIAL bytes, DCC bytes, and K
bytes to form a 2 Mbit/s overhead signal and
transmits the 2 Mbit/s overhead signal to the system
l Adjusts AU pointers and generates specific
performance events.
l Transmits pointer indication signals and VC-4
signals to the cross-connect unit.
Table 9-16 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SL4D

1 Overhead processing l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals

unit from the cross-connect unit.
l Sets AU pointers.
2 O/E conversion unit l Converts electrical signals into optical signals.


Transport Platform
control and communication unit and enables FPGA loading.
Clock Unit
9.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, a bar code, and a laser safety class label on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 9-6 shows the front panel of the SL4D.
Figure 9-6 Front panel of the SL4D

SL4D
CLASS1
LASER
LOS1
LOS2
STAT
PRODUCT
SRV
TX1/RX1 TX2/RX2
Indicators
The front panel of the SL4D has the following indicators: STAT, SRV, LOS1, and LOS2. For
status explanation for the indicators, see 22.2 Board Indicators.
Ports
Table 9-17 Ports on an SL4D board

on Cable
TX1/R Receive/ LC SFP optical module l TX represents 17.1.2

X1 Transmit the transmit Connectors
port of the TX RX port.
first l RX represents
STM-4 the receive
optical port port.
TX2/R Receive/
X2 Transmit
port of the
second
STM-4
optical port

Transport Platform
Labels
9.2.6 Valid Slots

The SL4D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The logical slots of the SL4D on the
NMS are the same as its physical slots.
9.2.7 Feature Code

indicates the type of optical port. SL4D boards have feature codes.
Table 9-18 Feature codes of the SL4D
Feature Code Type of Optical Port
01 S-4.1, eSFP optical module
04 S-4.1, single-fiber bidirectional optical module (For optical port 1, the

transmit wavelength is 1490 nm and the receive wavelength is 1310
nm; for optical port 2, the transmit wavelength is 1310 nm and the
receive wavelength is 1490 nm.)
9.2.8 SL4D Parameters

This section describes the parameters for SDH boards.
Table 9-19 Parameters for SDH interfaces
Port For example: NE(9-1001)-1- This parameter indicates the

SL4D-1(SDH-1) corresponding SDH interface.
Optical Interface Name For example: SDH-1 This parameter indicates or

specifies the name of the
optical interface.

Transport Platform
Laser Switch Open, Close This parameter indicates or

Default value: Open specifies the on/off state of
the laser.
This parameter is set for SDH
optical interfaces only. In
normal cases, this parameter
is set to Open.
Optical(Electrical) Non-Loopback, Inloop, This parameter indicates or

Interface Loopback Outloop specifies the loopback status
Default value: Non-Loopback on the SDH interface.
canceled or not
performed.
SDH signals transmitted
looped back.
received SDH signals are
looped back.
locating for the SDH
interfaces. The
Optical(Electrical) Interface
function.
Loopback.
VC4 Path For example: NE(9-1001)-1- This parameter indicates the

SL4D-1(SDH-1)-VC4:1 corresponding VC-4 path.

Transport Platform
VC4 Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, This parameter indicates or

Default value: Non-Loopback in the VC-4 path.
canceled or not
performed.
VC-4 signals transmitted
looped back.
received VC-4 signals are
looped back.
locating for the VC-4 paths.
The VC4 Loopback function
is used for diagnosis and may
affect the services that are
function.
Loopback.
Table 9-20 Parameters for automatic laser shutdown

Optical Interface For example: NE(9-1001)-1- This parameter indicates the

SL4D-1(SDH-1) corresponding optical
interface.

Transport Platform
Automatic Shutdown Disabled, Enabled This parameter indicates or

Default value: Disabled specifies whether the
Automatic
Shutdownfunction is enabled
or disabled for the laser.
The ALS function allows the
laser to shut down
automatically when an optical
port does not carry services,
an optical fiber is broken, or
no optical signal is received.
You can set On Period(ms),
Off Period(ms), and
Continuously On-test
Period(ms) only when this
parameter is set to Enabled.
On Period(ms) For example, 2000 This parameter indicates or

specifies the period when a
shutdown laser automatically
starts up and tests whether the
optical fiber is normal.
Off Period(ms) For example, 60000 This parameter indicates or

specifies the period when the
laser does not work (with the
ALS function being enabled).
Continuously On-test For example, 90000 This parameter indicates or

Period(ms) specifies the period when a
shutdown laser is manually
started up and tests whether
the optical fiber is normal.
9.2.9 SL4D Specifications

Table 9-21 lists the technical specifications of the SL4D.
Table 9-21 Technical specifications of the SL4D

Item Performance
Service TX1/RX Receive/Transmit port of the For the performance of STM-4

ports 1 first STM-4 optical port optical ports, see Table 9-22,
Table 9-23.

Transport Platform
Item Performance

2 second STM-4 optical port

x D)
Weight 0.30 kg

Item Value
Transmission 15 40 80
distance (km)
Operating 1274 to 1356 1280 to 1335 1480 to 1580

wavelength range
(nm)
Launched optical -15 to -8 -3 to +2 -3 to +2

power range (dBm)

(dBm)
(dBm)
Minimum extinction 8.2 10 10

ratio (dB)
NOTE

Transport Platform
optical ports
Paramete Value
r
Nominal 622080 kbit/s

bit rate
Line code NRZ

pattern
Type of S-4.1 L-4.1

optical
interface
Transmiss 10 40
ion
distance
(km)

fiber
Operating 1490 1310 1490 1310

transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
Operating 1310 1490 1310 1490

receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
optical
power
range
(dBm)
Receiver -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 6 9
extinction
ratio (dB)

Transport Platform
9.3 SP3D
The SP3D is a 42xE1/T1 electrical interface board.

The functional version of the SP3D is TNF1.
Version
Table 9-24 describes the version mapping of the SP3D board.
Table 9-24 Version description of the SP3D board
Item Description

version or later.
9.3.2 Application
The SP3D is a PDH processing board. The SP3D can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
series to add and drop PDH signals. The SP3D transmits/receives and processes 42xE1/T1
signals.
Figure 9-7 shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing boards
add tributary signals to line signals and drops tributary signals to line signals.
Figure 9-7 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

Transport Platform

The SP3D processes E1/T1 signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance events,
and maintenance features.
Table 9-25 lists the functions and features that the SP3D supports.
Table 9-25 Functions and features that the SP3D supports

Function and Board
Feature
Service Receives/Transmits and processes 42xE1/T1 signals.

processing
Overhead Processes path overheads at the VC-12 level such as J2 and V5.
processing

events
Tributary clock Extracts clock signals from the first and seventeenth channels.
sources
Maintenance l Inloops and outloops at electrical ports

features l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact
on services)
l PRBS tests

The SP3D consists of an interface unit, a CODEC unit, a mapping/demapping unit, a logic
control unit, and a power supply unit.

Transport Platform
Figure 9-8 Functional block diagram of the SP3D

Backplane
E1/T1
signal
E1/T1
CODEC Service bus
Interface Mapping/De
unit Cross-connect unit
unit mapping unit
E1/T1

Control control unit communication unit
bus
-48 V/-60 V
Power
System power supply
-48 V/-60 V

Clock unit
Table 9-26 Signal processing in the receive direction of the SP3D

1 Interface unit Couples external E1/T1 signals by using a transformer

and then transmits the signals to the board.
2 CODEC unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
3 Mapping/ l Asynchronously maps signals into C-12s.

Demapping unit l Adds path overhead bytes to C-12s to form VC-12s.
l Processes pointers to form TU-12s.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TU-12s to form
one TUG-2.
l Performs byte interleaving for seven TUG-2s to
form one TUG-3.
l Performs byte interleaving for three TUG-3s to form
one C-4.
l Adds higher order path overhead bytes to one C-4 to
form one VC-4.

Transport Platform
4 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication
signals to the active and standby cross-connect units.
Table 9-27 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the SP3D

1 Logic processing l Processes clock signals.

unit l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2 Mapping/ l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

Demapping unit l Demultiplexes seven TUG-2s from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes three VC-12s from one TUG-2.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
l Extracts E1/T1 signals.
3 CODEC unit Performs HDB3 coding.
4 Interface unit Couples E1/T1 signals by using a transformer and then

transmits the signals to an external cable.

Power Supply Unit


Transport Platform
Clock Unit
9.3.5 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 9-9 shows the front panel of the SP3D.
Figure 9-9 Front panel of the SP3D

SP3D
SP3D
21 42
STAT
SRV
1 22
Indicators
The front panel of the SP3D has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status
Ports
Table 9-28 Ports on an SP3D board

on Cable
1-21 Receives/ Anea 96 See Table 9-29. 17.2.2

Transmits POS.1 21xE1/T1
the first to Cable
twenty-
first E1/T1
signals.
POS.96
22-42 Receives/
Transmits
the twenty-
second to
forty-
second
E1/T1
signals.

Transport Platform
Table 9-29 Pin assignments for an Anea 96 port




















Transport Platform














57 The seventeenth received E1 81 The seventeenth transmitted E1

58 The seventeenth received E1 82 The seventeenth transmitted E1

59 The eighteenth received E1 83 The eighteenth transmitted E1

60 The eighteenth received E1 84 The eighteenth transmitted E1

61 The nineteenth received E1 85 The nineteenth transmitted E1


Transport Platform
62 The nineteenth received E1 86 The nineteenth transmitted E1

63 The twentieth received E1 87 The twentieth transmitted E1

64 The twentieth received E1 88 The twentieth transmitted E1

65 The twenty-first received E1 89 The twenty-first transmitted E1

66 The twenty-first received E1 90 The twenty-first transmitted E1

9.3.6 Valid Slots

The SP3D can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the SP3D on the NMS are the
same as its physical slots.
9.3.7 Feature Code

The feature code of the SP3D indicates the E1/T1 port impedance.
Table 9-30 Feature codes of the SP3D
Feature Code Port Impedance (Ohm)
A 120
B 75
9.3.8 SP3D Parameters on the NMS

This section describes the parameters for SP3D boards.
Table 9-31 Parameters for PDH interfaces
Port - This parameter indicates the

corresponding port.
Port Name - This parameter indicates or

specifies the name of the port.

Transport Platform
Tributary Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, This parameter indicates or

Default value: Non-Loopback in the associated path of the
tributary unit.
canceled or not
performed.
PDH signals transmitted
looped back.
received PDH signals are
looped back.
locating for the paths of the
tributary unit. The Tributary
interfaces. Therefore,
exercise precaution before
starting this function.
Loopback.
Port Impedance 75 ohm, 120 ohm, 100 ohm This parameter indicates the
impedance of a path, which
depends on the tributary unit.

Transport Platform
Service Load Indication Load, Non-Loaded This parameter indicates or

Default value: Load specifies the service loading
status in a specific path.
l When this parameter is set
to Load, the board detects
whether alarms exist in
the path.
to Non-Loaded, the board
does not detect whether
there are alarms in the
path.
If a path does not carry any
services, you can set this
parameter to Non-Loaded for
the path to mask all the
alarms. If a path carries
services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the
path.

Transport Platform
Retiming Mode Normal, Retiming Mode of This parameter indicates or

Tributary Clock, Retiming specifies the retiming mode
Mode of Cross-Connect of a specific path.
Clock By using the retiming
Default value: Normal function, the retiming
reference signal from the
SDH network and the service
data signal are combined and
then sent to the client
equipment, therefore
decreasing the output jitter in
the signal. In this way, the
retiming function ensures that
the service code flow can
normally transfer the retiming
reference signal.
Only E1 ports support
retiming.
to Normal, the retiming
function is not used.
to Retiming Mode of
Tributary Clock, the
retiming function is used
with the clock of the
upstream tributary unit
traced.
to Retiming Mode of
Cross-Connect Clock,
the retiming function is
used with the clock of the
cross-connect unit traced.
It is recommended that the
external clock, instead of the
retiming function, should be
used to provide reference
clock signals for the
equipment.
If the retiming function is
required, it is recommended
that you set this parameter to
Retiming Mode of Cross-
Connect Clock.

Transport Platform
Pattern B8ZS, AMI Sets the service type of the

tributary board port,
depending on the actual
service type of the port.
Port Service Type E1, T1 This parameter indicates the

Default value: E1 type of services that are
processed in a path. It
depends on the services that
are transmitted in a path.
9.3.9 SP3D Specifications

Table 9-32 lists the technical specifications of the SP3D.
Table 9-32 Technical specifications of the SP3D
Item Performance
Service 1-21 Receives/Transmits the first to See Table 9-33.

ports twenty-first E1/T1 signals.
22-42 Receives/Transmits the twenty-

second to forty-second E1/T1
signals.

x D)
Weight 0.85 kg
Table 9-33 Specifications of the E1/T1 electrical ports
Electrical Port Type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s
Code pattern B8ZS code, AMI code HDB3 code
Waveform at the output port Complies with ITU-T G.703.
Signal bit rate at the output

port
Allowed attenuation at the

input port

Transport Platform
Electrical Port Type 1544 kbit/s 2048 kbit/s
Permitted frequency deviation Complies with ITU-T G.823.

at the input port
Input jitter tolerance Complies with ITU-T G. Complies with ITU-T G.

824. 823.
Anti-interference capability at - Complies with ITU-T G.

the input port 703.
Reflection attenuation at the - Complies with ITU-T G.

input and output ports 703.
Output jitter Complies with ITU-T G.823 and G.824.
Mapping jitter Complies with ITU-T G.783.
Combined jitter
Jitter transfer function - Complies with ITU-T G.

742.
Port type Anea 96
9.4 PL3T
The PL3T is a 3xE3/T3 electrical interface board.

The functional version of PL3T boards is TNF1.
Version
Table 9-34 describes the version mapping of the PL3T board.
Table 9-34 Version description of the PL3T board
Item Description
Board hardware TNF1: The mapping version of the equipment isV100R003C03

version or later.
9.4.2 Application
The PL3T is a PDH processing board. The PL3T can be used on the OptiX OSN equipment
series to add and drop PDH signals. The PL3T transmits/receives and processes 3xE3/T3
signals.

Transport Platform
Figure 9-10 shows the application of the PDH processing boards. The PDH processing
boards add tributary signals to line signals and drops tributary signals to line signals.
Figure 9-10 Networking and application of the PDH processing boards
NE1
NE2 NE4
NE3
Service flow
Line board
Tributary board

The PL3T processes E3/T3 signals and overheads, and supports alarms, performance events,
and maintenance features.
Table 9-35 lists the functions and features that the PL3T supports.
Table 9-35 Functions and features that the PL3T supports

Function and Board
Feature
Service Receives/Transmits and processes 3xE3/T3 signals.

processing
Overhead Sets and queries all path overheads at the VC-3 level.
processing

events
Tributary clock Extracts clock signals from the first and second channels.
sources

Transport Platform
Function and Board

Feature
Maintenance l Inloops and outloops at electrical ports

features l Warm resets and cold resets (with warm resets having no impact
on services)
l PRBS tests

The PL3T consists of an interface unit, a CODEC unit, a mapping/demapping unit, and a
logic control unit.
This section describes how the PL3T processes one E3/T3 signal, and it serves as an example
to describe the working principle and signal flow of the PL3T. Figure 9-11 shows the
functional block diagram of the PL3T.
Figure 9-11 Functional block diagram of the PL3T

Backplane
E3/T3
signal
E3/T3
CODEC Service bus
Interface Mapping/De
unit Cross-connect unit
unit mapping unit
E3/T3

Control control unit communication unit
bus
Power supplied to the other

+3.3 V
units on the board

Clock unit

Transport Platform
Table 9-36 Signal processing in the receive direction of the PL3T

1 Interface unit Couples external E3/T3 signals by using a transformer

and then transmits the signals to the board.
2 CODEC unit l Equalizes the received signals.

l Detects T_ALOS alarms.
3 Mapping/ l Asynchronously maps the signal into C-3.

Demapping unit l Processes path overheads and forms the signal to be
VC-3.
l Processes pointers and forms the signal to be TU-3.
l One TU-3 is multiplexed into one TUG-3.
l Three TU-3s are performed with byte interleaving
and are multiplexed into one C-4.
l C-4 is added with higher order path overheads and
the VC-4 is formed.
4 Logic control unit l Processes clock signals.

l Transmits VC-4 signals and pointer indication
signals to the active and standby cross-connect units.
Table 9-37 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the PL3T

1 Logic control unit l Processes clock signals.

l Receives VC-4 signals and pointer indication signals
from the cross-connect unit.
2 Mapping/ l Demultiplexes three TUG-3s from one VC-4.

Demapping unit l Demultiplexes one TU-3 from one TUG-3.
l Demultiplexes one VC-3 from one TU-3.
l Processes path overheads and pointers and detects
l Extracts E3/T3 signals.
3 CODEC unit Performs HDB3 coding.

Transport Platform
4 Interface unit Couples E3/T3 signals by using a transformer and then

transmits the signals to an external cable.

The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the system control and
communication unit.
Clock Unit
9.4.5 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 9-12 shows the front panel of the PL3T.
Figure 9-12 Front panel of the PL3T

PL3T
PL3T
STAT
SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3
Indicators
The front panel of the PL3T has the STAT and SRV indicators. For status explanation for the
indicators, see 22.2 Board Indicators.
Ports
The front panel of the PL3T has three electrical ports. Table 9-38 lists the types of the ports
on the PL3T and their respective usage.

Transport Platform
Table 9-38 Ports on the PL3T

Port Description Connector Type Pin Assignment Required Cable
TX1- Transmits the first SMB l Inner core: 17.2.3 E3/T3

TX3 to third E3/T3 transmitting Cable
signals. data (+)
l Outer core:
transmitting
data (-)
RX1- Receives the first l Inner core:

RX3 to third E3/T3 transmitting
signals. data (+)
l Outer core:
transmitting
data (-)
9.4.6 Valid Slots

The PL3T can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the PL3T on the NMS are the
9.4.7 Feature Code

PL3T boards do not have feature codes.
9.4.8 PL3T Parameters on the NMS

This section describes the parameters for PL3T boards.
Table 9-39 Parameters for PDH interfaces

Port - This parameter indicates the

corresponding port.
Port Name - This parameter indicates or

specifies the name of the port.

Transport Platform
Tributary Loopback Non-Loopback, Inloop, This parameter indicates or

Default value: Non-Loopback in the associated path of the
tributary unit.
canceled or not
performed.
PDH signals transmitted
looped back.
received PDH signals are
looped back.
locating for the paths of the
tributary unit. The Tributary
interfaces. Therefore,
exercise precaution before
starting this function.
Loopback.

Transport Platform
Service Load Indication Load, Non-Loaded This parameter indicates or

Default value: Load specifies the service loading
status in a specific path.
to Load, the board detects
whether alarms exist in
the path.
to Non-Loaded, the board
does not detect whether
there are alarms in the
path.
If a path does not carry any
services, you can set this
parameter to Non-Loaded for
the path to mask all the
alarms. If a path carries
services, you need to set this
parameter to Load for the
path.
Port Service Type E3, T3 This parameter indicates the

Default value: E3 type of services that are
processed in a path. It
depends on the services that
are transmitted in a path.
9.4.9 PL3T Specifications

This section describes the board specifications, including the electrical port performance,
dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 9-40 lists the technical specifications of the PL3T.
Table 9-40 Technical specifications of the PL3T

Item Performance
Service TX1- Transmits the first to third E3/T3 See Table 9-41.
ports TX3 signals.
RX1- Receives the first to third E3/T3

RX3 signals.

x D)
Weight 0.30 kg

Transport Platform
Item Performance
Table 9-41 Specifications of the E3/T3 electrical ports

Item Value
Bit rate 34368 kbit/s 44736 kbit/s
Code pattern HDB3 B3ZS
Connector SMB SMB
Port impedance (ohm) 75 75
Permitted frequency deviation at

the input port
Allowed attenuation at the input

port
Input jitter tolerance Complies with Complies with ITU-T G.824.

ITU-T G.823.
9.5 EFS8
The EFS8 is an 8xFE switching and processing board.

The functional version of the EFS8 is TNF1.
Version
Table 9-42 describes the version mapping of the EFS8 board.
Table 9-42 Version description of the EFS8 board

Item Description

version or later.

Transport Platform
9.5.2 Application
The EFS8 is a TDM processing board. The EFS8 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services,
manage bandwidths, and realize Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.
Figure 9-13 shows the typical networking and application of the EFS8 board. the Ethernet
switching board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data
with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow classification, traffic
control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching
board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/
demapping for data.
Figure 9-13 Networking and application of the EFS8 board
NMS
User A2 NE1
PORT 1
VLAN 100 NE2 NE4
NE3
Service flow PORT 1 VLAN 100

SDH board
EFS8 board
Cross-connect and
timing board User A1

The EFS8 supports the Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services, link capacity adjustment
scheme (LCAS), and test frames.
Table 9-43 lists the functions and features that the EFS8 supports.

Transport Platform
Table 9-43 Functions and features supported by EFS8 boards

Funct Board
ion
and
Featu
re
Basic Processes 8xFE electrical signals.

functi
ons
Port Supports 10Base-T/100Base-TX that complies with IEEE 802.3u.

types
Port Working Auto-negotiation, 10M full-duplex, 10M half-duplex, 100M half-

charac modes duplex, and 100M full-duplex
teristic
s Traffic Auto-negotiation mode Supported
control at
ports Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/ Supported
Setting
of port
status
Query of Supported
port
types
Servic EPL Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.

e service
catego
ries EVPL l Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
service l Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by QinQ tags.
EPLAN l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the
service static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. The
blacklist function supports verification of destination MAC
addresses only.
l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The
capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the
MAC address can be set and queried.
l Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
l Supports the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
l Supports a maximum of 1 VB. The maximum number of logical
ports for each VB is 16.
l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d
MAC bridge.

Transport Platform
Funct Board
ion
and
Featu
re
EVPLA l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

N service l Supports the setting of a maximum of 4095 VLAN filtering tables.
l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q
virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.
Servic Formats IEEE 802.3 Supported

e of
specifi Ethernet Ethernet II Supported
cation data IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
s frames
Frame l Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from
length 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
range l Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Bound 12xVC-3 or 63xVC-12

bandwidt
h
Concaten VC-12, VC-3, VC-12-Xv (X 63), and VC-3-Xv (X 12)

ation
granulari
ties
Encapsul HDLC Supported

ation
formats LAPS Supported
GFP-F Supported
MPLS Not supported

technolo
gy
VLAN Supports a total number of 4095 VLANs, which comply with IEEE
technolo 802.1q/p.
gy
Maximu 622 Mbit/s

m uplink
bandwidt
h
VCTRU Maximum number of VCTRUNKs supported by one EFS8 board: 8

NK Configuration principles are as follows:
specificat
ions VC-4 numbered 4 of the board support the binding of VC-3 and
VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths
only.

Transport Platform
Funct Board
ion
and
Featu
re
Protec TPS Not supported

tion
schem BPS Not supported
es PPS Not supported
DLAG Not supported
LAG Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.

Supports the load sharing mode and load non-sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the

bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT in compliance with Huawei
proprietary protocol.
STP/ Supports STP/RSTP in compliance with IEEE 802.1w.

RSTP
MSTP Not supported
Synch Synchron Not supported

roniza ous
tion Ethernet
IEEE Not supported

1588v2
Maint ETH l Supports CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE
enanc OAM 802.1ag and OAM ping in compliance with Huawei proprietary
e protocol.
featur l Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection,
es and link performance detection in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah,
and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei proprietary
protocol.
Test Supports test frames in GFP and Ethernet bearer modes.

Frame
Response Supported
to ping
Port Supports egress and ingress port mirroring.

mirroring
Loopbac PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.

k
MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.

Transport Platform
Funct Board
ion
and
Featu
re
capabilit VC-4 level Not supported

y
VC-3 level Supports inloops.
VC-12 level Not supported
RMON Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports.
Warm Supported
resets
Cold Supported
resets
Alarms Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the
and management and maintenance of the equipment.
performa
nce
events
QoS Traffic Supports traffic classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT

classifica +SVLAN, and PORT+SVLAN+CVLAN.
tion
Class of Supports CoS types including simple, VLAN priority, DSCP, and IP
service TOS.
(CoS)
Committ Supports the CAR, with the granularity of 64 kbit/s.

ed access
rate
(CAR)
Shaping Supports queue shaping on ports.
Queue Supports SP+WRR (SP is short for strict priority and WRR is short
schedulin for weighted round robin.)
g policy
Congesti Supports random early detection (RED) and weighted random early
on detection (WRED).
avoidanc
e
IGMP Protocol Supports protocol enabling in compliance with IGMPv1 and

snoopi enabling IGMPv2.
ng
Port Supported
aging
time

Transport Platform
Funct Board
ion
and
Featu
re
Fast Supported
leave
Discardi Supported
ng of
unknown
broadcast
packets
Static Not supported

broadcast
entry
Traffic Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
contro
l
Traffic Supports port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

monit
oring

The EFS8 consists of an Ethernet access unit, an encapsulation/mapping unit, a logic control
unit, a power supply unit, and a clock unit.
This section describes how the EFS8 processes one FE signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the EFS8. Figure 9-14 shows the function
block diagram of the EFS8.

Transport Platform
Figure 9-14 Function block diagram of the EFS8

Backplane
Encapsulation/
Mapping unit
access unit
FE
Ethernet
Service bus
Cross-connect unit
FE

control unit communication unit
Control bus
-48 V/-60 V
System power supply
-48 V/-60 V

Table 9-44 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EFS8
1 Ethernet access unit l Receives/Transmits FE signals.

l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE signals.
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.
2 Encapsulation/ l Encapsulates and maps signals.

Mapping unit l Transmits encapsulated data to the cross-connect
unit over the service bus.
Table 9-45 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EFS8
1 Encapsulation/ l Receives signals from the cross-connect unit.

Mapping unit l Demaps and decapsulates signals.

Transport Platform
2 Ethernet access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition,

CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement.
Ethernet data frames.
l Sends out the generated FE signals through Ethernet
ports.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet access unit and the encapsulation/mapping unit
over the control bus on the board.
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
9.5.5 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

Figure 9-15 shows the front panel of the EFS8.
Figure 9-15 Front panel of the EFS8

EFS8
EFS8
PROG
STAT
87654321 87654321 87654321 87654321 87654321 87654321 87654321 87654321

SRV
TX1 RX1 TX2 RX2 TX3 RX3 TX4 RX4 TX5 RX5 TX6 RX6 TX7 RX7 TX8 RX8

Transport Platform
Indicators
The front panel of the EFS8 has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, and SRV. For status
Ports
Table 9-46 Description of the ports

Port Descriptio Connector Type Pin Assignment Required
n Cable
RX1/ Receives RJ45 The ports support 17.3

TX1- and MDI and MDI-X Management
RX8/ transmits modes. For details Cables
TX8 the first to about the pin
eighth FE 87654321 assignments for the
electrical ports, see Table 9-47
signals. and Table 9-48.

Pin 10BASE-T/100BASE-TX
Signal Function
1 TX+ Transmitting data (+)
2 TX- Transmitting data (-)
3 RX+ Receiving data (+)
4 Reserved -
5 Reserved -
6 RX- Receiving data (-)
7 Reserved -
8 Reserved -

Signal Function
1 RX+ Receiving data (+)
2 RX- Receiving data (-)
3 TX+ Transmitting data (+)

Transport Platform
Signal Function
4 Reserved -
5 Reserved -
6 TX- Transmitting data (-)
7 Reserved -
8 Reserved -
9.5.6 Valid Slots

The EFS8 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
9.5.7 Feature Code

EFS8 boards do not have feature codes.
9.5.8 EFS8 Parameters on the NMS

This section describes the parameters for EFS8 boards.
Table 9-49 Parameters for configuring the basic attributes of an Ethernet port
Port PORTn Displays all the available

ports on an Ethernet port. The
letter n indicates the number
of the PORT port.
Name For example, PORT-1 Specifies the name of a PORT

port. The name can contain up
to 32 characters in English or
16 characters in Chinese.
Enable Port Disabled, Enabled The Enable Port (Ethernet

Default value: Disabled Port Attribute) parameter
specifies whether packets can
be transmitted or received at
an Ethernet port.

Transport Platform
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half- Specifies the working mode

Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, of the Ethernet port on a
100M Half-Duplex, 100M board. This parameter
Full-Duplex, 1000M Half- determines the maximum
Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex, transmission rate and
10GE Full-Duplex LAN, communication mode of the
10GE Full-Duplex WAN Ethernet port.
When setting this parameter,
you must ensure the working
modes of the interconnected
ports are the same. Otherwise,
the services are not available.
Force Autonegotiation 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full- Indicates the Ethernet port
Flow Control Mode Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, works in the forced auto-
100M Full-Duplex, 1000M negotiation mode.
Half-Duplex, 1000M Full-
Duplex
Max. Frame Length 1518 to 9600 The Max. Frame Length

Default value: 1522 (Ethernet Port Attribute)
parameter specifies the
maximum frame length that is
supported at an Ethernet port.
MAC Loopback Inloop, Non-Loopback The MAC Loopback

Default value: Non-Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute)
parameter specifies the MAC
loopback state at an Ethernet
port. Port loopback setting is
applied to locating faults only.
PHY Loopback Inloop, Outloop, Non- The PHY Loopback

Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Default value: Non-Loopback parameter specifies the PHY
Logic Type SDH-OPPORT, SDH-EPORT Displays the logic type of

port.

Transport Platform
Table 9-50 Parameters for configuring flow control of an Ethernet port


MAC ports on an Ethernet
board.
Specifies the PORT port. The
of the port.
Non-Autonegotiation Disabled, Enable Symmetric The Non-Autonegotiation

Flow Control Mode Flow Control, Send Only, Flow Control Mode
Receive Only (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Default value: Disable specifies the flow control
mode adopted when an
Ethernet port works in non-
auto-negotiation mode.
Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable The Autonegotiation Flow

Control Mode Dissymmetric Flow Control, Control Mode (Ethernet
Enable Symmetric Flow Port Attribute) specifies the
Control, Enable Symmetric/ flow control mode adopted
Dissymmetric Flow Control when an Ethernet port works
Default value: Disable in auto-negotiation mode.
Table 9-51 Parameters for configuring the tag attributes of an Ethernet port
Port PORTn or VCTRUNKn Specifies the PORT or

VCTRUNK port. The letter n
indicates the number of the port.
Tag Identifier Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid The Tag Identifier parameter
Default value: Tag Aware indicates that the Ethernet port
supports IEEE 802.1Q Ethernet
packets that contain VLAN tags.
You can set three attributes to
differentiate the packets from
each other so that these packets
can be transmitted efficiently.
Default VLAN ID 1-4095 The Default VLAN ID

parameter specifies the default
VLAN ID of a port.

Transport Platform
VLAN Priority 0-7 The VLAN Priority (Ethernet

Default value: 0 Port Attribute) parameter
specifies the priority of the
default VLAN ID of a port. It
indicates the priority of the
service quality.
Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled The Entry Detection (Ethernet

Default value: Enabled Port Attribute) parameter
specifies whether to identify the
tag labels in the data packets.
The entry detection function can
be disabled in the port-based
services only. If the entry
detection function is disabled,
you may fail to configure other
VLAN-based services.
Table 9-52 Parameters for configuring network attributes of an Ethernet port

Port PORTn Specifies the PORT port. The

of the port.
Port Attribute UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware The Port Attribute

(Ethernet Port) parameter
specifies the position of a port
in the network. Different port
attributes support different
packets.
Table 9-53 Parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port
Port PORTn Indicates the PORT port.

The letter n indicates the
number of the PORT port.

Transport Platform
Enabling Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled The Enabling Broadcast

Suppression Default value: Disabled Packet Suppression
(Ethernet Interface
Attributes) parameter
specifies whether to enable
the function for a port to
suppress the broadcast
packets and to control the
traffic of the broadcast
data packets that enter the
port. If the broadcast
packet suppression
function is enabled, and if
the broadcast traffic
exceeds the specified
threshold value, the
broadcast packets that
enter the port are
discarded.
Broadcast Packet Suppression 10%-100% The Broadcast Packet

Threshold Default value: 30% Suppression
Threshold(Ethernet
Interface Attributes)
parameter allocates the
specified bandwidth to the
broadcast packets. The
bandwidth is allocated on
the basis of the traffic
proportion at the port. If
the bandwidth allocated to
the broadcast packets
reaches the specified
the broadcast data packets
that are received.
Traffic Threshold(Mpbs) 0-1000, in step length of 1 The Traffic

Default value: 1000 Threshold(Mpbs)
(External Ethernet Port
Attribute) parameter
specifies the data flow
threshold at external
physical ports.

Transport Platform
Port Traffic Threshold Time 1-30 The Port Traffic

Window(Min) Default value: 0 Threshold Time
Window(Min) parameter
specifies the duration for a
VCTRUNK or an IP port
to monitor the traffic after
the zero traffic monitoring
function of the port is
enabled.
Loop Detection Enabled, Disabled The Loop Detection

Default value: Disabled (Ethernet Port Attribute)
function of reporting the
self-loop alarms after one
of the following loopback
cases is detected.
l For the external
physical interface of
the board, the transmit
direction is connected
to the receive direction
by a fiber.
l The two external
physical ports on the
board are cross-
connected to each other
through fibers.
l The cross-connection is
created on the same
VCTRUNK of the
board.
created between
different VCTRUNKs
of the board.

Transport Platform
Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled The Loop Port Shutdown

Default value: Enabled (Ethernet Port Attribute)
parameter is set to disable
the self-loop port after a
self-loop port is detected if
the loop port shutdown
function is enabled. After
the self-loop port is shut
down, the self-loop port
only transmits or receives
the self-loop detection
packets rather than any
other packets. If the port is
not a self-loop port, it
starts to work again.
Zero-Flow Monitor Enabled, Disabled The Zero-Flow Monitor

Default value: Disabled parameter specifies
whether the traffic on a
port is monitored.
After the zero traffic
monitoring function is
enabled, the port can
report the zero traffic
alarm after the state of
zero traffic lasts for a
certain period. Hence, the
user can check whether the
service is interrupted due
to the fault on the
equipment side.
Zero-Flow Monitor Interval 1-30 Sets the time interval for

(min) Default value: 15 the zero-flow monitoring.
Table 9-54 Parameters for configuring the encapsulation and mapping of an Ethernet port
Port VCTRUNKn Indicates the VCTRUNK

port. The letter n indicates
the number of the
VCTRUNK port.

Transport Platform
Mapping Protocol GFP, LAPS, HDLC The Mapping Protocol

Default value: GFP parameter specifies the
mapping protocol of the
VCTRUNK port.
The Mapping Protocol
parameter of the VCTRUNK
is the basic setting of the
VCTRUNK port. If the
parameter value is different
from that of Mapping
Protocol for the VCTRUNK
of the interconnected
equipment, the service is
interrupted.
Scramble Unscramble, Scramble The Scramble parameter

mode[X43+1], Scramble specifies whether to
mode[X48+1] scramble the payload area of
Default value: Scramble the encapsulation protocol
mode[X43+1] and the scramble mode.
If the value of Scramble for
the VCTRUNK of the local
equipment is different from
that of Scramble for the
VCTRUNK of the
interconnected equipment,
the service is interrupted.
Set Inverse Value for CRC Yes, No The Set Inverse Value for
Default value: Yes CRC parameter specifies
whether to set an inverse
value for the CRC field of
the HDLC or LAPS
protocol.
If the value of Set Inverse
Value for CRC for the
VCTRUNK of the local
that of Set Inverse Value
for CRC for the VCTRUNK
interrupted.
NOTE
This parameter takes effect
only when Mapping Protocol
is set to LAPS or HDLC.

Transport Platform
Check Field Length No, FCS16, FCS32 The Check Field Length
Default value: FCS32 parameter specifies the
length of the CRC field of
the mapping protocol.
If Mapping Protocol is set
to HDLCor LAPS, and if
the value of Check Field
Length is different from that
for the interconnected
VCTRUNKs at the two
ends, the service is
interrupted.
NOTE
If Mapping Protocol is set to
HDLC or LAPS, select FCS32
only.
FCS Calculated Bit Big endian, Little endian The FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence Default value: Big endian Sequence parameter
specifies the sequence of
storing the bits in the CRC
field of the mapping
protocol.
If the value of FCS
Calculated Bit Sequence
for the VCTRUNK of the
local equipment is different
from that of FCS
Table 9-55 Parameters for configuring the LCAS

Parameter Value Description
Port VCTRUNKn Specifies the VCTRUNK

the number of the
VCTRUNK port.

Transport Platform
Enabling LCAS Enabled, Disabled The Enabling LCAS

Default value: Disabled parameter can increase or
decrease the SDH network
capacity without affecting
the service. The capacity is
automatically decreased if a
member fails, and is
automatically increased if
the member recovers.
As a bidirectional protocol,
the LCAS can work
normally only when some
bandwidth is available in the
bidirectional physical paths.
If the bandwidth is available
only in the unidirectional
physical paths, the LCAS
may fail to correctly adjust
the bandwidth.
You can set Enabling
LCAS as required.

Transport Platform
LCAS Mode Huawei Mode, Standard Specifies the sequence for

Mode the sink end to respond to
Default value: Huawei the MST and Rs_Ack
Mode messages received from the
source end.
l Huawei Mode: inverts
the RS_Ack message,
and then transmits the
MST message.
l Standard Mode:
transmits the MST
message, and then
inverts the RS_Ack
message.
To set the LCAS mode,
follow the principles:
l If the interconnected
equipment at the two
ends are Huawei
equipment, select
Huawei Mode.
l If Huawei equipment is
interconnected to third-
party equipment, set the
interconnected
equipment to the same
mode according to the
mode supported by the
third-party equipment.
Hold off Time(ms) 0, 2000-10000 Specifies HO Procedure

Default value: 2000 Timer Duration of the
LCAS protocol. If the
LCAS coexists with another
network-level protection
scheme (for example, MSP
or SNCP), you can set this
parameter to postpone the
LCAS switching.
The LCAS switching time is
affected.
when Enabling LCAS is set
to Enabled.

Transport Platform
WTR Time(s) 0-720 Specifies WTR Procedure

LCAS protocol. Set this
parameter to avoid impact
caused by the alarm jitter on
the link status.
The fault recovery time of
the LCAS protocol is
affected. After the network
recovers from a fault, the
LCAS protocol can recover
only after a WTR duration.
NOTE
to Enabled.
TSD Enabled, Disabled Specifies the B3 or BIP

Default value: Disabled error status of a VCTRUNK
member. TSD stands for
trail signal degrade. When
this parameter is set to
Enabled and if a
VCTRUNK member has
excessive B3 or BIP bit
errors, the LCAS protocol
regards that this member
fails and deletes it from the
available members. If this
parameter is set to Disabled,
the LCAS protocol does not
monitor the status of the B3
or BIP bit errors of a
VCTRUNK member.
NOTE
to Enabled.

Transport Platform
Minimum Number of 2-256 When the LCAS is enabled,

Members in the Transmit Default value: 256 the LCAS_PLCT alarm is
Direction reported if certain members
in the transmit direction fail
and the number of valid
members is smaller than a
certain value. The
Minimum Number of
Members in the Transmit
Direction parameter
specifies the certain number
of the valid members in the
transmit direction.
When the LCAS is enabled,
failure in certain paths does
not affect the service in the
case of sufficient
bandwidths. The user can
set this parameter to enable
the reporting of the
LCAS_PLCT alarm only
when the number of the
valid members in the
transmit direction is smaller
than a certain value.
Minimum Number of 2-256 Specifies the minimum

Members in the Receive Default value: 256 number of members in the
Direction receive direction. If the
LCAS is enabled and the
number of valid members is
less than the specified value,
an alarm is reported.
Table 9-56 Parameters for binding paths

VCTRUNK Port VCTRUNKn Displays the number (n) of

the VCTRUNK port.
Level For example, VC12-xv Specifies the level of a path

that is bound with the
VCTRUNK.
Service Direction Bidirectional, Uplink, Specifies the direction of the

Downlink Ethernet service.
Default value: Bidirectional

Transport Platform
Bound Path For example, VC4-1- Specifies the number of the

VC12(1-3) path to be bound, for
example, VC4-1-VC12(1-3).
Number of Bound Paths n Displays the number of

VCTRUNKs to be bound.
The Used Channel For example, VC4-1- Displays the actually used
VC12(1) channel.
Activation Status Active, Deactive Displays whether the path is

active.

This section describes the board specifications, including the parameters specified for
electrical ports, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 9-57 lists the technical specifications of the EFS8.
Table 9-57 Technical specifications of the EFS8

Item Performance
Service ports FE electrical port See Table 9-58.
Table 9-58 Specifications of the EFS8 Ethernet electrical ports

FE electrical 10BASE-T Manchester coding RJ45

port signals
100BASE-TX MLT-3 encoding

signal
The mechanical specifications of a EFS8 board are as follows:
l Dimensions (Height x Width x Depth): 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x 226.00 mm
l Weight: 0.65 kg (1.4 lb)

Transport Platform
Power Consumption
EFS8 12.85 12.85
9.6 EGS4
The EGS4 is a 4xGE switching and processing board.

The functional version of the EGS4 is TNF1.
Version
Table 9-59 describes the version mapping of the (EGS4) board.
Table 9-59 Version description of the (EGS4) board

Item Description

version or later.
9.6.2 Application
The EGS4 is used to transmit/receive Ethernet services, manage bandwidths, and realize
Layer 2 switching of Ethernet services.
Figure 9-16 shows the typical networking and application of the EGS4 board. the Ethernet
switching board accesses and converges Ethernet services, and provides the Ethernet data
with the following data features: Layer 2 switching, port isolation, flow classification, traffic
control, VLAN management, and priority configuration. In addition, the Ethernet switching
board performs encapsulation/decapsulation, virtual concatenation, and SDH mapping/
demapping for data.

Transport Platform
Figure 9-16 Networking and application of the EGS4 board
NMS
User A2 NE1
PORT 1
VLAN 100
NE2 NE4
NE3
PORT 2
VLAN 100
PORT 2
User B2 VLAN 100
PORT 1 VLAN 100 User B1

Service flow
TDM board
Cross-connect and
timing board User A1

EGS4 boards support the Layer 2 switching, link aggregation, and multicast functions.
Table 9-60 lists the functions and features supported by EGS4 boards.
Table 9-60 Functions and features supported by EGS4 boards

Funct Description
ion
and
Featu
re
Basic Receives/Transmits and processes 4xFE or 4xGE services.

functi
ons

Transport Platform
Funct Description
ion
and
Featu
re
Port l FE SFP optical module type: 100BASE-BX/100BASE-FX/100BASE-LX/

types 100BASE-VX/100BASE-ZX
l GE SFP optical module type: 1000BASE-SX/1000BASE-LX/1000BASE-ZX
l GE SFP electrical module type: 1000BASE-T, supporting auto-negotiation
l SFP module types:
FE/GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
FE/GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
GE pluggable electrical module
l A GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port. A colored CWDM
optical port supports a transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km.
Port Working GE electrical port: auto-negotiation, 1000M full-duplex, 100M full-

charac modes duplex, and 10M full-duplex
teristic GE optical port: auto-negotiation and 1000M full-duplex
s
FE optical port: 100M full-duplex
Traffic Auto-negotiation mode Supported only by GE ports

control at
ports Non-autonegotiation mode Supported
Query/ Supported
Setting
of port
status
Query of Supported
port
types
Servic EPL Supports PORT-based transparent transmission.

e service
catego
ries EVPL l Supports PORT-shared EVPL services.
service l Supports VCTRUNK-shared EVPL services.
The services are isolated by VLAN tags.
The services are isolated by QinQ tags.

Transport Platform
Funct Description
ion
and
Featu
re
EPLAN l Supports switching on the client and SDH sides.

service l Supports the blacklist that can contain 512 records and also the
static MAC address table that can contain 512 records. The
blacklist function supports verification of destination MAC
addresses only.
l Supports the self-learning of the source MAC address. The
capacity of the MAC address table is 16K. The aging time of the
MAC address can be set and queried.
l Supports the configuration of static MAC routes.
l Supports the query of dynamic MAC addresses.
l Supports a maximum of 16 VBs. The maximum number of logical
ports for each VB is 68.
l Supports the EPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1d
MAC bridge.
EVPLA l Supports data isolation based on VB+VLAN.

N service l Supports the setting of a maximum of 4095 VLAN filtering tables.
l Supports the EVPLAN services that are based on the IEEE 802.1q
virtual bridge and IEEE 802.1ad provider bridge.
Servic Formats IEEE 802.3 Supported

e of
specifi Ethernet Ethernet II Supported
cation data IEEE 802.1 q/p Supported
s frames
Frame l Supports the setting of the frame length to a value ranging from
length 1518 bytes to 9600 bytes.
range l Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600 bytes.
Bound 16xVC-4, or 48xVC-3, or 252xVC-12

bandwidt
h
Concaten VC-12, VC-3, VC-4, VC-12-Xv (X 63), VC-3-Xv (X 24), and

ation VC-4-Xv (X 8).
granulari
ties
Encapsul HDLC Supported

ation
formats LAPS Supported
GFP-F Supported

Transport Platform
Funct Description
ion
and
Featu
re
MPLS Not supported

technolo
gy
VLAN Supports a total number of 4094 VLANs, which comply with IEEE
technolo 802.1q/p.
gy
Maximu 2.5 Gbit/s.

m uplink
bandwidt
h
VCTRU 64
NK Configuration principles are as follows:
specificat
ions Supports a maximum of 16 VC-4s.
VC-4s numbered 1-4 of the board support the binding of VC-3 and
VC-12 paths. The other VC-4s support the binding of VC-3 paths
only.
Protec Distribut Supports static DLAGs.

tion ed link Supports non-load sharing DLAGs.
schem aggregati
es on group Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
(DLAG)
LAG Supports manual link aggregation and static link aggregation.

Supports the load sharing mode and non-load sharing mode.
Complies with IEEE 802.3ad and IEEE 802.1AX.
LCAS Dynamically increases or decreases the bandwidth and protects the

bandwidth in compliance with ITU-T G.7042.
LPT Supports P2P LPT and P2MP LPT in compliance with ITU-T G.
7042.
STP/ Supports the RSTP, which complies with IEEE 802.1w.

RSTP
MSTP Not supported
Synch Synchron Supported

roniza ous NOTE
tion Ethernet SFP electrical modules do not support synchronous Ethernet clocks.
IEEE Not supported

1588v2

Transport Platform
Funct Description
ion
and
Featu
re
Maint ETH- l Supports CC, LB tests, and LT tests in compliance with IEEE
enanc OAM 802.1ag and OAM ping in compliance with Huawei proprietary
e protocol.
featur l Supports OAM auto-discovery, remote loopbacks, fault detection,
es and link performance detection in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah,
and selfloop detection in compliance with Huawei proprietary
protocol.
Test Supports test frames in GFP bearer mode.

Frame
Response Not supported

to ping
Port Supports ingress mirroring.

mirroring
Loopbac PHY layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.

k
capabilit MAC layer at Ethernet ports Supports inloops.
y VC-4 level Supports outloops.
RMON Supports RMON of the Ethernet performance of Ethernet ports and

VCTRUNKs.
Warm Supported
resets
Cold Supported
resets
Alarms Reports various alarms and performance events, which facilitates the
and management and maintenance of the equipment.
performa
nce
events
QoS Traffic Supports traffic classification based on PORT, PORT+VLAN, PORT

classifica +SVLAN, and ORT+VLAN+PRI.
tion
Class of Supports CoS types including simple, VLAN priority, DSCP, and IP
service TOS.
(CoS)

Transport Platform
Funct Description
ion
and
Featu
re
Committ Supports the CAR, with the granularity of 64 kbit/s.

ed access
rate
(CAR)
Shaping Supports queue shaping on ports.
Queue Supports strict priority (SP) and weighted fair queuing (WFQ).
schedulin
g policy
Congesti Supports random early detection (RED).

on
avoidanc
e
IGMP Protocol Supports protocol enabling in compliance with IGMPv1 and

snoopi enabling IGMPv2.
ng
Port Supported
aging
time
Fast Supported
leave
Discardi Supported
ng of
unknown
broadcast
packets
Static Not supported

broadcast
entry
Traffic Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies with IEEE 802.3x.
contro
l
Traffic EGS4 boards support port-based and VCTRUNK-based traffic monitoring.

monit
oring

The EGS4 consists of an Ethernet access unit, an encapsulation/mapping unit, a logic control
unit, a power supply unit, and a clock unit.

Transport Platform
This section describes how the EGS4 processes one GE signal, and it serves as an example to
describe the working principle and signal flow of the EGS4. Figure 9-17 shows the function
block diagram of the EGS4.
Figure 9-17 Function block diagram of the EGS4

Backplane
Encapsulation/
Mapping unit
access unit
GE
Ethernet
Service bus
Cross-connect unit
GE

control unit communication unit
Control bus

+3.3 V Power Fuse -48 V/-60 V
Power module -48 V/-60 V

module Fuse +3.3 V
+3.3 V backup power
Table 9-61 Signal processing in the receive direction of the EGS4

1 Ethernet access unit l Receives/Transmits FE/GE signals.

l Performs restructuring, decoding, and serial/parallel
conversion for FE/GE signals.
CRC checks, and Ethernet performance
measurement for frame signals.
2 Encapsulation/ l Encapsulates and maps signals.

Mapping unit l Transmits encapsulated data to the cross-connect
unit over the service bus.

Transport Platform
Table 9-62 Signal processing in the transmit direction of the EGS4

1 Encapsulation/ l Receives signals from the cross-connect unit.

Mapping unit l Demaps and decapsulates signals.
2 Ethernet access unit l Performs frame delimitation, preamble addition,

CRC code computing, and Ethernet performance
measurement.
Ethernet data frames.
l Sends out the generated FE/GE signals through
Ethernet ports.

The logic control unit controls the Ethernet access unit and the encapsulation/mapping unit
over the control bus on the board.
communication unit.
Power Supply Unit

Clock Unit
9.6.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and an optical port on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram
Figure 9-18 Front panel of the EGS4 (with FE/GE optical ports)
OUT1/IN1OUT2/IN2 OUT3/IN3 OUT4/IN4
EGS4
PROG
STAT
SRV
L/A1
L/A2
L/A3
L/A4

Transport Platform
Indicators
The front panel of the EGS4 has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, SRV, L/A1, L/A2,
L/A3, and L/A4. For status explanation for the indicators, see 22.2 Board Indicators.
Ports
Table 9-63 Description of the port

Por Descriptio Connector Type Pin Require
t n Assignment d Cable
IN1 Receives FE/GE LC SFP optical l OUT 17.1.2

/ and optical port module represents Connect
OU transmits OUT IN the transmit ors
T1, FE/GE port.
IN2 signals. l IN
/ represents
OU the receive
T2, port.
IN3
/ GE electrical SFP electrical module The electrical 17.3
OT port port supports Manage
U3, medium ment
and 87 65 4 32 1 dependent Cables
IN4 interface
/ For status explanation (MDI), MDI
OU for the indicators, see crossover
T4 Table 9-64. (MDI-X), and
auto-MDI/MDI-
X modes. For
pin
assignments,
see Table 9-65
and Table 9-66.

L/A (green) On The Ethernet link is working

properly.
L/A (yellow) On or blinking The port is receiving or transmitting

data.

transmitting data.

Transport Platform


(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

(+)

(-)


(+)

(-)

(+)

(+)

(-)

(-)

Transport Platform

(+)

(-)
Labels
There is a laser safety class label on the front panel of the EGS4.
9.6.6 Valid Slots

The EGS4 can be inserted in one of the slots 1-6 in the chassis.
NOTE
When the APIU (providing AC power) or UPM system is used for power supply, a maximum of four
EGS4 boards can be used in a chassis.
Different slots provide different backplane bandwidths. The EGS4 board supports the
following three slot applications. Figure 9-19 shows the backplane bandwidth for each
application.
l Application 1: If the maximum upstream bandwidth of the boards in slot 1 to slot 6 is
1.25 Gbit/s, the EGS4 board can be installed in slot 1 to slot 6.
l Application 2: If the maximum upstream bandwidth of the boards in slot 3 and slot 4 is
2.5 Gbit/s, the TDM boards that do not support 2.5G buses cannot be installed in slot 3
and slot 4. In other words, the TDM boards installed in slot 3 and slot 4 can only be
EGS4 boards. In addition, TDM service boards cannot be installed in slot 1 and slot 2.
l Application 3: If the maximum upstream bandwidth of the boards in slot 1 and slot 2 is
2.5 Gbit/s, the TDM boards that do not support 2.5G buses cannot be installed in slot 1
and slot 2. In other words, the TDM boards installed in slot 1 and slot 2 can only be
EGS4 boards. In addition, TDM service boards cannot be installed in slot 3 and slot 4.
NOTE
Maximum upstream bandwidth of the EGS4 board is 2.5 Gbit/s. The maximum access capacity of slots
1, 2, 3, and 4 is 2.5 Gbit/s and the maximum access capacity of slots 5 and 6 is 1.25 Gbit/s.

Transport Platform
Figure 9-19 EGS4 board slot applications
Application 1:
Slot SLOT
Slot 7 7 SLOT 8Slot 8
(CST/CSH)
91
10 (CST/CSH)
(PIU SLO
Slot SLOT 5 SLOT 6
Slot 6 (1.25 Gbit/s)
(PIU) 93T Slot 5 (1.25 Gbit/s)
) 11 (EXT) (EXT)
SLO (FAN SLOT 3 SLOT 4
Slot (FAN) Slot 3 (1.25 Gbit/s) Slot 4 (1.25 Gbit/s)
T ) (EXT) (EXT)
9
92 SLOT 1 SLOT 2
(PIU) Slot 1 (1.25)Gbit/s)
(EXT Slot (EXT )
2 (1.25 Gbit/s)
Application 2:
Slot SLOT
(CST/CSH)
91
10 (CST/CSH)
Slot
(PIU SLO SLOT
Slot 5 Gbit/s)
5 (1.25
SLOT 6
(PIU) 93T Slot (EXT)
6 (1.25 Gbit/s)
) 11 (EXT)
Slot (FAN) Slot 3 (2.5 Gbit/s) Slot(EXT)
4 (2.5 Gbit/s)
T ) (EXT)
9
92 SLOT 1 SLOT 2
(PIU) Slot 1 (no(EXT )
TDM service board) )
Slot 2 (no TDM service board)
(EXT
Application 3:
Slot SLOT
(CST/CSH)
91
10 (CST/CSH)
Slot
(PIU SLO SLOT 5 SLOT 6
(PIU) 93T Slot 5 (1.25 Gbit/s) Slot(EXT)
6 (1.25 Gbit/s)
) 11 (EXT)
Slot (FAN) Slot 3 (no TDM service board) Slot 4 (no TDM service board)
T ) (EXT) (EXT)
9
92 SLOT 1 SLOT 2
(PIU) Slot 1(EXT )
(2.5 Gbit/s) )
Slot 2 (2.5 Gbit/s)
(EXT
9.6.7 Feature Code

None.
9.6.8 EGS4 Parameters on the NMS

This section describes the parameters for EGS4 boards.
Table 9-67 Parameters for configuring the basic attributes of an Ethernet port

ports on an Ethernet port. The
of the PORT port.
Name For example, PORT-1 Specifies the name of a PORT

port. The name can contain up
to 32 characters in English or
16 characters in Chinese.

Transport Platform
Enable Port Disabled, Enabled The Enable Port (Ethernet

Default value: Disabled Port Attribute) parameter
specifies whether packets can
be transmitted or received at
an Ethernet port.
Working Mode Auto-Negotiation, 10M Half- Specifies the working mode

Duplex, 10M Full-Duplex, of the Ethernet port on a
100M Half-Duplex, 100M board. This parameter
Full-Duplex, 1000M Half- determines the maximum
Duplex, 1000M Full-Duplex, transmission rate and
10GE Full-Duplex LAN, communication mode of the
10GE Full-Duplex WAN Ethernet port.
When setting this parameter,
you must ensure the working
modes of the interconnected
ports are the same. Otherwise,
the services are not available.
Force Autonegotiation 10M Half-Duplex, 10M Full- Indicates the Ethernet port
Flow Control Mode Duplex, 100M Half-Duplex, works in the forced auto-
100M Full-Duplex, 1000M negotiation mode.
Half-Duplex, 1000M Full-
Duplex
Max. Frame Length 1518 to 9600 The Max. Frame Length

maximum frame length that is
supported at an Ethernet port.
MAC Loopback Inloop, Non-Loopback The MAC Loopback

Default value: Non-Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute)
parameter specifies the MAC
PHY Loopback Inloop, Outloop, Non- The PHY Loopback

Loopback (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Default value: Non-Loopback parameter specifies the PHY
Logic Type SDH-OPPORT, SDH-EPORT Displays the logic type of

port.

Transport Platform
Table 9-68 Parameters for configuring flow control of an Ethernet port


MAC ports on an Ethernet
board.
Specifies the PORT port. The
of the port.
Non-Autonegotiation Disabled, Enable Symmetric The Non-Autonegotiation

Flow Control Mode Flow Control, Send Only, Flow Control Mode
Receive Only (Ethernet Port Attribute)
Default value: Disable specifies the flow control
mode adopted when an
Ethernet port works in non-
auto-negotiation mode.
Autonegotiation Flow Disabled, Enable The Autonegotiation Flow

Control Mode Dissymmetric Flow Control, Control Mode (Ethernet
Enable Symmetric Flow Port Attribute) specifies the
Control, Enable Symmetric/ flow control mode adopted
Dissymmetric Flow Control when an Ethernet port works
Default value: Disable in auto-negotiation mode.
Table 9-69 Parameters for configuring the tag attributes of an Ethernet port
Port PORTn or VCTRUNKn Specifies the PORT or

VCTRUNK port. The letter n
indicates the number of the port.
Tag Identifier Access, Tag Aware, Hybrid The Tag Identifier parameter
Default value: Tag Aware indicates that the Ethernet port
supports IEEE 802.1Q Ethernet
packets that contain VLAN tags.
You can set three attributes to
differentiate the packets from
each other so that these packets
can be transmitted efficiently.
Default VLAN ID 1-4095 The Default VLAN ID

parameter specifies the default
VLAN ID of a port.

Transport Platform
VLAN Priority 0-7 The VLAN Priority (Ethernet

Default value: 0 Port Attribute) parameter
specifies the priority of the
default VLAN ID of a port. It
indicates the priority of the
service quality.
Entry Detection Enabled, Disabled The Entry Detection (Ethernet

Default value: Enabled Port Attribute) parameter
specifies whether to identify the
tag labels in the data packets.
The entry detection function can
be disabled in the port-based
services only. If the entry
detection function is disabled,
you may fail to configure other
VLAN-based services.
Table 9-70 Parameters for configuring network attributes of an Ethernet port

Port PORTn Specifies the PORT port. The

of the port.
Port Attribute UNI, C-Aware, S-Aware The Port Attribute

(Ethernet Port) parameter
specifies the position of a port
in the network. Different port
attributes support different
packets.
Table 9-71 Parameters for configuring the advanced attributes of an Ethernet port
Port PORTn Indicates the PORT port.

The letter n indicates the
number of the PORT port.

Transport Platform
Enabling Broadcast Packet Enabled, Disabled The Enabling Broadcast

Suppression Default value: Disabled Packet Suppression
(Ethernet Interface
Attributes) parameter
specifies whether to enable
the function for a port to
suppress the broadcast
packets and to control the
traffic of the broadcast
data packets that enter the
port. If the broadcast
packet suppression
function is enabled, and if
the broadcast traffic
exceeds the specified
threshold value, the
broadcast packets that
enter the port are
discarded.
Broadcast Packet Suppression 10%-100% The Broadcast Packet

Threshold Default value: 30% Suppression
Threshold(Ethernet
Interface Attributes)
parameter allocates the
specified bandwidth to the
broadcast packets. The
bandwidth is allocated on
the basis of the traffic
proportion at the port. If
the bandwidth allocated to
the broadcast packets
reaches the specified
the broadcast data packets
that are received.
Traffic Threshold(Mpbs) 0-1000, in step length of 1 The Traffic

Default value: 1000 Threshold(Mpbs)
(External Ethernet Port
Attribute) parameter
specifies the data flow
threshold at external
physical ports.

Transport Platform
Port Traffic Threshold Time 1-30 The Port Traffic

Window(Min) Default value: 0 Threshold Time
Window(Min) parameter
specifies the duration for a
VCTRUNK or an IP port
to monitor the traffic after
the zero traffic monitoring
function of the port is
enabled.
Loop Detection Enabled, Disabled The Loop Detection

Default value: Disabled (Ethernet Port Attribute)
function of reporting the
self-loop alarms after one
of the following loopback
cases is detected.
l For the external
physical interface of
the board, the transmit
direction is connected
to the receive direction
by a fiber.
l The two external
physical ports on the
board are cross-
connected to each other
through fibers.
created on the same
VCTRUNK of the
board.
created between
different VCTRUNKs
of the board.

Transport Platform
Loop Port Shutdown Enabled, Disabled The Loop Port Shutdown

Default value: Enabled (Ethernet Port Attribute)
parameter is set to disable
the self-loop port after a
self-loop port is detected if
the loop port shutdown
function is enabled. After
the self-loop port is shut
down, the self-loop port
only transmits or receives
the self-loop detection
packets rather than any
other packets. If the port is
not a self-loop port, it
starts to work again.
Zero-Flow Monitor Enabled, Disabled The Zero-Flow Monitor

Default value: Disabled parameter specifies
whether the traffic on a
port is monitored.
After the zero traffic
monitoring function is
enabled, the port can
report the zero traffic
alarm after the state of
zero traffic lasts for a
certain period. Hence, the
user can check whether the
service is interrupted due
to the fault on the
equipment side.
Zero-Flow Monitor Interval 1-30 Sets the time interval for

(min) Default value: 15 the zero-flow monitoring.
Table 9-72 Parameters for configuring the encapsulation and mapping of an Ethernet port
Port VCTRUNKn Indicates the VCTRUNK

the number of the
VCTRUNK port.

Transport Platform
Mapping Protocol GFP, LAPS, HDLC The Mapping Protocol

Default value: GFP parameter specifies the
mapping protocol of the
VCTRUNK port.
The Mapping Protocol
parameter of the VCTRUNK
is the basic setting of the
VCTRUNK port. If the
parameter value is different
from that of Mapping
Protocol for the VCTRUNK
interrupted.
Scramble Unscramble, Scramble The Scramble parameter

mode[X43+1], Scramble specifies whether to
mode[X48+1] scramble the payload area of
Default value: Scramble the encapsulation protocol
mode[X43+1] and the scramble mode.
If the value of Scramble for
the VCTRUNK of the local
that of Scramble for the
VCTRUNK of the
Set Inverse Value for CRC Yes, No The Set Inverse Value for
Default value: Yes CRC parameter specifies
whether to set an inverse
value for the CRC field of
the HDLC or LAPS
protocol.
If the value of Set Inverse
Value for CRC for the
VCTRUNK of the local
that of Set Inverse Value
for CRC for the VCTRUNK
interrupted.
NOTE
This parameter takes effect
only when Mapping Protocol
is set to LAPS or HDLC.

Transport Platform
Check Field Length No, FCS16, FCS32 The Check Field Length
Default value: FCS32 parameter specifies the
length of the CRC field of
the mapping protocol.
If Mapping Protocol is set
to HDLCor LAPS, and if
the value of Check Field
Length is different from that
for the interconnected
VCTRUNKs at the two
ends, the service is
interrupted.
NOTE
If Mapping Protocol is set to
HDLC or LAPS, select FCS32
only.
FCS Calculated Bit Big endian, Little endian The FCS Calculated Bit
Sequence Default value: Big endian Sequence parameter
specifies the sequence of
storing the bits in the CRC
field of the mapping
protocol.
If the value of FCS
local equipment is different
from that of FCS
Table 9-73 Parameters for configuring the LCAS

Port VCTRUNKn Specifies the VCTRUNK

the number of the
VCTRUNK port.

Transport Platform
Enabling LCAS Enabled, Disabled The Enabling LCAS

Default value: Disabled parameter can increase or
decrease the SDH network
capacity without affecting
the service. The capacity is
automatically decreased if a
member fails, and is
automatically increased if
the member recovers.
As a bidirectional protocol,
the LCAS can work
normally only when some
bandwidth is available in the
bidirectional physical paths.
If the bandwidth is available
only in the unidirectional
physical paths, the LCAS
may fail to correctly adjust
the bandwidth.
You can set Enabling
LCAS as required.

Transport Platform
LCAS Mode Huawei Mode, Standard Specifies the sequence for

Mode the sink end to respond to
Default value: Huawei the MST and Rs_Ack
Mode messages received from the
source end.
l Huawei Mode: inverts
the RS_Ack message,
and then transmits the
MST message.
l Standard Mode:
transmits the MST
message, and then
inverts the RS_Ack
message.
To set the LCAS mode,
follow the principles:
l If the interconnected
equipment at the two
ends are Huawei
equipment, select
Huawei Mode.
l If Huawei equipment is
interconnected to third-
party equipment, set the
interconnected
equipment to the same
mode according to the
mode supported by the
third-party equipment.
Hold off Time(ms) 0, 2000-10000 Specifies HO Procedure

LCAS protocol. If the
LCAS coexists with another
network-level protection
scheme (for example, MSP
or SNCP), you can set this
parameter to postpone the
LCAS switching.
The LCAS switching time is
affected.
to Enabled.

Transport Platform
WTR Time(s) 0-720 Specifies WTR Procedure

LCAS protocol. Set this
parameter to avoid impact
caused by the alarm jitter on
the link status.
The fault recovery time of
the LCAS protocol is
affected. After the network
recovers from a fault, the
LCAS protocol can recover
only after a WTR duration.
NOTE
to Enabled.
TSD Enabled, Disabled Specifies the B3 or BIP

Default value: Disabled error status of a VCTRUNK
member. TSD stands for
trail signal degrade. When
this parameter is set to
Enabled and if a
VCTRUNK member has
excessive B3 or BIP bit
errors, the LCAS protocol
regards that this member
fails and deletes it from the
available members. If this
parameter is set to Disabled,
the LCAS protocol does not
monitor the status of the B3
or BIP bit errors of a
VCTRUNK member.
NOTE
to Enabled.

Transport Platform
Minimum Number of 2-256 When the LCAS is enabled,

Members in the Transmit Default value: 256 the LCAS_PLCT alarm is
Direction reported if certain members
in the transmit direction fail
and the number of valid
members is smaller than a
certain value. The
Minimum Number of
Members in the Transmit
Direction parameter
specifies the certain number
of the valid members in the
transmit direction.
When the LCAS is enabled,
failure in certain paths does
not affect the service in the
case of sufficient
bandwidths. The user can
set this parameter to enable
the reporting of the
LCAS_PLCT alarm only
when the number of the
valid members in the
transmit direction is smaller
than a certain value.
Minimum Number of 2-256 Specifies the minimum

Members in the Receive Default value: 256 number of members in the
Direction receive direction. If the
LCAS is enabled and the
number of valid members is
less than the specified value,
an alarm is reported.
Table 9-74 Parameters for binding paths

VCTRUNK Port VCTRUNKn Displays the number (n) of

the VCTRUNK port.
Level For example, VC12-xv Specifies the level of a path

that is bound with the
VCTRUNK.
Service Direction Bidirectional, Uplink, Specifies the direction of the

Downlink Ethernet service.
Default value: Bidirectional

Transport Platform
Bound Path For example, VC4-1- Specifies the number of the

VC12(1-3) path to be bound, for
example, VC4-1-VC12(1-3).
Number of Bound Paths n Displays the number of

VCTRUNKs to be bound.
The Used Channel For example, VC4-1- Displays the actually used
VC12(1) channel.
Activation Status Active, Deactive Displays whether the path is

active.

Table 9-75 lists the technical specifications of the EGS4.
Table 9-75 Technical specifications of the EGS4
Item Performance
Service FE optical port See Table 9-77, and Table 9-78.

ports
GE electrical port See Table 9-76.
GE optical port See Table 9-79, Table 9-80, and

Table 9-81.
Table 9-76 Specifications of the Ethernet electrical ports
GE electrical 1000BASE-T 4D-PAM5 coding RJ45

port signals
Item Value

type

type LC LC

Transport Platform
Item Value
n distance
(km)

wavelength
(nm)
Mean -19 to -14 -15 to -8 -5 to 0 -5 to 0

launched
power
(dBm)
Receiver -30 -28 -34 -34

minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -14 -8 -10 -10

overload
(dBm)
Minimum 10 8.2 10 10
extinction
ratio (dB)

Parameter Value
(km)

wavelength (nm)

wavelength (nm)

range (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

Transport Platform
Parameter Value

ratio (dB)

Item Value

type

type
distance (km)

wavelength
(nm)
Mean -9.5 to -2.5 -9 to -3 -5 to 0 -2 to +5

launched
power (dBm)
Receiver -17 -20 -23 -23

minimum
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum 0 -3 -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9 9 9
extinction
ratio (dB)

Paramete Value
r

optical
interface
Transmiss 10 40
ion
distance
(km)

Transport Platform
Paramete Value
r

fiber
Operating 1490 1310 1490 1310

transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
Operating 1310 1490 1310 1490

receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
optical
power
range
(dBm)
Receiver -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9
extinction
ratio (dB)

Parameter Value
CWDM

rate
Transmission 40 80
distance (km)
optical power
range (dBm)

Transport Platform
Parameter Value
CWDM

wavelength 20
range (nm)
Receiver -19 -28

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -9
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
(dB)
The mechanical specifications of a EGS4 board are as follows:
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.65 kg (1.4 lb)
Power Consumption
EGS4 26.5 27.5

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 10 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board
10 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing

Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical add/drop multiplexers.
10.1 DMD1
DMD1: Bidirectional Single Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board
10.2 DMD1S
DMD1S: Bidirectional Single Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board with OSC
10.3 DMD2
DMD2: Bidirectional Double Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board
10.4 DMD2S
DMD2S: Bidirectional Double Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board with OSC
10.5 MD8
MD8: 8 Channel Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Board
10.6 MD8S
MD8S: 8 Channel Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Board with OSC
10.7 MR1
MR1: Single Channel Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Board
10.8 MR1S
MR1S: Single Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board with OSC
10.9 MR2
MR2: Double Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board
10.10 MR2S
MR2S: Double Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board with OSC
10.11 MR4
MR4: Four Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board
10.12 MR4S

Transport Platform
MR4S: Four Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board with OSC

10.13 MR8
MR8: Eight Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board
10.14 SBM1
SBM1: Single Fiber Bidirectional Single Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing
Configuration Board
10.15 SBM2
SBM2: Single Fiber Bidirectional Double Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing
Configuration Board
10.16 SBM4
SBM4: Single Fiber Bidirectional Four Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing
Configuration Board
10.17 SBM8
SBM8: Single Fiber Bidirectional Eight Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing
Configuration Board

Transport Platform
10.1 DMD1
DMD1: Bidirectional Single Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board

The available hardware version for the DMD1 is TNF1.
Version
Table 10-1 describes the version mapping of the DMD1 board.
Table 10-1 Version description of the DMD1 board

Item Description

version or later.
NOTE
TNF1DMD1 boards are not supported by NEs running V100R003C05.
10.1.2 Application
The DMD1 board, in two directions, adds one wavelength to and drops one wavelength from
the multiplexed signals respectively. It supports both the DWDM and CWDM specifications.
The DMD1 supports two-fiber bidirectional transmission. Figure 10-1 shows the DMD1
board application in a WDM system.
Figure 10-1 DMD1 board application in a WDM system

Client service
OTU OTU
wA1 wD1 eA1 eD1
wIN eOUT
DMD1
wOUT eIN
NOTE
An OTU is a transceiver that can process transmitting signals and receiving signals for the same
wavelength at the same time.

Transport Platform

The main functions and features supported by the DMD1 are adding/dropping and
multiplexing.
Table 10-2 Functions and features of the DMD1 board

Functions and Features Description
Basic Function Adds/drops in two directions one channel of wavelength

signals to/from the multiplexed signals respectively.
WDM specifications Supports both the DWDM and CWDM specifications.

The DMD1 unit consists of two parts: the OADM module, and communication module.
Figure 10-2 shows the principle block diagram of the DMD1.
Figure 10-2 Principle block diagram of the DMD1

wD
wA1 eA1 eD1
1
wIN Drop Add Add Drop eIN

OADM OADM
module module
wOUT eOUT
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow
In the east, the DMD1 board receives multiplexed signals through optical port eIN. After the
optical module processes the multiplexed signals, the board splits out one channel of optical

Transport Platform
signals from the multiplexed signals and outputs them through optical port eD1. Then, the
remaining wavelengths are sent to the west add module.
The east add module receives the signals from the west drop module. The signals are
multiplexed with one wavelength that is input through the eA1 optical port. The multiplexed
signals are output through the eOUT optical port.
The working principle of west signals is the same as that of east signals; while the signal
flows in the two directions are different.
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of one wavelength respectively in two
directions.
10.1.5 Front Panel

There are ports on the front panel of the board.

Figure 10-3 shows the front panel of the DMD1.
Figure 10-3 Front panel of the DMD1

DMD1
wOUT wA1 wD1 eIN eOUT eA1 eD1

1471 1471
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
The number under the optical port indicates one of the wavelengths that are supported by the optical
port.
Indicators
The DMD1 board does not have indicators.
Ports
There are eight optical ports on the front panel of the DMD1 board, Table 10-3 lists the type
and function of each port.

Transport Platform
Table 10-3 Types and functions of the DMD1 ports

Optical
Port Port Type Function
wIN/wOUT LC Receive or transmit the westward multiplexed signal.
wA1 LC Receive the westward optical signals from the OTU or

integrated client-side equipment, thus adding one westward
channel.
wD1 LC Transmit the westward optical signals to the OTU or

integrated client-side equipment, thus dropping one
westward channel.
eIN/eOUT LC Receive or transmit the eastward multiplexed signal.
eA1 LC Receive the eastward optical signals from the OTU or

integrated client-side equipment, thus adding one eastward
channel.
eD1 LC Transmit the eastward optical signals to the OTU or

integrated client-side equipment, thus dropping one eastward
channel.
Laser Hazard Level

The laser hazard level of the board is HAZARD LEVEL 1M, indicating that the maximum
power launched by the board ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 21.3 dBm (136 mW).
10.1.6 Valid Slots

The DMD1 occupies one slot.

Display of Slots
On the U2000, the board occupies one logical slot.
When the board is installed in the OptiX OSN 1800 II Packet chassis, the slot number
displayed on the U2000, or in the command line represents the slot where the board is
installed.
10.1.7 Optical Interfaces

This section describes the display of optical ports on the board.

Table 10-4 lists the sequence number displayed in an NMS system of the optical port on the
DMD1 board front panel.

Transport Platform
Table 10-4 Display of the DMD1 ports

Optical Ports on the Front Panel Optical Port Displayed on the U2000
wA1/wD1 1
eA1/eD1 2
wIN/wOUT 3
eIN/eOUT 4
NOTE
10.1.8 DMD1 Parameters
Optical Interface/Channel - -
Optical Interface Name - -
Actual Wavelength No./ The parameter format is as Only can be queried.

Add-Drop Wavelength(nm)/ follows: wavelength No./
Frequency(THz) optical port wavelength/
frequency, for example,
1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /
Actual Band Type C, CWDM Only can be queried.

Default: /
10.1.9 DMD1 Specifications

consumption.
Optical Specifications
Table 10-5 and Table 10-6 list the optical specifications of the DMD1.

Transport Platform
Table 10-5 TNF1DMD1 board specifications in DWDM system

Correspondi Item Unit Value
ng interfaces
- Operating frequency THz 192.10 to 196.00

range
- Adjacent channel GHz 100

spacing
eIN-eD1 1.0 dB spectral width nm 0.2

wIN-wD1 Drop channel insertion dB < 1.2
loss
Adjacent channel dB 25
isolation
Non-adjacent channel dB 35
isolation
eA1-eOUT 1.0 dB spectral width nm 0.2

wA1-wOUT Add channel insertion dB < 1.2
loss
eIN-wOUT Insertion loss dB < 1.4

wIN-eOUT
- Reflectance dB < -40
Table 10-6 TNF1DMD1 board specifications in CWDM system

ng interfaces
- Operating wavelength nm 1471 to 1611

range
- Adjacent channel nm 20
spacing
eIN-eD1 1.0 dB spectral width nm 13

loss
Adjacent channel dB > 30

isolation
Non-adjacent channel dB > 40

isolation
eA1-eOUT 1.0 dB spectral width nm 13

wA1-wOUT

Transport Platform

ng interfaces
Add channel insertion dB < 1.2

loss

wIN-eOUT
Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelength

In a DWDM system, the DMD1 supports adding/dropping of one channel in the same band of
the same board. Table 10-7 shows the rules of wavelength distribution.
Table 10-7 Nominal Central Wavelength and Frequency of DWDM System
Waveleng Frequenc Wavelength Wavelength Frequency Wavelength

th No. y (THz) (nm) No. (THz) (nm)
80 192.1 1560.61 40 194.1 1544.53
78 192.2 1559.79 38 194.2 1543.73
76 192.3 1558.98 36 194.3 1542.94
74 192.4 1558.17 34 194.4 1542.14
72 192.5 1557.36 32 194.5 1541.35
70 192.6 1556.56 30 194.6 1540.56
68 192.7 1555.75 28 194.7 1539.77
66 192.8 1554.94 26 194.8 1538.98
64 192.9 1554.13 24 194.9 1538.19
62 193.0 1553.33 22 195.0 1537.40
60 193.1 1552.52 20 195.1 1536.61
58 193.2 1551.72 18 195.2 1535.82
56 193.3 1550.92 16 195.3 1535.04
54 193.4 1550.12 14 195.4 1534.25
52 193.5 1549.32 12 195.5 1533.47
50 193.6 1548.51 10 195.6 1532.68
48 193.7 1547.72 8 195.7 1531.90
46 193.8 1546.92 6 195.8 1531.12

Transport Platform

44 193.9 1546.12 4 195.9 1530.33
42 194.0 1545.32 2 196.0 1529.55
In a CWDM system, the DMD1 supports adding/dropping of one channel in the same band of
Table 10-8 Nominal Central Wavelengths of CWDM System

Wavelength No. Wavelength (nm) Wavelength No. Wavelength (nm)
11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611
The wavelength that is sent to each optical port should comply with the following rules:
The wavelength added on the east (eA1), that dropped on the east (eD1), that added on the
west (wA1), and that dropped on the west (wD1) should be the same.
in. x 8.2 in.)
l weight: 0.70 kg (1.54 lb.)
Power Consumption
DMD1 0.5 0.5
10.2 DMD1S
DMD1S: Bidirectional Single Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board with OSC

Transport Platform

The available hardware version of the DMD1S is TNF1.
Version
Table 10-9 describes the version mapping of the DMD1S board.
Table 10-9 Version description of the DMD1S board

Item Description

version or later.
NOTE
TNF1DMD1S boards are not supported by NEs running V100R003C05.
10.2.2 Application
The DMD1S board, in two directions, adds one wavelength to and drops one wavelength from
the multiplexed signals respectively.
The DMD1S supports two-fiber bidirectional transmission. Figure 10-4 shows the DMD1S
Figure 10-4 DMD1S board application in a WDM system
Client service
OTU OTU
wA1 wD1 eA1 eD1
wIN eOUT
DMD1S
wOUT eIN
NOTE

The main functions and features supported by the DMD1S are adding/dropping and
multiplexing.

Transport Platform
Table 10-10 Functions and features of the DMD1S board

Functions and
Basic Function Adds/drops in two directions one channel of wavelength signals

to/from the multiplexed signals respectively.
WDM specifications Supports the CWDM specifications.

The DMD1S unit consists of two parts: the OADM module and the communication module.
Figure 10-5 shows the principle block diagram of the DMD1S.
Figure 10-5 Principle block diagram of the DMD1S

wD1 wSO wA1 wSI eSI eA1 eSO eD1

OADM OADM
module moudle
wOUT eOUT
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow
The board receives the east multiplexed signals from the upstream station through the eIN
optical port. The drop module extracts one wavelength and one channel of supervisory
signals. The one wavelength is output through the eD1 optical port and the one channel of
supervisory signals is output through the eSO optical port. Then, the remaining wavelengths
are sent to the west add module.
multiplexed with one channel of supervisory signals that are input through the eSI optical port

Transport Platform
and then are multiplexed with one wavelength that is input through the eA1 optical port. The
multiplexed signals are output through the eOUT optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of one wavelength respectively in two
directions.
10.2.5 Front Panel


Figure 10-6 shows the front panel of the DMD1S.
Figure 10-6 Front panel of the DMD1S

DMD1S
wIN wOUT wA1 wD1 wSI wSO eIN eOUT eA1 eD1 eSI eSO
1471 1310 1471 1310
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
port.
Indicators
The DMD1S does not have indicators.
Ports
There are twelve optical ports on the front panel of the DMD1S, Table 10-11 lists the type

Transport Platform
Table 10-11 Types and functions of the DMD1S ports
Connector
Port type Description
wA1 LC Receive the westward optical signals from the OTU or

integrated client-side equipment, thus adding one
westward channel.
wD1 LC Transmit the westward optical signals to the OTU or

westward channel.
wSI/wSO LC Receive or transmit the westward OSC signal.
eA1 LC Receive the eastward optical signals from the OTU or

channel.
eD1 LC Transmit the eastward optical signals to the OTU or

eastward channel.
eSI/eSO LC Receive or transmit the eastward OSC signal.
Laser Hazard Level

10.2.6 Valid Slots

The DMD1S occupies one slot.

Display of Slots
installed.


Transport Platform

Table 10-12 lists the sequence number displayed on an NMS system of the optical port on the
DMD1S board front panel.
Table 10-12 Display of the DMD1S optical ports

wIN/wOUT 3
wA1/wD1 1
wSI/wSO 5
eIN/eOUT 4
eA1/eD1 2
eSI/eSO 6
NOTE
10.2.8 DMD1S Parameters

14/1531.00/-.
Default: /
Actual Band Type CWDM Only can be queried.

Default: /
10.2.9 DMD1S Specifications

consumption.

Transport Platform
Table 10-13 lists the optical specifications of the DMD1S.
Table 10-13 TNF1DMD1S board specifications

ng
interfaces

range
- Adjacent channel spacing nm 20

range of 1310 nm

loss

isolation

isolation
eIN-eSO Insertion loss dB < 1.4

wIN-wSO

wA1-wOUT Add channel insertion dB < 1.2
loss
eSI-eOUT Insertion loss dB < 1.4

wSI-wOUT

wIN-eOUT

In a CWDM system, the DMD1S supports adding/dropping of one channel in the same band
of the same board. Table 10-14 shows the rules of wavelength distribution.

Transport Platform

11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611
l The wavelength added in the east (eA1), the wavelength dropped in the east (eD1), the
wavelength added in the west (wA1) and the wavelength dropped in the west (wD1)
must be the same.
l The 1310 nm wavelength should be used to carry the supervisory signal from the east
(eSI), the supervisory signal to the east (eSO), the supervisory signal from the west
(wSI), and the supervisory signal to the west (wSO).
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.72 kg (1.59 lb.)
Power Consumption
DMD1S 0.5 0.5
10.3 DMD2
DMD2: Bidirectional Double Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board

The available hardware version of the DMD2 is TNF1.
Version
Table 10-15 describes the version mapping of the DMD2 board.

Transport Platform
Table 10-15 Version description of the DMD2 board

Item Description

version or later.
NOTE
TNF1DMD2 boards are not supported by NEs running V100R003C05.
10.3.2 Application
The DMD2 board, in two directions, adds two wavelengths to and drops two wavelengths
from the multiplexed signals respectively. It supports both the DWDM and CWDM
specifications.
The DMD2 supports two-fiber bidirectional transmission. For the application of the board in
WDM systems, see Figure 10-7.
Figure 10-7 Application of the DMD2 in WDM system
NOTE

The main functions and features supported by the DMD2 are adding/dropping and
multiplexing.

Transport Platform
Table 10-16 Functions and features of the DMD2 board

Basic Function Adds/drops in two directions two channels of wavelength

signals to/from the multiplexed signals respectively.

The DMD2 unit consists of two parts: the OADM module, the communication module.
Figure 10-8 shows the principle block diagram of the DMD2.
Figure 10-8 Principle block diagram of the DMD2

wD1 wD2 wA1 wA2 eA1 eA2 eD1 eD2

OADM OADM
module module
wOUT eOUT
UXC Backplane
Signal Flow
In the east, the DMD2 board receives multiplexed signals through optical port eIN. After the
optical module processes the multiplexed signals, the board splits out two channels of optical
signals from the multiplexed signals and outputs them through optical port eD1 and eD2.
Then, the remaining wavelengths are sent to the west add module.
multiplexed with two wavelengths that are input through the eA1 and eA2 optical ports. The
multiplexed signals are output through the eOUT optical port.

Transport Platform
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths respectively in two
directions.
10.3.5 Front Panel


Figure 10-9 shows the front panel of the DMD2.
Figure 10-9 Front panel of the DMD2

DMD2
wIN wOUT wA1 wD1 wA2 wD2 eIN eOUT eA1 eD1 eA2 eD2
1471 1491 1471 1491
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
port.
Indicators
The DMD2 board does not have indicators.
Ports
There are twelve optical ports on the front panel of the DMD2. Table 10-17 lists the type and
Table 10-17 Types and descriptions of the DMD2 ports
Connector
Port Type Description

Transport Platform
Connector
Port Type Description
wA1/wA2 LC Receive the westward optical signals from the OTU or

westward channel respectively.
wD1/wD2 LC Transmit the westward optical signals to the OTU or

eA1/eA2 LC Receive the eastward optical signals from the OTU or

eastward channel respectively.
eD1/eD2 LC Transmit the eastward optical signals to the OTU or

eastward channel respectively.
Laser Hazard Level

10.3.6 Valid Slots

The DMD2 occupies one slot.

Display of Slots
installed.


DMD2 board front panel.

Transport Platform
Table 10-18 Display of the DMD2 ports

wIN/wOUT 5
wA1/wD1 1
wA2/wD2 3
eIN/eOUT 6
eA1/eD1 2
eA2/eD2 4
NOTE
10.3.8 DMD2 Parameters

1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /

Default: /
10.3.9 DMD2 Specifications

consumption.
Table 10-19 and Table 10-20 list the optical specifications of the DMD2.

Transport Platform
Table 10-19 TNF1DMD2 board specifications in DWDM system

Corresponding Item Unit Value
interfaces
- Operating THz 192.10 to 196.00

frequency range
- Adjacent GHz 100

channel spacing
eIN-eD1 1.0 dB spectral nm 0.2

eIN-eD2 width
wIN-wD1 Drop channel dB < 1.5
wIN-wD2 insertion loss
Adjacent dB 25
channel isolation
Non-adjacent dB 35
channel isolation
eA1-eOUT 1.0 dB spectral nm 0.2

eA2-eOUT width
wA1-wOUT Add channel dB < 1.5
wA2-wOUT insertion loss
eIN-wOUT Add channel dB < 2.2

wIN-eOUT insertion loss
Table 10-20 TNF1DMD2 board specifications in CWDM system

interfaces
- Operating nm 1471 to 1611

wavelength
range
- Adjacent nm 20
channel spacing
eIN-eD1 1.0 dB spectral nm 13

eIN-eD2 width
wIN-wD1 Drop channel dB < 1.5
wIN-wD2 insertion loss
Adjacent dB > 30
channel isolation

Transport Platform

interfaces
Non-adjacent dB > 40
channel isolation
eA1-eOUT 1.0 dB spectral nm 13

eA2-eOUT width
wA1-wOUT Add channel dB < 1.5
wA2-wOUT insertion loss
eIN-wOUT Add channel dB < 2.2

wIN-eOUT insertion loss

In a DWDM system, the DMD2 supports adding/dropping of two channels in the same band

80 192.1 1560.61 40 194.1 1544.53
78 192.2 1559.79 38 194.2 1543.73
76 192.3 1558.98 36 194.3 1542.94
74 192.4 1558.17 34 194.4 1542.14
72 192.5 1557.36 32 194.5 1541.35
70 192.6 1556.56 30 194.6 1540.56
68 192.7 1555.75 28 194.7 1539.77
66 192.8 1554.94 26 194.8 1538.98
64 192.9 1554.13 24 194.9 1538.19
62 193.0 1553.33 22 195.0 1537.40
60 193.1 1552.52 20 195.1 1536.61
58 193.2 1551.72 18 195.2 1535.82
56 193.3 1550.92 16 195.3 1535.04
54 193.4 1550.12 14 195.4 1534.25
52 193.5 1549.32 12 195.5 1533.47

Transport Platform

50 193.6 1548.51 10 195.6 1532.68
48 193.7 1547.72 8 195.7 1531.90
46 193.8 1546.92 6 195.8 1531.12
44 193.9 1546.12 4 195.9 1530.33
42 194.0 1545.32 2 196.0 1529.55
In a CWDM system, the DMD2 supports adding/dropping of two channels in the same band

11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611
l On the first channel, the wavelength added in the east (eA1), the wavelength dropped in
the east (eD1), the wavelength added in the west (wA1), and the wavelength dropped in
the west (wD1) should be the same.
l On the second channel, the wavelength added in the east (eA2), the wavelength dropped
in the east (eD2), the wavelength added in the west (wA2), and the wavelength dropped
in the west (wD2) should be the same.
l The wavelength on the first channel is smaller than the wavelength on the second
channel.
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.72 kg (1.59 lb.)

Transport Platform
Power Consumption
DMD2 0.5 0.5
10.4 DMD2S
DMD2S: Bidirectional Double Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board with OSC

The available hardware version for the DMD2S is TNF1.
Version
Table 10-23 describes the version mapping of the DMD2S board.
Table 10-23 Version description of the DMD2S board

Item Description

version or later.
NOTE
TNF1DMD2S boards are not supported by NEs running V100R003C05.
10.4.2 Application
The DMD2S board, in two directions, adds two wavelengths to and drops two wavelengths
from the multiplexed signals respectively.
The DMD2S supports two-fiber bidirectional transmission. Figure 10-10 shows the DMD2S
board application in the WDM system.

Transport Platform
Figure 10-10 DMD2S board application in the WDM system
Client service
4
OTU ... OTU
wA1 wD1 eA2 eD2
wIN eOUT
DMD2S
wOUT eIN
NOTE

The main functions and features supported by the DMD2S are adding/dropping and
multiplexing.
Table 10-24 Functions and features of the DMD2S board

Functions and
Basic Function The DMD2S board, in two directions, adds two wavelengths to and
drops two wavelengths from the multiplexed signals respectively.

The DMD2S unit consists of two parts: the OADM module, the communication module.
Figure 10-11 shows the principle block diagram of the DMD2S.

Transport Platform
Figure 10-11 Principle block diagram of the DMD2S

wD wD
wSO wA1 wA2 wSI eSI eA1 eA2 eSO eD1 eD2
1 2

OADM OADM
module module
wOUT eOUT
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow
The board receives the east multiplexed signals from the upstream station through the eIN
optical port. The drop module extracts two wavelengths and one channel of supervisory
signals. The two wavelengths are output through the eD1 and eD2 optical ports and the one
channel of supervisory signals is output through the eSO optical port. Then, the remaining
wavelengths are sent to the west add module.
multiplexed with one channel of supervisory signals that are input through the eSI optical port
and then are multiplexed with two wavelengths that are input through the eA1 and eA2 optical
ports. The multiplexed signals are output through the eOUT optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths respectively in two
directions.
10.4.5 Front Panel


Transport Platform

Figure 10-12 shows the front panel of the DMD2S.
Figure 10-12 Front panel of the DMD2S
DMD2S
wIN wOUT wA1 wD1 wA2 wD2 wSI wSO eIN eOUT eA1 eD1 eA2 eD2 eSI eSO
1471 1491 1310 1471 1491 1310
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
port.
Indicators
The DMD2S board does not have indicators.
Ports
There are sixteen optical ports on the front panel of the DMD2S board, Table 10-25 lists the
type and function of each port.
Table 10-25 Types and functions of the DMD2S ports
Optical
wA1/wA2 LC Receive the westward optical signals from the OTU or

integrated client-side equipment, thus adding one westward
channel respectively.
wD1/wD2 LC Transmit the westward optical signals to the OTU or

wSI/wSO LC Receive or transmit the westward OSC signal.
eA1/eA2 LC Receive the eastward optical signals from the OTU or


Transport Platform
Optical
eD1/eD2 LC Transmit the eastward optical signals to the OTU or

integrated client-side equipment, thus dropping one eastward
eSI/eSO LC Receive or transmit the eastward OSC signal.
Laser Hazard Level

10.4.6 Valid Slots

The DMD2S occupies one slot.

Display of Slots
installed.


DMD2S board front panel.
Table 10-26 Display of the DMD2S ports

wIN/wOUT 5
wA1/wD1 1
wA2/wD2 3
wSI/wSO 8

Transport Platform

eIN/eOUT 6
eA1/eD1 2
eA2/eD2 4
eSI/eSO 7
NOTE
10.4.8 DMD2S Parameters

14/1531.00/-.
Default: /

Default: /
10.4.9 DMD2S Specifications

consumption.
Table 10-27 list the optical specifications on the client and WDM side of the DMD2S.

Transport Platform
Table 10-27 TNF1DMD2S board specifications

Correspond Item Unit Value
ing
interfaces
- Operating wavelength range nm 1471 to 1611

of 1310 nm

eIN-eD2
Drop channel insertion loss dB < 1.5
wIN-wD1
wIN-wD2 Adjacent channel isolation dB > 30

isolation
eIN-eSO Insertion loss dB < 2.0

wIN-wSO

eA2-eOUT Add channel insertion loss dB < 1.5
wA1-wOUT
wA2-wOUT
eSI-eOUT Insertion loss dB < 2.0

wSI-wOUT
wIN-eOUT Insertion loss dB < 3.0

eIN-wOUT

In a CWDM system, the DMD2S supports adding/dropping of two channels in the same band

11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611

Transport Platform
l On the first channel, the wavelength added in the east (eA1), the wavelength dropped in
the east (eD1), the wavelength added in the west (wA1), and the wavelength dropped in
the west (wD1) should be the same.
l On the second channel, the wavelength added in the east (eA2), the wavelength dropped
in the east (eD2), the wavelength added in the west (wA2), and the wavelength dropped
in the west (wD2) should be the same.
l The wavelength on the first channel is smaller than the wavelength on the second
channel.
l The 1310 nm wavelength should be used to carry the supervisory signal from the east
(eSI), the supervisory signal to the east (eSO), the supervisory signal from the west
(wSI), and the supervisory signal to the west (wSO).
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.74 kg (1.63 lb.)
Power Consumption
DMD2S 0.5 0.5
10.5 MD8
MD8: 8 Channel Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Board

The available hardware version for the MD8 is TNF1.
Version
Table 10-29 describes the version mapping of the MD8 board.

Transport Platform
Table 10-29 Version description of the MD8
Item Description

10.5.2 Application
The MD8 board mainly serves to add/drop eight channels of wavelength signals to/from the
multiplexed signals.
The MD8 supports two-fiber bidirectional transmission. For the application of the board in
Figure 10-13 Application of the MD8 in WDM systems

D8 D8
OTU OTU
Clinet A8 OUT IN A8 Clinet
8 MD8 MD8

service 8

D1 D1 service
OTU IN OUT
OTU
A1 A1

The main functions and features supported by the MD8 are adding/dropping and
multiplexing.
Table 10-30 Functions and features of the MD8 board
Functions and
Basic Function Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals from the

The MD8 unit consists of two parts: the OADM module, and communication module.
Figure 10-14 shows the principle block diagram of the MD8.

Transport Platform
Figure 10-14 Principle block diagram of the MD8

D1 to D8 A1 to A8
IN Drop Add OUT
OADM module
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals from the upstream station through the IN
optical port. The drop optical module drops eight wavelengths from the multiplexed signals
through the D1 to D8 optical ports.
The add module multiplexes the signals with the eight wavelengths added through the A1 to
A8 optical ports. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the OUT optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of eight wavelengths.
10.5.5 Front Panel


Figure 10-15 shows the front panel of the MD8.

Transport Platform
Figure 10-15 Front panel of the MD8
MD8
IN OUT A1 D1 A2 D2 A3 D3 A4 D4 A5 D5 A6 D6 A7 D7 A8 D8
1471 1491 1511 1531 1551 1571 1591 1611
NOTE
port.
Indicators
The MD8 board does not have indicators.
Ports
There are eighteen optical ports on the front panel of the MD8 board, Table 10-31 lists the
Table 10-31 Types and functions of the MD8 ports
Optical Port Port Type Function
A1 to A8 LC Receive the optical signals from the OTU or integrated

client side equipment, thus adding one channel
respectively.
D1 to D8 LC Transmit optical signals to the OTU or integrated client-

side equipment, thus dropping one channel respectively.
IN/OUT LC Receive or transmit the multiplexed signal.
Laser Hazard Level

10.5.6 Valid Slots

The MD8 occupies one slot.

Display of Slots

Transport Platform
installed.


MD8 board front panel.
Table 10-32 Display of the MD8 ports

IN/OUT 9
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
A5/D5 5
A6/D6 6
A7/D7 7
A8/D8 8
NOTE
10.5.8 MD8 Parameters

Transport Platform

14/1531.00/-.
Default: /

Default: /
10.5.9 MD8 Specifications

consumption.
Table 10-33 lists the optical specifications of the MD8.
Table 10-33 TNF1MD8 board specifications

ng
interfaces

range
spacing
IN-D1 1.0 dB spectral width nm 13

IN-D2
Drop channel insertion dB 2.0
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
IN-D5
isolation
IN-D6
IN-D7 Non-adjacent channel dB > 40
isolation
IN-D8
A1-OUT 1.0 dB spectral width nm 13

A2-OUT
A3-OUT
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT

Transport Platform

ng
interfaces
A7-OUT Add channel insertion dB 2.0

A8-OUT loss
Rules of Adding/Dropping Wavelengths

In the CWDM system, the MD8 supports adding/dropping of any wavelength. The
wavelength that is received by each optical port should comply with the following rules:
The add wavelength and drop wavelength of each channel are the same. In addition, the
wavelengths are incremented from the first channel to the eighth channel. (A1 = D1 < A2 =
D2 < A3 = D3 < A4 = D4 < A5 = D5 < A6 = D6 < A7 = D7 < A8 = D8)
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.64 kg (1.41 lb.)
Power Consumption
MD8 0.5 0.5
10.6 MD8S
MD8S: 8 Channel Multiplexing and Demultiplexing Board with OSC

The available hardware version for the MD8S is TNF1.
Version
Table 10-34 describes the version mapping of the MD8S board.

Transport Platform
Table 10-34 Version description of the MD8S
Item Description

10.6.2 Application
The MD8S board is mainly used to demultiplex eight wavelength signals from the
multiplexed signal in one transmission direction.
The MD8S supports two-fiber bidirectional transmission. For the application of the in WDM
system, see Figure 10-16.
Figure 10-16 Application of the MD8S in WDM system

D8 D8
OTU OTU
Clinet A8 OUT IN A8 Clinet
8 MD8S MD8S

service D1 D1 service
OTU IN OUT
OTU
A1 A1

The MD8S board supports optical add/drop multiplexing.
Table 10-35 Functions and features of the MD8S
Functions and
Basic function Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals from the
WDM Supports the CWDM specifications.

specifications

The MD8S unit consists of two parts: the OADM module, and communication module.
Figure 10-17 shows the principle block diagram of the MD8S.

Transport Platform
Figure 10-17 Principle block diagram of the MD8S

D1 to D8 SO SI A1 to A8
IN Drop Add OUT
OADM module
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow
through the D1 to D8 optical ports, and then drops one channel of OSC signal through the SO
optical port.
The add module multiplexes one channel of OSC signals through the SI optical port, and then
multiplexes the signals with the eight wavelengths added through the A1 to A8 optical ports.
The multiplexed optical signals are output through the OUT optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of eight wavelengths. Multiplex the signals in
the main optical path and the signals in the 1310 nm supervisory channel into one
signal, and completes the reverse process.
10.6.5 Front Panel


Figure 10-18 shows the front panel of the MD8S.

Transport Platform
Figure 10-18 Front panel of the MD8S
MD8S
IN OUT A1 D1 A2 D2 A3 D3 A4 D4 A5 D5 A6 D6 A7 D7 A8 D8 SI SO
1471 1491 1511 1531 1551 1571 1591 1611 1310
NOTE
port.
Indicators
The MD8S board does not have indicators.
Ports
There are twenty optical ports on the front panel of the MD8S board, Table 10-36 lists the
Table 10-36 Types and functions of the MD8S ports


client-side equipment, thus adding one channel
respectively.

SI/SO LC Receive or transmit the OSC signal.
Laser Hazard Level

10.6.6 Valid Slots

The MD8S occupies one slot.

Display of Slots

Transport Platform
installed.


MD8S board front panel.
Table 10-37 Display of the MD8S ports

IN/OUT 9
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
A5/D5 5
A6/D6 6
A7/D7 7
A8/D8 8
SI/SO 10
NOTE
10.6.8 MD8S Parameters

Transport Platform

14/1531.00/-.
Default: /

Default: /
10.6.9 MD8S Specifications

consumption.
Table 10-38 lists the optical specifications of the MD8S.
Table 10-38 TNF1MD8S board specifications

ng
interfaces

range
spacing

range of 1310 nm

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
IN-D5
isolation
IN-D6
IN-D7 Non-adjacent channel dB > 40
isolation
IN-D8
IN-SO Insertion loss dB 1.0

A2-OUT

Transport Platform

ng
interfaces

A4-OUT loss
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
SI-OUT Insertion loss dB 1.0

In the CWDM system, the MD8S supports adding/dropping of any wavelength. The
wavelength that is received by each optical port should comply with the following rules:
l The add wavelength and drop wavelength of each channel are the same. In addition, the
wavelengths are incremented from the first channel to the eighth channel. (A1 = D1 <
A2 = D2 < A3 = D3 < A4 = D4 < A5 = D5 < A6 = D6 < A7 = D7 < A8 = D8)
l The 1310 nm wavelength should be used to carry the input supervisory signal (SI) and
output supervisory signal (SO).
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.66 kg (1.45 lb.)
Power Consumption
MD8S 0.5 0.5
10.7 MR1
MR1: Single Channel Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing Board

Transport Platform

The available hardware version of the MR1 is TNF1.
Version
Table 10-39 describes the version mapping of the MR1 board.
Table 10-39 Version description of the MR1 board

Item Description

version or later.
NOTE
TNF1MR1 boards are not supported by NEs running V100R003C05.
10.7.2 Application
The MR1 board mainly serves to add/drop a channel of wavelength signals to/from the
multiplexed signals in a direction.
Application Scenario 1: OADM Mode

The MR1 supports two-fiber bidirectional transmission. Figure 10-19 shows the MR1 board
application in the WDM system.
Figure 10-19 MR1 board application in the two-fiber bidirectional WDM system
Client service Client service
OTU OTU
A1 D1 A1 D1
IN OUT
MO MI
MR1 MR1
MI MO
OUT IN
NOTE
Application Scenario 2: Bandpass Mode

In CWDM system, when the wavelength of MR1 board is 1531 nm, it supports bandpass
mode, and applies in single-fiber bidirectional transmission system, as shown in Figure
10-20.

Transport Platform
Figure 10-20 MR1 board application in the single-fiber bidirectional WDM system
TC1
LINE1
MR1
RC2 OBU
OBU RC1
LINE2
TC2
NOTE
In CWDM system, when the wavelength of the MR1 board is any one of the 8 wavelengths: 1471 nm,
1491 nm, 1511 nm, 1531 nm, 1551 nm, 1571 nm, 1591 nm and 1611 nm, it can be used at OADM mode
in two-fiber bidirectional system; when the wavelength of the MR1 board is 1531 nm, it can be used at
OADM mode in two-fiber bidirectional system or at bandpass mode in single-fiber bidirectional system.

The MR1 board supports optical add/drop multiplexing, cascading ports and bandpass mode
(1531 nm wavelength).
Table 10-40 Functions and features of the MR1 board
Functions and
Basic Function Adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signal from the
Provides the optical port to concatenate other OADM boards.
The MR1 board with 1531 nm wavelengths in a CWDM system
supports the bandpass mode.

Supports DWDM specifications when working in bandpass mode.
l The TC2 port supports eight DWDM wavelengths
(wavelength frequency: 192.9 THz to 193.6 THz).
l The TC1 port supports eight DWDM wavelengths
(wavelength frequency: 195.3 THz to 196.0 THz).

The MR1 unit consists of two parts: the OADM module, and communication module.
Figure 10-21 and Figure 10-22 show the principle block diagram of the MR1.

Transport Platform
Figure 10-21 Principle block diagram of the MR1 (OADM mode in CWDM system)
D1 MO MI A1
IN Drop Add OUT
Optical module
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow (OADM mode in CWDM system)

optical port. The drop optical module drops one wavelength from the multiplexed signals
through the D1 optical port. The remaining wavelengths are output through the MO optical
port.
The board receives the signals that travel over the main optical path through the MI optical
port. The add module multiplexes the signals with the one wavelength added through the A1
optical port. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the OUT optical port.
Module Function (OADM mode in CWDM system)

l Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of one wavelength.
Provides an intermediate cascade port for cascading to other optical add/drop
multiplexer (OADM) units, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at
the local station.

Transport Platform
Figure 10-22 Principle block diagram of the MR1 (bandpass mode in CWDM system)
TC1 RC2 TC2 RC1
LINE1 Add/Drop Add/Drop LINE2
Optical module
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow (bandpass mode in CWDM system)

The board receives DWDM signals from the upstream station through the LINE1 optical port.
Then, DWDM signals at a wavelength ranging from 195.3 THz to 196.0 THz are output
through the TC1 optical port. After the signals are transmitted, the MR1 board receives the
signals through the RC1 optical port and sends the signals to the line through the LINE2
optical port.
The board receives DWDM signals from the upstream station through the LINE2 optical port.
Then, DWDM signals at a wavelength ranging from 192.9 THz to 193.6 THz are output
through the TC2 optical port. After the signals are transmitted, the MR1 board receives the
signals through the RC2 optical port and sends the signals to the line through the LINE1
optical port.
Module Function (bandpass mode in CWDM system)

l Optical module
The board provides the bandpass function when the wavelength is 1531 nm.
10.7.5 Front Panel


Transport Platform

Figure 10-23 shows the front panel of the MR1 in CWDM system.
Figure 10-23 Front panel of the MR1 in CWDM system
MR1
IN(LINE1) OUT(LINE2) A1(RC1) D1(TC1) MI(TC2) MO(RC2)
1531
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
port.
Indicators
The MR1 board does not have indicators.
Ports
There are six optical ports on the front panel of the MR1 board, Table 10-41 lists the type and
Table 10-41 Types and functions of the MR1 ports in CWDM system
Optical Port
Port Type Function
IN LC l When the board is used at OADM mode, the port is used to

(LINE1) receive the multiplexed signals.
l When the wavelength of the MR1 board is 1531 nm, it can be
used at bandpass mode, and the port is used to input/output
DWDM signals.
OUT LC l When the board is used at OADM mode, the port is used to
(LINE2) transmit the multiplexed signals.
used at bandpass mode, and the port is used to input/output
DWDM signals.

Transport Platform
Optical Port
Port Type Function
A1 (RC1) LC l When the board is used at OADM mode, the port is used to
receive the optical signals from the OTU or integrated client-
side equipment, thus adding one channel.
used at bandpass mode, and the port is used to input DWDM
signals of 195.3 THz to 196.0 THz.
D1 (TC1) LC l When the board is used at OADM mode, the port is used to
transmit the optical signals to the OTU or integrated client-
side equipment, thus dropping one channel.
used at bandpass mode, and the port is used to output DWDM
MI (TC2) LC l When the board is used at OADM mode, the port is a cascade
input port, and used to concatenate other OADM boards,
implement the adding/dropping of other channels in the
used at bandpass mode, and the port is used to output DWDM
MO (RC2) LC l When the board is used at OADM mode, the port is a cascade
output port, and used to concatenate other OADM boards,
implement the adding/dropping of other channels in the
used at bandpass mode, and the port is used to input DWDM
Laser Hazard Level

10.7.6 Valid Slots

The MR1 occupies one slot.

Display of Slots

Transport Platform
installed.


Table 10-42 and Table 10-43 list the sequence number displayed in an NMS system of the
optical port on the MR1 board front panel.
Table 10-42 Display of the MR1 ports (bandpass mode in CWDM system)
TC1/RC1 1
TC2/RC2 2
LINE1 3
LINE2 4
Table 10-43 Display of the MR1 ports (OADM mode in CWDM system)
A1/D1 1
IN/OUT 2
MO/MI 3
10.7.8 MR1 Parameters

Transport Platform
Board Mode OADM Mode, Bandpass When the MR1 board is

Mode used in a CWDM system,
Default: OADM Mode set the parameter as follows
according to the working
wavelength of the board:
l Select OADM Mode
when the MR1 board
transmits a wavelength
of 1471 nm, 1491 nm,
1511 nm, 1551 nm, 1571
nm, 1591 nm, or 1611
nm.
l Select OADM Mode
when the MR1 board
transmits a 1531 nm
wavelength in a two-
fiber bidirectional
system; select Bandpass
Mode when the board is
used in a single-fiber
bidirectional system.

1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /

Default: /
10.7.9 MR1 Specifications

consumption.
Table 10-44 lists the optical specifications of the MR1.

Transport Platform
Table 10-44 TNF1MR1 board specifications in CWDM system
Correspond Item Unit Value

ing
interfaces

range
spacing
IN (LINE1)- 1.0 dB spectral width nm 13

D1 (TC1)
Drop channel dB < 1.2
insertion loss

isolation

isolation
A1 (RC1)- 1.0 dB spectral width nm 13

OUT
(LINE2) Add channel insertion dB < 1.2
loss
IN (LINE1)- Insertion loss dB < 1.2

MO (RC2)
Isolation dB > 13
MI (TC2)- Insertion loss dB < 1.2

OUT
(LINE2) Isolation dB > 15

In a CWDM system, the MR1 supports adding/dropping of one channel in the same band of
11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611

Transport Platform
The add wavelength (A1) is the same as the drop wavelength (D1).
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.54 kg (1.19 lb.)
Power Consumption
MR1 0.5 0.5
10.8 MR1S
MR1S: Single Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board with OSC

The available hardware version for the MR1S is TNF1.
Version
Table 10-46 describes the version mapping of the MR1S board.
Table 10-46 Version description of the MR1S board

Item Description

version or later.
NOTE
TNF1MR1S boards are not supported by NEs running V100R003C05.
10.8.2 Application
The MR1S board mainly serves to add/drop one channel of wavelength signals to/from the
The MR1S supports two-fiber bidirectional transmission. For the application of the board in

Transport Platform
Figure 10-24 Application of the MR1S in WDM systems

OTU OTU
A1 D1 A1 D1
IN OUT
MO MI
MR1S MR1S
MI MO
OUT IN
NOTE

The MR1S board supports optical add/drop multiplexing and cascading ports.
For detailed information about the functions and features, see Table 10-47.
Table 10-47 Functions and features of the MR1S board

Basic Function Adds/drops and multiplexes one channel of signal from the

The MR1S unit consists of two parts: the OADM module, and communication module.
Figure 10-25 shows the principle block diagram of the MR1S.

Transport Platform
Figure 10-25 Principle block diagram of the MR1S

D1 SO MO MI SI A1
IN Drop Add OUT
OADM module
UXC Backplane
Signal Flow
optical port. The drop optical module drops one wavelength from the multiplexed signals
through the D1 optical port, and then drops one channel of OSC signal through the SO optical
port. The remaining wavelengths are output through the MO optical port.
port. The add module multiplexes one channel of OSC signals through the SI optical port, and
then multiplexes the signals with the one wavelength added through the A1 optical port. The
multiplexed optical signals are output through the OUT optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module
the local station.
10.8.5 Front Panel


Transport Platform

Figure 10-26 shows the front panel of the MR1S.
Figure 10-26 Front panel of the MR1S
MR1S
IN OUT A1 D1 SI SO MI MO
1471 1310
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
port.
Indicators
The MR1S board does not have indicators.
Ports
There are eight optical ports on the front panel of the MR1S board, Table 10-48 lists the type
Table 10-48 Types and functions of the MR1S ports
Optical Port
Port Type Function
A1 LC Receive the optical signals from the OTU or integrated client-

side equipment, thus adding one channel.
D1 LC Transmit optical signals to the OTU or integrated client-side

equipment, thus dropping one channel.
MI/MO LC Cascade input/output ports; used to concatenate other OADM

boards, implement the adding/dropping of others channel in the
multiplexed signal.

Transport Platform
Laser Hazard Level

10.8.6 Valid Slots

The MR1S occupies one slot.

Display of Slots
installed.


MR1S board front panel.
Table 10-49 Display of the MR1S ports

A1/D1 1
IN/OUT 2
MI/MO 3
SI/SO 4
NOTE
10.8.8 MR1S Parameters

Transport Platform

1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /

Default: /
10.8.9 MR1S Specifications

consumption.
Table 10-50 and Table 10-51 list the optical specifications of the MR1S.
Table 10-50 TNF1MR1S board specifications in DWDM system

Correspon Item Unit Value
ding
interfaces
- Operating frequency range THz 192.10 to 196.00
- Adjacent channel spacing GHz 100

of 1310 nm
IN-D1 1.0 dB spectral width nm 0.2
Drop channel insertion loss dB < 1.6
Adjacent channel isolation dB 25
isolation
IN-SO Insertion loss dB < 1.0
A1-OUT 1.0 dB spectral width nm 0.2
Add channel insertion loss dB < 1.6
SI-OUT Insertion loss dB < 1.0
IN-MO Insertion loss dB < 1.2

Transport Platform

ding
interfaces
Isolation dB > 13
MI-OUT Insertion loss dB < 1.2
Isolation dB > 15
- reflectance dB < -40
Table 10-51 TNF1MR1S board specifications in CWDM system

ding
interfaces

range
spacing

range of 1310 nm
Drop channel insertion dB < 1.2

loss

isolation

isolation

loss
Isolation dB > 13
Isolation dB > 15

Transport Platform

In a DWDM system, the MR1S supports adding/dropping of one channel in the same band of

80 192.1 1560.61 40 194.1 1544.53
78 192.2 1559.79 38 194.2 1543.73
76 192.3 1558.98 36 194.3 1542.94
74 192.4 1558.17 34 194.4 1542.14
72 192.5 1557.36 32 194.5 1541.35
70 192.6 1556.56 30 194.6 1540.56
68 192.7 1555.75 28 194.7 1539.77
66 192.8 1554.94 26 194.8 1538.98
64 192.9 1554.13 24 194.9 1538.19
62 193.0 1553.33 22 195.0 1537.40
60 193.1 1552.52 20 195.1 1536.61
58 193.2 1551.72 18 195.2 1535.82
56 193.3 1550.92 16 195.3 1535.04
54 193.4 1550.12 14 195.4 1534.25
52 193.5 1549.32 12 195.5 1533.47
50 193.6 1548.51 10 195.6 1532.68
48 193.7 1547.72 8 195.7 1531.90
46 193.8 1546.92 6 195.8 1531.12
44 193.9 1546.12 4 195.9 1530.33
42 194.0 1545.32 2 196.0 1529.55
In a CWDM system, the MR1S supports adding/dropping of one channel in the same band of

Transport Platform
11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611
l The add wavelength (A1) is the same as the drop wavelength (D1).
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.55 kg (1.21 lb.)
Power Consumption
MR1S 0.5 0.5
10.9 MR2
MR2: Double Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board

The available hardware version for the MR2 is TNF1.
Version

Transport Platform
Item Description

version or later.
NOTE
TNF1MR2 boards do not apply to V100R003C05.
10.9.2 Application
The MR2 board mainly serves to add/drop two channels of wavelength signals to/from the
Figure 10-27 MR2 board application in the WDM system
OTU OTU OTU OTU

A1 D1A2 D2 D1 A1 D2 A2
IN OUT
MO MI
MR2 MR2
MI MO
OUT IN
NOTE

The MR2 board supports optical add/drop multiplexing and cascading ports.
Functions and
Basic Function Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signal from the

Transport Platform
Functions and
WDM Supports both the DWDM and CWDM specifications.

specifications

Figure 10-28 shows the principle block diagram of the MR2.
Figure 10-28 Principle block diagram of the MR2

D1 D2 MO MI A1 A2
IN Drop Add OUT
OADM module
UXC Backplane
Signal Flow
optical port. The drop optical module drops two wavelengths from the multiplexed signals
through the D1 and D2 optical ports. The remaining wavelengths are output through the MO
optical port.
port. The add module multiplexes the signals with the two wavelengths added through the A1
and A2 optical ports. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the OUT optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module

Transport Platform
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths in a direction.

the local station.
10.9.5 Front Panel


Figure 10-29 shows the front panel of the MR2.
Figure 10-29 Front panel of the MR2

MR2
IN OUT A1 D1 A2 D2 MI MO
1471 1491
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
port.
Indicators
Ports
There are eight optical ports on the front panel of the MR2 board, Table 10-56 lists the type
Table 10-56 Types and functions of the MR2 ports

Optical
A1/A2 LC Receive the optical signals from the OTU or integrated client-
side equipment, thus adding one channel respectively.

Transport Platform
Optical
D1/D2 LC Transmit optical signals to the OTU or integrated client-side

equipment, thus dropping one channel respectively.

boards, implement the adding/dropping of others channel in
the multiplexed signal.
Laser Hazard Level

10.9.6 Valid Slots


Display of Slots
installed.


MR2 board front panel.
Table 10-57 Display of the MR2 ports

IN/OUT 3
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
MO/MI 4

Transport Platform
NOTE

1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /

Default: /

consumption.
Table 10-58 and Table 10-59 list the optical specifications of the MR2.
Table 10-58 TNF1MR2 board specifications in DWDM system

ng interfaces

range

spacing

IN-D2 Drop channel insertion dB < 1.5
loss
isolation

Transport Platform

ng interfaces
isolation

A2-OUT Add channel insertion dB < 1.5
loss
Isolation dB > 13
Isolation dB > 15

ng interfaces

range

IN-D2 Drop channel insertion dB < 1.5
loss

isolation

isolation

loss
Isolation dB > 13
Isolation dB > 15

Transport Platform

In a DWDM system, the MR2 supports adding/dropping of two channels in the same band of

80 192.1 1560.61 40 194.1 1544.53
78 192.2 1559.79 38 194.2 1543.73
76 192.3 1558.98 36 194.3 1542.94
74 192.4 1558.17 34 194.4 1542.14
72 192.5 1557.36 32 194.5 1541.35
70 192.6 1556.56 30 194.6 1540.56
68 192.7 1555.75 28 194.7 1539.77
66 192.8 1554.94 26 194.8 1538.98
64 192.9 1554.13 24 194.9 1538.19
62 193.0 1553.33 22 195.0 1537.40
60 193.1 1552.52 20 195.1 1536.61
58 193.2 1551.72 18 195.2 1535.82
56 193.3 1550.92 16 195.3 1535.04
54 193.4 1550.12 14 195.4 1534.25
52 193.5 1549.32 12 195.5 1533.47
50 193.6 1548.51 10 195.6 1532.68
48 193.7 1547.72 8 195.7 1531.90
46 193.8 1546.92 6 195.8 1531.12
44 193.9 1546.12 4 195.9 1530.33
42 194.0 1545.32 2 196.0 1529.55
In a CWDM system, the MR2 supports adding/dropping of two channels in the same band of

Transport Platform
11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611
wavelength on the first channel is smaller than the wavelength on the second channel. (A1 =
D1 < A2 = D2)
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.55 kg (1.21 lb.)
Power Consumption
MR2 0.5 0.5
10.10 MR2S
MR2S: Double Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board with OSC

Version

Transport Platform

Item Description

version or later.
NOTE
TNF1MR2S boards are not supported by NEs running V100R003C05.
10.10.2 Application
The MR2S board mainly serves to add/drop two channels of wavelength signals to/from the
Figure 10-30 MR2S board application in a WDM system
OTU OTU OTU OTU

A1 D1A2 D2 D1 A1 D2 A2
IN OUT
MO MI
MR2S MR2S
MI MO
OUT IN
NOTE


Functions and
Basic Function Adds/drops and multiplexes two channels of signals from the

Transport Platform
Functions and


D1 D2 SO MO MI SI A1 A2
IN Drop Add OUT
OADM module
UXC Backplane
Signal Flow
optical port. The drop optical module drops two wavelengths from the multiplexed signals
through the D1 and D2 optical port, and then drops one channel of OSC signal through the SO
optical port. The remaining wavelengths are output through the MO optical port.
then multiplexes the signals with the two wavelengths added through the A1 and A2 optical
ports. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the OUT optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module

Transport Platform
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths in a direction.

the local station.
10.10.5 Front Panel



MR2S
IN OUT A1 D1 A2 D2 SI SO MI MO
1471 1491 1310
NOTE
port.
Indicators
Ports
There are ten optical ports on the front panel of the MR2S board, Table 10-64 lists the type
Optical
A1/A2 LC Receive the optical signals from the OTU or integrated client-
side equipment, thus adding one channel respectively.
D1/D2 LC Transmit optical signals to the OTU or integrated client-side

equipment, thus dropping one channel respectively.

Transport Platform
Optical

boards, implement the adding/dropping of others channel in
Laser Hazard Level

10.10.6 Valid Slots


Display of Slots
installed.


Table 10-65 Display of the MR2S optical ports

IN/OUT 3
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
SI/SO 5

Transport Platform

MI/MO 4
NOTE

1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /

Default: /

consumption.
Table 10-66 and Table 10-67 list the optical specifications of the MR2S.
Table 10-66 TNF1MR2S board specifications in DWDM system

ding
interfaces

range

spacing

Transport Platform

ding
interfaces

wavelength range of
1310 nm

IN-D2 Drop channel dB < 2.0
insertion loss
isolation
isolation

A2-OUT Add channel dB < 2.0
insertion loss
Isolation dB > 13
Isolation dB > 15
Table 10-67 TNF1MR2S board specifications in CWDM system

ding
interfaces

range
spacing

range of 1310 nm

IN-D2

Transport Platform

ding
interfaces

loss

isolation

isolation

loss
Isolation dB > 13
Isolation dB > 15

In a DWDM system, the MR2S supports adding/dropping of two channels in the same band

80 192.1 1560.61 40 194.1 1544.53
78 192.2 1559.79 38 194.2 1543.73
76 192.3 1558.98 36 194.3 1542.94
74 192.4 1558.17 34 194.4 1542.14
72 192.5 1557.36 32 194.5 1541.35
70 192.6 1556.56 30 194.6 1540.56
68 192.7 1555.75 28 194.7 1539.77

Transport Platform

66 192.8 1554.94 26 194.8 1538.98
64 192.9 1554.13 24 194.9 1538.19
62 193.0 1553.33 22 195.0 1537.40
60 193.1 1552.52 20 195.1 1536.61
58 193.2 1551.72 18 195.2 1535.82
56 193.3 1550.92 16 195.3 1535.04
54 193.4 1550.12 14 195.4 1534.25
52 193.5 1549.32 12 195.5 1533.47
50 193.6 1548.51 10 195.6 1532.68
48 193.7 1547.72 8 195.7 1531.90
46 193.8 1546.92 6 195.8 1531.12
44 193.9 1546.12 4 195.9 1530.33
42 194.0 1545.32 2 196.0 1529.55
In a CWDM system, the MR2S supports adding/dropping of two channels in the same band of

11 1471 15 1551
12 1491 16 1571
13 1511 17 1591
14 1531 18 1611
wavelength on the first channel is smaller than the wavelength on the second channel.
(A1 = D1 < A2 = D2)

Transport Platform
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.57 kg (1.26 lb.)
Power Consumption
MR2S 0.5 0.5
10.11 MR4
MR4: Four Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board

Version

Item Description

version or later.
10.11.2 Application
The MR4 board mainly serves to add/drop four channels of wavelength signals to/from the
The MR4 supports two-fiber bidirectional transmission.Figure 10-33 shows the MR4 board

Transport Platform

4 4
... ...
OTU OTU OTU OTU
A1 D1A4 D4 D1 A1 D4 A4
IN OUT
MO MI
MR4 MR4
MI MO
OUT IN
NOTE

The main functions and features supported by the MR4 are adding/dropping and multiplexing.

Basic Function Adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signal from the


Transport Platform

D1 D2 D3 D4 MO MI A1 A2 A3 A4
IN Drop Add OUT
OADM module
UXC Backplane
Signal Flow
optical port. The drop optical module drops four wavelengths from the multiplexed signals
through the D1, D2, D3 and D4 optical ports. The remaining wavelengths are output through
the MO optical port.
port. The add module multiplexes the signals with the one wavelength added through the A1,
A2, A3 and A4 optical ports. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the OUT
optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of four wavelengths.
the local station.
10.11.5 Front Panel


Transport Platform

NOTE
The number under the optical port indicates one of the frequencies that are supported by the optical port.
Indicators
Ports
There are twelve optical ports on the front panel of the MR4 board, Table 10-72 lists the type

A1 to A4 LC Receive the optical signals from the OTU or

D1 to D4 LC Transmit optical signals to the OTU or integrated

client-side equipment, thus dropping one channel
respectively.
MI/MO LC Cascade input/output ports; used to concatenate

other OADM boards, implement the adding/
dropping of others channel in the multiplexed
signal.
Laser Hazard Level


Transport Platform
10.11.6 Valid Slots


Display of Slots
installed.



Optical Ports on the
Front Panel Optical Port Displayed on the U2000
IN/OUT 5
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
MI/MO 6
NOTE

Transport Platform

1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /

Default: /

consumption.
Table 10-74 and Table 10-75 list the optical specifications of the MR4.
Table 10-74 TNF1MR4 board specifications in DWDM system

ng interfaces

range

spacing

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
isolation
isolation

A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT

Transport Platform

ng interfaces
Isolation dB > 13
Isolation dB > 15

ng interfaces

wavelength range
spacing
IN-D1 1.0 dB spectral nm 13

IN-D2 width
IN-D3 Drop channel dB < 1.5
IN-D4 insertion loss

isolation
channel isolation
A1-OUT 1.0 dB spectral nm 13

A2-OUT width
A3-OUT Add channel dB < 1.5
A4-OUT insertion loss
dB < 1.5
Isolation dB > 13
Isolation dB > 15

Transport Platform

In a DWDM system, the MR4 supports adding/dropping of four channels in the same band of
Table 10-76 Wavelength distribution rules of the MR4 in a DWDM system

Frequency (THz)
Band Group A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
1 192.1 192.2 192.3 192.4
2 192.5 192.6 192.7 192.8
3 192.9 193.0 193.1 193.2
4 193.3 193.4 193.5 193.6
5 193.7 193.8 193.9 194.0
6 194.1 194.2 194.3 194.4
7 194.5 194.6 194.7 194.8
8 194.9 195.0 195.1 195.2
9 195.3 195.4 195.5 195.6
10 195.7 195.8 195.9 196.0
In a CWDM system, the MR4 supports adding/dropping of four wavelengths in the same
band of the same board. Table 10-77 shows the rules of wavelength distribution.
Table 10-77 Wavelength distribution rules of the MR4 in a CWDM system

Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
1471 1491 1511 1531
1551 1571 1591 1611
wavelengths are incremented from the first channel to the fourth channel. (A1 = D1 < A2 =
D2 < A3 = D3 < A4 = D4)

Transport Platform
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.56 kg (1.23 lb.)
Power Consumption
MR4 0.5 0.5
10.12 MR4S
MR4S: Four Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board with OSC

Version

Item Description

version or later.
10.12.2 Application
The MR4S board mainly serves to add/drop four channels of wavelength signals to/from the

Transport Platform
Figure 10-36 MR4S board application in a WDM system

4 4
... ...
OTU OTU OTU OTU
A1 D1A4 D4 D1 A1 D4 A4
IN OUT
MO MI
MR4S MR4S
MI MO
OUT IN
NOTE


Functions and
Basic Function Adds/drops and multiplexes four channels of signals from the


Transport Platform

D1 D2 D3 D4 SO MO MI SI A1 A2 A3 A4
IN Drop Add OUT
OADM module
UXC Backplane
Signal Flow
optical port. The drop optical module drops four wavelengths from the multiplexed signals
through the D1, D2, D3 and D4 optical ports, and then drops one channel of OSC signal
through the SO optical port. The remaining wavelengths are output through the MO optical
port.
then multiplexes the signals with the four wavelengths added through the A1, A2, A3 and A4
optical ports. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the OUT optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module
the local station.
10.12.5 Front Panel


Transport Platform

MR4S
IN OUT A1 D1 A2 D2 A3 D3 A4 D4 SI SO MI MO
1471 1491 1511 1531 1310
NOTE
port.
Indicators
Ports
There are fourteen optical ports on the front panel of the MR4S board, Table 10-80 lists the


respectively.

MI/MO LC Cascade input/output ports; used to concatenate other

OADM boards, implement the adding/dropping of
others channel in the multiplexed signal.
Laser Hazard Level

10.12.6 Valid Slots


Transport Platform

Display of Slots
installed.


Table 10-81 Display of the MR4S ports

IN/OUT 5
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
SI/SO 7
MI/MO 6
NOTE

Transport Platform

14/1531.00/-.
Default: /

Default: /

consumption.
Table 10-82 lists the optical specifications of the MR4S.
Table 10-82 TNF1MR4S board specifications

Correspo Item Unit Value
nding
interfaces

range
spacing

range of 1310 nm

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
isolation

isolation

A2-OUT
A3-OUT

Transport Platform
Correspo Item Unit Value

nding
interfaces
loss
Isolation dB > 13
Isolation dB > 15

In the CWDM system, the MR4S supports adding/dropping of four wavelengths in the same
Table 10-83 Wavelength distribution rules of the MR4S in a CWDM system
Wavelength (nm)
A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4
1471 1491 1511 1531
1551 1571 1591 1611
The wavelength that is received by each optical port should comply with the following rules:
wavelengths are incremented from the first channel to the fourth channel. (A1 = D1 < A2
= D2 < A3 = D3 < A4 = D4)
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.58 kg (1.28 lb.)

Transport Platform
Power Consumption
MR4S 0.5 0.5
10.13 MR8
MR8: Eight Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing Board

Version
Table 10-84 Version description of the MR8

Item Description

The system provides five types of the MR8, Table 10-85 lists the types of the MR8.
Table 10-85 Type description of the MR8

Board Name Description
MR801 The allowable frequencies at each optical port are

192.1 THz, 192.2 THz, 192.3 THz, 192.4 THz, 192.5
THz, 192.6 THz, 192.7 THz, and 192.8 THz.

192.9 THz, 193.0 THz, 193.1 THz, 193.2 THz, 193.3

193.7 THz, 193.8 THz, 193.9 THz, 194.0 THz, 194.1

194.5 THz, 194.6 THz, 194.7 THz, 194.8 THz, 194.9

Transport Platform

195.3 THz, 195.4 THz, 195.5 THz, 195.6 THz, 195.7
10.13.2 Application
The MR8 board mainly serves to add/drop eight channels of wavelength signals to/from the

8 8
... ...
OTU OTU OTU OTU
A1 D1A8 D8 D1 A1 D8 A8
IN OUT
MO MI
MR8 MR8
MI MO
OUT IN
NOTE

The main functions and features supported by the MR8 are adding/dropping and multiplexing.
Functions and
Basic Function Adds/drops and multiplexes eight channels of signals from the
WDM specifications Supports the DWDM specifications.

Transport Platform


D1 to D8 MO MI A1 to A8
IN Drop Add OUT
OADM module
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow
through the D1 to D8 optical ports. The remaining wavelengths are output through the MO
optical port.
port. The add module multiplexes the signals with the eight wavelengths added through the
A1 to A8 optical ports. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the OUT optical
port.
Module Function
l Optical module
the local station.

Transport Platform
10.13.5 Front Panel



MR8
IN OUT A1 D1 A2 D2 A3 D3 A4 D4 A5 D5 A6 D6 A7 D7 A8 D8 MI MO
1921 1922 1923 1924 1925 1926 1927 1928
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
The number under the optical port indicates one of the frequencies that is supported by the optical port.
Indicators
Ports
There are twenty optical ports on the front panel of the MR8 board, Table 10-87 lists the type

A1 to A8 LC Receive the optical signals from the OTU or

D1 to D8 LC Transmit optical signals to the OTU or integrated

client-side equipment, thus dropping one channel
respectively.
MI/MO LC Cascade input/output ports; used to concatenate

other OADM boards, implement the adding/
dropping of others channel in the multiplexed
signal.

Transport Platform
Laser Hazard Level

10.13.6 Valid Slots


Display of Slots
installed.



IN/OUT 9
A1/D1 1
A2/D2 2
A3/D3 3
A4/D4 4
A5/D5 5
A6/D6 6
A7/D7 7
A8/D8 8
MI/MO 10

Transport Platform
NOTE

1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /

Default: /

consumption.
Table 10-89 lists the optical specifications of the MR8.
Table 10-89 TNF1MR8 board specifications

ng interfaces

range

spacing

IN-D2
IN-D3 loss
IN-D4
IN-D5
isolation
IN-D6
IN-D7

Transport Platform

ng interfaces
IN-D8 Non-adjacent channel dB 35
isolation

A3-OUT loss
A4-OUT
A5-OUT
A6-OUT
A7-OUT
A8-OUT
Isolation dB > 13
Isolation dB > 15

In the DWDM system, the MR8 supports adding/dropping of eight wavelengths in the same
Table 10-90 Wavelength distribution rules of the MR8 in a DWDM system

Frequency (THz)
Band
Group A1/D1 A2/D2 A3/D3 A4/D4 A5/D5 A6/D6 A7/D7 A8/D8
1 192.1 192.2 192.3 192.4 192.5 192.6 192.7 192.8
2 192.9 193.0 193.1 193.2 193.3 193.4 193.5 193.6
3 193.7 193.8 193.9 194.0 194.1 194.2 194.3 194.4
4 194.5 194.6 194.7 194.8 194.9 195.0 195.1 195.2
5 195.3 195.4 195.5 195.6 195.7 195.8 195.9 196.0
The wavelength that is received by each optical port should comply with the following rules:
The frequencies of add wavelength and drop wavelength of each channel are the same. In
addition, the frequencies are incremented from the first channel to the eighth channel. (A1 =
D1 < A2 = D2 < A3 = D3 < A4 = D4< A5 = D5< A6 = D6 < A7 = D7 < A8 = D8)

Transport Platform
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.62 kg (1.37 lb.)
Power Consumption
MR8 0.5 0.5
10.14 SBM1
SBM1: Single Fiber Bidirectional Single Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing
Configuration Board

The available hardware version for the SBM1 is TNF1.
Version
Table 10-91 describes the version mapping of the SBM1 board.
Table 10-91 Version description of the SBM1

Item Description

Type
The system provides four types of the SBM1, Table 10-92 lists the types of the SBM1.
Table 10-92 Type description of the SBM1

Board Description
Name
SBM1M01 Used in CWDM system, the wavelength of optical port A1 is longer than
the wavelength of optical port D1.

Transport Platform
Board Description
Name
SBM1M02 Used in CWDM system, the wavelength of optical port A1 is shorter than
the wavelength of optical port D1.
SBM1M03 Used in DWDM system, the frequency of optical port A1 is lower than the
frequency of optical port D1.
SBM1M04 Used in DWDM system, the frequency of optical port A1 is higher than the
frequency of optical port D1.
10.14.2 Application
The SBM1 is mainly used to drop one channel of signal from the multiplexed signals and add
another channel into the multiplexed signals.
The SBM1 supports single-fiber bidirectional transmission. For the application of the board in
Figure 10-42 Application of the SBM1 in WDM system

OTU OTU
A1 D1 A1 D1
LINE EXT EXT LINE

SBM1 SBM1
NOTE

The main functions and features supported by the SBM1 is to drop one channel of signal from
the multiplexed signals and add another channel into the multiplexed signals.

Transport Platform
Table 10-93 Functions and features of the SBM1

Functions and
Basic function Drops one channel of signal from the multiplexed signals and adds
another channel into the multiplexed signals. The demultiplexed
signals and the multiplexed signals must be at different wavelengths.

specification

The SBM1 consists of two parts: the OADM module and the communication module.
Figure 10-43 is the functional block diagram of the SBM1.
Figure 10-43 Functional block diagram of the SBM1

D1 A1
EXT Drop Add LINE
OADM module
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow
The board receives the multiplexed optical signals from the upstream station through the
LINE optical port. The drop optical module drops one channel of single-wavelength signals
from the multiplexed signals through the D1 optical port. The add module multiplexes the
passthrough signals with the one channel of single-wavelength signal added through the A1
optical port. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the LINE optical port.
The EXT port is used as a cascade port. It transmits the multiplexed signals to other single-
fiber bidirectional OADM boards to add/drop the other channels of the multiplexed signals.

Transport Platform
Module Function
l Optical module
multiplexer units, so that the system can add/drop more wavelengths at the local
station.
10.14.5 Front Panel


Figure 10-44, Figure 10-45, Figure 10-46 and Figure 10-47 show the front panel of the
SBM1.
Figure 10-44 Front panel of the SBM1M01

SBM1
Line Ext A1 D1
1491 1471

SBM1
Line Ext A1 D1
1471 1491

SBM1
Line Ext A1 D1
1934 1958
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS

Transport Platform
SBM1
Line Ext A1 D1
1958 1934
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
The number under the optical port on the SBM1M01 and SBM1M02 boards indicates one of the
wavelengths that are supported by the optical port, and the number under the optical port on the
SBM1M03 and SBM1M04 boards indicates one of the frequencies that are supported by the optical port.
Indicators
The SBM1 board does not have indicators.
Ports
There are four optical ports on the front panel of the SBM1 board, Table 10-94 lists the type
Table 10-94 Types and functions of the SBM1 ports

LINE LC Single fiber bidirectional port, used to receive and transmit

A1 LC Receive the optical signals from the OTU or integrated

client-side equipment, thus adding one channel.
D1 LC Transmit optical signals to the OTU or integrated client-

side equipment, thus dropping one channel.
EXT LC Cascade input/output ports; used to concatenate other

OADM boards, implement the adding/dropping of other
channels in the multiplexed signal.
Laser Hazard Level

10.14.6 Valid Slots

The SBM1 occupies one slot.

Transport Platform

Display of Slots
installed.


SBM1 board front panel.
Table 10-95 Display of the SBM1 ports

Line 3
Ext 4
A1 1
D1 2
10.14.8 SBM1 Parameters

1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /

Default: /

Transport Platform
10.14.9 SBM1 Specifications

consumption.
Table 10-96 and Table 10-97 list the optical specifications of the SBM1.
Table 10-96 TNF1SBM1 board specifications in DWDM system

ng
interfaces

range

spacing
LINE-D1 1.0 dB spectral width nm 0.2

loss
isolation
isolation
A1-LINE 1.0 dB spectral width nm 0.2

loss
LINE-EXT Insertion loss dB < 1.4
Table 10-97 TNF1SBM1 board specifications in CWDM system

ng
interfaces

range
spacing
LINE-D1 1.0 dB spectral width nm 13

Transport Platform

ng
interfaces
Drop channel dB < 1.5

insertion loss

isolation

isolation
A1-LINE 1.0 dB spectral width nm 13

loss

In DWDM and CWDM systems, the SBM1 supports adding/dropping of any wavelength.
l The wavelength that is accessed by each optical port of SBM1M01 and SBM1M02
should comply with the following rules:
SBM1M01: A1 > D1
SBM1M02: A1 < D1
l The frequency that is accessed by each optical port of SBM1M03 and SBM1M04 should
comply with the following rules:
SBM1M03: A1 < D1
SBM1M04: A1 > D1
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.52 kg (1.15 lb.)
Power Consumption
SBM1 0.5 0.5

Transport Platform

10.15 SBM2
SBM2: Single Fiber Bidirectional Double Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing
Configuration Board

The hardware version available for the SBM2 is TNF1.
Version
Item Description

Type
The system provides four types of the SBM2, Table 10-99 lists the types of the SBM2.
SBM2M01 Used in CWDM system, the wavelength of optical ports A1-A2 is

longer than the corresponding wavelength of optical ports D1-D2.
SBM2M02 Used in CWDM system, the wavelength of optical ports A1-A2 is

shorter than the corresponding wavelength of optical ports D1-D2.
SBM2M03 Used in DWDM system, the frequency of optical ports A1-A2 is

lower than the frequency of optical ports D1-D2.
SBM2M04 Used in DWDM system, the frequency of optical ports A1-A2 is

higher than the frequency of optical ports D1-D2.

Transport Platform
10.15.2 Application
The SBM2 is mainly used to drop two channels of signal from the multiplexed signals and
add another two channels into the multiplexed signals.

OTU OTU OTU OTU

A1 D1A2 D2 D1 A1 D2 A2
LINE EXT EXT LINE

SBM2 SBM2
NOTE

The main functions and features supported by the SBM2 is to drop two channels of signal
from the multiplexed signals and add another two channels into the multiplexed signals.

Functions and
Basic function Drops two channels of signals from the multiplexed signals and adds
another two channels into the multiplexed signals. The demultiplexed

specification


Transport Platform

D1 D2 A1 A2
EXT Drop Add LINE
OADM module
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow
LINE optical port. The drop optical module drops two channels of single-wavelength signals
from the multiplexed signals through the D1 and D2 optical ports. The add module
multiplexes the passthrough signals with the two channels of single-wavelength signal added
through the A1 and A2 optical ports. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the
LINE optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module
Performs the add/drop multiplexing of two wavelengths.
station.
10.15.5 Front Panel


Transport Platform

Figure 10-50, Figure 10-51, Figure 10-52 and Figure 10-53 show the front panel of the
SBM2.

SBM2
Line Ext A1 D1 A2 D2
1491 1471 1531 1511

SBM2
1471 1491 1511 1531

SBM2
1929 1953 1930 1954
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS

SBM2
1953 1929 1954 1930
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS

Transport Platform
NOTE
The number under the optical port on the SBM2M01 and SBM2M02 boards indicates one of the
wavelengths that are supported by the optical port, and the number under the optical port on the
SBM2M03 and SBM2M04 boards indicates one of the frequencies that are supported by the optical port.
Indicators
Ports
There are six optical ports on the front panel of the SBM2 board, Table 10-101 lists the type

LINE LC Single fiber bidirectional port, used to receive and

transmit the multiplexed signal.
A1/A2 LC Receive the optical signals from the OTU or integrated

respectively.
D1/D2 LC Transmit optical signals to the OTU or integrated client-

EXT LC Cascade input/output ports; used to concatenate other

Laser Hazard Level

10.15.6 Valid Slots


Display of Slots
installed.

Transport Platform


Table 10-102 lists the sequence number displayed in an NMS system of the optical port on
the SBM2 board front panel.

Line 5
Ext 6
A1 1
D1 2
A2 3
D2 4

1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /

Default: /

consumption.

Transport Platform
Table 10-103 and Table 10-104 list the optical specifications of the SBM2.
Table 10-103 TNF1SBM2 board specifications in DWDM system

ng interfaces

range

spacing

LINE-D2 Drop channel insertion dB <2.0
loss
isolation
isolation

A2-LINE Add channel insertion dB <2.0
loss
LINE-EXT Insertion loss dB <1.8
Table 10-104 TNF1SBM2 board specifications in CWDM system

interfaces

range
spacing
LINE-D1 1.0 dB spectral width nm 13

LINE-D2 Drop channel insertion dB <2.0
loss
Adjacent channel dB >30

isolation
Non-adjacent channel dB >40

isolation

Transport Platform

interfaces
A1-LINE 1.0 dB spectral width nm 13

A2-LINE Add channel insertion dB <2.0
loss
LINE-EXT Insertion loss dB <1.8

In DWDM and CWDM systems, the SBM2 supports adding/dropping of any wavelength.
l The wavelength that is accessed by each optical port of SBM2M01 and SBM2M02
should comply with the following rules:
SBM2M01: D1 < A1 < D2 < A2
SBM2M02: A1 < D1 < A2 < D2
l The frequency that is accessed by each optical port of SBM2M03 and SBM2M04 should
comply with the following rules:
SBM2M03: A1 < A2 < D1 < D2
SBM2M04: D1 < D2 < A1 < A2
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.54 kg (1.19 lb.)
Power Consumption
SBM2 0.5 0.5
10.16 SBM4
SBM4: Single Fiber Bidirectional Four Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing
Configuration Board

Transport Platform

Version

Item Description

Type
The system provides two types of SBM4 boards, Table 10-106 lists the types of the SBM4.

SBM401 The wavelength of optical port A is longer than the

corresponding wavelength of optical port D.
SBM402 The wavelength of optical port A is shorter than the

corresponding wavelength of optical port D.
10.16.2 Application
The SBM4 is mainly used to drop four channels of signal from the multiplexed signals and
add another four channels into the multiplexed signals.

Client service
OTU OTU
A1 D1A2 D2
LINE EXT
SBM4
A3 D3A4 D4
OTU OTU
Client service

Transport Platform
NOTE

The main functions and features supported by the SBM4 is to drop four channels of signal
from the multiplexed signals and add another four channels into the multiplexed signals.

Functions and
Basic function Drops four channels of signals from the multiplexed signals and adds
another four channels into the multiplexed signals. The demultiplexed
WDM Supports the CWDM specifications.

specification


D1 D2 D3 D4 A1 A2 A3 A4
EXT Drop Add LINE
OADM module
Backplane
UXC

Transport Platform
Signal Flow
LINE optical port. The drop optical module drops four channels of single-wavelength signals
from the multiplexed signals through the D1, D2, D3 and D4 optical ports. The add module
multiplexes the passthrough signals with the four channels of single-wavelength signals added
through the A1, A2, A3 and A4 optical ports. The multiplexed optical signals are output
through the LINE optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module
station.
10.16.5 Front Panel


Figure 10-56 and Figure 10-57 show the front panel of the SBM4.
Figure 10-56 Front panel of the SBM401

SBM4
Line Ext A1 D1 A2 D2 A3 D3 A4 D4
1491 1471 1531 1511 1571 1551 1611 1591

SBM4
Line Ext A1 D1 A2 D2 A3 D3 A4 D4
1471 1491 1511 1531 1551 1571 1591 1611
NOTE
The number under the optical port indicates the wavelength that supported by the optical port.

Transport Platform
Indicators
Ports
There are ten optical ports on the front panel of the SBM4 board, Table 10-108 lists the type


respectively.

Ext LC Cascade input/output ports; used to concatenate other

Laser Hazard Level

10.16.6 Valid Slots


Display of Slots
installed.


Transport Platform

Table 10-109 lists the sequence number displayed in an NMS system of the optical port on
the SBM4 board front panel.

Line 9
Ext 10
A1 1
D1 2
A2 3
D2 4
A3 5
D3 6
A4 7
D4 8

14/1531.00/-.
Default: /

Default: /

consumption.

Transport Platform
Table 10-110 lists the optical specifications of the SBM4.
Table 10-110 TNF1SBM4 board specifications
Correspondin Item Unit Value

g interfaces

wavelength range
spacing
LINE-D1 1.0 dB spectral nm 13

LINE-D2 width
LINE-D3 Drop channel dB < 2.8
LINE-D4 insertion loss

isolation
channel isolation
A1-LINE 1.0 dB spectral nm 13

A2-LINE width
A3-LINE Add channel dB < 2.8
A4-LINE insertion loss

In CWDM systems, the SBM4 supports adding/dropping of any wavelength. The wavelength
that is accessed by each optical port should comply with the following rules:
l SBM401: D1 < A1 < D2 < A2 < D3 < A3 < D4 < A4

l SBM402: A1 < D1 < A2 < D2 < A3 < D3 < A4 < D4
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.58 kg (1.28 lb.)

Transport Platform
Power Consumption
SBM4 0.5 0.5
10.17 SBM8
SBM8: Single Fiber Bidirectional Eight Channel Optical Add/drop Multiplexing
Configuration Board

Version

Item Description

Type
The system provides two types of the SBM8, Table 10-112 lists the types of the SBM8.

SBM803 Used in the DWDM system. The frequency of optical port A

is lower than the frequency of optical port D.
SBM804 Used in the DWDM system. The frequency of optical port A

is higher than the frequency of optical port D.
10.17.2 Application
The SBM8 is mainly used to drop eight channels of signal from the multiplexed signals and
add eight channels into the multiplexed signals.

Transport Platform
The SBM8 supports single-fiber bidirectional transmission. Figure 10-58 shows the SBM8
Figure 10-58 SBM8 board application in a WDM system

Client service
8
OTU OTU
A1 D1 A8 D8
LINE
SBM8
NOTE

The main functions and features supported by the SBM8 is to drop eight channels of signal
from the multiplexed signals and add eight channels into the multiplexed signals.

Function and
Feature Description
Basic Function Drops eight channels of signals from the multiplexed signals and adds
eight channels into the multiplexed signals.
WDM Supports the DWDM specifications.

specifications


Transport Platform
D1 to D8 A1 to A8
LINE Drop Add
OADM module
Backplane
UXC
Signal Flow
LINE optical port. The drop optical module drops eight channels of single-wavelength signals
from the multiplexed signals through the D1 to D8 optical ports. The add module multiplexes
the passthrough signals with the eight channels of single-wavelength signals added through
the A1 to A8 optical ports. The multiplexed optical signals are output through the LINE
optical port.
Module Function
l Optical module
10.17.5 Front Panel


Figure 10-60 and Figure 10-61 show the front panel of the SBM8.

Transport Platform
SBM8
LINE A1 D1 A2 D2 A3 D3 A4 D4 A5 D5 A6 D6 A7 D7 A8 D8
1929 1953 1930 1954 1931 1955 1932 1956 1933 1957 1934 1958 1935 1959 1936 1960
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS

SBM8
LINE A1 D1 A2 D2 A3 D3 A4 D4 A5 D5 A6 D6 A7 D7 A8 D8
1953 1929 1954 1930 1955 1931 1956 1932 1957 1933 1958 1934 1959 1935 1960 1936
wIN
CAUTION
LASER RADIATION
INSTRUMENTS
NOTE
The number under the optical port on the boards indicates one of the frequencies that are supported by
the optical port.
Indicators
Ports
There are seventeen optical ports on the front panel of the SBM8 board, Table 10-114 lists the



respectively.

Transport Platform

Laser Hazard Level

10.17.6 Valid Slots


Display of Slots
installed.


SBM8 board front panel.

A1 1
D1 2
A2 3
D2 4
A3 5
D3 6
A4 7

Transport Platform

D4 8
A5 9
D5 10
A6 11
D6 12
A7 13
D7 14
A8 15
D8 16
LINE 17

1/1558.98/192.300.
Default: /

Default: /

consumption.
Table 10-116 lists the optical specifications of the SBM8.

Transport Platform
Table 10-116 TNF1SBM8 board specifications

interfaces
- Operating frequency/ THz 192.90 to 193.60

wavelength range 195.30 to 196.00

spacing

LINE-D2
LINE-D3 loss
LINE-D4
LINE-D5
isolation
LINE-D6
LINE-D7 Non-adjacent channel dB 35
isolation
LINE-D8

A2-LINE Add channel insertion dB < 3.0
A3-LINE loss
A4-LINE
A5-LINE
A6-LINE
A7-LINE
A8-LINE

The SBM8 board can add/drop eight fixed wavelength signals to/from the multiplexed signal
in a DWDM system. For the signal frequencies supported by each optical port on the SBM8
port, see Appearance of the Front Panel.
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.)

Transport Platform
Power Consumption
SBM8 0.5 0.5

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 11 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board
11 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer

Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical multiplexers and optical
demultiplexers.
11.1 DSFIU
DSFIU: is available in DSFIU01 and DSFIU02.

Transport Platform
11.1 DSFIU
DSFIU: is available in DSFIU01 and DSFIU02.
Table 11-1 Type description of the DSFIU

DSFIU01 Both East & West Directional Fiber

Interface Board for Sync Timing (Dual
SFIU subcard)
DSFIU02 Fiber Interface Board for Sync Timing

(Single SFIU subcard)
NOTE
OptiX OSN 1800 Packet supports only DSFIU02 boards.

Only one functional version of the DSFIU board is available, that is, TNF1.
Version
Table 11-2 describes the version mapping of the DSFIU board.
Table 11-2 Version description of the DSFIU

Item Description

11.1.2 Application
As a type of optical multiplexing and demultiplexing unit, the DSFIU board multiplexes and
demultiplexes signals transmitted along the main optical path and optical supervisory channel
(OSC).
For the position of the DSFIU board in the WDM system, see Figure 11-1.
Figure 11-1 Position of the DSFIU board in the WDM system

WLINE1 WOSC2 RM21511 TM1 1511 EOSC2 ELINE1
ST2
WOSC1 TM2 1491 RM1 1491 EOSC1
D D
M M
S WSYS1 OA U U ESYS1 S
OA
F X/ X/ F
I D D I
WLINE2 U WSYS2 E E
ESYS2 U ELINE2
M M
OA U U OA
X X

Transport Platform
NOTE
Ports OSC1 and OSC2 on a DSFIU board work with ports TM1/TM2 and RM1/RM2 on an ST2 board
to transmit IEEE 1588v2 protocol packets.

The main functions and features supported by the DSFIU board are optical multiplexing and
demultiplexing.
For details of the functions and features, see Table 11-3.
Table 11-3 DSFIU functions and features

Feature
Basic functions The SFIU subboard is mountable. The single-subboard and dual-
subboard are available.
It implements optical multiplexing and demultiplexing of the
optical supervisory channel (OSC).
WDM specifications Supports DWDM and CWDM.
Operating The OSC1 supports the 1491-nm wavelength and the OSC2
wavelengths of the supports the 1511-nm wavelength.
OSC

The DSFIU board consists of the SFIU subboard and communication module.
Figure 11-2 is the functional block diagram of the DSFIU board.

Transport Platform
Figure 11-2 Functional block diagram of the DSFIU board

OSC1 OSC2
LINE1
Filter
Filter
SYS1
SYS2 LINE2
SFIU subboard
OSC1 OSC2
LINE1
Filter
Filter
SYS1
SYS2 LINE2
SFIU subboard
Backplane
System control board
NOTE
The SFIU subboards have the same silkscreen. The backplane has east and west silkscreens (E and W)
to indicate the direction of the SFIU subboards.
Signal Flow
The LINE1 optical port transmits or receives main optical path signals and optical supervisory
channel (OSC) signals. When the LINE1 optical port transmits signals, it cannot receive
signals; and vice versa.
The SYS1, SYS2, and LINE2 optical ports transmit or receive main optical path signals.
When the SYS1, SYS2, or LINE2 optical port transmits signals, it cannot receive signals; and
vice versa.
The OSC1 and OSC2 optical ports transmit or receive OSC signals. When the OSC1 optical
port receives OSC signals, the OSC2 optical port can only transmit OSC signals; and vice
versa.
When the OSC1 optical port receives OSC signals and the OSC2 optical port transmits OSC
signals, the signal flow on the DSFIU board is as follows:
l OSC signals received by the OSC1 optical port are output by the LINE1 optical port.
l Main optical path signals received by the LINE1 optical port are output by the SYS1
optical port, and OSC signals received by the LINE1 optical port are output by the OSC2
optical port.

Transport Platform
l Main optical path signals received by the SYS2 optical port are output by the LINE2
optical port.
When the OSC2 optical port receives OSC signals and the OSC1 optical port transmits OSC
signals, the signal flow on the DSFIU board is as follows:
l OSC signals received by the LINE1 optical port are output by the OSC1 optical port.
l Main optical path signals received by the SYS1 optical port and OSC signals received by
the OSC2 optical port are multiplexed into one channel by the optical module, and then
output by the LINE1 optical port.
l Main optical path signals received by the LINE2 optical port are output by the SYS2
optical port.
Module Function
l SFIU subboard
Multiplexes and demultiplexes main optical path signals and OSC signals.
Communicates with the system control and communication board.
11.1.5 Front Panel

There are interfaces on the front panel of the DSFIU board.

Figure 11-3 and Figure 11-4 show the front panel of the DSFIU board.
Figure 11-3 Front panel of the DSFIU board (dual-subboard)
OSC1: 1491 OSC1: 1491

OSC2: 1511 OSC2: 1511
SFIU
SFIU
Be same to the Be same to the

wavelength of wavelength of
OSCs TM OSCs TM
LINE1 LINE2 SYS1 SYS2 OSC1 OSC2 LINE1 LINE2 SYS1 SYS2 OSC1 OSC2
Figure 11-4 Front panel of the DSFIU board (single-subboard)
OSC1: 1491
OSC2: 1511
SFIU
Be same to the
wavelength of
OSCs TM
LINE1 LINE2 SYS1 SYS2 OSC1 OSC2
Interfaces

Transport Platform
Table 11-4 Types and functions of the interfaces on the DSFIU board
Interface Type Function
LINE1 LC The LINE1 optical interface is located on the

line side. It sends and receives OSC signals in
addition to transmitting main optical path
signals.
LINE2 LC The LINE2 optical interface is located on the

line side. It transmits the signals of the main
optical path.
SYS1 LC The SYS1 optical interface transmits the

signals in the main optical path.
SYS2 LC The SYS2 optical interface transmits the

signals in the main optical path.
OSC1 LC The OSC1 optical interface transmits the OSC

signals.
OSC2 LC The OSC2 optical interface transmits the OSC

signals.
11.1.6 Valid Slots

One slot houses one DSFIU board.

11.1.7 Interfaces
Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the
NM are listed in Table 11-5.
Table 11-5 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the DSFIU board displayed on the NM
Interface Interface on the NM
WLINE1/WLINE2 1
WOSC1/WOSC2 2
WSYS1/WSYS2 3
ELINE1/ELINE2 4
EOSC1/EOSC2 5

Transport Platform
Interface Interface on the NM
ESYS1/ESYS2 6
11.1.8 DSFIU Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 11-6 Optical specifications of the DSFIU board

Interface Item Uni Value
t
- Operating wavelength range of a service nm 1528 to 1561

channel
- Operating wavelength range of optical nm 1480 to 1520

supervisory channel
LINE1- Insertion loss dB 1.0

SYS1
LINE2-
SYS2
LINE1- Insertion loss dB 1.5

OSC1
LINE1-
OSC2
LINE1- Isolation dB 65
OSC1 @c
LINE1- Isolation dB 40
OSC2 @c
OSC1- Directivity dB 45
SYS1
SYS1-
OSC1
OSC1- Directivity dB 55
OSC2
OSC2-
OSC1
- Optical return loss dB > 40

Transport Platform
Interface Item Uni Value

t
- Polarization C band dB < 0.1

dependent loss
OSC channel dB < 0.15
in. x 8.2 in.)
Power Consumption
DSFIU 0.5 0.5

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 12 Optical Amplifying Board
12 Optical Amplifying Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical amplifier boards.
12.1 OBU
OBU: Optical Booster Board

Transport Platform
12.1 OBU
OBU: Optical Booster Board

The available hardware version of the OBU is TNF1.
Version
Table 12-1 describes the version mapping of the OBU board.
Table 12-1 Version description of the OBU board

Item Description

version or later.
12.1.2 Application
The OBU board is used at the transmit or receive end to amplify optical signals in the C band.
For the application of the board in WDM system, see Figure 12-1.
Figure 12-1 Application of the OBU in WDM system
OTU OTU
Client DCM OBU DCM OBU OADM Client
OADM
service OTU service
OTU
OTU OTU Client

Client OADM DCM DCM OADM
OBU OBU
service OTU service
OTU

The main functions and features supported by the OBU are optical signals amplifying, online
optical performance monitoring, gain lock function and alarms and performance events
monitoring.

Transport Platform
Table 12-2 Functions and features of the OBU
Functions and
Basic function Simultaneously amplifies optical signals on a maximum of 40

channels with 100 GHz channel spacing in the C band.
Features small noise figure.
Nominal Gain The nominal gain is 23 dB.

NOTE
The nominal gain of the OBU board is 23 dB. Actual gain includes the
noise, and the value is bigger than that of nominal gain.
Gain lock function Supports automatic gain control. Adding or deleting channels has
no impact on online services.
Transient control When channels are added or dropped, the unit can suppress the
function fluctuation of the optical power in the path so as to achieve a
smooth upgrade and expansion.
Online optical The MON port is provided for online performance monitoring. A
performance small volume of optical signals is output at the optical port to the
monitoring optical spectrum analyzer or spectrum analysis board. The optical
spectrum analyzer or spectrum analysis board monitors the
multiplexed optical signals and optical performance without
interrupting services.
Automatic shutdown When no light is received, the board automatically shuts down the
of output optical transmission of lights on the EDFA module so that relevant
power personnel can be protected.
Variable Optical The VO/VI port on the board is used to insert the SFP EVOA
attenuator module. The board uses the SFP VOA module to adjust the
transmission optical power or receive optical power in the range
of 0 dB to 20 dB.
Alarms and Monitors performance indexes, including

performance events l The input power and the output power of the board
monitoring
l Pump driving current
l Back facet current
l Pump cooling current
l The temperature of the pump laser and the board
WDM specifications Supports the DWDM specification only.

The OBU unit consists of five parts: the EDFA optical module, the drive and detection
module, the variable optical attenuator, the communication module, and the power supply
module. The variable optical attenuator is the optional module. If you need this equipment,
contact Huawei.

Transport Platform
Figure 12-2 is the functional block diagram of the OBU unit.
Figure 12-2 Functional block diagram of the OBU unit
NOTE
An EVOA can be configured on this board if required to adjust the signal power. You can either attach
the EVOA to the OUT optical port on this board to adjust the transmit optical power of this board or
attach the EVOA to the IN optical port on this board to adjust the receive optical power of this board.
Signal Flow
One multiplexed optical signal received through the IN port is input to the erbium-doped fiber
amplifier (EDFA) optical module. The EDFA optical module amplifies the optical power of
the signal and locks the gain of the signal. Then, the amplified multiplexed signal is output
through the OUT port
The multiplexed signal can also be input from the VI optical port, and output from the VO
optical port after the optical power is adjusted, and then received by the IN optical port.
Functional Modules
l EDFA optical module
Multiplexed signal light and pump light enter the erbium-doped fiber for
amplification. The erbium-doped fiber that is excited by the pump laser can amplify
the optical signal to implement the optical power amplification function.
The optical splitter splits some optical signals from the main optical path and
provides them to the MON port for detection.

Transport Platform
l Drive and detection module

Detects in real time the optical power of service signals.
Detects in real time the drive current, back facet current, cooling current, and
operating temperature and ambient temperature of the pump laser inside the EDFA
optical module.
Drives the pump laser inside the EDFA optical module.
Reports alarms and performance events to the communication module.
Adjust the receive optical power.
After the board is powered on, the default attenuation of the EVOA retains the
maximum value 20 dB, ensuring that the board is not overloaded.
12.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports and laser safety label on the OBU front panel.

Figure 12-3 shows the front panel of the OBU board.
Figure 12-3 Front panel of the OBU board
Indicators


Transport Platform
Ports
There are five optical ports on the front panel of the OBU, Table 12-3 lists the type and
Table 12-3 Ports on the front panel of the OBU

Connector
Port type Description
VO LC Transmit the attenuated signal.
VI LC Receive the signal to be attenuated.
IN LC Receive the signal to be amplified.
OUT LC Transmit the amplified signal.
MON LC Achieves the in-service monitoring of optical

spectrum.
The MON port is a 1/99 tap of the total composite
signal at the OUT port (20dB lower than the actual
signal power).
12.1.6 Valid Slots

The OBU occupies one slot.
Valid Slot in Subrack

In the OptiX OSN chassis, the valid slots of the board are SLOT1 to SLOT6.
Display of Slots

This section introduces the display of ports on the board.

Table 12-4 lists the sequence number displayed in an NM system of the optical port on the
OBU board front panel.
Table 12-4 Display of the OBU optical ports

IN 1

Transport Platform
OUT 2
VI/VO 3
MON 4
12.1.8 OBU Parameters on the NMS
Optical Interface Attenuation 0 to 20 parameter provides an option to

Ratio (dB) Default: 20 set the optical power attenuation
of a board channel so that the
optical power of the output
signals at the transmit end is
within the preset range.
Max. Attenuation Ratio (dB) 20 parameter provides an option to

Default: 20 query the maximum attenuation
rate allowed by the current optical
port of a board.
Min. Attenuation Ratio (dB) 0 parameter provides an option to

Default: 0 query the minimum attenuation
rate allowed by the current optical
port of a board.
Channel Use Status Used, Unused l Set this parameter to Unused

Default: Used when a channel that is not
used.
l Set this parameter to Used
when a channel that is used.
Laser Status ON, OFF parameter provides an option to

Default: OFF set and query the laser status of a
board.
Gain (dB) 19.0 to 40.0 parameter provides an option to

Default: / query the gain of an optical
amplifier board, namely, the
difference of the output power
(dBm) to the input power (dBm).

Transport Platform
Nominal Gain (dB) 23 parameter specifies the desired

Default: / gain of the signal optical power.
This parameter is used to indicate
the relative value between the
optical power of output signals
and the optical power of input
signals, namely, the amplifying
multiple of the signal optical
power.
12.1.9 OBU Specifications

OBU board specifications include specifications of optical module on the client and WDM
sides, laser level, mechanical specifications and power consumption.
Table 12-5 shows the details about the optical specifications of the OBU.Table 12-6 shows
the details about the optical specifications of the SFP EVOA module.
Table 12-5 OBU board specifications
Item Unit Value
Operating wavelength range nm 1529.53 to 1560.61
Total input power range dBm -32 to -3
Maximum total output dBm 20

optical power
Input power range per dBm -32 to -19

channel
Nominal single-wavelength dBm -19

input optical power
Maximum output power of dBm 4

single wavelength
Noise figurea dB 6
Channel gain dB 23
Gain flatness dB <2.0
Pump leakage at input dBm <-30
Input reflectance dB <-40
Output reflectance dB <-40

Transport Platform
Item Unit Value
Maximum reflectance dB <-27

tolerance at input
Maximum reflectance dB <-27

tolerance at output
NOTE
a: Noise figure with full wavelength.

Item Unit Value
VI/VO Inherent insertion dB 1.5

loss
Dynamic dB 20
attenuation range

Laser Level
The laser hazard level of the optical interface is HAZARD LEVEL 1M (The maximum output
optical power of each optical interface ranges from 10 dBm (10 mW) to 22.15 dBm (136
mW)).
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.65 kg (1.43 lb.)
Power Consumption
OBU 5.6 7.6

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 13 System Control, Switching, and Timing Board
13 System Control, Switching, and Timing

Board
About This Chapter
This topic describes the system control, switching, and timing board.
13.1 UXCL
The UXCL is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board.
13.2 UXC
The UXC is a system control, cross-connect, and timing board.

Transport Platform
13.1 UXCL
The UXCL is a system control, cross-connect, timing, and line board.

The functional version of the UXCL is TNF1.
Version
Table 13-1 describes the version mapping of the UXCL board.
Table 13-1 Version description of the UXCL

Item Description

13.1.2 Application
The UXCL provides service processing, service grooming, clock input/output, and
communication control functions in the OptiX OSN system.
The UXCL provides the timing information to the other boards in the system, processes the
SDH signals, switches packets, grooms services between line boards or tributary boards,
communicates with the other boards in the system, and performs the configuration and
management functions for the other boards in the system.
Figure 13-1 shows the position of the UXCL in the system.

Transport Platform
Figure 13-1 Position of the UXCL in the system

Line/Tributary Packet data
SDH/PDH Packet data
service
Clock unit
Auxillary
Higher Auxillary interface
order/Lower SCC Packet data unit
order cross- board processing unit
connect unit
-48 V/-60 V
PIU
SDH
processing
unit UXCL
Line interface on the

local board

This section describes the functions and features that the UXCL supports.
System Control, Switching, and Timing Unit

Table 13-2 lists the functions and features that the system control, switching, and timing unit
of the UXCL supports.
Table 13-2 Functions and features that the system control, switching, and timing unit of the
UXCL supports
Basic Packet l The UXCL supports 60 Gbit/s packet switching function.

function switching
s capability
Time division A higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a

multiplexing lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s.
(TDM) cross-
connect
capacity

Transport Platform
System control and l Manages and controls the running status of an NE.
communication l Works as a communication service unit between the
network management system (NMS) and boards to help
the NMS to control and manage the NE.
System performance l For packet service performance specifications, see Packet

Specifications.
l For TDM service performance specifications, see TDM
Specifications.
Multiprotocol Label The packet switching unit of the UXCL works with its service
Switching (MPLS) interface unit or a service board to implement MPLS
functions functions.
l Setup mode: static tunnels
l Protection: 1:1 tunnel automatic protection switching
(APS)
l Operation, administration and maintenance (OAM):
supports MPLS tunnel OAM and multiprotocol label
switching transfer profile (MPLS-TP) tunnel OAM.
MPLS tunnel OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and
MPLS-TP tunnel OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Pseudo wire emulation The packet switching unit of the UXCL works with its service
edge-to-edge (PWE3) interface unit or a service board to implement PWE3
functions functions.
l Service categories
TDM PWE3 services (circuit emulation services
[CESs])
Asynchronous transfer mode (ATM) PWE3 services
ETH PWE3 services
l Setup mode: static pseudo wires (PWs)
l Supports single-segment PWs (SS-PWs) and multi-
segment PWs (MS-PWs).
l PW encapsulation mode: raw mode or tagged mode
l PW control word: supported
l Protection: 1:1 PW APS
l OAM: supports MPLS PW OAM and MPLS-TP PW
OAM. MPLS PW OAM complies with ITU-T Y.1711, and
MPLS-TP PW OAM complies with ITU-T G.8113.1.
Equipment-level l 1+1 hot standby

protection

Transport Platform
Synchro Clock source The traced clock source at the physical layer can be any of the
nization following:
l External clock
l Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) line clock
l Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) tributary clock
l Synchronous Ethernet clock
l Internal clock source
The traced packet clock source can be any of the following:
l External time
l IEEE 1588v2 clock and time
l IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) clock
Clock protocol l Standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol

l Extended SSM protocol
l Best master clock (BMC) protocol
Data Outband DCN 38 data communications channels (DCCs) that are composed
commun of D1-D3 bytes
ication
network Inband DCN l Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN bandwidth
(DCN) is configurable.
ESC function Supported
Network Huawei Supported by outband and inband DCNs

manage Embedded
ment Control
protocol Channel
(HWECC)
protocol
IP Supported by outband and inband DCNs
Open systems Supported only by outband DCNs

interconnectio
n (OSI) over
DCC protocol
Simple Supported
Network
Management
Protocol
(SNMP)
Auxiliary and Provides one 10M/100M Ethernet NMS port or NMS serial
management ports port.

Transport Platform
Packet Processing Unit and SDH Line Unit

Table 13-3 lists the functions and features that the packet processing unit and SDH line unit
of the UXCL support. The packet processing unit indicates the PEX1 logical unit, and the
SDH line unit includes SL16S, SL4S, and SL1S logical units. For the mapping between the
logical units and logical slots, see 13.1.7 Valid Slots.
Table 13-3 Functions and features that the packet processing unit and SDH line unit of the
UXCL support
Basic functions receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE signals and

1xSTM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signals.
Port TDM service l One STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 small form-factor pluggable

specifica port (SFP) optical port. The optical port type can be S-1.1,
tions L-1.1, S-4.1, L-4.1, S-16.1.
l One STM-1 small form-factor pluggable (SFP) electrical
port. STM-1 ports support SFP electrical modules.
l The following types of small form-factor pluggable (SFP)
modules are supported:
STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 two-fiber bidirectional
pluggable optical module
STM-1/STM-4 single-fiber bidirectional pluggable
optical module
STM-1 pluggable electrical module
l A STM-1/4/16 optical port can be a colored CWDM
optical port. A colored CWDM optical port supports a
transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km.
l A STM-4/16 optical port can be a colored DWDM optical
port. A colored DWDM optical port supports a
transmission distance of 120 km.
Packet service l One 10GE XFP optical port: 10GBASE-SR (LAN),

port 10GBASE-SW (WAN), 10GBASE-LR (LAN),
10GBASE-LW (WAN).
l A 10GE optical port can be a colored CWDM optical port
or a colored DWDM optical port. A colored CWDM
optical port supports a transmission distance of 40 km or
70 km. A colored DWDM optical port supports a
transmission distance of 40 km or 80 km.
l The following types of SFP modules are supported:
GE two-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
GE single-fiber bidirectional pluggable optical module
l The XFP module supported is a 10GE two-fiber
bidirectional pluggable optical module.

Transport Platform
Port Working mode l The GE optical port supports 1000M full-duplex and auto-
attribute negotiation.
s l The 10GE optical port supports 10G full-duplex and the
setting of LAN mode or WAN mode.
TAG attributes The TAG attribute can be set to tag aware, access, or hybrid.
Traffic control Supports the port-based traffic control function that complies
at ports with IEEE 802.3x.
Port type Supported

query
Query and Supported

setting of
optical power
thresholds
Packet E-Line l Native ETH services:

services services E-Line services based on point-to-point transparent
transmission
(VLANs)
services)
E-LAN l Native ETH services:

services E-LAN services based on IEEE 802.1d bridges

frame format
Jumbo frame Supports a jumbo frame with a maximum length of 9600

bytes.
MFL Ranges from 960 bytes to 9600 bytes, with 1620 bytes being
the default value.
SDH service functions Processes VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 services, VC-4-4c services

(supported by STM-4/STM-16 service ports), and VC-4-16c
services (supported by STM-16 service ports).
Packet Tunnel APS Supports 1:1 tunnel APS.

protectio
n PW APS/FPS Supports 1:1 PW APS/FPS.
schemes

Transport Platform
MSTP Supports MSTP that runs only Common and Internal

Spanning Tree (CIST) instances. This type of MSTP provides
the same functions as the Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol
(RSTP).
ERPS Supports ERPS that complies with ITU-T G.8032/Y.1344.
LAG l Aggregation types: manual aggregation and static

aggregation
l Load sharing modes: load sharing and non-load sharing
LPT Point-point and point-multipoint LPT.
MRPS Supported
TDM Sub-network Supports SNCP at the VC-12/VC-3/VC-4 levels.

protectio connection
n protection
schemes (SNCP)
Ring multiplex Supports ring MSP at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 levels.

section
protection
(MSP)
Linear MSP Supports linear MSP at the STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 levels.

Transport Platform
Quality of service (QoS) The packet switching unit of the UXCL works with its service
functions interface unit or a service board to implement QoS functions.
l DiffServ
Supports simple traffic classification by specifying PHB
information (C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN priorities,
DSCP values, or MPLS EXP values) carried by packets.
Supports complex traffic classification based on C-VLAN
IDs, S-VLAN IDs, C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
priorities, C-VLAN IDs + C-VLAN priorities, S-VLAN
IDs + S-VLAN priorities, or DSCP values carried by
packets, and V-UNI ingress policies.
l QoS policies
Supports port policies, port WRED policy and V-UNI
ingress policies.
l CAR
Provides the CAR function for traffic flows at ports and V-
UNI ingresses.
l Shaping
Mainten MPLS/MPLS- l Tunnel OAM and PW OAM are supported.

ance TP OAM l MPLS OAM supports connectivity verification (CV), fast
features failure detection (FFD), backward defect indication (BDI),
forward defect indication (FDI), ping, and traceroute tests
in compliance with ITU-T Y.1711.
l MPLS-TP OAM supports continuity checks (CCs), remote
defect indication (RDI), alarm indication signal (AIS)
insertion, loopback (LB) tests, linktrace (LT) tests, PW
loss measurement (LM), and two-way delay measurement
(DM) in compliance with ITU-T G.8113.1.
ETH OAM l Ethernet service OAM:

Supports CCs, LB tests, LT tests, and AIS insertion in
compliance with IEEE 802.1ag.
performance monitoring, remote loopbacks, and selfloop
checks in compliance with IEEE 802.3ah.

Transport Platform
l Warm reset and cold reset

Synchro SDH clock Transmits SDH line clock signals at one port.
nization source
Synchronous Transmits synchronous Ethernet clock signals at one port.

Ethernet
IEEE 1588v2 Transmits IEEE 1588v2 time and clock signals at one port.
NOTE
Ports working in WAN mode do not support IEEE 1588v2.
IEEE 1588 Transmits 1588 ACR clock signals at one port.

ACR NOTE
Ports working in WAN mode do not support IEEE 1588 ACR.
DCN l Each TDM port supports one embedded control channel

(ECC).
l Each GE/10GE port supports one inband DCN channel.
Internet Group Supports IGMP Snooping V1/V2/V3.

Management Protocol
(IGMP) snooping

The UXCL consists of a system control and communication unit, a packet switching unit, a
10GE signal access unit, a cross-connect unit, a line unit, a clock unit, and a power supply
unit.

Transport Platform
Figure 13-2 Function block diagram of the UXCL

Backplane
STM-1/4/16 signal Cross- TDM service

Line unit Service board
connect unit
Data
service
10GE signal 10GE signal Packet Service board
processing unit switching unit
10GE
signal
Control bus
Clock signal received

Ethernet NM port from other boards
System control and
NM serial port Clock unit
communication unit
Clock signal provided
to other boards
Clock signal Clock signal

received from provided to the
the service unit other units on
on the board the board
-48 V/-60 V
Power supplied to the other Power Fuse System power supply
units on the board supply
unit System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V power supplied to other boards
+12 V power supplied to fans
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit.
The system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l The CPU unit performs the following control functions using the control bus:
Manages other boards and the other units on the UXCL, and collects alarms and
performance events.
Implements software loading by reading information from the CF card.
l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and
enables FPGA loading.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit
Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services

Transport Platform
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l The system control and communication unit on a UXCL board communicates with the
system control and communication unit on the standby UXCL board by carrying FE
signals over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, the active and
standby UXCL boards form a 1+1 hot backup relationship.
Packet Switching Unit

The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services.
l After receiving Ethernet services from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit
grooms the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are delivered by the
system control and communication unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit
transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for
processing. After processing, the system control and communication unit sends the
protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits
the protocol packets to the Ethernet board.
Cross-Connect Unit
The cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order cross-
connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 13-3 shows the function
block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 13-3 Function block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM Higher Sink TDM

service unit order cross- service unit
connect
module
HOXC
Lower order
cross-
connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect
module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order
cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink
TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order
cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect
module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and
then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order

Transport Platform
cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM
service unit.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from service clock sources at service
ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked
loop, the clock unit provides the system clock to other units on the UXCL and other
boards.
10GE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time
synchronization.
l The clock units on the active and standby UXCL boards transmit clock signals to each
other.
10GE Signal Processing Unit

The 10GE signal processing unit receives/transmits and processes 1x10GE optical signals.
l In the receive direction:
After performing optical-to-electrical (O/E) conversion, restructuring, decoding,
and serial/parallel conversion for 10GE optical signals, the 10GE signal processing
unit extracts framed 10GE signals by delimiting frames and adding preambles. The
10GE signal processing unit also performs cyclic redundancy checks (CRCs).
The 10GE signal processing unit works with the packet switching unit to process
VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames, process labels in Multiprotocol Label
Switching (MPLS) or pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge (PWE3) packets,
perform quality of service (QoS) processing such as traffic classification and
committed access rate (CAR) restriction for Ethernet data frames, and process
operation, administration and maintenance (OAM) packets and protocol packets.
l In the transmit direction:
The 10GE signal processing unit works with the packet switching unit to process
VLAN tags in Ethernet data frames, process labels in MPLS or PWE3 packets,
perform QoS processing such as traffic shaping and queue scheduling for Ethernet
data frames, and process OAM packets and protocol packets.
After delimiting frames, adding preambles, and calculating CRC codes, the 10GE
signal processing unit performs parallel/serial conversion and encoding and then
transmits 10GE signals to the 10GE optical port after performing electrical-to-
optical (E/O) conversion.
Line Unit
The line unit performs the following functions: STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 signal receiving,
serial/parallel conversion, clock signal extraction, data restoration, overhead processing, alarm
monitoring/reporting, signal inloops/outloops, MSP, and ALS functions.
Power Supply Unit

l Combines two -48 V/-60 V DC power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the
power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board.

Transport Platform
l Combines two -48 V/-60 V power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the
+3.3 V power supply required by other boards.
+12 V power supply required by fans.
13.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, buttons, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 13-4 shows the front panel of UXCL finished board.
Figure 13-4 Front panel of UXCL finished board

UXC
CLASS1
LASER
PROG
SYNC
STAT
PRODUCT
SRV
LOS
ACT
L/A
RST
TX1/ RX1 TX2/RX2 NMS 1/COM EXT
NOTE
The silkscreen on the front panel of the UXCL board is "UXC".
Indicators
The front panel of the UXCL has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, ACT,
LOS, and L/A. For status explanation for the indicators, see 22.2 Board Indicators.
Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports
Table 13-4 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports
Port Descript Connector Type Pin Assignment Required
ion Cable
NMS/ Ethernet l Pin 1: transmitting data (+) 17.3

COM NM l Pin 2: transmitting data (-) Managemen
RJ45
port/NM t Cables
serial port l Pin 3: receiving data (+)
87 65 4 32 1
l Pin 4: grounding end of the
NM serial port
l Pin 5: receive end of the
For status
NM serial port
explanation for the
indicators of an l Pin 6: receiving data (-)
RJ45 port, see l Pin 7: not defined
Table 13-5.
l Pin 8: transmit end of the
NM serial port
EXT Reserved - - -

Transport Platform


properly.

data.

transmitting data.
Service Ports
Table 13-6 Description of the service ports on the UXCL

Boar Port Descr Connector Type Pin Required
d iption Assignment Cable
UXC TX/R 10GE l 10GE optical port: l TX represents 17.1.2

L X optical LC XFP optical the transmit Connectors
port module port.
STM- l STM-1/4/16 optical l RX represents

1/4/16 port: LC SFP optical the receive
optical module port.
port, TX RX
STM-
1
electri l STM-1 electrical
cal port: SFP electrical
port module
TX RX
Buttons
Table 13-7 Buttons

Button Name Description
RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warm

reset is performed on the board.

Transport Platform
Labels
13.1.6 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
CF Card
Software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. To synchronize the NE logs on the
UXCL board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the UXCL board during package
diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize
software packages on the UXCL board and the CF card. If the active system control, switching, and timing
board and the CF card have different software packages, the associated NE reports an
SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm if it restarts after a power failure.
Positions of the DIP Switches and CF Card
1
2
ON DIP
3
1 2 3 4
1. DIP switches 2. CF card 3. Daughter board

Transport Platform
Meanings of DIP Switch Settings

Setting of DIP Switchesa Meaning
4 3 2 1
0 0 0 0 Indicates that
the board works
with the
watchdog
enabled.
0 0 0 1 The value is
reserved.
the board is
being
debugged.
the board is
being
debugged.
the board works
with the
watchdog
disabled and a
full memory
check is
running.
0 1 0 1 Indicates the
BIOS holdover
state.
BIOS
exhibition state.
reserved. (By
default, this
value indicates
that the board
works with the
watchdog
enabled.)

Transport Platform
4 3 2 1
reserved. (By
default, this
value indicates
that the board
works with the
watchdog
enabled.)
reserved.
1 0 1 0 Erases data
stored in the
system
parameter area
of the flash
memory.
1 0 1 1 Erases the
database stored
in the flash
memory.
1 1 0 0 Erases the NE
software
(including
patches) stored
in the flash
memory.
1 1 0 1 Erases the
database and
NE software
(including
patches) stored
in the flash
memory.
1 1 1 0 Formats the
flash file
system to erase
all data stored
in the file
system.

Transport Platform
4 3 2 1
1 1 1 1 Erases all the

data except for
the board
manufacturing
information and
basic BIOS
data. That is, all
data stored in
the flash file
system,
extended BIOS
area, and
system
parameter area
of the flash
memory is
erased.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
NOTICE
After the board completes the operation specified by setting the BIOS DIP switch to a specific
value, clear the DIP switch setting (that is, set the DIP switch to binary value 0000) before
restarting the board; otherwise, the board cannot enter the normal running state.
13.1.7 Valid Slots

The UXCL can be inserted in slot 7 (preferred) or slot 8 in the chassis.
Figure 13-5 shows the mapping between physical slots and their logical slots. Physical slot 7
has the following logical slots on the NMS: slot 7, slot 9, slot 81, slot 83, and slot 85; physical
slot 8 has the following logical slots on the NMS: slot 8, slot 10, slot 82, slot 84, and slot 86.
Figure 13-5 Logical slots for a UXCL board
Slot Slot 817

SLOT Slot 85 Slot 82 Slot 86
Slot 7 Slot 9 Slot 83 Slot 8 SLOT
Slot 108 (CST/CSH) Slot 84
91 (SCC)
(CST/CSH) (STG) (SCC) (STG)
10
(PIU SLO
Slot SLOT 5 SLOT
Slot 6
6
(PIU) 93T Slot 5
) 11 (EXT) (EXT)
Slot (FAN) Slot 3 Slot 4
T ) (EXT) (EXT)
9
92 SLOT 1 SLOT 2
(PIU) Slot 1 )
(EXT Slot 2
(EXT
)

Transport Platform
Table 13-8 provides the mapping between manufactured boards and their logical boards.
Table 13-8 Mapping between manufactured boards and their logical boards
Manufact Logical Logical Logical Logical Slot Logical Slot
ured Slot 7/8 Slot 9/10 Slot 81/82 83/84 85/86
Board
UXCL SL16S/ PEX1 SCC PUXC STG

SL4S/SL1S
13.1.8 Feature Code

indicates the type of optical port. UXCL boards have feature codes.
Table 13-9 Feature codes of the UXCL

Feature Code Port Type
TNF1UXCL1601 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-16 (ESFP, L-16.1, LC)
TNF1UXCL401 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-4 (ESFP, S-4.1, LC)
TNF1UXCL101 1x10GE (XFP)/1xSTM-1 (ESFP, L-1.1, LC)
13.1.9 UXCL Specifications

Table 13-10 lists the technical specifications of the UXCL.
Table 13-10 Technical specifications of the UXCL

Item Performance
Auxiliar NMS/C Ethernet NM port/NM Not involved

y ports OM serial port/UPM
and monitoring port
manage
ment EXT Reserved Not involved
ports
Service TX/RX 10GE optical port See Table 13-11, Table 13-17, Table
ports 13-18.

Transport Platform
Item Performance
TX/RX STM-1/4/16 optical port See Table 13-12, Table 13-13, Table
13-14, Table 13-15, Table 13-16,
Table 13-19, Table 13-20, Table
13-21, and Table 13-22.

x D)
Weight 0.80 kg
Power consumption 45 W
Table 13-11 Specifications of the OptiX OSN's 10GE optical ports

Item Value
Optical port type 10GBASE-SR (LAN)/ 10GBASE-LR (LAN)/

10GBASE-SW (WAN) 10GBASE-LW (WAN)
Optical fiber type Multi-mode LC Single-mode LC
Transmission distance 0.3 10

(km)
Operating wavelength 840 to 860 1260 to 1330

(nm)
Mean launched power -1.3 to -7.3 -6 to -1

(dBm)
Receiver minimum -7.5 -11

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum overload -1 0.5

(dBm)
Minimum extinction 3 6
ratio (dB)

Item Value
Code pattern CMI

Transport Platform
Item Value

input port
Table 13-13 Specifications of the OptiX OSN's STM-1 optical ports

Item Value
Optical port type S-1.1
Operating wavelength range (nm) 1261 to 1360
Optical fiber type Single-mode LC
Launched optical power range (dBm) -15 to -8
Receiver sensitivity (dBm) -28
Minimum extinction ratio (dB) 8.2

NOTE
Table 13-14 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN's STM-1 optical ports
Parameter Value
(km)

wavelength (nm)

Transport Platform
Parameter Value

wavelength (nm)

range (dBm)

(dBm)

(dBm)

ratio (dB)

Item Value
Launched optical power range (dBm) -15 to -8

NOTE
Table 13-16 Specifications for the single-fiber bidirectional optical interfaces of the OptiX
OSN's STM-4 optical ports
Paramete Value
r
Nominal 622080 kbit/s

bit rate

Transport Platform
Paramete Value
r
Line code NRZ

pattern
Type of S-4.1 L-4.1

optical
interface
Transmiss 15 40
ion
distance
(km)

fiber
Operating 1490 1310 1490 1310

transmit
wavelengt
h (nm)
Operating 1310 1490 1310 1490

receive
wavelengt
h (nm)
optical
power
range
(dBm)
Receiver -19.5 -23

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -3
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 9 9
extinction
ratio (dB)
Table 13-17 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit l LAN mode: 10,312,500 kbit/s

rate l WAN mode: 9,953,280 kbit/s

Transport Platform
Parameter Value
CWDM
Transmission 40 70
distance (km)
optical power
range (dBm)
Operating 1471 to 1611, in steps of 20 1471 to 1611, in steps of 20

wavelength
range (nm)
Receiver -19 l 1451 nm to 1551 nm: -23

sensitivity l 1571 nm: -22
(dBm)
l 1591 nm to 1611 nm: -21
Minimum -3 -9
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
(dB)
Table 13-18 Parameters specified for colored 10GE optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM

Transmission 40 80
distance (km)
Launched optical -1 to +2 -1 to +3
power range
(dBm)
Central frequency 192.1 to 196.0 192.1 to 196.0

(THz)
Central frequency 10 10
deviation (GHz)

Transport Platform
Parameter Value
DWDM
Receiver -17 -24

sensitivity (dBm)
Minimum -1 -9
overload (dBm)
Minimum 9.5 8.2

extinction ratio
(dB)
Table 13-19 Parameters specified for colored STM-1/STM-4/STM-16 optical ports (CWDM)
Parameter Value
CWDM
Nominal bit 155,520 kbit/s (STM-1), 622,080 kbit/s (STM-4), 2,488,320 kbit/s
rate (STM-16)
Transmission 40 80
distance (km)
optical power
range (dBm)

wavelength 20
range (nm)
Receiver -19 -28

sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -3 -9
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 8.2 8.2

extinction ratio
(dB)

Transport Platform
Table 13-20 Parameters specified for colored STM-16 optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM
Nominal bit rate 2,488,320 kbit/s
Transmission distance 120

(km)
Launched optical power -1 to +3

range (dBm)
Central frequency (THz) 192.1 to 196.0
Central frequency 10
deviation (GHz)
Receiver sensitivity -28

(dBm)
Minimum overload -9
(dBm)
Minimum extinction ratio 8.2

(dB)
Table 13-21 Parameters specified for colored STM-4 optical ports (DWDM)
Parameter Value
DWDM
Nominal bit 622080 kbit/s

rate
Transmission 120
distance (km)
Launched -1 to 3
optical power
range (dBm)
Central 192.10 to 196.00

frequency
(THz)
Central 10
frequency
deviation
(GHz)

Transport Platform
Parameter Value
DWDM
Receiver -28
sensitivity
(dBm)
Minimum -9
overload
(dBm)
Minimum 8.2
extinction ratio
(dB)

Item Value
Launched optical power range (dBm) -5 to 0
Minimum overload (dBm) 0

NOTE
Explanation for optical port type "S-16.1" is as follows: "S" represents short distance; the first two digits
"16" represent STM-16 signals; the third digit "1" represents ITU-T G.652 fibers (1310 nm).
13.2 UXC
The UXC is a system control, cross-connect, and timing board.

The functional version of the UXC is TNF1.

Transport Platform
Version
Table 13-23 describes the version mapping of the UXC board.
Table 13-23 Version description of the UXC

Item Description

13.2.2 Application
The UXC provides service processing, service grooming, clock input/output, and
communication control functions in the OptiX OSN system.
The UXC provides the timing information to the other boards in the system, processes the
SDH signals, switches packets, grooms services between line boards or tributary boards,
communicates with the other boards in the system, and performs the configuration and
management functions for the other boards in the system.
Figure 13-6 shows the position of the UXC in the system.
Figure 13-6 Position of the UXC in the system

Line/Tributary Packet data
SDH/PDH Packet data
service
Clock unit
Auxillary
Higher Auxillary interface
order/Lower SCC Packet data unit
order cross- board processing unit
connect unit
-48 V/-60 V
PIU
SDH
processing
unit UXC

This section describes the functions and features that the UXC supports.
System Control, Switching, and Timing Unit

Table 13-24 lists the functions and features that the system control, switching, and timing unit
of the UXC supports.

Transport Platform
Table 13-24 Functions and features that the system control, switching, and timing unit of the
UXC supports
Basic Packet l The UXCLX supports 60 Gbit/s packet switching

function switching function.
s capability
Time division A higher order cross-connect capacity of 20 Gbit/s and a

multiplexing lower order cross-connect capacity of 5 Gbit/s
(TDM) cross-
connect
capacity
System control and l Manages and controls the running status of an NE.
communication l Works as a communication service unit between the
network management system (NMS) and boards to help
the NMS to control and manage the NE.
Equipment-level l 1+1 hot standby

protection
Synchro Clock source The traced clock source at the physical layer can be any of the
nization following:
l External clock
l Synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) line clock
l Plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) tributary clock
l Synchronous Ethernet clock
l Internal clock source
The traced packet clock source can be any of the following:
l External time
l IEEE 1588v2 clock and time
l IEEE 1588 adaptive clock recovery (ACR) clock
Clock protocol l Standard Synchronization Status Message (SSM) protocol

l Extended SSM protocol
l Best master clock (BMC) protocol
Data Outband DCN 38 data communications channels (DCCs) that are composed
commun of D1-D3 bytes
ication
network Inband DCN l Supports the inband DCN function. The DCN bandwidth
(DCN) is configurable.
ESC function Supported

Transport Platform
Network Huawei Supported by outband and inband DCNs

manage Embedded
ment Control
protocol Channel
(HWECC)
protocol
IP Supported by outband and inband DCNs
Open systems Supported only by outband DCNs

interconnectio
n (OSI) over
DCC protocol
Simple Supported
Network
Management
Protocol
(SNMP)
Auxiliary and Provides one 10M/100M Ethernet NMS port or NMS serial
management ports port.

The UXC consists of a system control and communication unit, a packet switching unit, a
TDM cross-connect unit, a clock unit, and a power supply unit.

Transport Platform
Figure 13-7 Function block diagram of the UXC

Backplane
TDM cross- TDM service

Service board
connect unit
Data
service
Packet Service board
switching unit
Control bus
Clock signal received

Ethernet NM port from other boards
System control and
NM serial port Clock unit
communication unit
Clock signal provided
to other boards
Clock signal Clock signal

received from provided to the
the service unit other units on
on the board the board
-48 V/-60 V
Power supplied to the other Power Fuse System power supply
units on the board supply
unit System power supply
-48 V/-60 V
+3.3 V power supplied to other boards
+12 V power supplied to fans
System Control and Communication Unit

The system control and communication unit consists of the CPU unit and logic control unit.
The system control and communication unit performs the following functions:
l The CPU unit performs the following control functions using the control bus:
Manages other boards and the other units on the UXC, and collects alarms and
performance events.
Implements software loading by reading information from the CF card.
l The CPU unit processes network management messages in DCCs using the logic control
unit.
l The CPU unit communicates with the NMS by its Ethernet NM port.
l The logic control unit decodes the address read/write signals from the CPU unit and
enables FPGA loading.
l The logic control unit cross-connects the overheads between the auxiliary interface unit,
the CPU unit, and other boards. This helps to achieve the following purposes:

Transport Platform
Adding or dropping DCC information processed by the CPU unit

Adding or dropping orderwire and synchronous/asynchronous data services
Exchanging the orderwire bytes, DCC bytes, and K bytes between different lines
l The system control and communication unit on a UXC board communicates with the
system control and communication unit on the standby UXC board by carrying FE
signals over the communication bus in the backplane. In this manner, the active and
standby UXC boards form a 1+1 hot backup relationship.
Packet Switching Unit

The packet switching unit grooms services and processes protocols for Ethernet services.
l After receiving Ethernet services from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit
grooms the Ethernet services based on the configurations that are delivered by the
system control and communication unit.
l After receiving protocol packets from an Ethernet board, the packet switching unit
transmits the protocol packets to the system control and communication unit for
processing. After processing, the system control and communication unit sends the
protocol packets back to the packet switching unit. The packet switching unit transmits
the protocol packets to the Ethernet board.
TDM Cross-Connect Unit

The TDM cross-connect unit grooms services over the entire system using the higher order
cross-connect module and the lower order cross-connect module. Figure 13-8 shows the
function block diagram of the cross-connect unit.
Figure 13-8 Function block diagram of the cross-connect unit
Source TDM Higher Sink TDM

service unit order cross- service unit
connect
module
HOXC
Lower order
cross-
connect
module
LOXC
The source TDM service unit transmits VC-4 signals to the higher order cross-connect
module over VC-4 buses. If the VC-4 signals carry only VC-4 services, the higher order
cross-connect module processes the VC-4 signals and then transmits the signals to the sink
TDM service unit. If the VC-4 signals include VC-12 or VC-3 services, the higher order
cross-connect module grooms the VC-12 or VC-3 services to the lower order cross-connect

Transport Platform
module. The lower order cross-connect module processes the VC-12 or VC-3 services and
then transmits the services back to the higher order cross-connect module. The higher order
cross-connect module processes the services and then transmits the services to the sink TDM
service unit.
Clock Unit
l The clock unit selects an appropriate clock source from service clock sources at service
ports based on clock priorities. Locking the clock source by means of the phase-locked
loop, the clock unit provides the system clock to other units on the UXC and other
boards.
10GE signal access unit, and performs protocol processing to achieve clock/time
synchronization.
l The clock units on the active and standby UXC boards transmit clock signals to each
other.
Power Supply Unit

power supply required by the chips of the other units on the local board.
l Combines two -48 V/-60 V power supplies, and converts the supplied power into the
+3.3 V power supply required by other boards.
+12 V power supply required by fans.
13.2.5 Front Panel

There are indicators, ports, buttons, and labels on the front panel.
Front Panel Diagram

Figure 13-9 shows the front panel of UXC finished board.
Figure 13-9 Front panel of UXC finished board

UXC
PROG
SYNC
STAT
SRV
LOS
ACT
L/A
RST
NMS 1/COM EXT
Indicators
The front panel of the UXC has the following indicators: STAT, PROG, SYNC, SRV, ACT,
LOS, and L/A. For status explanation for the indicators, see 22.2 Board Indicators.

Transport Platform
Clock Ports, Auxiliary Ports, and Management Ports
Table 13-25 Description of the clock ports, auxiliary ports, and management ports
Port Descript Connector Type Pin Assignment Required
ion Cable
NMS/ Ethernet l Pin 1: transmitting data (+) 17.3

COM NM l Pin 2: transmitting data (-) Managemen
RJ45
port/NM t Cables
serial port l Pin 3: receiving data (+)
87 65 4 32 1
l Pin 4: grounding end of the
NM serial port
l Pin 5: receive end of the
For status
NM serial port
explanation for the
indicators of an l Pin 6: receiving data (-)
RJ45 port, see l Pin 7: not defined
Table 13-26.
l Pin 8: transmit end of the
NM serial port
EXT Reserved - - -


properly.

data.

transmitting data.
Buttons
Table 13-27 Buttons

Button Name Description
RST Warm reset button After this button is pressed, a warm

reset is performed on the board.

Transport Platform
13.2.6 DIP Switches and CF Card

This board has a set of DIP switches and a pluggable CF card.
CF Card
Software packages, and NE logs are stored on the CF card. To synchronize the NE logs on the
UXC board to the CF card, enable the regular backup function.
NOTE
The software packages on the CF card are synchronized with those on the UXC board during package
diffusion. Therefore, automatic backup mechanisms or manual operations are not needed to synchronize
software packages on the UXC board and the CF card. If the active system control, switching, and timing
board and the CF card have different software packages, the associated NE reports an
SWDL_CHGMNG_NOMATCH alarm if it restarts after a power failure.
Positions of the DIP Switches and CF Card
1
2
ON DIP
3
1 2 3 4
1. DIP switches 2. CF card 3. Daughter board
Meanings of DIP Switch Settings

4 3 2 1
the board works
with the
watchdog
enabled.
reserved.

Transport Platform
4 3 2 1
the board is
being
debugged.
the board is
being
debugged.
the board works
with the
watchdog
disabled and a
full memory
check is
running.
BIOS holdover
state.
BIOS
exhibition state.
reserved. (By
default, this
value indicates
that the board
works with the
watchdog
enabled.)
reserved. (By
default, this
value indicates
that the board
works with the
watchdog
enabled.)
reserved.

Transport Platform
4 3 2 1
1 0 1 0 Erases data
stored in the
system
parameter area
of the flash
memory.
1 0 1 1 Erases the
database stored
in the flash
memory.
1 1 0 0 Erases the NE
software
(including
patches) stored
in the flash
memory.
1 1 0 1 Erases the
database and
NE software
(including
patches) stored
in the flash
memory.
1 1 1 0 Formats the
flash file
system to erase
all data stored
in the file
system.

Transport Platform
4 3 2 1
1 1 1 1 Erases all the

data except for
the board
manufacturing
information and
basic BIOS
data. That is, all
data stored in
the flash file
system,
extended BIOS
area, and
system
parameter area
of the flash
memory is
erased.
NOTE
a: When a DIP switch is set to the side with the numbers "1, 2, 3, 4", it represents binary digit 1. When a
DIP switch is set to the side with the letters "ON DIP", it represents binary digit 0.
NOTICE
After the board completes the operation specified by setting the BIOS DIP switch to a specific
value, clear the DIP switch setting (that is, set the DIP switch to binary value 0000) before
restarting the board; otherwise, the board cannot enter the normal running state.
13.2.7 Valid Slots

The UXC can be inserted in slot 7 (preferred) or slot 8 in the chassis.
Figure 13-10 shows the mapping between physical slots and their logical slots. Physical slot 7
has the following logical slots on the NMS: slot 81, slot 83, and slot 85; physical slot 8 has
the following logical slots on the NMS: slot 82, slot 84, and slot 86.
Figure 13-10 Logical slots for a UXC board
Slot Slot 817

SLOT Slot 85 Slot 82 Slot 86
Slot 7 Slot 9 Slot 83 Slot 8 SLOT
Slot 108 (CST/CSH) Slot 84
91 (SCC)
(CST/CSH) (STG) (SCC) (STG)
10
(PIU SLO
Slot SLOT 5 SLOT
Slot 6
6
(PIU) 93T Slot 5
) 11 (EXT) (EXT)
Slot (FAN) Slot 3 Slot 4
T ) (EXT) (EXT)
9
92 SLOT 1 SLOT 2
(PIU) Slot 1 )
(EXT Slot 2
(EXT
)

Transport Platform
Table 13-28 provides the mapping between manufactured boards and their logical boards.
Table 13-28 Mapping between manufactured boards and their logical boards
Manufact Logical Logical Logical Logical Slot Logical Slot
ured Slot 7/8 Slot 9/10 Slot 81/82 83/84 85/86
Board
UXC - - SCC PUXC STG
13.2.8 Feature Code

The UXC does not have a feature code.
13.2.9 UXC Specifications

Table 13-29 lists the technical specifications of the UXC.
Table 13-29 Technical specifications of the UXC

Item Performance
Auxiliar NMS/C Ethernet NM port/NM Not involved

y ports OM serial port/UPM
and monitoring port
manage
ment EXT Reserved Not involved
ports

x D)
Weight 0.65 kg

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 14 Optical Supervisory Channel Board
14 Optical Supervisory Channel Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical supervisory channel boards.
14.1 ST2
ST2: Bidirectional Optical Supervisory Channel and Timing Transmission Unit

Transport Platform
14.1 ST2
ST2: Bidirectional Optical Supervisory Channel and Timing Transmission Unit

The available hardware version for the ST2 is TNF1.
Version
Table 14-1 describes the version mapping of the ST2 board.
Table 14-1 Version description of the ST2
Item Description

14.1.2 Application
The ST2 board transmits IEEE 1588v2 or physical-layer clock signals.
For the position of the ST2 board in the WDM system, see Figure 14-1.
Figure 14-1 Position of the ST2 board in the WDM system
LINE1 SYS1 SYS1 LINE1

OA
D D
OSC2 RM2 TM1 OSC2
S S
ST2
F OSC1 TM2 RM1 OSC1 F
I I
U U
LINE2 SYS2 SYS2 LINE2
OA
NOTE
Ports OSC1 and OSC2 on a DSFIU board work with ports TM1/TM2 and RM1/RM2 on an ST2 board
to transmit IEEE 1588v2 protocol packets.

Transport Platform

The ST2 board supports IEEE 1588v2, physical-layer clock, and other functions and features.
For detailed functions and features, refer to Table 14-2.
Table 14-2 Functions and features of the ST2 board

Feature
Basic function Supports the receipt, transmission, and processing of IEEE 1588v2
signals.
Supports physical clock function.
Supports a maximum of 40 dB transmission.
Operating When the ST2 board works with the DSFIU board, the signal
wavelength wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM1/TM1 is 1511 nm, and
the signal wavelengths of supervisory channel for RM2/TM2 is
1491 nm.
Loopback Supports outloops.

The ST2 board consists of the transmit optical module, IEEE 1588v2 module, receive optical
module, control and communication module, and power supply module.
Figure 14-2 is the functional block diagram of the ST2 board.

Transport Platform
Figure 14-2 Functional block diagram of the ST2 board
RM1 O/E E/O TM1
IEEE 1588v2
module
RM2 O/E E/O TM2
Optical Optical
receiving transmitting
module module
Control
Communication
Control and communication module
Power supply Required
module Voltage
Fuse
Backplane
System control board
DC power supply
from a backplane
Signal Flow
The O/E module converts clock signals from the DSFIU board into electrical signals, and
transmits them to the IEEE 1588v2 module. The IEEE 1588v2 module extracts clock or time
information from the electrical signals and transmits it to the clock unit of the SCC board.
Then, the E/O module receives clock or time information processed by the clock unit, and
converts the information into optical signals.
Module Function
l Receive optical module
Performs O/E conversion of two-channel OSC signals.
l Transmit optical module
Performs E/O conversion of two-channel electrical supervisory channel (ESC) signals.
l IEEE 1588v2 module
Sends the clock signal of the STG board to the next NE according to the IEEE 1588v2
protocol, or extracts the clock signal from the optical supervisory signals according to
the IEEE 1588v2 protocol and then sends the clock signal to the STG board.
l Control and communication module
Controls the entire board.

Transport Platform
Collects alarms and performance events, working status, and voltage detection
information of each module on the board.
Communicates with the system control and communication board.
l Power module
Converts the DC power supplied by the chassis into the power required by each module
on the board.
14.1.5 Front Panel

There are indicators and interfaces on the front panel of the ST2 board.

Figure 14-3 shows the front panel of the ST2 board.
Figure 14-3 Front panel of the ST2 board

STAT IN1
ST2
SRV IN2
TM1 RM1 TM2 RM2
WSC1 WSC2
Indicators
Interfaces
Table 14-3 Types and functions of the interfaces on the ST2 board
Interface Type Function
TM1/TM2 LC Transmits the first/second IEEE 1588v2 signal.
RM1/RM2 LC Receives the first/second IEEE 1588v2 signal.
WSC1/WSC2 RJ45 Reserved
Laser Hazard Level


Transport Platform
14.1.6 Valid Slots

The ST2 occupies one slot.

14.1.7 Feature Code

None.

This topic describes the interface information on the U2000.
Display of Optical Interfaces

The serial numbers of the optical interfaces on the front panel of the board displayed on the
NM are listed in Table 14-4.
Table 14-4 Serial numbers of the interfaces of the ST2 board displayed on the NM
Interface on the Panel Interface on the NM
RM1/TM1 1
RM2/TM2 2
14.1.9 ST2 Parameters
Optical Interface/Channel - Displays the position of the

optical interface.
Optical Interface Name - Sets and queries the Optical

Interface Name.
Optical Interface Loopback Non-Loopback, Outloop Specifies the loopback mode

Default: Non-Loopback for the optical interface on a
board.
Laser Status Off, On The Laser Status parameter

Default: On sets the laser status of a
board.

Transport Platform
DEG Threshold 0 to 10167 Sets signal deterioration

Default: 190 thresholds. An alarm is
reported when error codes
detected in DEG Monitoring
Time(s) are more than the
value of this parameter.
DEG Monitoring Time(s) 2 to 10 Sets the signal monitoring

Default: 7 time. If the number of bit
errors in the signal exceeds
DEG Threshold during this
time, an alarm is reported.
Actual Band Type/Actual - Only can be queried.

Wavelength No./Add-Drop
Wavelength(nm)/
Frequency(THz)
Actual Band Type - Only can be queried.
14.1.10 ST2 Specifications

Specifications include optical specifications, dimensions, weight, and power consumption.
Table 14-5 lists the optical specifications of the ST2 board whose optical ports are used to
transmit OSC signals.
Table 14-5 Optical specifications of the ST2 board

Item Unit Value
150 km 80 km OSC 40 km OSC 15 km OSC

OSC Module Module Module
Module
Signal rate Mbit/s 155.52 155.52 155.52 155.52
Target distance - 150 km 80 km 40 km 15 km
Operating nm 1504.5 to 1504.5 to 1263 to 1360 1261 to 1360

wavelength 1517.5 1517.5
range 1484.5 to 1484.5 to
1497.5 1497.5
Launched dBm 0.5 to 5 -4 to 1 -5 to 0 -15 to -8

optical power

Transport Platform
Item Unit Value
150 km 80 km OSC 40 km OSC 15 km OSC

OSC Module Module Module
Module
Receiver dBm -41 -34 -34 -28

sensitivity
Receiver dBm -10 -10 -10 -8

overload
Table 14-6 lists the specifications of optical modules when standard DWDM wavelengths are
used.

Value

ratio
Receiver type - APD

Transport Platform
Table 14-7 lists the specifications of optical modules when standard CWDM wavelengths are
used.
Table 14-7 Specifications of 2.5G-1600ps/nm-fixed-APD-eSFP, 2.5G-800ps/nm-fixed-PIN-

eSFP, 155M-1600ps/nm-fixed-APD-eSFP and 155M-3000ps/nm-fixed-APD-eSFP optical
modules
Value
2.5G-1600ps 2.5G-800ps/ 155M-1600p 155M-3000p

Un /nm-fixed- nm-fixed- s/nm-fixed- s/nm-fixed-
Item it APD-eSFP PIN-eSFP APD-eSFP APD-eSFP
Maximum - 8 8 1 1
wavelength count
Line code format - NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZ
Maximum mean dB 5 5 1 5
launched power m
Minimum mean dB 0 0 -4 0
launched power m
Minimum dB 10 8.2 9 10
extinction ratio
Central nm 1471 to 1611 1471 to 1611 1511 1511

wavelength
Central nm 6.5 6.5 6.5 6.5

wavelength
deviation
Maximum -20 dB nm 1 1 N/A N/A

spectral width
Minimum side dB 30 30 30 30
mode suppression
ratio
Dispersion ps/ 1600 800 1600 3000

tolerance nm
Receiver type - APD PIN APD APD

Transport Platform
Value
2.5G-1600ps 2.5G-800ps/ 155M-1600p 155M-3000p

Un /nm-fixed- nm-fixed- s/nm-fixed- s/nm-fixed-
Item it APD-eSFP PIN-eSFP APD-eSFP APD-eSFP

wavelength range
Receiver dB -28 -19 -34 -41

sensitivity m
Minimum dB -9 -3 -10 -10

receiver overload m
Maximum dB -27 -27 N/A N/A

reflectance
in. x 8.2 in.)
Power Consumption
ST2 9 10.5

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 15 Auxiliary Board
15 Auxiliary Board
About This Chapter
The OptiX OSN supports the auxiliary boards AUX.
15.1 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary interface board that provides one orderwire phone port, one 64 kbit/s
synchronous transparent data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, and
alarm input/output ports.

Transport Platform
15.1 AUX
The AUX is an auxiliary interface board that provides one orderwire phone port, one 64 kbit/s
synchronous transparent data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, and
alarm input/output ports.

The functional version of the AUX is TNF1.
Version
Table 15-1 describes the version mapping of the AUX board.
Table 15-1 Version description of the AUX board
Item Description

version or later.

The AUX provides one orderwire phone port, one external clock port, one 64 kbit/s
synchronous data port or one 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous transparent data port, and one outdoor
cabinet monitoring port.
Table 15-2 lists the functions and features that the AUX supports.
Table 15-2 Functions and features that the AUX supports
Synchronous/Asynchronous transparent Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous

data port transparent data port or 19.2 kbit/s
asynchronous transparent data port.
External clock port Provides two BITS clock input ports which
also output same-source clock signals. The
port impedance is 120 ohms.
External time port Provides two external time input/output

ports.
Alarm input/output ports Provides alarm ports with six inputs and two
outputs.

Transport Platform
Outdoor cabinet monitoring port Provides one outdoor cabinet monitoring

port (sharing one port physically with an
alarm input/output port) for monitoring the
temperature and humidity of an outdoor
cabinet.
Orderwire phone port Provides one orderwire phone port so that

operation/maintenance engineers at different
workstations can have voice communication
with each other.

This section describes the working principle and signal flow of the AUX.
Figure 15-1 Functional block diagram of the AUX

Backplane
Synchronous/Asynchronous Power +3.3 V

transparent data port supply unit
Orderwire phone port Power dip detection signal
6-input/2-output alarm ports Orderwire

System bus
unit Logic System control and
Two-channel external clock/time port control unit communication unit
Outdoor cabinet monitoring port
Clock unit Clock Board status System control and

signal detection unit communication unit
Power Supply Unit

l Receives the +3.3 V power supply from the backplane and supplies it to the other units
on the AUX.
l Receives and shuts down control signals.
Orderwire Unit
l Provides one 64 kbit/s synchronous transparent data port or 19.2 kbit/s asynchronous
transparent data port.
l Provides one orderwire phone port.
l Provides 6-input/2-output alarm ports.

Transport Platform
l Provides one outdoor cabinet monitoring port.

l Provides one two-channel external clock/time port.
Logic Control Unit

l Provides an interface with the CPU unit and works with the CPU unit to control the
board.
l Processes orderwire bytes and overhead bytes.
l Processes clock signals.
l Provides board status information.
l Checks the status of the active and standby system control, switching, and timing boards.
l Checks the status of the active and standby clocks.
l Switches system clock reference sources automatically or by running specific
commands.
l Detects and reports the status of the key clock for each board in the system.
l Detects the presence of the key clock for each board in the system and reports specific
alarms if any key clock is found lost.
Board Status Detection Unit

l Detects board performance data such as board temperature and voltage.
l Controls power shut-down.
l Stores and reads board manufacturing information.
Clock Unit
l Provides clock signals to the logic control unit.
15.1.4 Front Panel

Front Panel Diagram

AUX
STAT
SRV
F1/S1 PHONE ALMO ALMI ALMI2/EXT SYNC TOD0 TOD1
Indicators
The front panel of the AUX has the following indicators: STAT and SRV. For status

Transport Platform
Ports
Table 15-3 Description of the ports on the AUX

Por Descript Connector Type Pin Assignment Required
t ion Cable
F1/ 64 kbit/s RJ45 l Pin 1: transmitting 17.3

S1 synchrono asynchronous data signals Management
us l Pin 2: grounding end Cables
transparen 87 65 4 32 1
t data port l Pin 3: receiving

or 19.2 asynchronous data signals
For status
kbit/s explanation for the l Pin 4: transmitting
asynchron indicators of an synchronous data signals (+)
ous RJ45 port, see l Pin 5: transmitting
transparen Table 15-4. synchronous data signals (-)
t data port
l Pin 6: grounding end
l Pin 7: receiving synchronous
data signals (+)
l Pin 8: receiving synchronous
data signals (-)
PH Orderwire l Pin 1: not defined

ON phone l Pin 2: not defined
E port
l Pin 3: not defined
l Pin 4: orderwire call signal
(ring)
l Pin 5: orderwire call signal
(tip)

Transport Platform

t ion Cable
AL Alarm l Pin 1: the first external alarm

MO output output signal (+)
port l Pin 2: the first external alarm
output signal (-)
l Pin 3: the second external
alarm output signal (+)
l Pin 4: the first external alarm
output signal (+)
l Pin 5: the first external alarm
output signal (-)
alarm output signal (-)
alarm output signal (+)
alarm output signal (-)
AL Alarm l Pin 1: the first external alarm

MI1 input port input signal
1 (four l Pin 2: grounding end for the
inputs) first alarm input signal
alarm input signal
l Pin 4: the third external alarm
input signal
l Pin 5: grounding end for the
second alarm input signal
third alarm input signal
l Pin 7: the fourth external
alarm input signal
fourth alarm input signal

Transport Platform

t ion Cable
AL Alarm l Pin 1: the fifth external alarm

MI2 input port input signal
/EX 2 (two l Pin 2: grounding end for the
T inputs)/ fifth alarm input signal
Outdoor
cabinet l Pin 3: receiving outdoor
monitorin cabinet monitoring signal (-)
g port l Pin 4: the sixth external
alarm input signal
sixth alarm input signal
l Pin 6: receiving outdoor
cabinet monitoring signal (+)
l Pin 7: transmitting outdoor
cabinet monitoring signal (-)
l Pin 8: transmitting outdoor
cabinet monitoring signal (+)
SY 120-ohm, l Pin 1: differential signal input

NC two- of external clock 1 (-)
channel l Pin 2: differential signal input
external of external clock 1 (+)
clock
input/ l Pin 3: differential signal input
output of external clock 2 (+)
port l Pin 4: differential signal
output of external clock 1 (-)
l Pin 5: differential signal
l Pin 6: differential signal input
of external clock 2 (-)
output of external clock 2 (-)

Transport Platform

t ion Cable
TO External l Pin 1: not defined

D0 time port l Pin 2: not defined
1
l Pin 3: 1pps differential input/
output signal (-)
l Pin 4: GND
l Pin 5: GND
output signal (+)
l Pin 7: TOD differential input/
output signal (-)
output signal (+)
TO External l Pin 1: not defined

D1 time port l Pin 2: not defined
2
output signal (-)
l Pin 4: GND
l Pin 5: GND
output signal (+)
output signal (-)
output signal (+)


properly.

data.

transmitting data.

Transport Platform
15.1.5 Valid Slots

The AUX can be inserted in slots 1-6 in the chassis. The slot allocation priority is as follows:
slots 4 and 6 > slots 1 and 2 > slots 3 and 5. The logical slots of the AUX on the NMS are the
15.1.6 Feature Code

None.
15.1.7 AUX Specifications

Table 15-5 lists the technical specifications of the AUX.
Table 15-5 Technical specifications of the AUX

Item Performance
Ports F1/S1 64 kbit/s synchronous See Table 15-6 and Table 15-7.
transparent data port or 19.2
kbit/s asynchronous transparent
data port
PHONE Orderwire phone port See Table 15-8.
ALMO Alarm output port Not involved
ALMI1 Alarm input port 1 (four Not involved

inputs)
ALMI2/E Alarm input port 2 (two For the outdoor cabinet

XT inputs)/Outdoor cabinet monitoring port, seeTable 15-9.
monitoring port
SYNC 120-ohm, two-channel external See Table 15-10.

clock input/output port
TOD0 External time port 1 See Table 15-11.
TOD1 External time port 2 See Table 15-11.
Dimensions (H x W x D) 19.82 mm x 193.80 mm x

225.80 mm
Weight 0.30 kg

Transport Platform
Table 15-6 Specifications of the OptiX OSN's synchronous data ports

Item Value
Transmission channel Byte F1 in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s) 64
Port type Codirectional
Port characteristics In compliance with ITU-T G.703
Table 15-7 Specifications of the OptiX OSN's asynchronous data ports

Item Value
Transmission channel User-defined byte in the SDH overhead
Bit rate (kbit/s) 19.2
Port characteristics In compliance with RS-232
Table 15-8 Specifications of the OptiX OSN's orderwire ports

Item Value
Transmission channel Bytes E1 and E2 in the SDH overhead
Orderwire type Addressing call
Pair in each direction One symmetrical pair
Impedance (ohm) 600
Table 15-9 Specifications of the OptiX OSN's outdoor cabinet monitoring ports
Item Value
Port characteristics In compliance with RS-485
Table 15-10 Specifications of the OptiX OSN's external clock ports

Item Value
External synchronous source 2048 kbit/s (in compliance with ITU-T G.703) or 2048 kHz
(in compliance with ITU-T G.703)
Frequency accuracy In compliance with ITU-T G.813
Pull-in or pull-out range

Transport Platform
Item Value
Noise generation
Noise toleration
Noise transfer
Transient response and

holdover performance
Synchronization clock < 50 ppb

transfer accuracy
Table 15-11 Specifications of the OptiX OSN's external time ports

Item Value
Port type l 1PPS+TOD

l DCLS
Electrical specifications RS-422
Protocol type l 1PPS+TOD: UBX and NMEA

l DCLS: IRIG-B (DC)

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 16 Optical Protection Board
16 Optical Protection Board
About This Chapter
Describes the functions and the working principle of optical protection boards.
16.1 OLP
OLP: Optical Line Protection Board
16.2 SCS
SCS: Sync Optical Channel Separator Board

Transport Platform
16.1 OLP
OLP: Optical Line Protection Board

The available version for the OLP is TNF1.
Version
Table 16-1 describes the version mapping of the OLP board.
Table 16-1 Version description of the OLP

Item Description
Board hardware version TNF1: The mapping version of the

equipment is V100R003C03 or later.
NOTE
For V100R003C03 or later, only the TNF1OLP board of hardware version VER.C can be used.
16.1.2 Application
The OLP board achieves the optical line protection, the intra-board wavelength protection and
client 1+1 protection.
For the application of the board in WDM systems, see Figure 16-1, Figure 16-2 and Figure
16-3.
Figure 16-1 Application of the OLP in WDM systems (optical line protection)
TO1 RI1
OTU OTU
TI RO
OADM OADM
OTU TO2 RI2 OTU
Client service OLP OLP Client service

RI1 TO1
OTU RO TI OTU
OADM RI2 TO2 OADM
OTU OTU

Transport Platform
Figure 16-2 Application of the OLP in WDM systems (intra-board wavelength protection)
TO1 RI1
OADM OADM
RI1 TO1
RO OADM OADM
TI
OTU OLP OLP
TI TO2 RO OTU
RI2
OADM OADM
RI2 TO2
OADM OADM
Figure 16-3 Application of the OLP in WDM systems (client 1+1 protection)
TO1 RI1
OTU OTU
TI TO2 OADM OADM RO
OTU RI2
OTU
Client Client
OLP OLP service
service
RI1 TO1
OTU OTU
RO RI2 OADM OADM TO2 TI
OTU OTU
NOTE
When the OLP board is used for client 1+1 protection, the OLP board must be housed in the master
subrack where the working OTU is located. In this manner, the OLP board can switch services normally
when the equipment is powered off.
NOTE

The OLP board achieves the optical line protection, the intra-board wavelength protection and
client 1+1 protection.
Table 16-2 Functions and features of the OLP board
Functions and
Basic Function The OLP board achieves the optical line protection, the intra-board
wavelength protection and client 1+1 protection.

Transport Platform
Functions and
Protection The protection mode is dual-fed and signal selection. When the
schemes performance of the working fiber declines, the system will automatically
switch the service from the working path to the protection path.

The OLP unit consists of three parts: the optical module, the communication module, and the
power supply module.
Figure 16-4 is the functional block diagram of the OLP unit.
Figure 16-4 Functional block diagram of the OLP unit
TI TO1
TO2
Optical switch
RO RI1
RI2
Optical power
detecting
module
Optical module
Required voltage
Power supply
module
Fuse
Backplane
DC power supply UXC
from a chassis
Signal Flow
The OLP unit implements the dual-fed and selective receiving of one channel of signals.
The TI optical port receives one channel of optical signal. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection fibers (channels) through
the TO1 and TO2 optical ports.

Transport Platform
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection fibers (channels) are input through the RI1
and RI2 optical ports, and enter the optical switch. The optical switch selects one from
the two channels of signals based on the optical power of the signals. In this way, the
selection of signals from the working and the protection channels is achieved. The
selected optical signals are output through the RO optical port.
The optical power detecting module detects the detection signals that are extracted from
the working and protection signals, and reports the detection results to the control and
communication module. The control and communication module compares the optical
power of the two channels of optical signals, and controls the operation of the optical
switch based on the optical power. In this way, the selection of signals from the working
and the protection channels is achieved.
Module Function
l Optical module
The optical module consists of a signal dual-fed part and a signal selection part.
The signal dual-fed part divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels
of the same power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels.
The signal selection part receives the optical signals from the working and
protection channels. The optical power detecting module detects and compares the
optical power of the two channels of optical signals. Based on the results, the signal
selection part selects one channel of optical signals and outputs it.
Converts the 3.3 V power supply from the backplane to the required voltage of each
module on the board.
16.1.5 Front Panel


Figure 16-5 shows the front panel of the OLP.

Transport Platform
Figure 16-5 Front panel of the OLP
Indicators

l Working status of working path indicator (RI1)- red, green
l Working status of protection path indicator (RI2)red, green
Ports
There are six optical ports on the front panel of the OLP, Table 16-3 lists the type and
Table 16-3 Optical ports on the front panel of the OLP

Port Connector type Description
RO LC Transmit signals after selected.
TI LC Receive signals to be protected.
TO1 LC Transmit working signals.
TO2 LC Transmit protection signals.
RI1 LC Receive working signals.
RI2 LC Receive protection signals.
Laser Hazard Level


Transport Platform
16.1.6 Valid Slots

The OLP occupies one slot.

In the OptiX OSN chassis, the valid slots of the board are SLOT1 to SLOT6.
Display of Slots

This section introduces the display of optical ports on the board.

OLP board front panel.
Table 16-4 Display of the OLP ports

RI1/TO1 1
RI2/TO2 2
TI/RO 3
NOTE
16.1.8 OLP Parameters on the NMS
Initial Variance Value -10.0 to 10.0 The parameter provides an

Between Primary and Default: 0 option to set the reference
Secondary Input Power (dB) value of the optical power
variance between the
primary and secondary input
optical ports of a board.

Transport Platform
16.1.9 OLP Specifications

consumption.
Table 16-5 lists the optical specifications of the OLP.
Table 16-5 Optical port specifications of the TNF1OLP
Corresponding
ports Item Unit Value
TI-TO1 Signal splitter insertion dB < 4.0

TI-TO2 loss
RI1-RO Signal selection dB < 1.5

RI2-RO insertion loss
Range of the input optical power dBm -35 to 7
Alarm threshold of optical power difference dB 3
Switching threshold of optical power difference dB 5
NOTE
The switching threshold of optical power difference can be manually specified.
in. x 8.2 in.)
l Weight: 0.41 kg (0.90 lb.)
Power Consumption
OLP 1.2 1.4

Transport Platform
16.2 SCS
SCS: Sync Optical Channel Separator Board

The available hardware version for the SCS is TNF1.
Version
Table 16-6 describes the version mapping of the SCS board.
Table 16-6 Version description of the SCS

Item Description

version or later.
16.2.2 Application
The SCS board provides client 1+1 protection.
Figure 16-6 shows the SCS board application in the WDM system.
Figure 16-6 SCS board application in the WDM system

TO11 RI11
OTU OTU
TI1 TO12
RO1
OTU RI12
OTU
TO21 OADM OADM RI21
OTU OTU
TI2 TO22 RO2
OTU RI22
OTU
Client Client
service SCS SCS service
RI11 TO11
OTU OTU
RO1 RI12 TO12 TI1
OTU OTU
RI21 OADM OADM TO21
OTU OTU
RO2 RI22 TO22 TI2
OTU OTU
NOTE

The SCS board provides client 1+1 protection.

Transport Platform
Table 16-7 Functions and features of the SCS

Functions and
Basic function The SCS board provides the client 1+1 protection. When the
performance of the working fiber degrades, the signals switch
automatically to the protection channel.
Protection schemes The channel protection that is supported by the SCS board
does not require any protocol. The SCS board triggers a
channel protection switching after the SD or SF event is
detected in the channel.

The SCS unit consists of three parts: the optical module and the communication module.
Figure 16-7 is the functional block diagram of the SCS unit.
Figure 16-7 Functional block diagram of the SCS unit
Optical module
TO11
TI1 Optical splitter
TO12
Optical splitter TO21

TI2
TO22
RI11
RO1 Optical coupler
RI12
RI21
RO2 Optical coupler
RI22
UXC Backplane
Signal Flow
One SCS unit supports the dual-fed and dual receiving of two channels of optical signals. The
SCS unit processes the two channels of optical signals in the same way. This section describes
the service flow of only one channel of optical signals.

Transport Platform
The TI1 optical port receives one channel of optical signals. After passing through the
splitter, the signals are output to the working and the protection channels through the
TO11 and TO12 optical ports.
l Receive direction
The signals in the working and the protection channels are input through the RI1 and RI2
optical ports, and enter the coupler. The system activates one of the two channels of
optical signals based on the service quality. In this way, the selection of path optical
signals is achieved. The selected optical signals are output through the RO1 optical port.
Normally, the working OTU at the receive end is active, and the protection OTU is
standby. Once a fault occurs in the services, an alarm triggers a protection switching. The
system shuts down the working OTU, and activates the protection OTU.
Module Function
l Optical module
The optical module consists of splitters and couplers.
The splitter divides the one channel of optical signals into two channels of the same
power, and outputs them to the working and protection channels.
The coupler receives the signals in the working and the protection channels. The
system selects one channel of optical signals based on the service quality.
16.2.5 Front Panel


Figure 16-8 shows the front panel of the SCS.
Figure 16-8 Front panel of the SCS

SCS
TI1 TI2 TO11 TO12 TO21 TO22 RO1 RO2 RI11 RI12 RI21 RI22
Indicators
The SCS board does not have indicators.
Ports
There are 12 optical ports on the front panel of the SCS board, Table 16-8 lists the type and

Transport Platform
Table 16-8 Types and functions of the SCS ports
TI1 LC Transmit the first channel of optical signals.
RO1 LC Receive the first channel of optical signals.
TI2 LC Transmit the second channel of optical signals.
RO2 LC Receive the second channel of optical signals.
TO11/TO12 LC Transmit the first channel of signals to working and

protection OTUs respectively.
TO21/TO22 LC Transmit the second channel of signals to working and

RI11/RI12 LC Receive the first channel of signals from working and

RI21/RI22 LC Receive the second channel of signals from working and

Laser Hazard Level

16.2.6 Valid Slots

The SCS occupies one slot.

Display of Slots
installed.

This section introduces the display of optical ports on the board.

SCS board front panel.

Transport Platform
Table 16-9 Display of the SCS ports

TI1/RO1 1
TI2/RO2 2
RI11/TO11 3
RI12/TO12 4
RI21/TO21 5
RI22/TO22 6
NOTE
16.2.8 SCS Specifications

consumption.
Table 16-10 list the optical specifications of the SCS.
Table 16-10 Optical interface parameter specifications of the SCS board specifications
Item Unit Value
Insertion loss Single-mode dB <4
Operating wavelength Single-mode nm 1260 to 1620

range
in. x 8.2 in.)

Transport Platform
Power Consumption
SCS 0.5 0.5

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 17 Cables
17 Cables
About This Chapter
This chapter describes various equipment cables, including fibers, power cables, grounding
cables, and management cables.
17.1 Optical Fibers

The OptiX OSN has several optical fibers with different length and connectors.
17.2 Signal Cable
The signal cables include the 75-ohm E1 cable and 120-ohm E1 cable. The signal cable is
120-ohm E1 cable.
17.3 Management Cables
The management cable consists of the cable for connecting the OADM extended frame to the
primary NE, NM connection cable, and alarm output cable. The management cable for the
OptiX OSN series is the straight-through network cable or crossover network cable, which is
made on site.

Transport Platform
17.1 Optical Fibers

The OptiX OSN has several optical fibers with different length and connectors.
17.1.1 Classification
Select fiber connectors and fiber length according to the on-site survey.
The optical fibers used by the OptiX OSN equipment is classified as shown in Table 17-1.
Table 17-1 Classification of optical fibers
Type of Connectors at Fiber Type

Both Ends
LC/PC-LC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) single- G.657A2 fiber

mode fiber
2.0 mm (0.08 in.)

multimode fiber
LC/PC-FC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) single- G.657A2 fiber

mode fiber
2.0 mm (0.08 in.)

multimode fiber
LC/PC-SC/PC 2.0 mm (0.08 in.) single- G.657A2 fiber

mode fiber
2.0 mm (0.08 in.)

multimode fiber
NOTE
The G.657 optical fibers provided by Huawei are named G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 optical
fibers. The G.657B optical fibers are short-jacket optical fibers defined in ITU-T G.657 (12/2006).
According to ITU-T G.657 (11/2009), these fibers are classified into G.657A1, G.657A2, G.657B2, and
G.657B3 optical fibers. The G.657B optical fibers provided by Huawei and the G.657A2 optical fibers
are fully compatible and can be interconnected. In addition, the G.657B and G.657A2 optical fibers are
fully compatible with G.652D optical fibers. However, the compatibility between customer-purchased
G.657B optical fibers and G.657A2 and G.652D optical fibers needs to be verified.
17.1.2 Connectors
All optical ports on the front panel of the boards for the system are the LC/PC type. LC/PC
fiber connectors are used with these boards. The optical ports on the ODF in the equipment
room are generally of the SC/PC or FC/PC type. SC/PC or FC/PC fiber connectors are used
with them.
For detailed description of the two types of fiber connectors, see Table 17-2.

Transport Platform
Table 17-2 Classification of fiber connectors
Type of fiber
connectors Description
LC/PC Plug-in square fiber connector/protruding polished
SC/PC Square fiber connector/protruding polished
FC/PC Round fiber connector/protruding polished
Figure 17-1 shows the appearance of LC/PC optical connector.
Figure 17-1 LC/PC optical connector
Figure 17-2 shows the appearance of SC/PC optical connector.
Figure 17-2 SC/PC optical connector
SC/PC connector
Protective cap
Figure 17-3 shows the appearance of FC/PC optical connector.

Transport Platform
Figure 17-3 FC/PC optical connector
Protective cap
FC/PC connector
17.2 Signal Cable

The signal cables include the 75-ohm E1 cable and 120-ohm E1 cable. The signal cable is
120-ohm E1 cable.
17.2.1 16xE1/T1 Cable

An 16xE1/T1 cable uses Anea 96 connectors and can transmit a maximum of 16 E1/T1
signals.
There are two types of 16xE1/T1 cables: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair
cables.
NOTE
A 75-ohm E1 cable and a 120-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.

The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1/T1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening
of 2.5 mm or 1.7 mm to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1/T1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1
coaxial connector.

Transport Platform
Cable Diagram
Figure 17-4 75-ohm/120-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable
Main label
X1 A
ViewA Pos.96
Cable connector, Anea,
96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
Pin Assignments
16xTable 17-3 provides details about the pin assignments for a 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable.
Table 17-3 Pin assignments for a 75-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable

Pin Cor Seri Lab Pin Cor Seri Lab Pin Cor Seri Lab
e al el e al el e al el
No. No. No.
1 Tip 1 R0 13 Tip 13 R6 49 Tip 25 R12
2 Ring 14 Ring 50 Ring
25 Tip 2 T0 37 Tip 14 T6 73 Tip 26 T12
3 Tip 3 R1 15 Tip 15 R7 51 Tip 27 R13
27 Tip 4 T1 39 Tip 16 T7 75 Tip 28 T13
5 Tip 5 R2 17 Tip 17 R8 53 Tip 29 R14

Transport Platform
No. No. No.
29 Tip 6 T2 41 Tip 18 T8 77 Tip 30 T14
7 Tip 7 R3 19 Tip 19 R9 55 Tip 31 R15
31 Tip 8 T3 43 Tip 20 T9 79 Tip 32 T15
9 Tip 9 R4 21 Tip 21 R10
10 Ring 22 Ring
33 Tip 10 T4 45 Tip 22 T10
34 Ring 46 Ring
11 Tip 11 R5 23 Tip 23 R11
12 Ring 24 Ring
35 Tip 12 T5 47 Tip 24 T11
36 Ring 48 Ring
Table 17-4 provides details about the pin assignments for a 120-ohm 16xE1/T1 cable.

Ri Pi Co La Re Ri Pi Co La Re Ri Pi Co La Re
bb n lor bel lat bb n lor bel lat bb n lor bel lat
on of io on of io on of io
Co the ns Co the ns Co the ns
lor Co hi lor Co hi lor Co hi
re p re p re p
Blu 1 Wh R0 Pai Or 15 Wh R7 Pai Gre 53 Wh R1 Pai

e ite r ang ite r en ite 4 r
e
2 Blu 16 Blu 54 Blu
e e e
25 Wh T0 Pai 39 Wh T7 Pai 77 Wh T1 Pai

ite r ite r ite 4 r
26 Or 40 Or 78 Or
ang ang ang
e e e

Transport Platform
re p re p re p
3 Wh R1 Pai 17 Wh R8 Pai 55 Wh R1 Pai

ite r ite r ite 5 r
4 Gr 18 Gr 56 Gr
een een een

ite r ite r ite 5 r
28 Br 42 Br 80 Br
ow ow ow
n n n
5 Wh R2 Pai 19 Wh R9 Pai
ite r ite r
6 Gr 20 Gr
ay ay
29 Re T2 Pai 43 Re T9 Pai
d r d r
30 Blu 44 Blu
e e
7 Re R3 Pai 21 Re R1 Pai
d r d 0 r
8 Or 22 Or
ang ang
e e
d r d 0 r
32 Gr 46 Gr
een een
9 Re R4 Pai 23 Re R1 Pai
d r d 1 r
10 Br 24 Br
ow ow
n n
d r d 1 r
34 Gr 48 Gr
ay ay

Transport Platform
re p re p re p
11 Bla R5 Pai 49 Bla R1 Pai

ck r ck 2 r
12 Blu 50 Blu
e e
35 Bla T5 Pai 73 Bla T1 Pai

ck r ck 2 r
36 Or 74 Or
ang ang
e e
13 Bla R6 Pai 51 Bla R1 Pai

ck r ck 3 r
14 Gr 52 Gr
een een
37 Bla T6 Pai 75 Bla T1 Pai

ck r ck 3 r
38 Br 76 Br
ow ow
n n
Technical Specifications
Table 17-5 lists the technical specifications for 16xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN.
Table 17-5 Technical specifications for 16xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN
Item Description
Connector type Anea 96
Number of cores 32 cores/pair
Fireproof class IEC60332-3C
17.2.2 21xE1/T1 Cable

An 21xE1/T1 cable uses Anea 96 connectors and can transmit a maximum of 21 E1/T1
signals.

Transport Platform
There are two types of 21xE1/T1 cables: 75-ohm coaxial cables and 120-ohm twisted pair
cables.
NOTE
A 75-ohm E1 cable and a 120-ohm E1 cable have the same appearance.

The core diameter of a 75-ohm E1/T1 cable is 1.6 mm. Therefore, use a crimping tool with an opening
of 2.5 mm or 1.7 mm to attach the end of the 75-ohm E1/T1 cable on the DDF frame with a 75-1-1
coaxial connector.
Cable Diagram
Figure 17-5 75-ohm/120-ohm 21xE1/T1 cable
Main label
X1 A
ViewA Pos.96
Cable connector, Anea,
96-pin,female
Pos.1
1. Cable connector, Anea 96, female
Pin Assignments

No. No. No.
1 Tip 1 R0 15 Tip 15 R7 53 Tip 29 R14
25 Tip 2 T0 39 Tip 16 T7 77 Tip 30 T14
3 Tip 3 R1 17 Tip 17 R8 55 Tip 31 R15

Transport Platform
No. No. No.
27 Tip 4 T1 41 Tip 18 T8 79 Tip 32 T15
5 Tip 5 R2 19 Tip 19 R9 57 Tip 33 R16
29 Tip 6 T2 43 Tip 20 T9 81 Tip 34 T16
7 Tip 7 R3 21 Tip 21 R10 59 Tip 35 R17
31 Tip 8 T3 45 Tip 22 T10 83 Tip 36 T17
9 Tip 9 R4 23 Tip 23 R11 61 Tip 37 R18
33 Tip 10 T4 47 Tip 24 T11 85 Tip 38 T18
11 Tip 11 R5 49 Tip 25 R12 63 Tip 39 R19
35 Tip 12 T5 73 Tip 26 T12 87 Tip 40 T19
13 Tip 13 R6 51 Tip 27 R13 65 Tip 41 R20
37 Tip 14 T6 75 Tip 28 T13 89 Tip 42 T20

Transport Platform

re p re p re p
Blu 1 Wh R0 Pai Or 15 Wh R7 Pai Gre 53 Wh R1 Pai

e ite r ang ite r en ite 4 r
e
2 Blu 16 Blu 54 Blu
e e e

ite r ite r ite 4 r
26 Or 40 Or 78 Or
ang ang ang
e e e

ite r ite r ite 5 r
4 Gr 18 Gr 56 Gr
een een een

ite r ite r ite 5 r
28 Br 42 Br 80 Br
ow ow ow
n n n

ite r ite r ite 6 r
6 Gr 20 Gr 58 Gr
ay ay ay
29 Re T2 Pai 43 Re T9 Pai 81 Re T1 Pai

d r d r d 6 r
30 Blu 44 Blu 82 Blu

e e e
7 Re R3 Pai 21 Re R1 Pai 59 Re R1 Pai

d r d 0 r d 7 r
8 Or 22 Or 60 Or
ang ang ang
e e e

d r d 0 r d 7 r

Transport Platform
re p re p re p
32 Gr 46 Gr 84 Gr
een een een
9 Re R4 Pai 23 Re R1 Pai 61 Re R1 Pai

d r d 1 r d 8 r
10 Br 24 Br 62 Br
ow ow ow
n n n

d r d 1 r d 8 r
34 Gr 48 Gr 86 Gr
ay ay ay
11 Bla R5 Pai 49 Bla R1 Pai 63 Bla R1 Pai

ck r ck 2 r ck 9 r
12 Blu 50 Blu 64 Blu

e e e
35 Bla T5 Pai 73 Bla T1 Pai 87 Bla T1 Pai

ck r ck 2 r ck 9 r
36 Or 74 Or 88 Or
ang ang ang
e e e
13 Bla R6 Pai 51 Bla R1 Pai 65 Bla R2 Pai

ck r ck 3 r ck 0 r
14 Gr 52 Gr 66 Gr
een een een
37 Bla T6 Pai 75 Bla T1 Pai 89 Bla T2 Pai

ck r ck 3 r ck 0 r
38 Br 76 Br 90 Br
ow ow ow
n n n
Table 17-8 lists the technical specifications for 21xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN.

Transport Platform
Table 17-8 Technical specifications for 21xE1/T1 cables used on the OptiX OSN
Item Description
Connector type Anea 96
Number of cores 42 cores/pair
Fireproof class IEC60332-3C
17.2.3 E3/T3 Cable

An E3/T3 cable receives/transmits E3/T3 signals. One end of the E3/T3 cable has an SMB
connector that is connected to an E3/T3 electrical interface board. The other end of the E3/T3
cable is connected to a DDF and its connector needs to be prepared on site as required.
Structure
Figure 17-6 Structure of an E3/T3 cable
1. Coaxial connector - SMB 2. Main label 3. Coaxial cable
Pin Assignments
None.
Item Description
Connector Coaxial connector, SMB connector, 75 ohms, straight, female
Cable I Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded
Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal insulation
layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor (0.34 mm)
Available lengths: 10 m, 15 m, 20 m, 30 m
Cable II Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 4.4 mm, 2.4 mm, 0.4 mm, shielded, gray
Available lengths: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 40 m

Transport Platform
Item Description
Cable III Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 6.7 mm, 3.8 mm, 0.61 mm, shielded, gray
Available lengths: 15 m, 20 m, 25 m, 30 m, 130 m
Cable IV Coaxial cable, 75 ohms, 5.80 mm, 3.71 mm, 0.643 mm, black
Available length: 30 m
Fireproof CM
class
17.2.4 STM-1 Cable

An STM-1 cable transmits/receives STM-1 signals. One end of the STM-1 cable has an SAA
connector that is connected to an STM-1 electrical port. The connector at the other end of the
STM-1 cable is connected to a DDF and needs to be prepared on site as required.
Cable Diagram
Figure 17-7 STM-1 cable
1. Coaxial connector, SAA straight/male 2. Main label 3. Coaxial cable
Pin Assignments
None.
Item Description
Connector Coaxial connector, SAA connector (1.0/2.3), 75-ohm straight/

male
Cable model Coaxial cable, 75-ohm, 3.9 mm, 2.1 mm, 0.34 mm, shielded

Transport Platform
Item Description
Number of cores One
Core diameter Diameter of the shield layer (3.9 mm), diameter of the internal
insulation layer (2.1 mm), diameter of the internal conductor
(0.34 mm)
Length 10 m
Fireproof class CM
17.3 Management Cables

The management cable consists of the cable for connecting the OADM extended frame to the
primary NE, NM connection cable, and alarm output cable. The management cable for the
OptiX OSN series is the straight-through network cable or crossover network cable, which is
made on site.
NOTE
The intrabuilding port(s) of the equipment or subassembly is suitable for connection only to shielded
intra-building cabling grounded at both ends.
17.3.1 Straight-through Cable

Each end of a straight-through cable has an RJ-45 connector for connecting to equipment.
Structure
See Figure 17-8.
Figure 17-8 Straight-through cable

1 1
8 8
1 1
1. Network connector
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of straight-through cable is shown in Table 17-9.

Transport Platform
Table 17-9 Pin assignment of straight-through cable

Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
X1.2 X2.2 Pair
X1.1 X2.1
X1.6 X2.6 Pair
X1.3 X2.3
X1.4 X2.4 Pair
X1.5 X2.5
X1.8 X2.8 Pair
X1.7 X2.7
Technical Parameter
The technical parameters of straight-through cable are shown in Table 17-10.
Table 17-10 Technical parameters of straight-through cable

Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8 pins-8 bits-shielded-crystal

model connector
Cable type Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100 ohms-enhanced type 5

cable-0.52 mm (0.02 in.) -24 AWG-8 cores, four pairs-
PANTONE 430U
Number of cores 8
17.3.2 Crossover Cable

The management interfaces of the OptiX OSN are adaptive. Crossover cables can be used for
connecting the OptiX OSN to the U2000. Each end of a crossover cable has an RJ-45
connector for connecting to equipment.
Structure
The structure of crossover cable is shown in Figure 17-9.

Transport Platform
Figure 17-9 Structure of crossover cable
1 1
8 8
1 1
1. Network connector
Pin Assignment
The pin assignment of crossover network cable is shown in Table 17-11.
Table 17-11 Pin assignment of crossover network cable
Connector X1 Connector X2 Relationship
X1.6 X2.2 Pair
X1.3 X2.1
X1.2 X2.6 Pair
X1.1 X2.3
X1.4 X2.4 Pair
X1.5 X2.5
X1.8 X2.8 Pair
X1.7 X2.7
Technical Parameter
The technical parameters of crossover network cable are shown in Table 17-12.
Table 17-12 Technical parameters of crossover network cable
Item Description
Connector X1/X2 Network interface connector-8 pins-8 bits-shielded-crystal

model connector

Transport Platform
Item Description
Cable type Symmetrical twisted pair cable-100 ohms-enhanced type 5

cable-0.52 mm (0.02 in.) -24 AWG-8 cores, four pairs-
PANTONE 430U
Number of cores 8

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 18 Optical Attenuator
18 Optical Attenuator
About This Chapter
Optical attenuators are classified into fixed optical attenuators and mechanical variable optical
attenuators (VOAs).
NOTE
A optical attenuator is optional. That is, it must be purchased separately, if it is required.
18.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator

A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value.
The common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10
dB, and 15 dB.
18.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator
A mechanical variable optical attenuator (MVOA) can adjust the optical power on an optical
path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of an MVOA is 2 dB to 30
dB.
18.3 EVOA Module
An electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA) module is used to adjust the optical power of
signals.

Transport Platform
18.1 Fixed Optical Attenuator

A fixed optical attenuator can reduce the optical power on an optical path by a fixed value.
The common attenuation specifications of fixed optical attenuators are 2 dB, 5 dB, 7 dB, 10
dB, and 15 dB.
Figure 18-1 shows the appearance of a fixed optical attenuator.
Figure 18-1 Fixed optical attenuator
18.2 Mechanical Variable Optical Attenuator

A mechanical variable optical attenuator (MVOA) can adjust the optical power on an optical
path within a permitted range. The attenuation adjustment range of an MVOA is 2 dB to 30
dB.
Figure 18-2 and Figure 18-3 show the appearance of common MVOAs.
Figure 18-2 Dual-channel MVOA
Figure 18-3 Single-channel MVOA

Transport Platform
18.3 EVOA Module

An electrical variable optical attenuator (EVOA) module is used to adjust the optical power of
signals.
Functions
NOTE
As pluggable SFP optical modules, EVOA modules are optional. That is, it must be purchased
separately, if it is required.
An EVOA module adjusts the optical power of signals by adjusting line attenuation. You can
view the attenuation on the NMS.
You can connect the EVOA module to the IN port on the board where the EVOA module
resides to adjust the receive optical power of the board. For details, see Figure 18-4. You can
also connect the EVOA module to the OUT port on the board where the EVOA module
resides to adjust the transmit optical power of the board. For details, see Figure 18-5.
Figure 18-4 Application of the EVOA module (adjusting the receive optical power of the
board)
OUT
E WDM-
VO IN
V side
O optical
module
VI A
Figure 18-5 Application of the EVOA module (adjusting the transmit optical power of the
board)
VO
WDM- OUT
E
VI
side V
optical O
module
IN A
Boards Supporting EVOA Modules

Table 18-1 describes the boards supporting EVOA modules and the corresponding working
modes and ports of the boards.

Transport Platform
Table 18-1 Boards supporting EVOA modules, and corresponding working modes and ports
Board Working Mode Available Port
Supporting
EVOA
Modules
ELOM(STND) 1*AP8 General Mode RX1/TX1RX8/TX8
1*AP1 ODU2 Mode RX7/TX7, RX8/TX8
1*AP1 ODUflex Mode RX7/TX7, RX8/TX8
F2LQM2(STND 1*AP8 ODU1 Mode RX2/TX2RX8/TX8

)
2*AP4 ODU1 Mode TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, TX4/RX4, TX6/
RX6, TX7/RX7, TX8/RX8
2*AP2 ODU0 Mode RX1/TX1RX8/TX8
2*AP3 ODU1 Mode TX2/RX2, TX3/RX3, TX4/RX4, TX6/

RX6, TX7/RX7, TX8/RX8
OBU / VO/VI

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 19 Pluggable Optical Modules
19 Pluggable Optical Modules
About This Chapter
19.1 Types of Pluggable Module

The OptiX OSN supports the small form-factor pluggable (SFP), 10 Gbit/s small form-factor
pluggable (XFP), small form-factor pluggable plus (SFP+), tunable 10 Gbit/s small form-
factor pluggable (TXFP) modules.
19.2 Service Types Supported by Modules
The section provides service type that each pluggable modules supports.

Transport Platform
19.1 Types of Pluggable Module

The OptiX OSN supports the small form-factor pluggable (SFP), 10 Gbit/s small form-factor
pluggable (XFP), small form-factor pluggable plus (SFP+), tunable 10 Gbit/s small form-
factor pluggable (TXFP) modules.
The client and WDM sides of the optical wavelength conversion boards of the OptiX OSN
can use pluggable modules. When you need to adjust the type of accessed services or replace
a faulty module, you only need to replace the module without replacing the board. Figure
19-1 and Figure 19-2 show the optical SFP and XFP modules.
Figure 19-1 Optical SFP/SFP+ module
Figure 19-2 XFP/TXFP module
19.2 Service Types Supported by Modules

The section provides service type that each pluggable modules supports.
Module Name Supported Service Type Module Type
800ps/nm-tunable-PIN- OTU2, OTU2e TXFP

TXFP
800ps/nm-fixed-PIN-XFP OTU2, OTU2e XFP
1600ps/nm-fixed-APD-XFP OTU2, OTU2e XFP
2400ps/nm-fixed-APD- OTU1 eSFP

eSFP

Transport Platform
1600ps/nm-fixed-APD- OTU1 eSFP

eSFP
800ps/nm-fixed-PIN-eSFP OTU1 eSFP
10Gbit/s Single rate-0.3km 10GE LAN XFP
10Gbit/s Multi-rate-10km 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, XFP

OTU2

OTU2, OTU2e

OTU2, OTU2e
1000BASE-SX-0.5km FC200, FC100, GE, CPRI option2 eSFP
1000BASE-LX-10km FC100, GE, CPRI option2, STM-4, eSFP

ESCON, STM-1, FICON, FE, SDI,
DVB-ASI
1000BASE-LX-40km (also FC100, GE, CPRI option2, STM-4, eSFP

known as "1000BASE- ESCON, STM-1, FICON, FE, SDI,
VX-40km") DVB-ASI
1000BASE-ZX-80km FC100, GE, CPRI option2, STM-4, eSFP

ESCON, STM-1, FICON, FE, SDI,
DVB-ASI
1000BASE-BX-10km GE eSFP
(SM1310)
(SM1490)
(SM1310)
(SM1490)
I-16 OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, eSFP

CPRI option2, CPRI option3, STM-4,
ESCON, STM-1, FICON, FICON
EXPRESS, FE, SDI, HD-SDI, DVB-
ASI
S-16.1 OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, eSFP

ASI

Transport Platform
L-16.2 OTU1, STM-16, FC200, FC100, GE, eSFP

ASI
S-4.1 STM-4, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE, eSFP

ESCON, SDI
L-4.1 STM-4, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE, eSFP

ESCON, SDI
L-4.2 STM-4, STM-1, DVB-ASI, FE, eSFP

ESCON, SDI
100BASE-FX STM-1, FE, ESCON SFP
100Base-LX FE SFP
100Base-VX FE SFP
100Base-ZX FE SFP
S-1.1 STM-1, FE eSFP
L-1.1 STM-1, FE eSFP
L-1.2 STM-1, FE eSFP
10G BASE-SR FC800, FICON 8G, 10GE LAN SFP+
10G BASE-LR FC800, FICON 8G, 10GE LAN SFP+
10GBASE-ER 10GE LAN SFP+
10GBASE-ZR 10GE LAN SFP+
10GBASE-SW 10GE WAN SFP+
10GBASE-LW 10GE WAN SFP+
10GBASE-EW 10GE WAN SFP+
10GBASE-ZW 10GE WAN SFP+
FC400 Multi-mode FC400, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON eSFP

Express
FC400 Single-mode FC400, FC200, FC100, FICON, FICON eSFP

Express
Multi-rate-10km-SFP+ 10GE LAN, 10GE WAN, STM-64, SFP+

FC1200, FICON 10G, CPRI option7
CPRI option6-2km CPRI option6 eSFP
CPRI option6-10km CPRI option6 eSFP

Transport Platform
3G-SDI 3G-SDI, SDI, HD-SDI eSFP
EVOA - eSFP
GE electrical module GE eSFP
FE electrical module FE eSFP

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 20 Pluggable electrical Modules
20 Pluggable electrical Modules
This chapter describes the pluggable electrical modules that the OptiX OSN supports. For a
board on which pluggable electrical modules are installed, if applicable service categories
need to be changed or faulty electrical modules need to be replaced, you need to replace only
the electrical modules instead of the board.
Appearance
Figure 20-1 FE/GE SFP electrical module
Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.5 mm x 13.4 mm x 66.8 mm

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 20 Pluggable electrical Modules
Figure 20-2 STM-1 SFP electrical module
Dimensions (H x W x D): 8.5 mm x 13.4 mm x 66.8 mm
SFP Electrical Modules
Table 20-1 SFP electrical modules

Part Number Name Specification Applicable Board
34100052 1000BASE-T RJ45 1000BASE-T EM6F/EGS4

SFP electrical (RJ45) SFP
module electrical module,
auto-negotiation,
100 m
34100104 STM-1 SFP Electrical active CQ1

electrical module module-copper
transceiver, SFP,
STM-1e
NOTE
Optical/Electrical module specifications may be updated in various product versions. Contact local
Huawei offices for the latest optical module specifications.

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 21 Filler Panels
21 Filler Panels
About This Chapter
A filler panel is used to fill in a vacant slot.

21.1 Functions and Features
This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel.
21.2 Front Panel
There is no indicator or port on the filler panel.
21.3 Valid Slots
This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel.
This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.

Transport Platform
21.1 Functions and Features

This chapter describes the functions and features of a filler panel.
A filler panel has the following functions:
l Prevents exposure of people to hazardous voltage and current in the chassis.
l Prevents foreign matter from entering the chassis.
l Maintains electromagnetic interference (EMI) compliance.
l Maintains proper air flow through the chassis.
21.2 Front Panel

There is no indicator or port on the filler panel.
Figure 21-1, Figure 21-2 and Figure 21-3 show the appearance of a filler panel.
Figure 21-1 Appearance of a common filler panel
Figure 21-2 Appearance of the PIU filler panel

Transport Platform
Figure 21-3 Appearance of the APIU filler panel
21.3 Valid Slots

This section describes the valid slots for a filler panel.
Table 21-1 lists the valid slots for a filler panel.
Table 21-1 Valid slots for a filler panel

Types of Filler Panel Valid Slot in OptiX OSN Chassis
Common filler panel SLOT1 to SLOT8
PIU filler panel SLOT91, SLOT92
APIU filler panel On the APIU board housed in SLOT2 and SLOT4,
or in SLOT4 and SLOT6

This section describes the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Table 21-2 lists the technical specifications of a filler panel.
Table 21-2 Technical specifications of a filler panel

Types of filler Dimension (Height x Width x Depth)
panels
Common filler panel 19.8 mm x 193.8 mm x 15.3 mm
PIU filler panel 42.0 mm x 21.0 mm x 17.8 mm
APIU filler panel 40.1 mm x 101.9 mm x 18.8 mm

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 22 Indicators
22 Indicators
About This Chapter
22.1 Cabinet Indicators

There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and
yellow.
22.2 Board Indicators
On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running
status of the board.
22.3 Fan Indicator
22.4 APIU Indicator
22.5 PIU Indicator

Transport Platform
22.1 Cabinet Indicators

There are altogether four indicators in different colors on each cabinet: green, red, orange and
yellow.
The corresponding messages of each indicator are listed in Table 22-1.
Table 22-1 Meanings of cabinet indicators

Indicator Name Status Meaning
power Power indicator On (green) The cabinet is

powered on.
Off The cabinet is not

powered on.
critical Critical alarm On (red) There is a critical

indicator alarm.
Off There is no critical

alarm.
major Major alarm On (Orange) There is a major

indicator alarm.
Off There is no major

alarm.
minor Minor alarm On (Yellow) There is a minor

indicator alarm.
Off There is no minor

alarm.
22.2 Board Indicators

On the front panel of each board, there are indicators, indicating the alarm status and running
status of the board.
Table 22-2 Descriptions of the indicators on optical transponder boards

STAT On (green) The board works normally.
On (yellow) Minor alarm occurs to service.
On (red) The hardware of the board is faulty.
Off The board does not work. The board is

not created or powered on.

Transport Platform
SRV On (green) The services are normal and there is no

alarm.
On (red) Critical or major alarm occurs to service.
Blinking (red) The SFP module type does not match.
Off No service is configured or the board is

not powered on.
IN1/IN2 On (red) No receive optical power.
Flashing (red) l Blinking slowly (300 ms on and 700

ms off): The optical power at the
local end is excessively low.
l Blinking quickly (300 ms on and 300
ms off): The optical power at the
local end is excessively high.
On (green) Normal
Off The module is offline, or the board is not

powered on.
Table 22-3 Descriptions of the indicators on TDM boards/packet boards/system Control,

switching, and timing boards
STAT On (green) The board is working properly.
On (red) The board hardware is faulty.
Off l The board is not working or created.

l There is no power supplied to the
board.
PROG Blinks on (green) and off at Software is being loaded to the board
100 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.
Blinks on (green) and off at The board software is in BIOS boot state
300 ms intervals during the power-on or resetting process
of the board.
Blinks on (red) and off at The BOOTROM self-check fails during

100 ms intervals the power-on or resetting process of the
board.

Transport Platform
On (green) l The upper layer software is being

initialized.
l The software is running properly.
On (red) l The memory self-check fails or

loading upper layer software fails
during the power-on or resetting
process of the board.
l The logic file or upper layer software
is lost during the running process of
the board.
l The pluggable storage card is faulty.
Off The board is not powered on or works in

low-power mode.
SYNC On (green) The clock is working properly.
On (red) The clock source is lost or a clock

switchover occurs.
SRV On (green) The system/service is normal.
On (red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the

system/service.
On (yellow) A minor or remote alarm occurs in the

system/service.
Off l For a UXC board:

In an unprotected system, there is
no power supplied to the system.
In a 1+1 protected system, the
board works as the standby one.
l For a service board, no service is
configured.
ACT On (green) l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the active one.
l In an unprotected system, the board
has been activated.
Off l In a 1+1 protected system, the board

works as the standby one.
l In an unprotected system, the board is
not activated.
LINK1/LINK2 On (green) The GE port is connected correctly, but

is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinks (yellow) The GE port is receiving or transmitting

data.

Transport Platform
Off The GE port is not connected or is

abnormal.
LOS/LOS1/ On (red) The optical port on the board is reporting

LOS2/LOS3/ an R_LOS alarm.
LOS4
Blinks (red) three times The optical port on the board receives
every second too strong power.
Blinks (red) once every The optical port on the board receives
second too weak power.
Blinks (red) once every The optical port on the board is reporting
three seconds an MS_RDI alarm.
Off The optical port on the board is free of

R_LOS alarms.
L/A On (green) The port is connected correctly (link up),

but is not receiving or transmitting data.
Blinks (red) three times The port on the board receives too strong
every second, 300 ms on power.
and 300 ms off
Blinks (red) once every The port on the board receives too weak
second, 300 ms on and 700 power.
ms off
Blinks (yellow) The port is connected correctly (link up),

and is receiving and transmitting data.
Off The optical fiber is not connected to the

port, or the port is abnormal (link down/
LOS).
Table 22-4 Descriptions of the indicators on OLP board
STAT On (green) The board works normally.
On (red) The hardware of the board is faulty.
Flashing (red) The logical board does not match the physical board.
Off The board does not work. The board is not created or
powered on.
SRV On (green) The services are normal and there is no alarm.
On (red) Critical or major alarm occurs to service.

Transport Platform
Off No service is configured or the board is not powered

on.
RI1 On (red) There is no optical power received in the working

path.
On (green) Normal
RI2 On (red) There is no optical power received in the protection

path.
On (green) Normal
Table 22-5 Descriptions of the indicators on optical amplifying board

STAT On (green) Normal
On (yellow) A minor alarm occurs in the service.
On (steady red) The hardware of the board is faulty.
On (blinking red) The logical board is not consistent with the physical
board.
Off The board is not working, not created, or not powered

on.
On (steady red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the service.
board.
Off The module is not powered on.
IN On (steady red) The optical power at the local end is excessively low
or no receive optical power.
On (blinking red) The optical power at the local end is excessively high.
On (green) Normal
Off The module is offline or the board is not powered on.

Transport Platform
Table 22-6 Descriptions of the indicators on auxiliary board

STAT On (green) Normal
On (steady red) The hardware of the board is faulty.
board.
Off The board is not working, not created, or not powered

on.
On (steady red) A critical or major alarm occurs in the service.
board.
Off The module is not powered on.
22.3 Fan Indicator

There is one indicator on the front panel of the FAN board, the descriptions of the indicator
are shown in Table 22-7.
Table 22-7 Descriptions of the indicator on the FAN board

On (green) The board works normally.
On (red) The FAN_FAIL alarm occurs to the board.
22.4 APIU Indicator

There are two indicators on the front panel. For details on the indicators, refer to Table 22-8.

Transport Platform
Table 22-8 Descriptions of the indicator on the APIU board

Indicator Meaning Indicator Status Description
INPUT Indicator of the On (green) The input power voltage is

input power status normal.
On (red) The input power voltage is

OUTPUT Indicator of the On (green) The output power voltage is

output power status normal.
On (red) The output power voltage is

22.5 PIU Indicator

There is one indicator on the TND1PIU front panel, the descriptions of the indicator are
shown in Table 22-9.
Table 22-9 Descriptions of the indicator on the TND1PIU board

On (green) The board is in working status.

Transport Platform
Hardware Description 23 Quick Reference Table of the Boards
23 Quick Reference Table of the Boards
About This Chapter
Quick reference tables include those for specifications of optical transponder units, optical
amplifier units and other boards, and also the functions of OTUs, tributary boards and line
boards.
23.1 Quick Reference Table for Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the common parameters specified for the interfaces of boards.
23.2 Basic Functions of Boards
This topic describes the functions supported by optical transponder boards, and packet boards.
23.3 Loopback Function of the Boards
The optical transponder boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, packet boards and EoS boards of
the OptiN OSN equipment support various types of loopbacks.
23.4 Protection Mode of boards
The optical transponder boards, packet board, SDH boards and EoS boards support protection
function.

Transport Platform
23.1 Quick Reference Table for Optical Interfaces

This topic lists the common parameters specified for the interfaces of boards.
23.1.1 Specification of OTUs

The main client-side specifications of the optical transponder unit include the access service
type, optical module specifications and optical module type.
Table 23-1 Quick reference table for the optical module at client-side specifications of optical
transponder boards
Optical Module Opti
cal
Optical Port Mean Launched Receiv Minim Mod
Acces Type Supported Optical Power er um ule
s Sensiti Overlo Type
Servi Maxim Minim vity ad
Board ce um um (dBm) Point
Name Type (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)
ELOM FC20 1000BASE- -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 SFP

0, SX-0.5km
FC10
0, GE,
CPRI
option
2
FC10 1000BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

0, GE, LX-10km
CPRI
option 1000BASE- 0 -5 -22 -3
2, LX-40km
STM- 1000BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3
4, ZX-80km
ESCO
N,
STM-
1,
FICO
N, FE,
SDI,
DVB-
ASI
GE 1000BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3
BX-10km
(SM1310)

Transport Platform
Optical Module Opti

cal
1000BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3
BX-10km
(SM1490)
1000BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3
BX-40km
(SM1310)
1000BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3
BX-40km
(SM1490)
OTU1 I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3

,
STM- S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
16, L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
FC20
0,
FC10
0, GE,
CPRI
option
2,
CPRI
option
3,
STM-
4,
ESCO
N,
STM-
1s,
FICO
N,
FICO
N
EXPR
ESS,
FE,
SDI,
HD-
SDI,
DVB-
ASI

Transport Platform
Optical Module Opti

cal
STM- S-4.1 -8 -15 -28 -8

4,
STM- L-4.1 2 -3 -28 -8
1, L-4.2 2 -3 -28 -8
DVB-
ASI,
FE,
ESCO
N,
SDI
STM- S-1.1 -8 -15 -28 -8

1, FE
L-1.1 0 -5 -34 -10
L-1.2 0 -5 -34 -10
STM- 100BASE-FX -14 -19 -30 -14

1, FE,
ESCO
N
FC40 - -1.1 -9 -15 0

0
Multi-
mode
FC40 - -1 -8.4 -18 0

0
Single
-mode
FC80 10G BASE-LR 0.5 -8.2 -14.4 0.5 SFP+

0,
FICO 10G BASE-SR -1 -7.3 -11.1 -1
N 8G

Transport Platform
Optical Module Opti

cal
10GE Multi-rate-10km- -1 -6 -11 0.5

LAN, SFP+ (9.95G
10GE bit/s,
WAN, 10.7Gb
STM- it/s)
64, -14.4
FC12 (10.3G
00, bit/s,
FICO 10.5Gb
N it/s)
10G,
CPRI -13.4
option (11.1G
7 bit/s)
CPRI CPRI option6 0.5 -8.2 -11 0.5 SFP

option
6-2km
CPRI CPRI option6 0.5 -8.4 -13.8 0.5

option
6-10k
m
3G- 3G-SDI, SDI, HD- 0 -7 0 -17

SDI SDI
LQM2 FC20 1000BASE- -2.5 -9.5 -17 0 SFP

0, SX-0.5km
FC10
0, GE,
CPRI
option
2
FC10 1000BASE- -3 -9 -20 -3

0, GE, LX-10km
CPRI
option 1000BASE- 0 -5 -22 -3
2, LX-40km
STM-
4,
ESCO
N,
STM-

Transport Platform
Optical Module Opti

cal
1, 1000BASE- 5 -2 -23 -3
FICO ZX-80km
N,
SDI,
DVB-
ASI,
FE
GE 1000BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3
BX-10km
(SM1310)
1000BASE- -3 -9 -19.5 -3
BX-10km
(SM1490)
1000BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3
BX-40km
(SM1310)
1000BASE- 3 -2 -23 -3
BX-40km
(SM1490)
OTU1 I-16 -3 -10 -18 -3

,
STM- S-16.1 0 -5 -18 0
16,
FC20
0,
FC10
0, GE,
CPRI
option
2,
CPRI
option
3,
STM-
4,
ESCO
N,
STM-
1,
FICO

Transport Platform
Optical Module Opti

cal
N, L-16.2 3 -2 -28 -9
FICO
N
EXPR
ESS,
SDI,
HD-
SDI,
DVB-
ASI,
FE
STM- S-4.1 -8 -15 -28 -8

4,
STM- L-4.1 2 -3 -28 -8
1, L-4.2 2 -3 -28 -8
DVB-
ASI,
FE,
ESCO
N,
SDI
STM- S-1.1 -8 -15 -28 -8

1, FE
L-1.1 0 -5 -34 -10
L-1.2 0 -5 -34 -10
STM- 100BASE-FX -14 -19 -30 -14

1, FE,
ESCO
N

Transport Platform
Optical Module Opti

cal
LDX 10GE Multi-Rate SFP -1 -6 -11 0.5 SFP+

LAN, + 10km (9.95G
10GE bit/s,
WAN, 10.7Gb
STM- it/s)
64, -14.4
FC12 (10.3G
00, bit/s,
FICO 10.5Gb
N it/s)
10G
-13.4
(11.1G
bit/s)
FC80 10G BASE-SR -1 -7.3 -11.1 -1

0,
FICO 10G BASE-LR 0.5 -8.2 -14.4 0.5
N 8G
Table 23-2 Quick reference table for the electrical module at client-side specifications of
optical transponder boards
Electrical Module
Electrical Transmiss Transmissi

Access port rate ion on
Service distance bandwidth
Board Name Type (m)
LQM2/ELOM FE 125 Mbit/s 100 98%
GE 1.25 Gbit/s 100 98%

Transport Platform
Table 23-3 Quick reference table for DWDM-side specifications of optical transponder
boards
Optical Module Optica
l
Optical Port Mean Launched Recei Minim Modul
Acce Type Optical Power ver um e Type
ss Supported Sensit Overlo
Serv Maxi Minim ivity ad
ice mum um (dBm) Point
Board Name Type (dBm) (dBm) (dBm)
LQM2 OTU 2400ps/ 3 -1 -28 -8 SFP

1 nm-2mW-
APD
ELOM OTU 800ps/nm 2 -1 -16 0 XFP

2
1600ps/nm 3 -1 -24 -9
800ps/nm 2 -1 -16 0 TXFP
Table 23-4 Quick reference table for CWDM-side specifications of optical transponder
boards
Optical Module Opt
ical
Optical Mean Rec Mini Mo
Port Launched eive mum dule
Ac Type Optical r Overl
ces Typ
Support Power Sen oad e
s ed sitiv Point
Ser Maxi Mini ity (dBm)
vic mu mum (dB
e m (dBm m)
Ty (dB )
Board Name pe m)
LQM2 OT 1600ps/n 5 0 -28 -9 SFP

U1 m
800ps/nm 5 0 -19 -3

Transport Platform
Optical Module Opt

ical
Optical Mean Rec Mini Mo
Port Launched eive mum dule
Ac Type Optical r Overl
ces Typ
Support Power Sen oad e
s ed sitiv Point
Ser Maxi Mini ity (dBm)
vic mu mum (dB
e m (dBm m)
Ty (dB )
Board Name pe m)
ELOM OT 1400ps/n 4 0 -23 -9 XFP

U2 m (1471 (147
nm to 1 nm
1571 to
nm) 1551
3 nm)
(1591 -22
nm to (157
1611 1
nm) nm)
-21
(159
1 nm
to
1611
nm)
23.1.2 Specification of Optical Amplifier Boards

The main specifications of the optical amplifying boards include the operating wavelength
range, channel gain, nominal input power range, nominal output power range and maximum
output power of a single wavelength.

Transport Platform
Table 23-5 Quick reference table for optical amplifying unit
Input Output Output Power Nominal single-

Power Power Range per wavelength input optical
Range Range Channel power (dBm)
(dBm)
Ch Max Mini Ma Mi 16 32 40 16 32 40
an imu mu xi ni Ch Ch Ch Chann Chann Chann
nel m m mu mu an an an els els els
Boa Gai (dB (dB m m nel nel nel
rd n m) m) (d (d s s s
Na (dB B B
me ) m) m)
OB 23 -3 -32 20. -9 4 -19

U 5
23.1.3 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of

Packet Boards
This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of packet boards.
Table 23-6 lists common parameters specified for optical interfaces of packet processing
boards.
Table 23-6 Parameters specified for optical interfaces of packet boards
Board Name Optical Module Type Trans

of missi
Type Mean Launched Receive Mini Fiber on
of Optical Power r mum Dista
Interf Sensiti Overl nce
ace Minim Maxim vity oad
um um (km)
(dBm) (dBm)
(dBm) (dBm)
EF8F 100Bas -19 -14 -30 14 Multi- 2

e-FX mode
LC
100Bas -15 -8 -28 8 Single 15

e-LX -mode
LC
100Bas -5 0 -34 10 Single 40

e-VX -mode
LC
100Bas -5 0 -34 10 Single 80

e-ZX -mode
LC

Transport Platform

of missi
um um (km)
(dBm) (dBm)
(dBm) (dBm)
EM6F, EG4C 1000B -9.5 -2.5 -17 0 Multi- 0.5

ase-SX mode
LC
1000B -9 -3 -20 3 Single 10

ase-LX -mode
LC
1000B -5 0 -23 3 Single 40

ase- -mode
VX LC
1000B -2 5 -23 3 Single 80

ase-ZX -mode
LC
100Bas -19 -14 -30 14 Multi- 2

e-FX mode
LC
100Bas -15 -8 -28 8 Single 15

e-LX -mode
LC
100Bas -5 0 -34 10 Single 40

e-VX -mode
LC
100Bas -5 0 -34 10 Single 80

e-ZX -mode
LC
CQ1 S-1.1 -15 -8 -28 -8 Single 15

-mode
LC
L-1.1 -5 0 -34 -10 Single 40

-mode
LC
L-1.2 -5 0 -34 -10 Single 80

-mode
LC

Transport Platform

of missi
um um (km)
(dBm) (dBm)
(dBm) (dBm)
EX1 10GB -7.3 -1.3 7.5 1 Multi- 0.3

ASE- mode
SR LC
(LAN)
10GB -7.3 -1.3 7.5 1 Multi- 0.3

ASE- mode
SW LC
(WAN)
10GB -8.2 0.5 -12.6 0.5 Single 10

ASE- -mode
LR LC
(LAN)
10GB -8.2 0.5 -12.6 0.5 Single 10

ASE- -mode
LW LC
(WAN)
10GB -4.7 4 -14.1 -1 Single 40

ASE- -mode
ER LC
(LAN)
10GB -4.7 4 -14.1 -1 Single 40

ASE- -mode
EW LC
(WAN)
10GB 0 4 -21 -7 Single 80

ASE- -mode
ZR LC
(LAN)
10GB 0 4 -21 -7 Single 80

ASE- -mode
ZW LC
(WAN)
23.1.4 Common Parameters Specified for Optical Interfaces of

TDM Boards
This topic describes common parameters specified for optical interfaces of SDH boards.

Transport Platform
Table 23-7 lists the common parameters specified for the optical interfaces of the TDM
boards.
Table 23-7 Common parameters specified for the white optical interfaces of the TDM boards
Board Name Optical Module Type
of
Type of Mean Launched Receiver Minimu Fiber
Support Optical Power Sensitivit m
ed y (dBm) Overloa
Optical Minimu Maximu d (dBm)
Interfac m (dBm) m (dBm)
e
SL1Q S-1.1 15 8 28 8 Single-

mode
LC
L-1.1 5 0 34 10 Single-
mode
LC
L-1.2 5 0 34 10 Single-
mode
LC
SL4D S-4.1 15 8 28 8 Single-

mode
LC
L-4.1 3 2 28 8 Single-
mode
LC
L-4.2 3 2 28 8 Single-
mode
LC
EGS4 100Base- -19 -14 -30 -14 Multi-

FX mode
LC
100Base- -15 -8 -28 -8 Single-

LX mode
LC
100Base- -5 0 -34 -10 Single-

VX mode
LC
100Base- -5 0 -34 -10 Single-

ZX mode
LC

Transport Platform
Board Name Optical Module Type

of
Type of Mean Launched Receiver Minimu Fiber
Support Optical Power Sensitivit m
ed y (dBm) Overloa
Optical Minimu Maximu d (dBm)
Interfac m (dBm) m (dBm)
e
1000Bas 9.5 2.5 -17 0 Multi-

e-SX mode
LC
1000Bas -9 -3 -20 -3 Single-

e-LX mode
LC
1000BA -5 0 -23 -3 Single-

SE-VX mode
LC
1000BA -2 5 -23 -3 Single-

SE-ZX mode
LC
23.1.5 Specification of Other Unit

The main specifications of other boards include the insertion loss values of each board.
Table 23-8 Quick reference table for specifications of other boards

Board Name Insertion Loss (dB)
DMD1 eIN-eD1 DWDM: <1.2

wIN-wD1 CWDM: <1.2
eA1-eOUT DWDM: <1.2

wA1-wOUT CWDM: <1.2
wIN-eOUT DWDM: <1.4

eIN-wOUT CWDM: <1.4
DMD1S eIN-eD1 CWDM: <1.2

wIN-wD1
eIN-eSO CWDM: <1.4

wIN-wSO
eA1-eOUT CWDM: <1.2

wA1-wOUT

Transport Platform
eSI-eOUT CWDM: <1.4

wSI-wOUT
wIN-eOUT CWDM: <2.1

eIN-wOUT
DMD2 eIN-eD1 DWDM: <1.5

eIN-eD2 CWDM: <1.5
wIN-wD1
wIN-wD2
eA1-eOUT DWDM: <1.5

eA2-eOUT CWDM: <1.5
wA1-wOUT
wA2-wOUT
wIN-eOUT DWDM: <2.2

eIN-wOUT CWDM: <2.2
DMD2S eIN-eD1 CWDM: <1.5

eIN-eD2
wIN-wD1
wIN-wD2
eIN-eSO CWDM: <2.0

wIN-wSO
eA1-eOUT CWDM: <1.5

eA2-eOUT
wA1-wOUT
wA2-wOUT
eSI-eOUT CWDM: <2.0

wSI-wOUT
eIN-wOUT CWDM: <3.0

wIN-eOUT
MD8 IN-Dx CWDM: 2.0
Ax-OUT CWDM: 2.0
MD8S IN-Dx CWDM: 2.5
IN-SO CWDM: 1.0
Ax-OUT CWDM: 2.5
SI-OUT CWDM: 1.0

Transport Platform
MR1 IN-D1 CWDM: <1.2
A1-OUT CWDM: <1.2
IN-MO CWDM: <1.2
MI-OUT CWDM: <1.2
MR1S IN-D1 DWDM: <1.6

CWDM: <1.2
IN-SO DWDM: <1.0

CWDM: <1.2
A1-OUT DWDM: <1.6

CWDM: <1.2
SI-OUT DWDM: <1.0

CWDM: <1.2
IN-MO DWDM: <1.2

CWDM: <1.2
MI-OUT DWDM: <1.2

CWDM: <1.2
MR2 IN-D1 DWDM: <1.5

IN-D2 CWDM: <1.5
A1-OUT DWDM: <1.5

A2-OUT CWDM: <1.5
IN-MO DWDM: <1.0

CWDM: <1.0
MI-OUT DWDM: <1.0

CWDM: <1.0
MR2S IN-D1 DWDM: <2.0

IN-D2 CWDM: <1.5
IN-SO DWDM: <1.0

CWDM: <1.5
A1-OUT DWDM: <2.0

A2-OUT CWDM: <1.5
SI-OUT DWDM: <1.0

CWDM: <1.5

Transport Platform
IN-MO DWDM: <1.5

CWDM: <1.5
MI-OUT DWDM: <1.5

CWDM: <1.5
MR4 IN-Dx DWDM: <2.0

CWDM: <1.5
Ax-OUT DWDM: <2.0

CWDM: <1.5
IN-MO DWDM: <1.5

CWDM: <1.5
MI-OUT DWDM: <1.5

CWDM: <1.5
MR4S IN-Dx CWDM: <1.5
IN-SO CWDM: <2.0
Ax-OUT CWDM: <1.5
SI-OUT CWDM: <2.0
IN-MO CWDM: <2.0
MI-OUT CWDM: <2.0
MR8 IN-Dx DWDM: 4.0
Ax-OUT DWDM: 4.0
IN-MO CWDM: <3.0
MI-OUT CWDM: <3.0
OLP TI-TO1 <4.0

TI-TO2
RI1-RO <1.5
RI2-RO
SBM1 LINE-D1 DWDM: <1.5

CWDM: <1.5
A1-LINE DWDM: <1.5

CWDM: <1.5
LINE-EXT DWDM: <1.4

CWDM: <1.4

Transport Platform
SBM2 LINE-D1 DWDM: <2.0

LINE-D2 CWDM: <2.0
A1-LINE DWDM: <2.0

A2-LINE CWDM: <2.0
LINE-EXT DWDM: <1.8

CWDM: <1.8
SBM4 LINE-Dx CWDM: <2.8
Ax-LINE CWDM: <2.8
LINE-EXT CWDM: <2.8
SBM8 LINE-Dx DWDM: <3.0
Ax-LINE DWDM: <3.0
SCS Single-mode <4.0
DSFIU LINE1-SYS1 CWDM: 1.0
LINE2-SYS2 DWDM: 1.0
LINE1-OSC1 CWDM: 1.5
LINE1-OSC2 DWDM: 1.5
23.2 Basic Functions of Boards

This topic describes the functions supported by optical transponder boards, and packet boards.
Table 23-9 Basic functions of optical transponder boards

ESC ALS FEC WDM Optical
Board Functio Functio OTN Encodin Specific Module
Name n n Function g ation
ELOM Y Y Y FEC/ DWDM/ Client side:

AFEC-2 CWDM SFP, SFP+
WDM side:
XFP, TXFP
LDX Y Y Y FEC/ DWDM/ Client side:

AFEC-2 CWDM SFP+
WDM side:
XFP, TXFP

Transport Platform
ESC ALS FEC WDM Optical

Board Functio Functio OTN Encodin Specific Module
Name n n Function g ation
LQM2 Y Y Y FEC DWDM/ Client side:

CWDM SFP
WDM side:
SFP
Table 23-10 Basic functions of packet boards

L MP P M M LP ET IG 158 In R
A LS W PL ST T H M 8v2 ba M
G Tun AP S/ P OA P nd ON
B nel S M M Sn DC
oa APS PL oo N
rd S- pi
N E- TP ng
a E- L H O
m Li A Q A
e ne N oS M
EF Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
8F
E Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y N Y Y
M
6F
E Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
G
4C
E Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
X
1
23.3 Loopback Function of the Boards

The optical transponder boards, SDH boards, PDH boards, packet boards and EoS boards of
the OptiN OSN equipment support various types of loopbacks.
Table 23-11 Loopback function of optical transponder boards

WDM Side WDM Side Client-Side Client-Side
Board Inloop Outloop Inloop Outloop
ELOM Y Y Y Y

Transport Platform
WDM Side WDM Side Client-Side Client-Side

Board Inloop Outloop Inloop Outloop
LDX Y Y Y Y
LQM2 Y Y Y Y
Table 23-12 Loopback capability of the SDH boards

Inloop at Outloop at
an an Inloop on a Outloop on a
Board Interface Interface VC-4 Path VC-4 Path
SL1Q Y Y Y Y
SL4D Y Y Y Y
Table 23-13 Loopback capability of the PDH boards

Inloop at an Outloop at an
Board Interface Interface
SP3D Y Y
PL3T Y Y
Table 23-14 Loopback capability of the packet processing boards

Outloop at Inloop at Outloop at
the MAC the MAC the PHY Inloop at the
Board Layer Layer Layer PHY Layer
EF8F N Y N Y
EM6F N Y N Y
EG4C N Y N Y
EX1 N Y N Y
Table 23-15 Loopback capability of the EoS boards

EGS4 N Y N Y

Transport Platform

EFS8 N Y N Y
23.4 Protection Mode of boards

The optical transponder boards, packet board, SDH boards and EoS boards support protection
function.
Table 23-16 Protection mode of optical transponder boards

Board Name Intra-Board 1+1 Client 1+1 ODUk SNCP
Protection Protection Protection
ELOM Y Y Y
LDX Y Y Y
LQM2 Y Y Y
Table 23-17 Protection mode of packet boards

Board Name 1:1 1:1 PW MSTP ERPS LAG
Tunnel APS
APS LPT
EF8F Y Y Y Y Y Y
EM6F Y Y Y Y Y Y
EG4C Y Y Y Y Y Y
EX1 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Table 23-18 Protection mode of SDH boards

Board Name Two-Fiber Ring Linear MSP SNCP
MSP
SL1Q Y Y Y
SL4D Y Y Y

Transport Platform
Table 23-19 Protection mode of EoS boards

Board Name LAG LCAS LPT STP/ MSTP
DLAG RSTP
EGS4 Y Y Y Y Y N
EFS8 N Y Y Y Y N

Transport Platform
Hardware Description A Glossary
A Glossary
Numerics
1U The standard electronics industries association (EIA) rack unit (44 mm/1.75 in.)
3G See 3rd Generation.
3R reshaping, retiming, regenerating
3rd Generation (3G) The third generation of digital wireless technology, as defined by the International
Telecommunications Union (ITU). Third generation technology is expected to deliver
data transmission speeds between 144 kbit/s and 2 Mbit/s, compared to the 9.6 kbit/s
to 19.2 kbit/s offered by second generation technology.
802.1Q in 802.1Q A VLAN feature that allows the equipment to add a VLAN tag to a tagged frame. The
(QinQ) implementation of QinQ is to add a public VLAN tag to a frame with a private VLAN
tag to allow the frame with double VLAN tags to be transmitted over the service
provider's backbone network based on the public VLAN tag. This provides a layer 2
VPN tunnel for customers and enables transparent transmission of packets over
private VLANs.
A
A/D analog/digit
AAA See Authentication, Authorization and Accounting.
AAL5 ATM Adaptation Layer Type 5
AC alternating current
ACH associated channel header
ACL See access control list.
ADM add/drop multiplexer
AF See assured forwarding.
AGC automatic gain control
AIS alarm indication signal
ALC See automatic level control.
ALS See automatic laser shutdown.

Transport Platform
AMI See alternate mark inversion.

APC automatic phase changer
APD See avalanche photodiode.
APE See automatic power equilibrium.
API See application programming interface.
APS automatic protection switching
ARP See Address Resolution Protocol.
AS See autonomous system.
ATM asynchronous transfer mode
AU See administrative unit.
Address Resolution An Internet Protocol used to map IP addresses to MAC addresses. The ARP protocol
Protocol (ARP) enables hosts and routers to determine link layer addresses through ARP requests and
responses. The address resolution is a process by which the host converts the target IP
address into a target MAC address before transmitting a frame. The basic function of
ARP is to use the target equipment's IP address to query its MAC address.
Authentication, A mechanism for configuring authentication, authorization, and accounting security
Authorization and services. Authentication refers to the verification of user identities and the related
Accounting (AAA) network services; authorization refers to the granting of network services to users
according to authentication results; and accounting refers to the tracking of the
consumption of network services by users.
access control list A list of entities, together with their access rights, which are authorized to access a
(ACL) resource.
administrative unit The information structure that enables adaptation between the higher order path layer
(AU) and the multiplex section layer. The administrative unit consists of an information
payload (the higher order VC) and an AU pointer, which indicates the offset of the
payload frame start relative to the multiplex section frame start.
alternate mark A synchronous clock encoding technique which uses bipolar pulses to represent
inversion (AMI) logical 1 values.
application An application programming interface is a particular set of rules and specifications
programming interface that are used for communication between software programs.
(API)
assured forwarding One of the four per-hop behaviors (PHB) defined by the Diff-Serv workgroup of IETF.
(AF) It is suitable for certain key data services that require assured bandwidth and short
delay. For traffic within the bandwidth limit, AF assures quality in forwarding. For
traffic that exceeds the bandwidth limit, AF degrades the service class and continues
to forward the traffic instead of discarding the packets.
automatic laser A technique (procedure) to automatically shutdown the output power of laser
shutdown (ALS) transmitters and optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels.
automatic level control A feature that identifies speech signals and adjusts the sound volume to stay within a
(ALC) comfortable range, improving user experience.
automatic power A function to automatically equalize channel optical power at the transmitter end,
equilibrium (APE) ensuring a required optical power flatness and OSNR at the receiver end.

Transport Platform
autonomous system A network set that uses the same routing policy and is managed by the same
(AS) technology administration department. Each AS has a unique identifier that is an
integer ranging from 1 to 65535. The identifier is assigned by IANA. An AS can be
divided into areas.
avalanche photodiode A semiconductor photodetector with integral detection and amplification stages.
(APD) Electrons generated at a p/n junction are accelerated in a region where they free an
avalanche of other electrons. APDs can detect faint signals but require higher voltages
than other semiconductor electronics.
B
B-ISDN See broadband integrated services digital network.
BA booster amplifier
BBE background block error
BBER background block error ratio
BC boundary clock
BDI See backward defect indication.
BE See best effort.
BEI backward error indication
BER bit error rate
BFD See Bidirectional Forwarding Detection.
BGP Border Gateway Protocol
BIAE backward incoming alignment error
BIOS See basic input/output system.
BIP See bit interleaved parity.
BIP-8 See bit interleaved parity-8.
BITS See building integrated timing supply.
BMC best master clock
BPDU See bridge protocol data unit.
BRAS See broadband remote access server.
BSC See base station controller.
BTS base transceiver station
BTV broadband TV
Bidirectional A fast and independent hello protocol that delivers millisecond-level link failure
Forwarding Detection detection and provides carrier-class availability. After sessions are established between
(BFD) neighboring systems, the systems can periodically send BFD packets to each other. If
one system fails to receive a BFD packet within the negotiated period, the system
regards that the bidirectional link fails and instructs the upper layer protocol to take
actions to recover the faulty link.
backward defect A function that the sink node of a LSP, when detecting a defect, uses to inform the
indication (BDI) upstream end of the LSP of a downstream defect along the return path.

Transport Platform
base station controller A logical entity that connects the BTS with the MSC in a GSM/CDMA network. It
(BSC) interworks with the BTS through the Abis interface, the MSC through the A interface.
It provides the following functions: radio resource management, base station
management, power control, handover control, and traffic measurement. One BSC
controls and manages one or more BTSs in an actual network.
basic input/output Firmware stored on the computer motherboard that contains basic input/output control
system (BIOS) programs, power-on self test (POST) programs, bootstraps, and system setting
information. The BIOS provides hardware setting and control functions for the
computer.
best effort (BE) A traditional IP packet transport service. In this service, the diagrams are forwarded
following the sequence of the time they reach. All diagrams share the bandwidth of
the network and routers. The amount of resource that a diagram can use depends of the
time it reaches. BE service does not ensure any improvement in delay time, jitter,
packet loss ratio, and high reliability.
bit interleaved parity A method of error monitoring. With even parity, the transmitting equipment generates
(BIP) an X-bit code over a specified portion of the signal in such a manner that the first bit
of the code provides even parity over the first bit of all X-bit sequences in the covered
portion of the signal, the second bit provides even parity over the second bit of all X-
bit sequences within the specified portion, and so forth. Even parity is generated by
setting the BIP-X bits so that an even number of 1s exist in each monitored partition
of the signal. A monitored partition comprises all bits in the same bit position within
the X-bit sequences in the covered portion of the signal. The covered portion includes
the BIP-X.
bit interleaved parity-8 Consists of a parity byte calculated bit-wise across a large number of bytes in a
(BIP-8) transmission transport frame. Divide a frame is into several blocks with 8 bits (one
byte) in a parity unit and then arrange the blocks in matrix. Compute the number of
"1" or "0" over each column. Then fill a 1 in the corresponding bit for the result if the
number is odd, otherwise fill a 0.
blacklist A method of filtering packets based on their source IP addresses. Compared with
ACL, the match condition for the black list is much simpler. Therefore, the black list
can filter packets at a higher speed and can effectively screen the packet sent from the
specific IP address.
bridge protocol data Data messages exchanged across switches within an extended LAN that uses a
unit (BPDU) spanning tree protocol (STP) topology. BPDU packets contain information on ports,
addresses, priorities, and costs, and they ensure that the data reaches its intended
destination. BPDU messages are exchanged across bridges to detect loops in a
network topology. These loops are then removed by shutting down selected bridge
interfaces and placing redundant switch ports in a backup, or blocked, state.
broadband integrated A standard defined by the ITU-T to handle high-bandwidth applications, such as
services digital voice. It currently uses the ATM technology to transmit data over SONNET-based
network (B-ISDN) circuits at 155 to 622 Mbit/s or higher speed.
broadband remote A new type of access gateway for broadband networks. As a bridge between backbone
access server (BRAS) networks and broadband access networks, BRAS provides methods for fundamental
access and manages the broadband access network. It is deployed at the edge of
network to provide broadband access services, convergence, and forwarding of
multiple services, meeting the demands for transmission capacity and bandwidth
utilization of different users. BRAS is a core device for the broadband users' access to
a broadband network.

Transport Platform
building integrated In the situation of multiple synchronous nodes or communication devices, one can use
timing supply (BITS) a device to set up a clock system on the hinge of telecom network to connect the
synchronous network as a whole, and provide satisfactory synchronous base signals to
the building integrated device. This device is called BITS.
C
CAPEX capital expenditure
CAR committed access rate
CATV cable TV
CBR See constant bit rate.
CBS See committed burst size.
CC See continuity check.
CD chromatic dispersion
CDVT cell delay variation tolerance
CE See customer edge.
CENELEC European Committee for Electrotechnical Standardization
CES See circuit emulation service.
CFM connectivity fault management
CFR cell fill rate
CGMP Cisco Group Management Protocol
CIR committed information rate
CIST See Common and Internal Spanning Tree.
CLNP connectionless network protocol
CLP See cell loss priority.
CMI coded mark inversion
CODEC coder/decoder
CORBA See Common Object Request Broker Architecture.
CPLD complex programmable logical device
CPRI See common public radio interface.
CPU See central processing unit.
CRC See cyclic redundancy check.
CRPC case-shape Raman pump amplifier unit for C-band
CS class selector
CSA Canadian Standards Association
CSES consecutive severely errored second
CSF Client Signal Fail
CSMA/CD See carrier sense multiple access with collision detection.

Transport Platform
CTC common transmit clock

CV connectivity verification
CW control word
CWDM See coarse wavelength division multiplexing.
CoS class of service
Common Object A specification developed by the Object Management Group in 1992 in which pieces
Request Broker of programs (objects) communicate with other objects in other programs, even if the
Architecture (CORBA) two programs are written in different programming languages and are running on
different platforms. A program makes its request for objects through an object request
broker, or ORB, and therefore does not need to know the structure of the program
from which the object comes. CORBA is designed to work in object-oriented
environments.
Common and Internal The single spanning tree jointly calculated by STP and RSTP, the logical connectivity
Spanning Tree (CIST) using MST bridges and regions, and MSTP. The CIST ensures that all LANs in the
bridged local area network are simply and fully connected.
carrier sense multiple Carrier sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) is a computer
access with collision networking access method in which:
detection (CSMA/CD)
l A carrier sensing scheme is used.
l A transmitting data station that detects another signal while transmitting a frame,
stops transmitting that frame, transmits a jam signal, and then waits for a random
time interval before trying to send that frame again.
cell loss priority (CLP) A field in the ATM cell header that determines the probability of a cell being dropped
if the network becomes congested. Cells with CLP = 0 are insured traffic, which is
unlikely to be dropped. Cells with CLP = 1 are best-effort traffic, which might be
dropped.
central processing unit The computational and control unit of a computer. The CPU is the device that
(CPU) interprets and executes instructions. The CPU has the ability to fetch, decode, and
execute instructions and to transfer information to and from other resources over the
computer's main data-transfer path, the bus.
circuit emulation A function with which the E1/T1 data can be transmitted through ATM networks. At
service (CES) the transmission end, the interface module packs timeslot data into ATM cells. These
ATM cells are sent to the reception end through the ATM network. At the reception
end, the interface module re-assigns the data in these ATM cells to E1/T1 timeslots.
The CES technology guarantees that the data in E1/T1 timeslots can be recovered to
the original sequence at the reception end.
coarse wavelength A signal transmission technology that multiplexes widely-spaced optical channels into
division multiplexing the same fiber. CWDM spaces wavelengths at a distance of several nm. CWDM does
(CWDM) not support optical amplifiers and is applied in short-distance chain networking.
committed burst size A parameter used to define the capacity of token bucket C, that is, the maximum burst
(CBS) IP packet size when information is transferred at the committed information rate. This
parameter must be greater than 0 but should be not less than the maximum length of
an IP packet to be forwarded.

Transport Platform
common public radio A common standard of the key internal interface between the REC and the RE of the
interface (CPRI) wireless base station. This standard was established by Huawei, Ericsson, NEC,
Siemens, and Nortel in June 2003. It aims at standardizing the baseband and RF
interface. The CPRI has a set of mature standards, which advance the standard and
equipment. The major feature of the CPRI is that baseband is separated from RF to
reduce the cost of engineering, equipment room, and equipment.
constant bit rate A kind of service categories defined by the ATM forum. CBR transfers cells based on
(CBR) the constant bandwidth. It is applicable to service connections that depend on precise
clocking to ensure undistorted transmission.
continuity check (CC) An Ethernet connectivity fault management (CFM) method used to detect the
connectivity between MEPs by having each MEP periodically transmit a Continuity
Check Message (CCM).
customer edge (CE) A part of the BGP/MPLS IP VPN model that provides interfaces for directly
connecting to the Service Provider (SP) network. A CE can be a router, switch, or
host.
cyclic redundancy A procedure used to check for errors in data transmission. CRC error checking uses a
check (CRC) complex calculation to generate a number based on the data transmitted. The sending
device performs the calculation before performing the transmission and includes the
generated number in the packet it sends to the receiving device. The receiving device
then repeats the same calculation. If both devices obtain the same result, the
transmission is considered to be error free. This procedure is known as a redundancy
check because each transmission includes not only data but extra (redundant) error-
checking values.
D
DAPI destination access point identifier
DBPS distributed board protect system
DC direct current
DC-I See DC-return isolate (with ground).
DC-return isolate (with A power system, in which the BGND of the DC return conductor is short-circuited
ground) (DC-I) with the PGND on the output side of the power supply cabinet and is isolated from the
PGND on the line between the output of the power supply cabinet and the electric
equipment.
DCC See data communications channel.
DCF See dispersion compensation fiber.
DCM See dispersion compensation module.
DCN See data communication network.
DDF digital distribution frame
DE discard eligible
DHCP See Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
DIP switch dual in-line package switch
DM See delay measurement.
DMUX demultiplexer

Transport Platform
DNI dual node interconnection

DRDB dynamic random database
DRZ differential phase return to zero
DSCP See differentiated services code point.
DSLAM See digital subscriber line access multiplexer.
DSP digital signal processing
DTE See data terminal equipment.
DVB digital video broadcasting
DVB-ASI digital video broadcast-asynchronous serial interface
DVMRP See Distance Vector Multicast Routing Protocol.
DWDM See dense wavelength division multiplexing.
DiffServ See Differentiated Services.
Differentiated Services An IETF standard that defines a mechanism for controlling and forwarding traffic in a
(DiffServ) differentiated manner based on CoS settings to handle network congestion.
Distance Vector An Internet gateway protocol based primarily on the RIP. The DVMRP protocol
Multicast Routing implements a typical dense mode IP multicast solution and uses IGMP to exchange
Protocol (DVMRP) routing datagrams with its neighbors.
Dynamic Host A client-server networking protocol. A DHCP server provides configuration
Configuration Protocol parameters specific to the DHCP client host requesting information the host requires
(DHCP) to participate on the Internet network. DHCP also provides a mechanism for allocating
IP addresses to hosts.
data communication A communication network used in a TMN or between TMNs to support the data
network (DCN) communication function.
data communications The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to
channel (DCC) transmit information on the operation, management, maintenance, and provisioning
(OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channel composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to
as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel composed of bytes D4-D12
is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel.
data terminal A user device composing the UNI. The DTE accesses the data network through the
equipment (DTE) DCE equipment (for example, a modem) and usually uses the clock signals produced
by DCE.
delay measurement The time elapsed since the start of transmission of the first bit of the frame by a source
(DM) node until the reception of the last bit of the loopbacked frame by the same source
node, when the loopback is performed at the frame's destination node.
dense wavelength The technology that utilizes the characteristics of broad bandwidth and low
division multiplexing attenuation of single mode optical fiber, employs multiple wavelengths with specific
(DWDM) frequency spacing as carriers, and allows multiple channels to transmit simultaneously
in the same fiber.

Transport Platform
differentiated services According to the QoS classification standard of the Differentiated Service (Diff-Serv),
code point (DSCP) the type of services (ToS) field in the IP header consists of six most significant bits
and two currently unused bits, which are used to form codes for priority marking.
Differentiated services code point (DSCP) is the six most important bits in the ToS. It
is the combination of IP precedence and types of service. The DSCP value is used to
ensure that routers supporting only IP precedence can be used because the DSCP
value is compatible with IP precedence. Each DSCP maps a per-hop behavior (PHB).
Therefore, terminal devices can identify traffic using the DSCP value.
digital subscriber line A network device, usually situated in the main office of a telephone company, that
access multiplexer receives signals from multiple customer Digital Subscriber Line (DSL) connections
(DSLAM) and uses multiplexing techniques to put these signals on a high-speed backbone line.
dispersion The maximum error of the local clock compared with the reference clock.
dispersion A type of fiber that uses negative dispersion to compensate for the positive dispersion
compensation fiber of the transmitting fiber to maintain the original shape of the signal pulse.
(DCF)
dispersion A type of module that contains dispersion compensation fibers to compensate for the
compensation module dispersion of the transmitting fiber.
(DCM)
dual-ended switching A protection method in which switching is performed at both ends of a protected
entity, such as a connection or path, even if a unidirectional failure occurs.
E
E-LAN See Ethernet local area network.
E-Line See Ethernet line.
E-Tree See Ethernet-tree.
E2E end to end
ECC See embedded control channel.
EDFA See erbium-doped fiber amplifier.
EF See expedited forwarding.
EFM Ethernet in the First Mile
EMC See electromagnetic compatibility.
EMI See electromagnetic interference.
EMS See element management system.
EPL See Ethernet private line.
EPLAN See Ethernet private LAN service.
EPON See Ethernet passive optical network.
ERPS Ethernet ring protection switching
ESC See electric supervisory channel.
ESCON See enterprise system connection.
ESD electrostatic discharge

Transport Platform
ESN See equipment serial number.

ETS European Telecommunication Standards
ETSI See European Telecommunications Standards Institute.
EVC Ethernet virtual connection
EVOA electrical variable optical attenuator
EVPL See Ethernet virtual private line.
EVPLAN See Ethernet virtual private LAN service.
EXP See experimental bits.
Ethernet A LAN technology that uses the carrier sense multiple access with collision detection
(CSMA/CD) media access control method. The Ethernet network is highly reliable
and easy to maintain. The speed of an Ethernet interface can be 10 Mbit/s, 100 Mbit/s,
1000 Mbit/s, or 10,000 Mbit/s.
Ethernet line (E-Line) A type of Ethernet service that is based on a point-to-point EVC (Ethernet virtual
connection).
Ethernet local area A type of Ethernet service that is based on a multipoint-to-multipoint EVC (Ethernet
network (E-LAN) virtual connection).
Ethernet passive A passive optical network based on Ethernet. It is a new generation broadband access
optical network technology that uses a point-to-multipoint structure and passive fiber transmission. It
(EPON) supports upstream/downstream symmetrical rates of 1.25 Gbit/s and a reach distance
of up to 20 km. In the downstream direction, the bandwidth is shared based on
encrypted broadcast transmission for different users. In the upstream direction, the
bandwidth is shared based on TDM. EPON meets the requirements for high
bandwidth.
Ethernet private LAN A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
service (EPLAN) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between multipoint-to-
multipoint connections.
Ethernet private line A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
(EPL) networks. This service is carried over dedicated bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private LAN service networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between multipoint-to-
(EVPLAN) multipoint connections.
Ethernet virtual A type of Ethernet service provided by SDH, PDH, ATM, or MPLS server layer
private line (EVPL) networks. This service is carried over shared bandwidth between point-to-point
connections.
Ethernet-tree (E-Tree) An Ethernet service type that is based on a Point-to-multipoint Ethernet virtual
connection.
European A standards-setting body in Europe. Also the standards body responsible for GSM.
Telecommunications
Standards Institute
(ETSI)
eSFP enhanced small form-factor pluggable

Transport Platform
electric supervisory A technology that implements communication among all the nodes and transmission
channel (ESC) of monitoring data in an optical transmission network. The monitoring data of ESC is
introduced into DCC service overhead and is transmitted with service signals.
electromagnetic A condition which prevails when telecommunications equipment is performing its
compatibility (EMC) individually designed function in a common electromagnetic environment without
causing or suffering unacceptable degradation due to unintentional electromagnetic
interference to or from other equipment in the same environment.
electromagnetic Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or
interference (EMI) limits the performance of electronics/electrical equipment.
element management ITU-T compliant software that is used to manage one or more specific types of
system (EMS) network element (NE). An EMS enables a user to individually manage all the features
of each NE, but not the communication between NEs. This communication is
managed by the network management system (NMS).
embedded control A logical channel that uses a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer
channel (ECC) to enable the transmission of operation, administration, and maintenance (OAM)
information between NEs.
enterprise system A path protocol that connects the host to various control units in a storage system.
connection (ESCON) Enterprise system connection is a serial bit stream transmission protocol that operates
a rate of 200 Mbit/s.
equipment serial A string of characters that identify a piece of equipment and ensures correct allocation
number (ESN) of a license file to the specified equipment. It is also called "equipment fingerprint".
erbium-doped fiber An optical device that amplifies optical signals. This device uses a short optical fiber
amplifier (EDFA) doped with the rare-earth element, Erbium. The signal to be amplified and a pump
laser are multiplexed into the doped fiber, and the signal is amplified by interacting
with doping ions. When the amplifier passes an external light source pump, it
amplifies the optical signals in a specific wavelength range.
expedited forwarding The highest order QoS in the Diff-Serv network. EF PHB is suitable for services that
(EF) demand low packet loss ratio, short delay, and broad bandwidth. In all the cases, EF
traffic can guarantee a transmission rate equal to or faster than the set rate. The DSCP
value of EF PHB is "101110".
experimental bits A field in the MPLS packet header, three bits long. This field is always used to
(EXP) identify the CoS of the MPLS packet.
F
FAS frame alignment signal
FC See Fibre Channel.
FDB flash database
FDD See frequency division duplex.
FDDI See fiber distributed data interface.
FDI See forward defect indication.
FDV See frame delay variation.
FEC See forward error correction.
FFD fast failure detection

Transport Platform
FICON See Fibre Connect.

FIFO See first in first out.
FIU fiber interface unit
FLR See frame loss ratio.
FMC See fixed mobile convergence.
FOADM fixed optical add/drop multiplexer
FPGA See field programmable gate array.
FRR See fast reroute.
FTN FEC to NHLFE
FTP File Transfer Protocol
Fibre Channel (FC) A high-speed transport technology used to build SANs. FC is primarily used for
transporting SCSI traffic from servers to disk arrays, but it can also be used on
networks carrying ATM and IP traffic. FC supports single-mode and multi-mode fiber
connections, and can run on twisted-pair copper wires and coaxial cables. FC provides
both connection-oriented and connectionless services.
Fibre Connect A new generation connection protocol that connects the host to various control units.
(FICON) It carries a single byte command protocol through the physical path of fibre channel,
and provides a higher transmission rate and better performance than ESCON.
fast reroute (FRR) A technology which provides a temporary protection of link availability when part of
a network fails. The protocol enables the creation of a standby route or path for an
active route or path. When the active route is unavailable, the traffic on the active
route can be switched to the standby route. When the active route is recovered, the
traffic can be switched back to the active route. FRR is categorized into IP FRR, VPN
FRR, and TE FRR.
fiber distributed data A standard developed by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI) for high-
interface (FDDI) speed fiber-optic LANs. FDDI provides specifications for transmission rates of 100
megabits per second on token ring networks.
field programmable A semi-customized circuit that is used in the Application Specific Integrated Circuit
gate array (FPGA) (ASIC) field and developed based on programmable components. FPGA remedies
many of the deficiencies of customized circuits, and allows the use of many more gate
arrays.
first in first out (FIFO) A stack management method in which data that is stored first in a queue is also read
and invoked first.
fixed mobile Communication service provided based on the combination of fixed-line and wireless
convergence (FMC) technologies. Service providing, access technologies, and terminal devices on an FMC
network are independent from each other. The same service can be obtained from
various access networks. Subscribers from different access networks can obtain and
use the same service.
forward defect A packet generated and traced forward to the sink node of the LSP by the node that
indication (FDI) first detects defects. It includes fields to indicate the nature of the defect and its
location. Its primary purpose is to suppress alarms being raised at affected higher level
client LSPs and (in turn) their client layers.

Transport Platform
forward error A bit error correction technology that adds correction information to the payload at the
correction (FEC) transmit end. Based on the correction information, the bit errors generated during
transmission can be corrected at the receive end.
frame delay variation A measurement of the variations in the frame delay between a pair of service frames,
(FDV) where the service frames belong to the same CoS instance on a point to point ETH
connection.
frame loss ratio (FLR) A ratio, is expressed as a percentage, of the number of service frames not delivered
divided by the total number of service frames during time interval T, where the
number of service frames not delivered is the difference between the number of
service frames arriving at the ingress ETH flow point and the number of service
frames delivered at the egress ETH flow point in a point-to-point ETH connection.
frequency division An application in which channels are divided by frequency. In an FDD system, the
duplex (FDD) uplink and downlink use different frequencies. Downlink data is sent through bursts.
Both uplink and downlink transmission use frames with fixed time length.
G
G-ACH generic associated channel header
GAL generic associated channel header label
GCC general communication channel
GNE See gateway network element.
GPON gigabit-capable passive optical network
GRE See Generic Routing Encapsulation.
GSM See Global System for Mobile Communications.
GUI graphical user interface
Generic Routing A mechanism for encapsulating any network layer protocol over any other network.
Encapsulation (GRE) GRE is used for encapsulating IP datagrams tunneled through the Internet. GRE
serves as a Layer 3 tunneling protocol and provides a tunnel for transparently
Global System for The second-generation mobile networking standard defined by European
Mobile Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI). It is aimed at designing a standard for
Communications global mobile phone networks. The standard allows a subscriber to use a phone
(GSM) globally. GSM consists of three main parts: mobile switching subsystem (MSS), base
station subsystem (BSS), and mobile station (MS).
gateway network An NE that serves as a gateway for other NEs to communicate with a network
element (GNE) management system.
H
HA See high availability.
HD-SDI high definition serial digital interface
HDB3 See high density bipolar of order 3 code.
HDLC High-Level Data Link Control
HDTV See high definition television.

Transport Platform
HEC See header error control.

HPA higher order path adaptation
HQoS See hierarchical quality of service.
HSDPA See High Speed Downlink Packet Access.
HSI high-speed Internet
HSPA High Speed Packet Access
High Speed Downlink A modulating-demodulating algorithm put forward in 3GPP R5 to meet the
Packet Access requirement for asymmetric uplink and downlink transmission of data services. It
(HSDPA) enables the maximum downlink data service rate to reach 14.4 Mbit/s without
changing the WCDMA network topology.
header error control A field within the ATM frame whose purpose is to correct any single bit error in the
(HEC) cell Header and also to detect any multi-bit errors. It actually performs a CRC check in
the first four header bits and also at the receiving end.
hierarchical quality of A type of QoS that controls the traffic of users and performs the scheduling according
service (HQoS) to the priority of user services. HQoS has an advanced traffic statistics function, and
the administrator can monitor the usage of bandwidth of each service. Hence, the
bandwidth can be allocated reasonably through traffic analysis.
high availability (HA) A scheme in which two modules operate in active/standby mode to achieve high
availability. When the active module fails, the standby module automatically takes
over the system functions of the active module.
high definition A type of TV that is capable of displaying at least 720 progressive or 1080 interlaced
television (HDTV) active scan lines. It must be capable of displaying a 16:9 image using at least 540
progressive or 810 interlaced active scan lines.
high density bipolar of A code used for baseband transmissions between telecommunications devices. The
order 3 code (HDB3) HDB3 code has the following feature: high capability of clock extraction, no direct
current component, error-checking capability, and a maximum of three consecutive
zeros.
I
IAE incoming alignment error
IANA See Internet Assigned Numbers Authority.
IC See integrated circuit.
ICC See ITU carrier code.
ICMP See Internet Control Message Protocol.
IE Internet Explorer
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE See Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers.
IETF Internet Engineering Task Force
IGMP See Internet Group Management Protocol.

Transport Platform
IGMP snooping A multicast constraint mechanism running on a layer 2 device. This protocol manages
and controls the multicast group by listening to and analyzing Internet Group
Management Protocol (IGMP) packets between hosts and Layer 3 devices. In this
manner, the spread of the multicast data on layer 2 network can be prevented
efficiently.
IGRP Interior Gateway Routing Protocol
ILM incoming label map
IMA See inverse multiplexing over ATM.
IP Internet Protocol
IPA See intelligent power adjustment.
IPTV See Internet Protocol television.
IPv4 See Internet Protocol version 4.
IPv6 See Internet Protocol version 6.
IS-IS See Intermediate System to Intermediate System.
ISO International Organization for Standardization
ISP See Internet service provider.
ITC independent transmit clock
ITU See International Telecommunication Union.
ITU carrier code (ICC) A code assigned to a network operator/service provider, maintained by the ITU-T
Telecommunication Standardization Bureau (TSB).
ITU-T International Telecommunication Union-Telecommunication Standardization Sector
IWF Interworking Function
Institute of Electrical A professional association of electrical and electronics engineers based in the United
and Electronics States, but with membership from numerous other countries. The IEEE focuses on
Engineers (IEEE) electrical, electronics, and computer engineering, and produces many important
technology standards.
Intermediate System to A protocol used by network devices (routers) to determine the best way to forward
Intermediate System datagram or packets through a packet-based network.
(IS-IS)
International A United Nations agency, one of the most important and influential recommendation
Telecommunication bodies, responsible for recommending standards for telecommunication (ITU-T) and
Union (ITU) radio networks (ITU-R).
Internet Assigned A department operated by the IAB. IANA delegates authority for IP address-space
Numbers Authority allocation and domain-name assignment to the NIC and other organizations. IANA
(IANA) also maintains a database of assigned protocol identifiers used in the TCP/IP suite,
including autonomous system numbers.
Internet Control A network layer protocol that provides message control and error reporting between a
Message Protocol host server and an Internet gateway.
(ICMP)
Internet Group One of the TCP/IP protocols for managing the membership of Internet Protocol
Management Protocol multicast groups. It is used by IP hosts and adjacent multicast routers to establish and
(IGMP) maintain multicast group memberships.

Transport Platform
Internet Protocol A system that provides TV services over the IP network. In the IPTV system, media
television (IPTV) streams from satellites, terrestrial, and studios are converted by the encoder to the
media streams applicable to the IP network. Then the media streams are transmitted to
the terminal layer on the IP network. Media content is displayed on a TV set after
media streams are processed by specified receiving devices (for example, an STB).
Internet Protocol The current version of the Internet Protocol (IP). IPv4 utilizes a 32bit address which is
version 4 (IPv4) assigned to hosts. An address belongs to one of five classes (A, B, C, D, or E) and is
written as 4 octets separated by periods and may range from 0.0.0.0 through to
255.255.255.255. Each IPv4 address consists of a network number, an optional
subnetwork number, and a host number. The network and subnetwork numbers
together are used for routing, and the host number is used to address an individual host
within the network or subnetwork.
Internet Protocol An update version of IPv4, which is designed by the Internet Engineering Task Force
version 6 (IPv6) (IETF) and is also called IP Next Generation (IPng). It is a new version of the Internet
Protocol. The difference between IPv6 and IPv4 is that an IPv4 address has 32 bits
while an IPv6 address has 128 bits.
Internet service An organization that offers users access to the Internet and related services.
provider (ISP)
integrated circuit (IC) A combination of inseparable associated circuit elements that are formed in place and
interconnected on or within a single base material to perform a microcircuit function.
intelligent power A technology that reduces the optical power of all the amplifiers in an adjacent
adjustment (IPA) regeneration section in the upstream to a safe level if the system detects the loss of
optical signals on the link. IPA helps ensure that maintenance engineers are not injured
by the laser escaping from a broken fiber or a connector that is not plugged in
properly.
inverse multiplexing A technique that involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a
over ATM (IMA) cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose
rate is approximately the sum of the link rates.
L
L2VPN Layer 2 virtual private network
L3VPN Layer 3 virtual private network
LACP See Link Aggregation Control Protocol.
LACPDU Link Aggregation Control Protocol data unit
LAG See link aggregation group.
LAN See local area network.
LAPD link access procedure on the D channel
LAPS Link Access Protocol-SDH
LB See loopback.
LC Lucent connector
LCAS See link capacity adjustment scheme.
LCK See Locked signal function.
LCT local craft terminal

Transport Platform
LDP Label Distribution Protocol

LER See label edge router.
LM See loss measurement.
LOC loss of continuity
LOM loss of multiframe
LOS See loss of signal.
LP logical port
LPA lower order path adaptation
LPT link-state pass through
LSA link-state advertisement
LSR See label switching router.
LT linktrace
LTC loss of tandem connection
LTE Long Term Evolution
Link Aggregation A dynamic link aggregation protocol that improves the transmission speed and
Control Protocol reliability. The two ends of the link send LACP packets to inform each other of their
(LACP) parameters and form a logical aggregation link. After the aggregation link is formed,
LACP maintains the link status in real time and dynamically adjusts the ports on the
aggregation link upon detecting the failure of a physical port.
Locked signal function A function administratively locks an MEG end point (MEP) at the server layer,
(LCK) informs consequential data traffic interruption to the peer MEP at the client layer, and
suppresses the alarm at the client layer.
label edge router A device that sits at the edge of an MPLS domain, that uses routing information to
(LER) assign labels to datagrams and then forwards them into the MPLS domain.
label switching router Basic element of an MPLS network. All LSRs support the MPLS protocol. The LSR
(LSR) is composed of two parts: control unit and forwarding unit. The former is responsible
for allocating the label, selecting the route, creating the label forwarding table,
creating and removing the label switch path; the latter forwards the labels according to
groups received in the label forwarding table.
link aggregation group An aggregation that allows one or more links to be aggregated together to form a link
(LAG) aggregation group so that a MAC client can treat the link aggregation group as if it
were a single link.
link capacity LCAS in the virtual concatenation source and sink adaptation functions provides a
adjustment scheme control mechanism to hitless increase or decrease the capacity of a link to meet the
(LCAS) bandwidth needs of the application. It also provides a means of removing member
links that have experienced failure. The LCAS assumes that in cases of capacity
initiation, increases or decreases, the construction or destruction of the end-to-end path
is the responsibility of the network and element management systems.
local area network A network formed by the computers and workstations within the coverage of a few
(LAN) square kilometers or within a single building, featuring high speed and low error rate.
Current LANs are generally based on switched Ethernet or Wi-Fi technology and run
at 1,000 Mbit/s (that is, 1 Gbit/s).

Transport Platform
loopback (LB) A troubleshooting technique that returns a transmitted signal to its source so that the
signal or message can be analyzed for errors. The loopback can be a inloop or outloop.
loss measurement A method used to collect counter values applicable for ingress and egress service
(LM) frames where the counters maintain a count of transmitted and received data frames
between a pair of MEPs.
loss of signal (LOS) No transitions occurring in the received signal.
M
MA maintenance association
MAC See Media Access Control.
MAN See metropolitan area network.
MBB mobile broadband
MBS maximum burst size
MCA multi-channel spectrum analyzer unit
MD See maintenance domain.
MDF See main distribution frame.
MDI medium dependent interface
ME See maintenance entity.
MEP maintenance end point
MFAS See multiframe alignment signal.
MIB See management information base.
MLD See multicast listener discovery.
MLT mechanized loop testing
MPI-R main path interface at the receiver
MPI-S main path interface at the transmitter
MPLS See Multiprotocol Label Switching.
MPLS TE multiprotocol label switching traffic engineering
MS multiplex section
MS-PW See multi-segment pseudo wire.
MSA multiplex section adaptation
MSI multiframe structure identifier
MSOH multiplex section overhead
MSP See multiplex section protection.
MSTP See Multiple Spanning Tree Protocol.
MTBF See mean time between failures.
MTTR See mean time to repair.
MTU See maximum transmission unit.

Transport Platform
MUX See multiplexer.

MVOA mechanical variable optical attenuator
Media Access Control A protocol at the media access control sublayer. The protocol is at the lower part of
(MAC) the data link layer in the OSI model and is mainly responsible for controlling and
connecting the physical media at the physical layer. When transmitting data, the MAC
protocol checks whether to be able to transmit data. If the data can be transmitted,
certain control information is added to the data, and then the data and the control
information are transmitted in a specified format to the physical layer. When receiving
data, the MAC protocol checks whether the information is correct and whether the
data is transmitted correctly. If the information is correct and the data is transmitted
correctly, the control information is removed from the data and then the data is
transmitted to the LLC layer.
Multiple Spanning A protocol that can be used in a loop network. Using an algorithm, the MSTP blocks
Tree Protocol (MSTP) redundant paths so that the loop network can be trimmed as a tree network. In this
case, the proliferation and endless cycling of packets is avoided in the loop network.
The protocol that introduces the mapping between VLANs and multiple spanning
trees. This solves the problem that data cannot be normally forwarded in a VLAN
because in STP/RSTP, only one spanning tree corresponds to all the VLANs.
Multiprotocol Label A technology that uses short tags of fixed length to encapsulate packets in different
Switching (MPLS) link layers, and provides connection-oriented switching for the network layer on the
basis of IP routing and control protocols.
main distribution A device at a central office, on which all local loops are terminated.
frame (MDF)
maintenance domain The network or the part of the network for which connectivity is managed by
(MD) connectivity fault management (CFM). The devices in a maintenance domain are
managed by a single Internet service provider (ISP).
maintenance entity An ME consists of a pair of maintenance entity group end points (MEPs), two ends of
(ME) a transport trail, and maintenance association intermediate points (MIPs) on the trail.
management A type of database used for managing the devices in a communications network. It
information base comprises a collection of objects in a (virtual) database used to manage entities (such
(MIB) as routers and switches) in a network.
maximum The largest packet of data that can be transmitted on a network. MTU size varies,
transmission unit depending on the network576 bytes on X.25 networks, for example, 1500 bytes on
(MTU) Ethernet, and 17,914 bytes on 16 Mbit/s token ring. Responsibility for determining the
size of the MTU lies with the link layer of the network. When packets are transmitted
across networks, the path MTU, or PMTU, represents the smallest packet size (the one
that all networks can transmit without breaking up the packet) among the networks
involved.
mean time between The average time between consecutive failures of a piece of equipment. It is a measure
failures (MTBF) of the reliability of the system.
mean time to repair The average time that a device will take to recover from a failure.
(MTTR)
metropolitan area A medium-scale computer network with area larger than that covered by a LAN and
network (MAN) smaller than that covered by a WAN. It interconnects multiple LAN networks in a
geographic region of a city.

Transport Platform
multi-segment pseudo A collection of multiple adjacent PW segments. Each PW segment is a point-to-point

wire (MS-PW) PW. The use of MS-PWs to bear services saves tunnel resources and can transport
services over different networks.
multicast listener A protocol used by an IPv6 router to discover the multicast listeners on their directly
discovery (MLD) connected network segments, and to set up and maintain member relationships. On
IPv6 networks, after MLD is configured on the receiver hosts and the multicast router
to which the hosts are directly connected, the hosts can dynamically join related
groups and the multicast router can manage members on the local network.
multiframe alignment A distinctive signal inserted into every multiframe or once into every n multiframes,
signal (MFAS) always occupying the same relative position within the multiframe, and used to
establish and maintain multiframe alignment.
multiplex section A function, which is performed to provide capability for switching a signal between
protection (MSP) and including two multiplex section termination (MST) functions, from a "working" to
a "protection" channel.
multiplexer (MUX) Equipment that combines a number of tributary channels onto a fewer number of
aggregate bearer channels, the relationship between the tributary and aggregate
channels being fixed.
N
NAS network access server
NBI See northbound interface.
NDF new data flag
NHLFE next hop label forwarding entry
NLP normal link pulse
NNI network-to-network interface
NOC network operations center
NPC See network parameter control.
NPE network provider edge
NRT-VBR non-real-time variable bit rate
NRZ non-return to zero
NSAP See network service access point.
NSF non-stop forwarding
NTP Network Time Protocol
network parameter During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each
control (NPC) virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded,
measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is
that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according
to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network
interface.
network service access A network address defined by ISO, at which the OSI Network Service is made
point (NSAP) available to a Network service user by the Network service provider.

Transport Platform
northbound interface An interface that connects to the upper-layer device to provision services and report
(NBI) alarms and performance statistics.
O
O&M operation and maintenance
OA optical amplifier
OADM See optical add/drop multiplexer.
OAM See operation, administration and maintenance.
OAMPDU operation, administration and maintenance protocol data unit
OC ordinary clock
OCI open connection indication
OCh optical channel with full functionality
ODB optical duobinary
ODF optical distribution frame
ODU optical demultiplexing unit
ODUk optical channel data unit - k
OFC Open Fibre Control
OLA optical line amplifier
OLP See optical line protection.
OLT optical line terminal
OM optical multiplexing
OMB See outdoor mini box.
OMS optical multiplexing section
ONT See optical network terminal.
ONU See optical network unit.
OOF out of frame
OOS out of service
OPA optical power adjust
OPEX operating expense
OPM optical performance monitor
OPS optical physical section
OPU See optical channel payload unit.
OPUk optical channel payload unit - k
OSC See optical supervisory channel.
OSI open systems interconnection
OSN optical switch node

Transport Platform
OSNR See optical signal-to-noise ratio.

OSPF See Open Shortest Path First.
OSS operations support system
OTDR See optical time domain reflectometer.
OTM optical terminal multiplexer
OTN optical transport network
OTS See optical transmission section.
OTU See optical transponder unit.
OTUk optical channel transport unit - k
OWSP optical wavelength shared protection
Open Shortest Path A link-state, hierarchical interior gateway protocol (IGP) for network routing that uses
First (OSPF) cost as its routing metric. A link state database is constructed of the network topology,
which is identical on all routers in the area.
operation, A set of network management functions that cover fault detection, notification,
administration and location, and repair.
maintenance (OAM)
optical add/drop A device that can be used to add the optical signals of various wavelengths to one
multiplexer (OADM) channel and drop the optical signals of various wavelengths from one channel.
optical channel A protection architecture that allows one wavelength to provide protection for
payload unit (OPU) multiple services between different stations, saving wavelength resources and
lowering costs.
optical line protection Optical line protection is implemented using the dual feeding and selective receiving
(OLP) function. Two pairs of fibers (that is, four fibers) are used. One pair of fibers function
as the working trail and is used to transmit service signals of a line when the line is
normal. The other pair of fibers function as the protection trail and is used to carry
protection switching signals when a fiber cut occurs or the signal attenuation is
excessively large.
optical network A device that terminates the fiber optical network at the customer premises.
terminal (ONT)
optical network unit A form of Access Node that converts optical signals transmitted via fiber to electrical
(ONU) signals that can be transmitted via coaxial cable or twisted pair copper wiring to
individual subscribers.
optical signal-to-noise The ratio of signal power to noise power in a transmission link. OSNR is the most
ratio (OSNR) important index for measuring the performance of a DWDM system.
optical supervisory A technology that uses specific optical wavelengths to realize communication among
channel (OSC) nodes in optical transmission network and transmit the monitoring data in a certain
channel.
optical time domain A device that sends a series of short pulses of light down a fiber-optic cable and
reflectometer (OTDR) measures the strength of the return pulses. An OTDR is used to measure fiber length
and light loss, and to locate fiber faults.
optical transmission A section in the logical structure of an optical transport network (OTN). The OTS
section (OTS) allows the network operator to perform monitoring and maintenance tasks between
NEs.

Transport Platform
optical transponder A device or subsystem that converts accessed client signals into a G.694.1/G.694.2-
unit (OTU) compliant WDM wavelength.
outdoor mini box A box that is an outdoor subrack with limited space. It supports external AC or DC
(OMB) input, and houses and protects the baseband unit (BBU). It is a component of a base
station.
P
P2MP point-to-multipoint
P2P See point-to-point service.
PBS See peak burst size.
PC personal computer
PCB See printed circuit board.
PCC protection communication channel
PCN product change notice
PDH See plesiochronous digital hierarchy.
PDU See power distribution unit.
PE See provider edge.
PHB See per-hop behavior.
PHP penultimate hop popping
PIM-DM Protocol Independent Multicast - Dense Mode
PIM-SM Protocol Independent Multicast - Sparse Mode
PIR peak information rate
PLL See phase-locked loop.
PM performance monitoring
PMD polarization mode dispersion
PMU power monitoring unit
POH path overhead
PON passive optical network
PPI PDH physical interface
PPP Point-to-Point Protocol
PPPoE Point-to-Point Protocol over Ethernet
PRBS See pseudo random binary sequence.
PRC primary reference clock
PSI payload structure identifier
PSN See packet switched network.
PSTN See public switched telephone network.
PT payload type

Transport Platform
PTI payload type indicator

PTN packet transport network
PTP Precision Time Protocol
PVC See permanent virtual circuit.
PVP See permanent virtual path.
PW See pseudo wire.
PWE3 See pseudo wire emulation edge-to-edge.
packet switched A telecommunications network that works in packet switching mode.
network (PSN)
peak burst size (PBS) A parameter that defines the capacity of token bucket P, that is, the maximum burst IP
packet size when the information is transferred at the peak information rate.
per-hop behavior IETF Diff-Serv workgroup defines forwarding behaviors of network nodes as per-hop
(PHB) behaviors (PHB), such as, traffic scheduling and policing. A device in the network
should select the proper PHB behaviors, based on the value of DSCP. At present, the
IETF defines four types of PHB. They are class selector (CS), expedited forwarding
(EF), assured forwarding (AF), and best-effort (BE).
permanent virtual A circuit that can be established as an option to provide a dedicated circuit link
circuit (PVC) between two facilities. PVC configuration is usually preconfigured by the service
provider. Unlike SVCs, PVCs are usually very seldom broken/disconnected. A
permanent virtual circuit (PVC) is a virtual circuit established for repeated/continuous
use between the same DTE. In a PVC, the long-term association is identical to the data
transfer phase of a virtual call. Permanent virtual circuits eliminate the need for
repeated call set-up and clearing.
permanent virtual Virtual path that consists of PVCs.
path (PVP)
phase-locked loop A circuit that consists essentially of a phase detector that compares the frequency of a
(PLL) voltage-controlled oscillator with that of an incoming carrier signal or reference-
frequency generator. The output of the phase detector, after passing through a loop
filter, is fed back to the voltage-controlled oscillator to keep it exactly in phase with
the incoming or reference frequency.
plesiochronous digital A multiplexing scheme of bit stuffing and byte interleaving. It multiplexes the
hierarchy (PDH) minimum rate 64 kit/s into rates of 2 Mbit/s, 34 Mbit/s, 140 Mbit/s, and 565 Mbit/s.
point-to-point service A service between two terminal users. In P2P services, senders and recipients are
(P2P) terminal users.
power distribution unit A unit that performs AC or DC power distribution.
(PDU)
printed circuit board A board used to mechanically support and electrically connect electronic components
(PCB) using conductive pathways, tracks, or traces, etched from copper sheets laminated
onto a non-conductive substrate.
provider edge (PE) A device that is located in the backbone network of the MPLS VPN structure. A PE is
responsible for managing VPN users, establishing LSPs between PEs, and exchanging
routing information between sites of the same VPN. A PE performs the mapping and
forwarding of packets between the private network and the public channel. A PE can
be a UPE, an SPE, or an NPE.

Transport Platform
pseudo random binary A sequence that is random in the sense that the value of each element is independent
sequence (PRBS) of the values of any of the other elements, similar to a real random sequence.
pseudo wire (PW) An emulated connection between two PEs for transmitting frames. The PW is
established and maintained by PEs through signaling protocols. The status information
of a PW is maintained by the two end PEs of a PW.
pseudo wire emulation An end-to-end Layer 2 transmission technology. It emulates the essential attributes of
edge-to-edge (PWE3) a telecommunication service such as ATM, FR or Ethernet in a packet switched
network (PSN). PWE3 also emulates the essential attributes of low speed time
division multiplexing (TDM) circuit and SONET/SDH. The simulation approximates
to the real situation.
public switched A telecommunications network established to perform telephone services for the
telephone network public subscribers. Sometimes it is called POTS.
(PSTN)
Q
QinQ See 802.1Q in 802.1Q.
QoS See quality of service.
quality of service A commonly-used performance indicator of a telecommunication system or channel.
(QoS) Depending on the specific system and service, it may relate to jitter, delay, packet loss
ratio, bit error ratio, and signal-to-noise ratio. It functions to measure the quality of the
transmission system and the effectiveness of the services, as well as the capability of a
service provider to meet the demands of users.
R
RADIUS See Remote Authentication Dial In User Service.
RAM See random access memory.
RAN See radio access network.
RDI remote defect indication
RED See random early detection.
REG See regenerator.
RIP See Routing Information Protocol.
RMEP remote maintenance association end point
RMON remote network monitoring
RNC See radio network controller.
RS regenerator section
RSTP See Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol.
RSVP See Resource Reservation Protocol.
RSVP-TE See Resource Reservation Protocol-Traffic Engineering.
RTP See Real-Time Transport Protocol.

Transport Platform
Rapid Spanning Tree An evolution of the Spanning Tree Protocol (STP) that provides faster spanning tree
Protocol (RSTP) convergence after a topology change. The RSTP protocol is backward compatible with
the STP protocol.
Real-Time Transport A protocol defined by the IETF for transmitting audio and video streams. RTP is
Protocol (RTP) based on UDP. In the RTP header, a time stamp is defined to ensure that audio and
video data can be transmitted and synchronized in real time. H.323 is based on RTP.
Remote Authentication A security service that authenticates and authorizes dial-up users and is a centralized
Dial In User Service access control mechanism. As a distributed server/client system, RADIUS provides
(RADIUS) the AAA function.
Resource Reservation A protocol that reserves resources on every node along a path. RSVP is designed for
Protocol (RSVP) an integrated services Internet.
Resource Reservation An extension to the RSVP protocol for setting up label switched paths (LSPs) in
Protocol-Traffic MPLS networks. The RSVP-TE protocol is used to establish and maintain the LSPs
Engineering (RSVP- by initiating label requests and allocating label binding messages. It also supports LSP
TE) rerouting and LSP bandwidth increasing.
Routing Information A simple routing protocol that is part of the TCP/IP protocol suite. It determines a
Protocol (RIP) route based on the smallest hop count between the source and destination. RIP is a
distance vector protocol that routinely broadcasts routing information to its
neighboring routers and is known to waste bandwidth.
radio access network The network that provides the connection between CPEs and the CN. It isolates the
(RAN) CN from wireless network.
radio network A device in a radio network subsystem that is in charge of controlling the usage and
controller (RNC) integrity of radio resources.
random access Semiconductor-based memory that can be read and written by the CPU or other
memory (RAM) hardware devices. The storage locations can be accessed in any order.
random early detection A packet loss algorithm used in congestion avoidance. It discards the packet according
(RED) to the specified higher limit and lower limit of a queue so that global TCP
synchronization resulting from traditional tail drop can be prevented.
regenerator (REG) A piece of equipment or device that regenerates electrical signals.
S
SAN storage area network
SAPI source access point identifier
SAToP Structure-Agnostic Time Division Multiplexing over Packet
SC square connector
SD See signal degrade.
SD-SDI See standard definition-serial digital interface signal.
SDH See synchronous digital hierarchy.
SDI See serial digital interface.
SDP serious disturbance period
SELV safety extra-low voltage
SES severely errored second

Transport Platform
SESR severely errored second ratio

SF See signal fail.
SFP small form-factor pluggable
SFTP See Secure File Transfer Protocol.
SLM single longitudinal mode
SM section monitoring
SMB sub-miniature B
SMSR side mode suppression ratio
SNC subnetwork connection
SNCP subnetwork connection protection
SNCTP subnetwork connection tunnel protection
SNMP See Simple Network Management Protocol.
SONET See synchronous optical network.
SPC soft permanent connection
SPI SDH physical interface
SQL See structured query language.
SSH See Secure Shell.
SSL See Secure Sockets Layer.
SSM See Synchronization Status Message.
SSMB synchronization status message byte
SSU synchronization supply unit
STG synchronous timing generator
STP Spanning Tree Protocol
STS synchronous transport signal
Secure File Transfer A network protocol designed to provide secure file transfer over SSH.
Protocol (SFTP)
Secure Shell (SSH) A set of standards and an associated network protocol that allows establishing a secure
channel between a local and a remote computer. A feature to protect information and
provide powerful authentication function for a network when a user logs in to the
network through an insecure network. It prevents IP addresses from being deceived
and simple passwords from being captured.
Secure Sockets Layer A security protocol that works at a socket level. This layer exists between the TCP
(SSL) layer and the application layer to encrypt/decode data and authenticate concerned
entities.

Transport Platform
Simple Network A network management protocol of TCP/IP. It enables remote users to view and
Management Protocol modify the management information of a network element. This protocol ensures the
(SNMP) transmission of management information between any two points. The polling
mechanism is adopted to provide basic function sets. According to SNMP, agents,
which can be hardware as well as software, can monitor the activities of various
devices on the network and report these activities to the network console workstation.
Control information about each device is maintained by a management information
block.
Synchronization Status A message that carries the quality levels of timing signals on a synchronous timing
Message (SSM) link. SSM messages provide upstream clock information to nodes on an SDH network
or synchronization network.
serial digital interface An interface that transmits data in a single channel in sequence.
(SDI)
signal degrade (SD) A signal indicating that associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded
defect condition is active.
signal fail (SF) A signal indicating that associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect
condition (non-degrade defect) is active.
span The physical reach between two pieces of WDM equipment.
standard definition- Standard definition video signal transported by serial digital interface.
serial digital interface
signal (SD-SDI)
structured query A programming language widely used for accessing, updating, managing, and
language (SQL) querying data in a relational database.
synchronous digital A transmission scheme that follows ITU-T G.707, G.708, and G.709. SDH defines the
hierarchy (SDH) transmission features of digital signals, such as frame structure, multiplexing mode,
transmission rate level, and interface code. SDH is an important part of ISDN and B-
ISDN.
synchronous optical A high-speed network that provides a standard interface for communications carriers
network (SONET) to connect networks based on fiber optical cable. SONET is designed to handle
multiple data types (voice, video, and so on). It transmits at a base rate of 51.84
Mbit/s, but multiples of this base rate go as high as 2.488 Gbit/s.
T
TCI tag control information
TCM tandem connection monitor
TCP See Transmission Control Protocol.
TCP/IP Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TD-SCDMA See Time Division-Synchronous Code Division Multiple Access.
TDD time division duplex
TDM See time division multiplexing.
TE See traffic engineering.
TFTP See Trivial File Transfer Protocol.
TIM trail trace identifier mismatch

Transport Platform
TLS Transport Layer Security

TMN See telecommunications management network.
TOD time of day
TPID tag protocol identifier
TTI transmission time interval
TTL See time to live.
TTSI See trail termination source identifier.
TU tributary unit
TUG tributary unit group
Time Division- A 3G mobile communications standard found in UMTS mobile telecommunications
Synchronous Code networks in China as an alternative to W-CDMA. TD-SCDMA integrates technologies
Division Multiple of CDMA, TDMA, and FDMA, and makes use of technologies including intelligent
Access (TD-SCDMA) antenna, joint detection, low chip rate (LCR), and adaptive power control. With the
flexibility of service processing, a TD-SCDMA network can connect to other
networks through the RNC.
Transmission Control The protocol within TCP/IP that governs the breakup of data messages into packets to
Protocol (TCP) be sent using Internet Protocol (IP), and the reassembly and verification of the
complete messages from packets received by IP. A connection-oriented, reliable
protocol (reliable in the sense of ensuring error-free delivery), TCP corresponds to the
transport layer in the ISO/OSI reference model.
Trivial File Transfer A small and simple alternative to FTP for transferring files. TFTP is intended for
Protocol (TFTP) applications that do not need complex interactions between the client and server.
TFTP restricts operations to simple file transfers and does not provide authentication.
telecommunications A protocol model defined by ITU-T for managing open systems in a communications
management network network. TMN manages the planning, provisioning, installation, and OAM of
(TMN) equipment, networks, and services.
throughput The maximum transmission rate of the tested object (system, equipment, connection,
service type) when no packet is discarded. Throughput can be measured with
bandwidth.
time division A multiplexing technology. TDM divides the sampling cycle of a channel into time
multiplexing (TDM) slots (TSn, n=0, 1, 2, 3), and the sampling value codes of multiple signals engross
time slots in a certain order, forming multiple multiplexing digital signals to be
transmitted over one channel.
time to live (TTL) A specified period of time for best-effort delivery systems to prevent packets from
looping endlessly.
traffic engineering A technology that is used to dynamically monitor the traffic of the network and the
(TE) load of the network elements, to adjust in real time the parameters such as traffic
management parameters, route parameters and resource restriction parameters, and to
optimize the utilization of network resources. The purpose is to prevent the congestion
caused by unbalanced loads.
trail termination A TTSI uniquely identifies an LSP in the network. A TTSI is carried in the
source identifier connectivity verification (CV) packet for checking the connectivity of a trail. If it
(TTSI) matches the TTSI received by the sink point, the trail has no connectivity defect.

Transport Platform
U
UART universal asynchronous receiver/transmitter
UAT See unavailable time event.
UBR unspecified bit rate
UBR+ Unspecified Bit Rate Plus
UDP See User Datagram Protocol.
UMTS See Universal Mobile Telecommunications System.
UNI See user-to-network interface.
UPC See usage parameter control.
UPE user-end provider edge
UPM uninterruptible power module
Universal Mobile A 3G mobile technology that will deliver broadband information at speeds up to 2
Telecommunications Mbit/s. Besides voice and data, UMTS will deliver audio and video to wireless
System (UMTS) devices anywhere in the world through fixed, wireless and satellite systems.
User Datagram A TCP/IP standard protocol that allows an application program on one device to send
Protocol (UDP) a datagram to an application program on another. UDP uses IP to deliver datagrams.
UDP provides application programs with the unreliable connectionless packet delivery
service. That is, UDP messages may be lost, duplicated, delayed, or delivered out of
order. The destination device does not actively confirm whether the correct data
packet is received.
unavailable time event An event that is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely
(UAT) errored seconds.
usage parameter During communications, UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each
control (UPC) virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded,
measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to UPC in function. The difference is
that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according
to their positions. UPC locates at the user/network interface, while NPC at the network
interface.
user-to-network The interface between user equipment and private or public network equipment (for
interface (UNI) example, ATM switches).
V
V-NNI virtual network-network interface
V-UNI See virtual user-network interface.
VB virtual bridge
VC See virtual channel.
VCC See virtual channel connection.
VCCV virtual circuit connectivity verification
VCI virtual channel identifier
VLAN virtual local area network

Transport Platform
VOA variable optical attenuator

VP See virtual path.
VPI See virtual path identifier.
VPLS See virtual private LAN service.
VPN virtual private network
VPWS See virtual private wire service.
VRRP See Virtual Router Redundancy Protocol.
VSI See virtual switching instance.
Virtual Router A protocol designed for multicast or broadcast LANs such as an Ethernet. A group of
Redundancy Protocol routers (including an active router and several backup routers) in a LAN is regarded as
(VRRP) a virtual router, which is called a backup group. The virtual router has its own IP
address. The host in the network communicates with other networks through this
virtual router. If the active router in the backup group fails, one of the backup routers
in this backup group becomes active and provides routing service for the host in the
network.
VoIP See Voice over Internet Protocol.
Voice over Internet A value-added service technology for IP calls. The VoIP service is a new IP telecom
Protocol (VoIP) service. It can run on fixed and mobile networks and support flexible access points.
Fees for VoIP subscribers are relatively low. Calls between VoIP subscribers who
belong to the same carrier are free of charge.
virtual channel (VC) Any logical connection in the ATM network. A VC is the basic unit of switching in
the ATM network and is uniquely identified by a virtual path identifier (VPI)/virtual
channel identifier (VCI) value. It is the channel on which ATM cells are transmitted
by a switch.
virtual channel A VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. A
connection (VCC) point-to-multipoint VCC is a set of ATM virtual connections between two or multiple
end points.
virtual path (VP) A bundle of virtual channels, all of which are switched transparently across an ATM
network based on a common VPI.
virtual path identifier The field in the Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) cell header that identifies to
(VPI) which virtual path the cell belongs.
virtual private LAN A type of point-to-multipoint L2VPN service provided over the public network. VPLS
service (VPLS) enables geographically isolated user sites to communicate with each other through the
MAN/WAN as if they are on the same LAN.
virtual private wire A technology that bears Layer 2 services. VPWS emulates services such as ATM, FR,
service (VPWS) Ethernet, low-speed TDM circuit, and SONET/SDH in a PSN.
virtual switching An instance through which the physical access links of VPLS can be mapped to the
instance (VSI) virtual links. Each VSI provides independent VPLS service. VSI has Ethernet bridge
function and can terminate PW.
virtual user-network A virtual user-network interface, works as an action point to perform service
interface (V-UNI) classification and traffic control in HQoS.

Transport Platform
WAN wide area network

WCDMA See Wideband Code Division Multiple Access.
WDM wavelength division multiplexing
WFQ See weighted fair queuing.
WLAN See wireless local area network.
WRED See weighted random early detection.
WRR weighted round robin
WTR See wait to restore.
Wideband Code A standard defined by the ITU-T for the third-generation wireless technology derived
Division Multiple from the Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) technology.
Access (WCDMA)
wait to restore (WTR) The number of minutes to wait before services are switched back to the working line.
weighted fair queuing A fair queue scheduling algorithm based on bandwidth allocation weights. This
(WFQ) scheduling algorithm allocates the total bandwidth of an interface to queues, according
to their weights and schedules the queues cyclically. In this manner, packets of all
priority queues can be scheduled.
weighted random early A packet loss algorithm used for congestion avoidance. It can prevent the global TCP
detection (WRED) synchronization caused by traditional tail-drop. WRED is favorable for the high-
priority packet when calculating the packet loss ratio.
wireless local area A hybrid of the computer network and the wireless communication technology. It uses
network (WLAN) wireless multiple address channels as transmission media and carriers out data
interaction through electromagnetic wave to implement the functions of the traditional
LAN.
X
X.25 A data link layer protocol. It defines the communication in the Public Data Network
(PDN) between a host and a remote terminal.
xDSL x digital subscriber line


OSN 1800 II Packet V100R006C10 Hardware Description 02

Transféré par

Informations du document

Copyright

Formats disponibles

Partager ce document

Partager ou intégrer le document

Options de partage

Avez-vous trouvé ce document utile ?

Ce contenu est-il inapproprié ?

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OSN 1800 II Packet V100R006C10 Hardware Description 02

Transféré par

Droits d'auteur :

Formats disponibles

OptiX OSN 1800 II Packet Multi-Service Edge

Optical Transport Platform

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential i

About This Document

Product Name Product Version

OptiX OSN 1800 V100R006C10

iManager U2000 V200R015C60 and later

l Network planning engineer

DANGER indicates a hazard with a high level or medium

WARNING indicates a hazard with a low level of risk

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ii

CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation

NOTE Provides additional information to emphasize or

Boldface The keywords of a command line are in boldface.

Italic Command arguments are in italic.

[] Items (keywords or arguments) in square brackets [ ] are

{ x | y | ... } Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ] Optional alternative items are grouped in square

{ x | y | ... } * Alternative items are grouped in braces and separated by

[ x | y | ... ] * Alternative items are grouped in brackets and separated

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iii

Updates in Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Based on Product Version

l 9.6 EGS4: Update the description of the slot.

Updates in Issue 01 (2015-10-30) Based on Product Version

Updates in Issue 03 (2016-01-08) Based on Product Version

Updates in Issue 02 (2015-09-30) Based on Product Version

Updates in Issue 01 (2015-06-30) Based on Product Version

Updates in Issue 02 (2015-03-20) Based on Product Version

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential iv

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-10-31) Based on Product Version

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-07-30) Based on Product Version

l Added missing boards in section "Appearance and Dimensions of Boards."

Updates in Issue 02 (2014-04-15) Based on Product Version

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential v

Updates in Issue 01 (2014-01-15) Based on Product Version

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vi

About This Document.....................................................................................................................ii

4 Fiber Management Tray............................................................................................................. 40

5 DCM Frame and DCM Module................................................................................................ 44

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential vii

7 Optical Transponder Board....................................................................................................... 79

8 Packet Board............................................................................................................................... 205

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential viii

8.1.1 Version Description................................................................................................................................................. 206

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential ix

8.5.3 Functions and Features............................................................................................................................................ 323

9 TDM Board................................................................................................................................. 349

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential x

9.3.4 Working Principle and Signal Flow.........................................................................................................................374

10 Optical Add and Drop Multiplexing Board....................................................................... 447

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xi

10.1.5 Front Panel.............................................................................................................................................................451

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xii

10.5.7 Optical Interfaces...................................................................................................................................................483

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiii

10.9.9 MR2 Specifications............................................................................................................................................... 514

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xiv

10.14.1 Version Description............................................................................................................................................. 548

11 Optical Multiplexer and Demultiplexer Board................................................................. 578

Issue 02 (2016-04-20) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential xv

12 Optical Amplifying Board..................................................................................................... 586